Fluidsim5 Enus PDF

FluidSIM® 5
User’s Guide
12/18
FluidSIM is a teaching tool for simulating pneumatics, hydraulics,
electrics/electronics and digital technique. It can be used in combi-
nation with the Festo Didactic SE training hardware, but also inde-
pendently. FluidSIM was developed as a joint venture between the
University of Paderborn, Festo Didactic SE, Denkendorf, and Art
Systems Software GmbH, Paderborn.
Contents
1. Welcome! 15
2. Installation 18
2.1 Technical requirements 18

2.2 Installation with program activation 19
2.2.1 Important information about online activation 19
2.3 Installation with a license connector 20
2.4 Installing the full version from DVD-ROM 20
3. First steps 22
3.1 Create a new circuit drawing 22

3.2 Organize symbols, libraries and circuit diagrams 26
3.3 Select unit system 26
3.4 Insert symbol from menu 27
3.5 Symbol libraries 29
3.5.1 Create user library 30
3.6 Circuit files 31
4. Library and project window 32
4.1 Change window position 32

4.2 Automatic show and hide 32
5. Edit circuit 34
5.1 Insert and arrange symbols 34

5.2 Connect connectors / ports 34
5.3 Automatically connect connectors 36
5.4 Insert T distributor 38
5.5 Move lines 41
5.6 Direct connection via straight connection line 43
5.7 Define the characteristics of lines 44
© Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 3

5.8 Delete line 48
5.9 Set the properties of the connectors 48
5.10 Configure a way valve 50
5.11 Configure cylinders 52
5.12 Group symbols 54
5.13 Create macro objects 54
5.14 Delete symbol groups and macro objects 55
5.15 Align symbols 55
5.16 Mirror symbols 55
5.17 Rotate symbols 56
5.18 Scale symbols 57
6. Drawing frame 59
6.1 Editable labels 59

6.2 Use a drawing frame 60
6.3 Drawing frame Editor 64
6.3.1 Drawing Size 65
6.3.2 Page border 66
6.3.3 Page Dividers 67
6.3.4 Title block customizing 69
6.3.5 Title block location 76
6.4 Page dividers 76
7. Additional tools for creating drawings 80
7.1 Drawing tools 80

7.1.1 Grid 80
7.1.2 Alignment lines 80
7.1.3 Object snap 81
7.1.4 Rulers 82
7.2 Drawing levels 82
7.3 Cross-references 84
7.3.1 Create cross-references from symbols 86
7.3.2 Cross-reference representation 86
7.3.3 Manage cross-references 88
7.4 Drawing functions and graphical elements 89
4 © Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

7.4.1 Interruption/Potential 90
7.4.2 Conduction line 93
7.4.3 Line 94
7.4.4 Polyline (set of connected lines) 96
7.4.5 Rectangle 98
7.4.6 Circle 100
7.4.7 Ellipse 102
7.4.8 Text 104
7.4.9 Image 104
7.5 Check drawing 106
8. Simulating with FluidSIM 108
8.1 Simulation of existing circuits 108

8.2 The different simulation modes 110
8.2.1 Reset and restart of the simulation 111
8.2.2 Single step mode 111
8.2.3 Simulation to a state change 111
8.3 Simulating circuits you create yourself 112
8.3.1 Example with a pneumatic circuit 112
8.3.2 Example with a hydraulic circuit 120
8.3.3 Example with an electronic circuit 128
9. Advanced concepts in simulating and creating circuits 137
9.1 Adjusting the component parameters 137

9.2 Special settings for cylinders 142
9.2.1 Cylinder friction and cylinder mass 142
9.2.2 External load and friction 143
9.2.3 Force profile 146
9.2.4 Actuating labels 148
9.3 Special settings for directional control valves 149
9.3.1 Hydraulic resistance 149
9.4 Additional simulation functions 150
9.4.1 Simultaneous actuation of several components 151
9.4.2 Simulation of individual pages and entire projects 151
9.5 Displaying quantity values 152

9.5.1 Display of direction of quantity values in FluidSIM 154
9.5.2 Reference arrows 155
9.6 Virtual measuring instruments 155
9.6.1 Inserting virtual measuring instruments 156
9.6.2 Deleting virtual measuring instruments 158
9.6.3 Measurements of currents and flow rates 158
9.6.4 Properties dialog window 159
9.6.5 Setting measuring tips again and deleting them 161
9.7 Displaying state diagrams 161
9.8 Coupling hydraulics, pneumatics, electrics and mechanics
164
9.8.1 Display styles for labels 171
9.9 Operating switches 172
9.9.1 Switches at cylinders 173
9.9.2 Relays 175
9.9.3 Coupling mechanical switches 176
9.9.4 Automatic switch altering 176
9.10 Adjusting component parameters during the simulation 177
9.11 Settings for simulation 179
9.12 Use of the EasyPort-hardware 179
9.13 OPC and DDE communication with other applications 181
9.14 Open-loop and closed-loop control by using continuous
valves 183
9.14.1 Open-loop control in pneumatics 185
9.14.2 Open-loop control in hydraulics 187
9.14.3 Closed-loop control in pneumatics 190
9.14.4 Closed-loop control in hydraulics 196
9.15 Use of the oscilloscope in electronics 202
9.16 Simulation of rotating machines 204
10. GRAFCET 207
10.1 The various GRAFCET modes 207

10.1.1 Drawing only (GrafEdit) 208
10.1.2 Observation (GrafView) 208
10.1.3 Control (GrafControl) 208
10.2 Setting the GRAFCET mode 209

10.3 GRAFCET elements 209
10.3.1 Steps 210
10.3.2 Actions 212
10.3.3 Transitions 214
10.3.4 Stored effective actions (allocations) 217
10.3.5 GRAFCET-PLC component 218
10.4 Access to variables of circuit components 222
10.5 Monitoring with GRAFCET actions 225
10.6 Quick reference for the FluidSIM-relevant GRAFCET concepts
232
10.6.1 Initialization 232
10.6.2 Sequence rules 233
10.6.3 Sequence selection 233
10.6.4 Synchronization 233
10.6.5 Transient sequence / unstable step / virtual triggering 234
10.6.6 Determining the values of GRAFCET variables 234
10.6.7 Checking the entries 234
10.6.8 Admissible characters for steps and variables 235
10.6.9 Variable names 235
10.6.10 Functions and formula entry 236
10.6.11 Delays / time limits 237
10.6.12 Boolean value of an assertion 238
10.6.13 Target information 239
10.6.14 Partial GRAFCETs 239
10.6.15 Macro-steps 239
10.6.16 Compulsory commands 240
10.6.17 Enclosing step 240
10.6.18 Action when a transition is triggered 241
11. Dimension 242
11.1 Draw dimension 242

11.2 Settings for the dimension 243
12. Component attributes 245
12.1 Component attributes in the Properties dialog window 246

12.2 User Defined Properties 248
12.3 Drawing Properties 249
12.4 Main and secondary components 250
12.5 Linking main and secondary components 250
12.6 Link solenoid valves and solenoid coils 253
12.7 Attributes of the text components 256
12.8 Link text components with attributes 259
12.9 Text components with specified links 261
12.10 Change the properties of multiple objects simultaneously
263
12.10.1 Drawing Properties 263
12.10.2 Main Component 265
13. Failure models and failure configuration 267
13.1 Failure configurations 267

13.2 Create failure configuration 272
13.3 Carry out repairs 279
14. Parts list management and analyses 284
14.1 Display parts list 285

14.2 Find components from the parts on the circuit diagram 286
14.3 Set parts list properties 288
14.4 Export parts list 292
14.5 Insert tube list 293
15. Manage projects 297
15.1 Create new project 297

15.2 Project nodes 298
15.2.1 Project archiving 298
15.3 Circuit and parts list nodes 299
16. Circuit and project properties 302
16.1 Attributes 303

16.1.1 Predefined placeholders 305
16.2 Page Dividers 306
16.3 Basic Unit Length 306
16.4 Encryption 307
16.5 Cross Reference Representation 309
17. Special functions for electric circuits 310
17.1 Potentials and conduction lines 310

17.2 Cables and wiring 312
17.2.1 Manage cables 318
17.2.2 Insert cable map 319
17.2.3 Insert cable list 321
17.2.4 Insert wiring list 324
17.3 Terminals and terminal strips 327
17.3.1 Set terminals 327
17.3.2 Set multiple terminals 329
17.3.3 Create terminal strips 331
17.3.4 Manage terminal strips 333
17.4 Terminal diagram 334
17.4.1 Set links 336
17.5 Contact images 340
18. Circuit input and output 343
18.1 Print circuit diagram and parts list 343

18.2 Import DXF file 345
18.3 Export circuit 345
19. Options 348
19.1 General 348

19.2 Save 350
19.3 Folder Locations 351
19.4 Language 352
19.5 Dimension 352
19.6 Cross Reference Representation 354

19.7 Connector Links 355
19.8 Warnings 356
19.9 Automatic Updates 357
19.10 Simulation 358
19.11 GRAFCET 360
19.12 DDE Connection 361
19.13 Environment parameters 362
19.14 Fluid properties 364
19.15 Sound 365
19.16 Text Sizes 366
20. Menu overview 367
20.1 File 367

20.2 Edit 370
20.3 Insert 372
20.4 Draw 374
20.5 Page 375
20.6 Execute 376
20.7 Didactics 377
20.8 Diagnosis 378
20.9 Project 379
20.10 View 380
20.11 Library 385
20.12 Tools 386
20.13 Window 387
20.14 Help 388
21. Functional diagram 389
21.1 Edit Mode 390

21.1.1 Set diagram properties 390
21.1.2 Table textboxes 391
21.1.3 Adjust the presentation of the diagrams 394
21.2 Draw diagram curve 395
21.3 Insert signal elements 396
21.4 Insert text boxes 397

21.5 Draw signal lines and insert signal connections 399
21.5.1 Free-draw signal lines 399
21.5.2 Drawing signal lines from signals 401
21.5.3 Draw signal lines from diagram support points 401
21.6 Insert additional signal lines 402
21.7 Insert row 402
21.8 Delete row 402
21.9 Additional editing functions 403
21.9.1 Zoom 403
21.9.2 Undo editing steps 403
22. The Component Library 404
22.1 Hydraulic 404

22.1.1 Supply elements 404
22.1.2 Directional valves, Configurable 416
22.1.3 Directional valves, Mechanically operated 421
22.1.4 Directional valves, Solenoid operated 430
22.1.5 Flow control valves/Shutoff valves 437
22.1.6 Pressure control valves 442
22.1.7 Pressure switch 456
22.1.9 Proportional valves 463
22.1.10 Actuators 469
22.1.11 Measuring instruments and sensors 476
22.2 Pneumatic 479
22.2.1 Supply elements 479
22.2.2 Directional valves, Configurable 486
22.2.3 Directional valves, Mechanically operated 492
22.2.4 Directional valves, Solenoid operated 501
22.2.5 Directional valves, Pneumatically operated 506
22.2.7 Pressure control valves 518
22.2.8 Pressure Operated Switches 521
22.2.9 Vacuum technology 523
22.2.10 Valve groups 526
22.2.11 Proportional valves 529

22.3 Electrical Controls (IEC) 550
22.3.1 Power supply 550
22.3.4 General switches 563
22.3.5 Delay Switches 564
22.3.6 Limit Switches 565
22.3.7 Switches, Manually operated 567
22.3.8 Pressure Operated Switches 569
22.3.9 Proximity Switches 570
22.3.10 Relays 571
22.3.11 Controller 577
22.3.12 EasyPort/OPC/DDE 579
22.4 Electrical Controls (NEMA) 581
22.4.3 General switches 582
22.4.4 Delay Switches 583
22.4.5 Limit Switches 584
22.4.6 Switches, Manually operated 587
22.4.7 Pressure sensor 588
22.4.8 Proximity Switches 589
22.4.9 Relays 591
22.5 Electrical engineering/Electronics 593
22.5.2 Passive components 599
22.5.3 Semiconductors 606
22.5.5 Switches 620
22.5.6 Switches, Automotive 624
22.5.7 Machines 627
22.5.8 Controller 645
22.5.9 Controller (block diagram) 654
22.6 Digital components with electrical signals 658
22.6.1 Basic symbols 659

22.6.2 Flip-flops 664
22.6.3 Miscellaneous 675
22.7 Digital technology 681
22.7.1 Constants and Terminals 681
22.7.2 Basic Functions 683
22.7.3 Special Functions 685
22.8 GRAFCET 691
22.8.1 GRAFCET 691
22.9 Miscellaneous 694
22.9.1 Miscellaneous 694
23. Learning, Teaching, and Visualizing Technologies 699
23.1 Information about Single Components 699

23.1.1 Component Descriptions 700
23.1.2 Component Illustrations 702
23.2 Selecting Didactics Material from a List 708
23.2.1 Tutorial 708
23.2.2 Component Library 710
23.2.3 Didactics Material 712
23.3 Presentations: Combining Instructional Material 714
23.4 Extended Presentations in the Microsoft PowerPoint Format
720
24. Didactics Material Survey (Pneumatics) 723
24.1 Basics 723

24.2 Supply elements 725
24.3 Actuators 730
24.4 Directional control valves 735
24.5 Shutoff valves 746
24.6 Flow control valves 753
24.7 Pressure control valves 755
24.8 Time delay valve 757
24.9 Sequential circuit and signal overlap circuit 760
24.10 Educational Films 762
24.10.1 Educational Films 762

24.11 Standard Presentations 763
24.11.1 Presentations 763
25. Didactics Material Survey (Hydraulics) 765
25.1 Applications 765

25.2 Components of a Hydraulic Plant 766
25.3 Symbols 768
25.4 Some Physical Fundamentals 772
25.5 Components of a Power Unit 775
25.6 Fundamentals of Valves 779
25.7 Pressure Valves 781
25.8 Way Valves 788
25.9 Shutoff Valves 797
25.10 Flow Valves 801
25.11 Hydraulic Cylinders and Motors 804
25.12 Gauges 807
25.13 Exercises 808
25.14 Educational Films 818
25.14.1 Educational Films 818
25.15 Standard Presentations 818
25.15.1 Presentations 819
Index 820

Welcome!
Chapter 1
1. Welcome!
Welcome to FluidSIM!
Thank you for purchasing the FluidSIM training software. This

user’s guide functions both as an introduction to FluidSIM and as a
reference manual outlining the possibilities, concepts and opera-
tion of the software package. This guide is not designed for the
teaching of training content in fluid engineering or electronics; if
you require materials for that purpose, there are textbooks availa-
ble from Festo Didactic SE.
FluidSIM permits the creation and simulation of circuits in the

following fields:
— Electro-pneumatics/vacuum technology
— Electro-hydraulics/mobile hydraulics
— Electrical engineering/electronics
There are specialized versions of the program for each of these

technologies, referred to in the following as FluidSIM-P, FluidSIM-H
and FluidSIM-E respectively.
All three versions also contain components for drawing creation

and simulation of:
— Digital technology
— GRAFCET
Some of the functions and components described in this manual

may not be available, depending on which program versions you
purchased. In places where the programming differences between
the technologies are only minor, general examples are given, and
the specific differences are mentioned. When specialized functions
are explained, such as closed-loop control in pneumatics and in
hydraulics, a separate chapter is devoted to each function.
For the first time you can link all technologies in FluidSIM in a single
circuit or project. This means that if you have purchased all three
technology versions, you can utilize pneumatic, hydraulics, control
technology, electronics, digital technology etc. in any way you want

in a single technical system. FluidSIM ensures that you can only
join connections which are also physically possible.
A major feature of FluidSIM is its close linkage between CAD func-

tionality and simulation. On the one hand, FluidSIM allows DIN-
compliant drawing of fluidic and electronic circuit diagrams; on the
other hand, it is capable of using physical component descriptions
to carry out a realistic, dynamic simulation of the drawn circuit. This
practically eliminates the separation between drawing creation and
simulation.
When developing FluidSIM, special emphasis was placed on mak-

ing operation intuitive and easy to learn. This approach makes it
possible for you to learn to design and simulate fluidic and elec-
tronic circuit diagrams in a very short time. To provide access to
professional functions not present in this simple operating inter-
face, FluidSIM also has an “Expert Mode” which can be switched on
as needed.
FluidSIM-P was created by the “Knowledge-based Systems”

workgroup at the University of Paderborn. FluidSIM-H is the result
of cooperative research between the Instrumentation and Control
department at Gerhard Mercator University in Duisburg, and
Knowledge-based Systems at the University of Paderborn. On hand
for mechanical engineering matters was Dr Ralf Lemmen. FluidSIM-
E was developed as an entirely new module by Art Systems Soft-
ware GmbH.
Planning and development of FluidSIM: Dr Daniel Curatolo, Dr

Marcus Hoffmann and Dr Benno Stein.
Users of this software are encouraged to contribute tips, criticism,

and suggestions for improvement of FluidSIM via email.
info@fluidsim.de
did@de.festo.com
You can also find the newest version on the following websites:
www.fluidsim.de
www.festo-didactic.de

Installation
Chapter 2
2. Installation
With your purchase of the full version of FluidSIM, you received one
or more DVD-ROMs and possibly a license connector. The installa-
tion procedure is described in the following sections.
The full version of FluidSIM is available in two versions: a version

that supports automatic Online activation, and the version with a
license connector for insertion in a USB port.
2.1 Technical requirements
You need a computer running Windows XP (SP3), Windows Vista,

Windows 7 or Windows 8.
If you intend to simulate complex circuits, a computer with dual

processor is recommended. Stand-alone tablet PCs without a
physically connected mouse are not ideal because creating draw-
ings is impractical using only swipe and gesture control.
During simulation, most of the adjustable components can be

controlled using a game controller as an alternative to the mouse.
You can use any game controller which Windows recognizes and
which appears in the Control Panel. You may need the matching
device drivers for Windows.
Additional drivers may be necessary in order to link FluidSIM to

external hardware. Compatible drivers for Festo’s EasyPort can be
found in the Support subfolder on the DVD. Communication with
other applications via OPC requires special auxiliary modules,
which are likewise located in the Support folder. For more details
about OPC, see the section OPC and DDE communication with other
applications.

2.2 Installation with program activation
We recommend activating the program via a PC connected to the

internet. During installation, you will be prompted to activate
FluidSIM. There are three ways of doing so:
— Online activation
This variant allows fully automatic activation if the installation
PC has direct access to the internet.
— Indirect activation
In this case the PC on which FluidSIM is to be installed does not
need to have direct internet access. Instead, the subsequent
dialog window gives you an internet address and an individual-
ly generated license key. You can then generate a matching ac-
tivation code by accessing the displayed internet address from
any computer. You then enter that activation code in the field
provided in the activation dialog box on the installation PC.
— Call Festo to receive your activation code

If you do not have an internet connection or if the internet con-
nection fails, you can call our service staff on weekdays during
standard office hours and they will provide you with your acti-
vation code.
2.2.1 Important information about online activation
During program activation, the individual features of your PC’s

hardware are linked to the product ID and used to generate an
activation code which is valid only for that PC. If at some later time
you intend to modify your PC substantially or want to use a new PC,
you can transfer the license. To do so, you first have to deactivate
the license on the original PC, by uninstalling the program. You can
find the deinstallation procedure in the Control Panel in “Add or
Remove Programs” or “Programs”.

If the PC on which you installed FluidSIM is no longer functional or
deactivation fails for some other reason, as an exception you can
transfer the license without prior deactivation.
Please note that this type of license transfer (without prior deacti-
vation) is only possible a few times. Moreover, when you transfer a
license to a modified or new PC, activation is no longer possible on
the original PC. Once the license is transferred, you cannot activate
FluidSIM on the original PC without a prior deactivation.
2.3 Installation with a license connector
Depending on whether you purchased a multiple or single user

license, this special connector is either connected directly to the
local user’s computer or is on a license server at a central location
in your network.
In the case of network licensing, the connector defines how many

instances of FluidSIM can run simultaneously on the network. If you
try to start more instances of FluidSIM than are permitted, you will
see a corresponding error message. If the license server is down or
the license connector is no longer present, you will be able to save
any circuits you are working on before FluidSIM terminates. As
soon as the license server becomes available again, you can re-
sume your work.
Detailed information on network installation of FluidSIM can be

found in the installation guide included as a booklet in the product
packaging, and also in electronic form as a PDF file in the “Doc”
folder on the installation DVD.
2.4 Installing the full version from DVD-ROM
If you are using the software with a license connector, do not plug
it in until you are prompted to do so by the installation program.

→ Switch on your computer and log on with administrator rights.
→ Insert the DVD-ROM.
Usually the installation program starts automatically. If it doesn’t,

please start it manually.
After a few seconds the start screen of the installation program

appears. Here you can select whether you have received the ver-
sion for online activation or a license connector with the FluidSIM
package.
Note that there are two versions of the license connector: The
newer one is silver in color and has the product label “CodeMeter”.
If you have purchased FluidSIM as an update of an earlier version,
you can also continue to use your existing green “WibuKey” con-
nector if it has been reprogrammed accordingly.
For online activation, you do not need a license connector; instead

you require your individual product ID which is printed on the back
of the DVD case.
→ Follow the instructions of the installation program. If you are

not sure how to answer any of the questions, simply click
Next .

First steps
Chapter 3
3. First steps
3.1 Create a new circuit drawing
When you start FluidSIM, the system checks whether you have
installed more than one technology (pneumatics, hydraulics, elec-
tronics). If you have, the selection window appears listing the
available technologies. Here you specify which components and
program functions you wish to use in this program session. This
decision is especially important for network users because a li-
cense will be occupied for each technology until you exit FluidSIM.
You can restart FluidSIM at any time and select a different combina-
tion.
Figure 3/1: Select Technologies dialog window
Available technologies The available technologies and the currently free licenses are
displayed here.
FluidSIM remembers the last selection and suggests it when the

program is next started. If you frequently use different combina-
tions, you can create links which will allow you to start FluidSIM
directly with the corresponding selection.

Next, the key concepts and terms are described which you will
encounter when using FluidSIM.
→ Start FluidSIM with the selection you require.
→ In the menu File , select New / File... .
An empty circuit window opens in which you can insert symbols

and connect them with lines. First you should set the drawing size.
→ In the Page menu, select Paper Size... .

Figure 3/2: Page dialog window, Drawing Size tab: setting the
drawing size
If you use a drawing frame, then FluidSIM can automatically adjust

the paper size. If you wish to define the drawing size manually, then
deactivate the “Adopt from drawing frame” option and select the
dimensions and orientation you require for the drawing. If the
drawing’s dimensions are larger than your printer’s printing area
then you can distribute your drawing across several pages (tile).
To retain a better overview you can create attributes for every

circuit drawing.
→ Click the “Attributes” tab.

Figure 3/3: Page dialog window, Attributes tab: creating attrib-
utes
The attribute table allows you to save any desired data in the form
of attribute value pairs. The associated placeholders (attributes
with the same name) in the drawing frame are replaced by the
values entered.
You can also access this dialog window directly by using the Page
menu and the Properties... menu item.

3.2 Organize symbols, libraries and circuit diagrams
In order to support the organization of the different document

types in FluidSIM all of the circuit files are assigned to one of three
groups.
Symbols Symbols are formal, abstract models providing a graphical repre-

sentation of the function of a component or component group. This
can consist of simple circuit symbols or entire circuits. Symbols can
be inserted into their own circuits and linked between the connect-
ing points. The insert can be performed either via the Insert menu
or via drag and drop from a library window. Symbols can be com-
piled into library files with the lib file suffix.
Libraries Libraries are hierarchically organized collections of symbols. In

addition to the standard library, which users cannot modify, users
can compile any desired number of their own libraries. You can find
functions for organizing the libraries on the Library menu as well
as on the context menu of the currently active library. To switch
libraries use the tab in the upper margin of the library window.
Library files have the lib file suffix.
Circuits The default location for circuits is in the FluidSIM folder con-
tained in the My Documents folder defined by the operating sys-
tem. These have the circ file suffix.
Note: It is worthwhile to create a new sub-folder in the FluidSIM

directory for every customer or every project.
3.3 Select unit system
Before creating the first circuit, it’s advisable to select the preferred
unit system.
→ Open the unit dialog via the menu Library / Setup units... .

Figure 3/4: Select unit system dialog window
FluidSIM converts units automatically, when default library compo-

nents are inserted in the circuit. Units used in the provided demo
circuits are determined by this option. Units of already existing
circuit components are not influenced by selecting another unit.
3.4 Insert symbol from menu
To find a specific symbol you can either enter characteristic key

words in the Find Symbol dialog windows or navigate through the
hierarchical structure.
→ Where necessary open a new window and select the Find

Symbol Description... entry on the Insert menu.
The Find Symbol dialog window then opens. You can enter your
search terms in the “Search” input line. Separate the individual
search terms using commas or spaces. Neither the order of the
search terms nor upper nor lower case letters have any influence on
the search results.

Figure 3/5: Find Symbol dialog window
You can see the symbols found in the two results lists. The library
hierarchy is displayed on the left-hand side although only those
branches appear which contain matching symbols. An alphabetical
list of the search hits is displayed on the right-hand side. The sym-
bol of the highlighted entry is shown in the preview. Once you have
found the symbol that you were looking for, you can select it using
the OK button or by double-clicking on the appropriate row in the
results list. The symbol then “hangs” on the mouse pointer and is
placed by left-clicking on the drawing area.

With the Fuzzy Search option you can activate a tolerance in order
to achieve results despite minor typing errors or spelling variants.
3.5 Symbol libraries
FluidSIM is capable of managing multiple libraries, each of which is

displayed in a tab in the library window. Libraries which cannot be
modified in FluidSIM are labeled with a lock symbol in the tab.
This applies to standard library as well as to symbol folders which
FluidSIM does not manage itself or for which the registered user
does on possess write authorization.
Every library is displayed hierarchically. Every hierarchy level can by

shown or hidden by clicking on the group name. Right-clicking in a
library opens a context menu offering the following menu items for
editing the library:
View Defines the size of the symbols displayed. Small , Normal and
Large are available.
Expand All Opens all of the hierarchy levels.
Collapse All Closes all of the hierarchy levels.
There are three types of library:
The standard library This library is delivered with FluidSIM and cannot be modified.
Symbol folders Circuit and symbol files saved on the disk can be used as libraries
in FluidSIM. The files from the selected folder are added as a library
via the Library menu and the Add Existing Symbol Folder...
menu item. The library hierarchy corresponds exactly to the folder
hierarchy. These libraries cannot be modified in FluidSIM. The files
must be modified directly.
User libraries You can create and subsequently edit new libraries via the Library
menu and the Create New Library... menu item (see section

Create user library). Using drag and drop you can move the symbols
and groups within the library as desired.
3.5.1 Create user library
In order to be able to access frequently used symbols (or circuits)

more quickly multiple symbols can be compiled into libraries.
Libraries are saved as files with the lib file suffix. You can create
new libraries using the Library and the Create New Library...
menu item. Right-clicking in the new library opens a context menu
with which you can modify the library.
The following options are available:
Copy Copies the selected symbols to the clipboard
Paste Inserts the symbols into the library from the clipboard. These
symbols can also be partial circuits.
Delete Removes the selected symbols from the library.
Rename... Edits the text which libraries display below the symbol.
Add Existing Symbols... Opens a dialog window for selecting symbol files to be copied into
the library as new symbols.
Copy to Other Library Copies the selected symbols into another library. The available
libraries are listed in a submenu. Only the currently open libraries
are displayed here (appearing as tabs in the library window) which
are not write-protects (recognizable as no lock symbol is dis-
played).
New Sub-Folder... Creates a new hierarchy level below the active group. The active
group is the one belonging to the area below the mouse point and
can be recognized by the dark blue coloring.
Remove Sub-Folder Removes the hierarchy level which the mouse pointer is located in.

Rename Sub-Folder... Enables you to rename the hierarchy level which the mouse pointer
is located in.
3.6 Circuit files
FluidSIM circuit files have the circ file suffix and are saved as
compressed XML files. An option in the Save tab under the Op-
tions... menu item from the Tools menu allows you to deactivate
this compression so that the circuit files can be viewed as plain
text. This can be useful for version management software, for
example.
However, please note that editing a circ file outside FluidSIM can
cause the file to become unreadable or corrupted upon re-import.

Library and project window
Chapter 4
4. Library and project window
4.1 Change window position
The library window is anchored on the left-hand side by default and

the project window (when a project is open) is on the right-hand
side.
To separate the window from the anchor move the mouse pointer
to the upper margin. Click and hold the left mouse button. Move
the window a small distance towards the center of the screen. Now
release the left mouse button. Now you need to move the library
window to the lower right and the project window to the lower left.
Once a window has been separated from the anchor it can be
moved freely.
To re-anchor the window move the mouse pointer to the upper

margin. Click and hold the left mouse button. Move the window as
far as possible to the right or the left. Now release the left mouse
button. This window snaps into place. This enables you to anchor
the library window to the right and the project window to the left,
for example. You can also anchor both windows on the same side.
In this case you can move the desired window into the foreground
by clicking the associated tab.
4.2 Automatic show and hide
The tabs offer an additional, practical function: Automatically

showing and hiding the library or project window. Click the associ-
ated vertical tab “Library” or “Project” at the edge of the window.
This causes the window to be hidden providing a larger area for the
drawing. In order to make the window visible again move the
mouse pointer over the tab; the window opens once again. As soon
as you have performed your operations in this window and move
the mouse pointer to a circuit window the library window and / or

the project window are automatically hidden. To deactivate the
function click the associated tab again (this then appears de-
pressed).

Edit circuit
Chapter 5
5. Edit circuit
5.1 Insert and arrange symbols
You can insert symbols into the symbol window being edited using
the dialog window Find Symbol and by means of the libraries. You
can also transfer objects from every other window by selecting
them and dragging them to the desired window. Alternatively you
can also utilize the clipboard by selecting the items, choosing the
Copy menu item on the Edit menu, bringing the target window
into the foreground and selecting the Paste menu item on the
Edit menu. Using the mouse pointer to drag objects from one
window to another copies them. Dragging the objects from one
position to another within a window moves them. In order to copy
within a window you need to hold down the Shift key while
moving the mouse pointer. You can recognize operation by the
shape of the mouse pointer. During a move-operation a cross with
arrows appears, when copying a plus symbol also appears in
the lower right-hand corner of the cross.
5.2 Connect connectors / ports
In order to connect two component connectors with a line move the

mouse pointer to the component connector. You can recognize a
connector by the small circle at the end of a symbol’s connection
line. As soon as you have touched the line the mouse pointer trans-
forms into a crosshair .

Figure 5/1: Mouse pointer as a crosshair over a component con-
nector.
→ Now press the left mouse button and move the mouse pointer
to the connector which you wish to connect with the first.
You can recognize when you are over the connector by the shape of
the mouse pointer . If the mouse pointer is over a connector
which is already connected to a line then the prohibited sign
appears and no line can be connected.
→ Release the mouse button once you have touched the second
connector.
FluidSIM automatically lays a line between the two connectors.

Figure 5/2: Line between two connectors
Support points can be set when dragging lines. To do so simply

release the mouse button while dragging the line and click the
desired points. The line is completed as soon as you click a second
connector or the same point twice. You can cancel the action by
pressing the Esc key or the right mouse button.
5.3 Automatically connect connectors
FluidSIM supports two methods of automatically connecting con-

nectors. The first is to drop a symbol on an existing line. To be able
to use this method, the symbol must have at least two connectors
that precisely fit onto one or more existing lines and the lines that

will be produced must not cross the symbol. The following two
illustrations show this function.
Figure 5/3: Circuit before the connectors are automatically con-

nected
Figure 5/4: Circuit after the connectors are automatically connected
Another method of automatically connecting connectors is to

position symbols so that their connectors can be horizontally or
vertically connected with free connectors from other symbols. After
the symbol has been dropped the corresponding lines are automat-
ically drawn if they do not cross any symbols. The free connectors
can also be T distributors.
You can define how different objects' connectors are automatically

connected in the Connector Links tab under the Options... menu

item from the Tools menu. The following two illustrations show
this function.
Figure 5/5: Circuit before the connectors are automatically con-

nected
Figure 5/6: Circuit after the connectors are automatically connected
5.4 Insert T distributor
You do not need to utilize a special symbol in order to insert a T

distributor. FluidSIM automatically inserts a T distributor when you
lay a component connection on a line or lay a line segment to a
connection. If you wish to connect two lines then you can also draw
one line segment to another; FluidSIM then inserts two T distribu-
tors and connects these with a new line.
→ Move the mouse points to a connector and press the left

mouse button.

As soon as you touch the line the mouse pointer transforms into a
crosshair .
→ Release the mouse button once you have touched the desired
point on the line.
FluidSIM inserts a T distributor and automatically lays a line.
Figure 5/7: Line connection with inserted T distributor
Every T distributor can connect up to 4 lines with each other.
The default representation for the T distributor can be selected via

the corresponding drop-down list on the toolbar.
You can customize the representation of the T distributor by dou-

ble-clicking the T distributor or highlighting the T distributor and
selecting the Properties... menu item from the Edit menu. The

“Properties” dialog window opens. Select the “Representation”
tab.
Figure 5/8: T distributor dialog window. Tab: Representation
T distributor Defines the representation of the basic T distributor. Here you can
select whether the distributor should be represented as a filled
circle or a simple intersection.
Cross-Link Defines that the T distributor should be represented as an electric

link. This representation has a knock-on effect on the connected
lines, which are automatically marked as links.

Junction Defines that the T distributor should be represented as an electric
junction. This representation has a knock-on effect on the termi-
nals' target search. With a junction, the target in the direction of a
straight line or right angle is found first and then the target via an
angled branch.
5.5 Move lines
Once you have joined two connectors you can then adjust the
length of the lines. You can move the line segments in parallel by
moving the respective line segment. You can see when you have
touched the line on the basis of the line-selection shape of the
mouse pointer.
→ Press the left mouse button and move the line segment or-
thogonally to the desired position.
Figure 5/9: Moving a line segment
→ Release the left mouse button; FluidSIM adjusts the adjoining

line segments in such a way that they remain connected.
If you move a line segment with is directly connected to a compo-

nent connector then FluidSIM may insert additional line segments
in order to prevent gaps.

If you move a line segment that is horizontally or vertically con-
nected with other line segments via T distributors then these line
segments are moved together with the T distributors.
Figure 5/10: Moving multiple line segments
Figure 5/11: Moving multiple line segments
If you only want to move the individual line segment in the case
described above then release the mouse button after you highlight
the line segment. Click the segment again and move it while keep-
ing the mouse button pressed.

Figure 5/12: Moving an individual line segment
5.6 Direct connection via straight connection line
Normally connection lines in technical circuits are always drawn

orthogonally. However, it can sometimes be desirable to create a
direct connection between two connectors via a diagonal line. To
achieve this, first connect the two connectors in the standard way.
Then select any segment on the line and right-click to open the
context menu. Select “Straight connection line” to create a direct
connection.
Figure 5/13: Direct connections between two connectors
To switch back to an orthogonal line, open the context menu again

and select “Orthogonal line segments”.

5.7 Define the characteristics of lines
Lines, like other symbols, can be assigned an identification and

user-defined properties. You can find further information on this
under Component attributes in the Properties dialog window.
You can also define the style, color and drawing layer of the lines by
double-clicking a line segment or highlighting the line segment and
selecting the Properties... menu item from the Edit menu. The
Line Properties dialog window opens. Select the Drawing Properties
tab in this window. The settings are applied to the entire line sec-
tion as far as the next connector or T distributor.
Double-clicking a line segment or selecting a line segment and

clicking on the menu item Properties... in the Edit menu, will
open up the Line Parameters dialog.

Figure 5/14: Line Parameters dialog window: defining the proper-
ties of a pneumatic line
Layer In this drop-down list, you define the Layer of the line. You can set
the Layer by clicking the downward-pointing arrow to the right of
the list and selecting a layer. Depending on the setting for drawing
layers, the line might not be displayed or might not be able to be
edited. In order to see the object or change its settings, you have to
temporarily activate the drawing layers with menu item View
Drawing Layers... .
Identification Here you can assign an identification that uniquely identifies the
line in the circuit diagram. The identification is shown as text in the
circuit drawing if the “Display” option is selected.

Automatic designation Optional, FluidSIM can assign reasonable designations to lines. The
designation of a line if combined out of the designations of con-
nected connectors as well as their components. Assuming connect-
or 2 of component A1 is connected to connector 4 of component
V3, the line designation would be A1:2/V3:4. When activated, the
line designation updates automatically, whenever the designation
of connected components changes.
Reverse Direction The automatic line designation, as well as other evaluation tables,
uses the source and target of a line or cable. The direction is initial-
ly determined by the connector the line is drawn from. Using the
Reverse Direction option, the direction can be reversed after-
wards.
Display in Parts Lists Activate this option if you want the line to appear in the parts list.
Display in Tube Lists Activate this option if you want the line to appear in the tube list.
As with other graphic objects, you can select style, color and line-
width for the lines. Select the Drawing Properties tab in the line
properties dialog. The settings will be applied to the whole line
segment until the next connector respectively T-junction.

Figure 5/15: Drawing Properties dialog window: defining the prop-
erties of a line
Color Sets the color of the line.
Line Style Sets the line style of the line.
Line Width Sets the line thickness of the line.
Straight connection line Normally connection lines in technical circuits are always drawn
orthogonally. However, it can sometimes be desirable to create a
direct connection between two connectors.
Note: Working lines are typically displayed as solid lines, pilot lines
as dashed lines.
Please note that the way the lines are displayed during the simula-
tion depends on the physical status of the lines. The colors, line
styles, and line thicknesses will vary according to pressure, flow,
voltage, etc.. You can define how the lines are displayed during the
simulation on the Simulation tab under Options... in the Tools
menu. When you exit Simulation Mode, the lines once again appear
the way you defined them in Edit Mode.

5.8 Delete line
To delete a line you can either highlight an associated line segment

and press the Del key or select the Delete menu item from the
Edit menu or highlight a component connector and press the
Del key. In these cases it is the line rather than the connector
itself that is deleted.
If you delete a T distributor which three or four lines are attached to

then all of the lines are deleted. If, on the other hand, only two lines
are connected then only the T distributor is deleted and the two
lines combined into one.
5.9 Set the properties of the connectors
You can assign a component connector an identification and a

blanking plug or silencer by double-clicking on the connector or by
selecting the connector and choosing the Properties... menu item
on the Edit menu. The Connector dialog window then opens.

Figure 5/16: Connector dialog window: setting the properties of a
connector
Identification You can enter a text identifying this connector into the input line. If
the Display option is activated then the identification is displayed
in the circuit diagram.
Whether or not the identification is actually displayed depends on

the option selected under Show Connector Descriptions .
Display quantity values During the simulation, the calculated quantity values can be dis-
played not only with specialized measuring devices, but also direct-
ly at the connectors. For a quick overview, you can use View
Quantity Values... to show all values at all connectors with a
single click. As this is generally fairly confusing, you can also
choose to view the quantity values at selected connectors only. For
more details, see "Displaying quantity values".
Terminator Open the symbol list containing connector terminators by clicking

the button using the arrow. Select a suitable silencer or a blanking
plug.
Note: Please note that this symbol list is only available if a line is
not connected to the connector in question. If you wish to connect a

line to a sealed connector you first have to remove the blanking
plug or silencer. To do this select the empty field in the symbol list
with the connector terminators. The alignment of the connector
terminator can be set via the radio buttons.
5.10 Configure a way valve
If you require a certain valve which you cannot find in the standard
FluidSIM library you can create your own valve symbol with the
help of the valve editor.
→ Insert a 5/n-way valve into a circuit window from the “Stand-

ard Symbols / Pneumatic Symbols / Valves / Configurable Way
Valves” library (insert a hydraulic valve in case of FluidSIM-H).
To set the valve body and the actuation types of the way valves
double-click the valve. The dialog window Properties then opens.
Click the “Configure Valve” tab to access the valve editor.

Figure 5/17: Properties dialog window: Configure Valve tab
Left Actuation – Right Actua- You can select the actuation types of the valve from the “Manual-
tion ly”, “Mechanically” and “Pneumatically/Electrically” (“Hydraulical-
ly/Electrically” resp.) categories for both sides of the valve. Click
the button with the mouse pointer and select a symbol element. A
valve can have multiple actuation types at the same time. If you do
not want an actuation type from a category then select the empty
field in the list. You can also define whether each side should have
a spring return, pilot control, pneumatic spring or external supply.

Valve Body A configurable valve can possess a maximum of four switching
positions. One valve body can be selected for each switching posi-
tion. Click the associate button with the mouse points to open the
symbol elements list. Select a symbol element for each switching
position. If you want to use less than four switching positions then
select the empty field on the list for the positions not required.
Initial Position Here you set which switching position the valve should use in the
normal position. Note: When determining this setting, ensure that it
does not conflict with a possible spring return.
Dominant Signal This provides a graphical identification of whether the right or left
signal should dominate in the event of equally strong signals.
External Supply This creates an additional connector for connecting the external
supply for the controller.
5.11 Configure cylinders
If you require a certain cylinder which you cannot find in the stand-
ard FluidSIM library you can create your own cylinder symbol with
the help of the cylinder editor.
→ Insert a double-acting cylinder into a circuit window from the

“Standard Symbols / Pneumatic Symbols / Pneumatic Drives /
Configurable Cylinders” library. In the case of FluidSIM-H, se-
lect a hydraulic cylinder accordingly.
To configure the cylinder double-clock on the cylinder. The dialog

window Properties then opens. Click the “Configure Cylinder” tab.
This brings you to the cylinder editor.

Figure 5/18: Properties dialog window: Configure Cylinder tab
Cylinder Type Click the button with the mouse pointer to open the symbol ele-
ments list. Select a cylinder type. Set whether the cylinder should
be single-acting or double-acting.
Return Spring Specifies whether a spring for the return should be inserted into the
right or left cylinder chamber.
Piston Click the button with the mouse pointer and select a symbol ele-
ment for the piston. Set whether the cylinder should possess end
position cushioning and whether this should be adjustable.

Piston Rod Click the button with the mouse pointer and select a symbol ele-
ment for the piston rod.
Piston Position Using the slider you can specify the relative piston position in 25 %
steps. 0 % stands for the completely retracted and 100 % extended
piston.
5.12 Group symbols
If you wish to combine multiple symbols into a group select these

and choose the Group menu item on the Edit menu. Groups can
also be nested, i.e. already grouped objects can be grouped again.
A group primarily serves as a drawing aid and does not represent

any new components. Every element in a group is included in a
parts list in exactly the same way as without being grouped. Dou-
ble-clicking on a group element opens the dialog window Proper-
ties of group element clicked.
If you wish to combine multiple symbols into a new component with

its own attributes create a macro object.
5.13 Create macro objects
If you wish to combine multiple symbols into a new component with

its own attributes then highlight these and select the Create Mac-
ro Object menu item from the Edit menu. This creates a new
macro object. Macro objects are included in the parts lists as inde-
pendent components. The original symbols are removed from the
parts lists. It is no longer possible to edit their component attrib-
utes.

5.14 Delete symbol groups and macro objects
To delete a group or a macro object select the group or the macro

object and select the Ungroup/Break Off menu item from the
Edit menu. This always deletes the outermost group. In order to
delete nested groups you must repeat the operation.
5.15 Align symbols
To align objects with each other, select these and choose the de-
sired orientation from the Align menu item on the Edit menu or
click the appropriate button on the toolbar.
5.16 Mirror symbols
The symbols can be both horizontally and vertically mirrored. Select

the desired mirror axis from the Mirror menu item on the Edit
menu or click the appropriate button on the toolbar. If you
select multiple objects at the same time then every object will be
mirrored separately. If you wish the operation to use a common
mirror axis then group the objects before the operation.
The geometrical properties can be entered directly via the “Drawing

Properties” tab. Enter a minus sign in front of the corresponding
scaling factor in order to mirror the symbol.

5.17 Rotate symbols
The symbols can be rotated in 90 degree steps or with the help of

the mouse pointer. To rotate objects in 90 degree steps, select the
desired angle from the Rotate menu item on the Edit menu or
click the appropriate button on the toolbar. If you select multiple
objects at the same time then every object will be rotated separate-
ly. If you wish the operation to use a common axis of rotation then
group the objects before the operation.
You can also rotate symbols with the help of the mouse pointer by
clicking and dragging the edge of the symbol. In order to do this
FluidSIM must be in Enable Rotate mode. This mode can be
activated or deactivated using the Enable Rotate menu item from
the Edit menu or by clicking the corresponding button on the
toolbar.
Note: Activating the Enable Scale mode deactivates the Enable

Rotate mode and vice versa.
→ In Enable Rotate mode click the edge of the symbol and hold
down the mouse button.
Figure 5/19: Rotate symbol
The current angle of rotation and guides are displayed.
→ Hold down the mouse button and move the mouse pointer
until the desired angle of rotation is achieved. The angle
changes in 15 degree steps.
Note: If you also press the Shift key then you can rotate the
symbol steplessly.

Figure 5/20: Rotate symbol
The angle of rotation can also be entered directly in the properties

dialog window in the Drawing Properties tab.
Note that the rotation of the drawing has no effect on the simula-
tion. If you want a load to be raised, for example, you need to enter
the desired angle under “Mounting angle” in the component pa-
rameters.
5.18 Scale symbols
The component symbols can be scaled with the help of the mouse
pointer. In order to do this FluidSIM must be in Enable Scale
mode. This mode can be activated or deactivated using the Enable
Scale menu item from the Edit menu or by clicking the corre-
sponding button on the toolbar.
Note: Activating the Enable Scale mode deactivates the Enable

Rotate mode and vice versa.
→ In Enable Scale mode click the edge or corner of the symbol

and hold down the mouse button.

Figure 5/21: Scale symbol
The current scaling relationship to the current original size is dis-

played.
→ Hold down the mouse button and move the mouse pointer
until the desired size is reached. The scaling relationship is
changed in 0.25 steps. Note: If you also press the Shift key
then you can scale the symbol steplessly.
Figure 5/22: Scale symbol
You can simultaneously mirror the symbol by moving the mouse

pointer over the middle of the symbol to the opposite side.
Figure 5/23: Mirror symbol
The scaling factor can also be entered directly in the Properties

dialog window in the Drawing Properties tab.

Drawing frame
Chapter 6
6. Drawing fra me
In FluidSIM drawing frames are “circuit diagrams” which consists of

a title block and the frame with the field divisions. They can also be
displayed in other circuit diagrams. Existing CAD drawing frames
can be imported using the DXF import menu item on the File
menu. No order to make a drawing frame usable in different pro-
jects and circuit diagrams a number of texts in the title block must
be editable. These texts are Author, Creation date, Project name,
Page name and Page number, for example. In FluidSIM these are
text components with Attribute Link.
6.1 Editable labels
Texts in the title block of a drawing frame are text components. You
can use the imported texts or insert new text components at the
desired positions. Editable texts are text components with Attribute
Link. These texts are replaced by the corresponding attribute val-
ues of the project and the circuit.
→ Double-click a text component to open the Properties dialog

window.
→ Enter the name of the attribute to be linked, e.g. “creator”, in

the text field and activate the “Attribute Link” option.
Note: You can also use an imported text as an attribute name.
The attribute name is utilized as a placeholder. These attributes are

displayed in angle brackets in the “circuit diagram” with the draw-
ing frame. These attributes are replaced by the corresponding
attribute values when using the drawing frame in a project or circuit
diagrams. Edit the attribute values in the Properties dialog window
of the project or the circuit diagram. Clicking on a text component
of the drawing frame opens the Properties dialog window of the
project or the circuit which contains the attribute which the text
component refers to.

6.2 Use a drawing frame
Drawing frames can be copied into a project and/or a circuit dia-

gram. Insert the drawing frame via the Properties dialog window of
a project or a circuit.
All of the objects belonging to a drawing frame are inserted into the
circuit diagram as a copy. Changing the file with the drawing frame
at a later date does not have any effect on the circuit diagram which
the drawing frame was inserted into.
When copying the objects belonging to the drawing frame all of the
attributes are generated with the drawing frame’s text components
refer to and which do not exist in the project or circuit.

Figure 6/1: Page dialog window: inserting a drawing frame
Inherit From Project If this option is activated then the drawing frame specified in the
project is copied into the circuit. The path and the file used are
displayed in the “Frame File” line.
Pick... This button opens a dialog window in which an included frame can
be selected. These frame files are located in the frm directory and
are compiled in the project file frames.prj.
Reload File Reloads the drawing frame and resets possible changes to the
attributes and the page dividers.
Edit... Opens the frame file for editing.

Remove Local Frame Removes the drawing frame from the circuit. The drawing frame’s
attributes remain attributes of the project or circuit.
Reload Frame Attributes When inserting a drawing frame the attributes of the text compo-
nents of the drawing frame are listed. These attributes are saved
with the project or the circuit drawing and can be edited and delet-
ed. The Reload Frame Attributes button reloads all of the attrib-
utes from the drawing frame, thus updating the attribute list of the
project or the circuit drawing.

Figure 6/2: Select Drawing Frame dialog window
All of the available frame files are displayed as a tree on the right-
hand side. The desired drawing frame can be selected in this tree.
The drawing frame is then displayed in the preview. In addition the

“Attributes” list displays all of the attributes of the texts from the
drawing frame which were defined as links.
Browse... Opens a dialog window to select a circuit file to be used as a frame.
6.3 Drawing frame Editor
The drawing frame editor allows for the creation and modification
of drawing frames.
The editor can be started from the property dialog of a project or a

page. First, select a drawing frame in the “Drawing Frame” tab and
open the frame for modification by clicking on Edit... .
Please note, that drawing frames, which were delivered in a version

below 5.2a, can’t be edited with the new editor.

6.3.1 Drawing Size
Figure 6/3: Tab Drawing Size
In this tab you can select a name for the drawing frame and change
its size and orientation. In the upper area you can choose from
predefined standard sizes or select your own, individual dimen-
sions. Below, you can change the orientation of the drawing frame.
In the preview on the right side, the current dimensions are shown
for illustration.

6.3.2 Page border
Figure 6/4: Tab Page border
This step allows you to configure the outer and inner border line
according to your wishes.
In the upper part the properties linewidth, linestyle and color of the
border line can be defined. If wanted, one or both lines can be
deleted from the drawing frame by clicking the respective check
boxes.
In the center part you can define the space between the outer
border line and the border of the drawing space as well as the
space between the inner border lines. All changes are visible in the
preview on the right side immediately.
In the lower part you can decide to show additional markings in the
drawing frame.

6.3.3 Page Dividers
Figure 6/5: Tab Page Dividers
In this tab the page dividers can be set up.
In the upper left side, properties for the individual rows can be
adjusted. The area below deals with the properties for the columns'
designation.
The arrangement of columns and rows can either be defined by a

fixed number or by choosing a particular height respectively width.
— If you specify a row height or column width concretely, the

rows and columns will be inserted with the given width / height
starting from the middle of the inner border. The last column or
row on both sides of the drawing frame can turn out shorter
than the specified width when using this way of arrangement.
The following figure exemplarily shows the arrangement of col-
umns on a DIN A4 sized drawing frame with landscape orienta-
tion and a specified column width of 50 mm.

Figure 6/6: Example for column widths with predefined column
widths
— If you otherwise specify a fixed number of rows or columns, the

width / height of the inner border will be divided into the speci-
fied number of columns, which all have the same size. The fol-
lowing figure shows the arrangement of columns on the same
DIN A4 drawing frame as before but with six columns.
Figure 6/7: Example for column widths with predefined column

count.
The numbering defines how the columns or rows are labeled. You
can choose between a numeric labeling or an alphabetical labeling
with upper- and lowercase letters. Use the First Item field to select,
which number or letter should be used as start for the labeling.
By default the columns will be numbered from left to right and rows
from top to bottom with ongoing numbering. Select the Descending
Order check box, if you wish to reverse the order of numbering.
On the right side the current page dividers status is displayed along
with additional controls to manually adjust the dividers. The shown
controls correspond to the controls in the main program and can be
used as well to manually set up the dividers. Given this case, the
width and height of the arrangement equals the complete width /
height of the inner border.

6.3.4 Title block customizing
Figure 6/8: Tab Title block customizing
This tab allows for adjusting and arranging the title block to your
needs.
General structure of the title The title block inside the drawing frame consists of a table with a
block specific number of columns and rows. In each individual cell can
either contain a fixed text, an attribute link or an image.
Using the Select template... button at the top of the tab opens up
a dialog, which allows for choosing a predefined title block to load.

Figure 6/9: Dialog for choosing a title block
In this dialog you can choose a template for the title block. You can
either use a predefined or an user-defined template. The selected
title block will be shown in a preview on the right.
Selecting cells Individual table cells can be selected by left-clicking on them.

Selected cells will be displayed with a thicker blue border. The
content of the selected cell, its cell properties as well as dimen-
sions of the corresponding row and column are shown below the
table.
You can select multiple cells by moving the cursor over additional
cells while pressing the left mouse button. Alternatively, you can
select the first cell and then select the last cell while keeping the
Shift key pressed. Multiple, non-contiguous cells can be selected
by holding the Ctrl key while clicking on the individual cells. The
selected cells will be framed with a thicker blue border as well.
Adjusting the table structure. You can change the current table’s number of rows and columns by
right-clicking on a table cell. A context menu for the current cell is
shown. Using the menu items Insert and Delete , you can find
commands for adding or removing rows and columns.
You can change a columns width or a rows height by moving the

cursor to a cells border, pressing the right mouse button and mov-
ing the border. The selected cell will be changed in size and so will

the tables overall height / width. Holding down the Ctrl key while
moving the mouse will result in changing the cells size without
changing the tables overall size.
Instead of changing the cell height or width by mouse, you can also
directly input dimensions in the corresponding boxes under the
table. Select a cell from the row / column you want to adjust and
insert the values into the input fields.
Inside the table, multiple cells can be combined to a single con-

nected cell. Such a connected cell spans multiple columns and / or
rows.
To connect multiple cells, select them in the table and click on the
menu item Merge cells in the menu at the top. Cells can only be
connected in a rectangular shape of neighboring cells. Connecting
cells makes the new connected cell use the content and formatting
of the cell in the upper left corner of the selection. To split up a
connected cell use the menu item Split cells
Inserting a fixed text By double-clicking a cell, you can input a fixed text for that cell. An
input cursor is shown and allows to directly input a text. You can
also press the F2 function key, to access the cells input mode.
Fixed texts are in language independent in general. That means, the

text will be show as they’ve been inserted, independet from the
language of the page or project. If you want to use a language-
dependent text, you can use the predefined attribute texts, shown
in the list on the left. Select a text and drag it into table cell. The cell
will then show the internal place holder for the attribute text. For
example, the internal placeholder for the attribute “Project” is
“~FrmAttProject”.
Text formatting You can adjust a cells text formatting by using the menu bar on the
top. Select a cell, which formatting you want to adjust. Click on one
of the formatting options in the menu bar afterwards or select a
value e.g. for font size.

Figure 6/10: Menu bar over the table display
Using the menu bar you can change the following formatting op-
tions:
— Font
— Font size
— Font style (B = bold; I = italic; U = underline)
— Horizontal alignment (left; centered; right)
— Vertical alignment (top; centered; bottom)
— Background color
— Font color
On selecting a cell, the values for font and font size for the current
cell are shown in the menu bar, as well as for font style, vertical and
horizontal alignment.
Insert images To insert an image into a cell, select the cell and click the Choose
picture... button below the table. Use the dialog to select an
image. Supported image types are BMP, JPEG, PNG and GIF.
The path and filename of the selected image will be shown in the
input field above the button and the image will be shown in the
selected table cell. The image will be displayed in its original aspect
ratio and will be adjusted in size to fit the cell. Either the maximum
width or height of the cell will be used, depending on which leads
to a larger image. If you want the image to be displayed larger,
enlarge the images cell.
A freshly inserted image is bound to the cell by path and filename.

This is indicated by the activated check box External Link. On every
use of the drawing frame, the image is reloaded from this path. If
the file is not available, a red X is shown instead of the image itself.

To embed the image in the drawing frame, deactivate the External
Link check box. The file will then be embedded into the drawing
frame and is always visible, independent from the previous file
path. By embedding images into the drawing frame, the file size for
the drawing frame, as well as any projects file size using the draw-
ing frame, increases. Keep in mind, to use space-saving images
preferably.
Adjust cell border lines You can select the border lines of a cell by using the Borderlines
button in the menu bar above the table. Select the cells you want to
change the border lines for and click the small triangle on the right
side of the control to see a drop-down menu of the available border
lines.
Figure 6/11: Border line selection
You can select a border line for the selected cell from this menu. By
selecting No border , you can remove all border lines from the
selected cells. Your choice will be applied to the control and can be
applied to further cells by left-clicking the control when other cells
are selected.
Frame attributes and varia- Additionally to the possibilities of fixed texts and images described
bles earlier, the title block can also contain variable elements, whose
values are determined later on using the drawing frame in a specific
project or circuit. These elements can either be drawing frame
attributes, which are maintained in the project or page properties
or predefined variables, which get replaced by the corresponding
value inside the circuit automatically.

Drawing frame attributes
Drawing frame attributes are special place holders, which can be

selected in the title block and are replaced in the final circuit by the
value of the corresponding attribute of the page or project, e.g. the
project name, the page title or the approval date.
All available attributes are shown in the list on the left. You can find
predefined attributes, predefined variables as well as user-defined
attributes.
Each drawing frame attribute consists of two base components:

The attributes labeling and a placeholder that will be replaced with
the attributes value. The attributes labeling is located in the Dis-
played Text column, the placeholder is located in the Default value
column. The placeholder is shown in angle brackets in a grey font, if
no default value is defined.
To use an attribute in the drawing frame, select the placeholder

from the Default value column and drag it to the desired cell while
holding the left mouse button. On releasing the mouse, the select-
ed place holder will be filled in. Inserting the placeholder into the
table cell is sufficient to have the attribute appear in the property
tab when using the drawing frame. From there you can select a
value for the attribute, which will replace the place holder.
You can define default values for attributes in the drawing frame.
Double-click on a place-holder and enter the desired default value.
The default value will be shown instead of the place holder in the
list, while the place holder is still displayed in the cells of the title
block. On using the drawing frame, the default value will be ap-
plied to the drawing frame, but remains changeable at all times. By
entering a default value, you also gain the possibility to check for
the correct formatting of the text and the cells size.
If you want to insert the attributes labeling additional to the attrib-

utes value, select the label in the Displayed Text and drag it to the
desired cell. Predefined attributes use special variables to be
displayed language dependent, when using the drawing frame.
Complimentary to using predefined attributes and variables, you

are able to define your won attributes. To add an attribute, click the
Add Attribute... button and enter a name for the attribute. After-

wards the attribute is shown in the list and can be used as de-
scribed above. In difference to predefined variables, user-defined
variables will not be translated according to circuit or project lan-
guage.
Variables
The attribute list contains the following predefined variables:
— Page number
— Description
— Installation
— Circuit
— Location
— File Name
— Full file path
— Full project path
— File modification date and time
— File modification date
— File modification time
— Total project pages
These variables are used in the same way as the drawing frame
attributes described above. In difference to the drawing frame
attributes, it is not possible to define a default value for variables,
since they are replaced directly with the variables value when using
the drawing frame.

6.3.5 Title block location
Figure 6/12: Tab Title block location
This tab allows changing the position of the title block inside the
drawing frame.
Select the preferred position from the possible options. The title
blocks changed position will be displayed in the preview on the
right.
6.4 Page dividers
A circuit diagram or page can be logically divided into rows and

columns, which can be labeled with numbers or letters. These page
dividers are usually shown in the drawing frame and serve as a
means of orientation within the page. Above all they allow the
current paths (columns) of contacts to be specified in the contact
images.

The graphical representation of the page dividers matches the
logical page dividers in the drawing frames provided. The logical
page dividers can be shown and hidden via the Show Page Divid-
ers menu item from the View menu or via the button. They
are displayed at the left-hand as well as the upper edge of the
circuit window.
To be able to display and edit page dividers, you need to activate

the Expert Mode option in the Options... menu.
If the page dividers are visible you can customize them using the
mouse so that they match the graphical representation of the
drawing frame, for example. This customization can be done in
different ways:
→ Click and hold the mouse buttons in a column or row to move

the entire column or row.
Figure 6/13:
→ Click and hold the mouse buttons at the outer margin of a

column or row to move the margin of the column or row.
Figure 6/14:
The opposite margin is not moved and the columns or rows are
resized proportionally.
→ Click and hold the mouse buttons at the margin of an inner

division in a column or row to move the margin of the column
or row.
Figure 6/15:
In this case only the adjacent columns or rows are resized.

Columns and rows can be inserted and removed using the and
buttons.
The label type and the number of rows and columns can be defined
using the button. The settings are saved as page properties. The
following dialog window is opened:
Figure 6/16: Page dialog window, Page Dividers tab
Adopt from drawing frame Selecting this option only makes senses for pages that do not
represent drawing frames. This option must be deactivated if the
current page represents a drawing frame that is to be inserted into
other pages later.
If this option is activated then all settings that have been defined in
the drawing frame will be adopted.
Adopt from current paths When this option is activated, the page dividers are automatically
derived from the current paths of the electrical circuit. You can
show or hide automatic current path numbering via the “ Display
Current Path Numbering ” menu.

Setup manually Permits manual division of the rows and columns.
Rows Defines the settings for the horizontal rows.
Columns Defines the settings for the vertical columns.
Number Defines the number of page dividers.
Numbering Numbers, lowercase letters or uppercase letters can be used for

numbering.
First Item Defines the first numbering item. The numbering will be continued
on analogously from this item.
Descending Order Changes the numbering order.
Reset Resets the page dividers to default values.

Additional tools for creating drawings
Chapter 7
7. Additional tools for creating dr awings
7.1 Drawing tools
7.1.1 Grid
For arranging the symbols and laying the lines it is often practical to
show a point or line grid. You can activate or deactivate the display
of the grid using the Show Grid menu item from the View menu.
You can also define further grid settings in the General tab under
the Options... menu item from the Tools menu.
In order to simplify handling the connectors snap into place when

they are close to a grid line. This makes it easier to find the precise
position when moving the connectors.
Note: The grid snap function may not be desired as it prevents free
positioning. In this case you can hold down the Ctrl key during
the moving operation; this temporarily deactivates the grid snap
function.
7.1.2 Alignment lines
Connectors between symbols should be exactly horizontal or verti-

cal wherever possible. Then they can be connected with a straight
line.
FluidSIM supports the exact positions firstly via the grid snap and
secondly via automatically displaying red alignment lines while
moving the selected objects.

→ Open a circuit file which contains multiple objects. Select one
of these and slowly move it back and forth above and next to
other objects.
Observe the dashed red lines which appear when two or more
connectors lie above each other.
Figure 7/1: Automatically display the alignment lines
In order to simplify handling the connectors snap into place when

they are close to an alignment line. This makes it easier to find the
precise position when moving the connectors.
Note: The grid snap function may not be desired as it prevents free
positioning. In this case you can hold down the Ctrl key during
the moving operation; this temporarily deactivates the alignment
lines and the grid snap function.
7.1.3 Object snap
Various snap points can be activated for precise drawing. During a

drawing operation the mouse pointer snaps into place as soon as it
is close to a snap point. The following snap functions are available:
Snap to Grid
Snap to Connector

Snap to End Point
Snap to Mid Point
Snap to Center
Snap to Intersection
Press and hold the Ctrl key during a drawing operation to tempo-
rarily deactivate the object snap function.
To be able to use object snap, you need to activate the Expert

Mode option in the Options... menu.
7.1.4 Rulers
The rulers can be shown and hidden via View Show Rulers .
They are displayed at the left-hand as well as the upper edge of the
circuit window.
To be able to use the rulers, you need to activate the Expert Mode
option in the Options... menu.
7.2 Drawing levels
FluidSIM supports 256 drawing levels which can be shown / hidden

and locked / unlocked individually. In addition you can also define
the color and line thickness for every drawing level. Using the
Drawing Layers... menu item on the View menu you can set the
properties of the individual layers and also insert a description.
Note: The drawing frame is located on layer “0” by default.

Figure 7/2: Drawing Layers dialog window
The drawing layer settings can be copied over as default settings

from the current circuit using the Inherit From Page button.
You can select the drawing layer where newly inserted objects
should be placed under “Default Layer”. If you do not want the
symbol layer to be changed when objects are inserted then select
the “Preserve Object Layer” option.
Objects located on a drawing layer for which the “Edit” option is

deactivated are visible but cannot be highlighted and therefore
neither moved nor deleted. This enables you to lock a drawing
frame, for example, if it was inserted manually and not via the
Properties dialog window for the circuit or project. In order to still
be able to edit objects on layers of this type you must activate the
“Edit” option for the corresponding layer.

Drawing layers for which the “Display” option is deactivated are
neither visible nor can they be edited.
7.3 Cross-references
Cross-references serve to link connected parts of a circuit drawing

when the entire drawing is spread across multiple pages. This
allows lines to be interrupted, for example, and continued on an-
other page.
FluidSIM offers two types of cross-references. Paired cross-

references consist of two cross-reference symbols that reference
each other. The two cross-reference symbols are linked via a
unique label that is entered for both symbols.
The option also exists to reference any object within a project from
a cross-reference symbol. The cross-reference is unidirectional in
this case: from the cross-reference to the target object. This allows
several cross-references to reference the same object.
Both types enable you to jump directly from a cross-reference to

the associated target. With the paired cross-reference the target is
the corresponding cross-reference, otherwise an object.
You jump to the corresponding target either using the Jump to

Target button in the properties dialog window for the cross-
reference symbol or by highlighting the cross-reference and select-
ing the Jump to Target menu item from the context menu.
The circuit drawings involved must belong to the same project.
Open the Cross-reference dialog window from the Edit menu and
the Properties... menu item. Alternatively you can open this
dialog window by double-clicking the cross-reference symbol or
using the Properties... context menu.

Figure 7/3: Cross-reference dialog window
Text This text is displayed in the cross-reference
Label Defines the labels via which the linked cross-references are identi-
fied.
Link If this option is activated then the label entered constitutes a link to
a target object. The cross-reference only works in the direction of
the target object in this case. This option can be combined with the
Show Location option to show the location of the target object.
Target Text If the Show Location option is activated then the location of the
target object will be displayed here. The representation of the
location is defined in the Cross Reference Representation tab in the
properties dialog window for the page or project.

If Show Description is activated then the text of the corresponding
cross-reference is displayed for paired cross-references, otherwise
the description of the target object is displayed.
Display Target Text If this option is activated then the above-mentioned text from the
Target Text field is displayed below the text for this cross-reference.
Jump to Target Activating this button opens the circuit window containing the
corresponding cross-reference. The associated symbol is indicated
by an animation.
The font type, text color and alignment of the texts to be displayed
can also be customized.
7.3.1 Create cross-references from symbols
You can generate a cross-reference from one or more symbols. To

do so highlight the corresponding symbols and select the Edit
Create Cross-reference menu item or the Create Cross-reference
menu item from the context menu. The highlighted symbols are
combined into a group that constitutes a cross-reference with two
additional texts. One of these texts shows the label used and the
other the target text for the cross-reference.
7.3.2 Cross-reference representation
The location of the target object can be shown in cross-references.

How it is represented can be specified in the Cross Reference
Representation tab in the properties dialog window for the circuit
or project. The location can be composed from the “Page number”,
“Page”, “Page Column”, “Page Row” and “Object Identification”
components. These reference the target object. Separators can be
placed before and after each component. The default representa-
tion is:

/ Page number. Page Column The description for the page and the
page number are specified in the Properties dialog window for the
circuit.
To be able to use the options for displaying cross-references, you

need to activate the Expert Mode option in the Options... menu.
The page number is a predefined placeholder that can be used in

text components and drawing frames among other things.
Figure 7/4: Cross Reference Representation tab
Inherit From Parent Node Defines whether the representation rules for the parent node
should be applied.
Example A sample location that conforms to the specified rules is displayed

here.
Reset Resets the cross-reference representation to the default setting.

7.3.3 Manage cross-references
All paired cross-references in a project are listed in a dialog window

that is opened using the Project Manage Cross References...
menu item. Using this dialog you can jump to all paired cross-
references in the project.
To be able to use the options for managing cross-references, you

need to activate the Expert Mode option in the Options... menu.
Figure 7/5: Manage Cross References... tab
Label Contains the label for the corresponding cross-reference.
Containing Page A page containing the cross-reference in question can be selected

in the drop-down list.
Jump to Target Using this button you can jump to the corresponding cross-
reference.

7.4 Drawing functions and graphical elements
Graphical elements can be inserted into a circuit using the Draw

menu or by activating the drawing function on the toolbar. In order
to prevent you from unintentionally moving other symbols when
drawing you enter a special mode for the drawing function in which
you can only perform the selected drawing functions. After every
drawing operation FluidSIM returns to the normal editing mode. To
insert another drawing element you must select the associated
menu item or the corresponding drawing function on the toolbar
again.
Note: If you wish to draw several elements in a row without leaving

the special drawing mode then you can select the menu item or the
corresponding drawing function on the toolbar while holding down
the Shift key. The drawing mode then remains active until the
menu item or the drawing function is deactivated by selecting it
again or another drawing function is selected without the Shift
key being pressed.
The drawing functions toolbar contains the following buttons:
Switches to the normal editing mode.
Switches to the mode for drawing a line.
Switches to the mode for drawing a polyline.
Switches to the mode for drawing a rectangle.
Switches to the mode for drawing a circle.
Switches to the mode for drawing an ellipse.
Switches to the mode for drawing a text.
Switches to the mode for drawing an image.
Switches to the mode for drawing a conduction line. You can start
by choosing whether you would like to draw a pneumatic, hydrau-
lic, electric, digital, or GRAFCET conduction line.

The graphical elements are drawn in the color shown.
The graphical elements are drawn in the line style shown.
The graphical elements are drawn in the line thickness shown.
The line beginnings are drawn with the symbol shown.
The line ends are drawn with the symbol shown.
7.4.1 Interruption/Potential
If conduction lines extend over several pages then the line ends can
be assigned interruptions. Interruptions can be used to define that
a conduction line is only interrupted in the drawing and is contin-
ued somewhere else. An interruption can be assigned an identifica-
tion and linked with another interruption. The location of the linked
interruption can be displayed at the source interruption.
If an electric interruption is used with an electric line then this

interruption is a potential. The use of electric potentials is de-
scribed under Potentials and conduction lines.
You can insert an interruption into an existing line or position it

freely in a circuit.
→ Select the Interruption/Potential... menu item from the

Insert menu.
A dialog window opens where you can make various settings for
the interruption to be inserted.

Figure 7/6: Interruption/Potential... dialog window
Type of connector Defines whether a fluidic or electric interruption (potential) is to be

inserted.
Define multiple connectors Multiple interruptions can be set one after the other if this option is
active. You can cancel the action by pressing the Esc key.
You can edit the properties for an interruption by double-clicking it.

The following dialog window opens.

Figure 7/7: Interruption/Potential dialog window
Layer Defines the drawing layer for the interruption.
Identification Defines the identification for the interruption. The identification will
be displayed in the circuit if the Display option is active.
Target Interruptions can reference each other in pairs. The counterpart

interruption can be selected from a list or entered directly in the list
box. Browse... opens a dialog window where all interruptions are
displayed in a tree and can be selected. Only interruptions that are
not linked will be shown in the list if the Only Free Interrup-
tions/Potentials option is active.
Jump to Target If the interruption is linked with another interruption then this
button can be used to jump to the counterpart interruption.
Show Location If this option is activated and the interruption is linked with another
interruption then the location of the counterpart interruption will be
displayed as a page coordinate (e.g. page number/column).
Representation A symbol that defines the representation of the interruption can be

selected from a list. To illustrate the representation the relevant
symbol always additionally shows the intersection of two lines.

7.4.2 Conduction line
A conduction line is drawn by defining two end points. A pneumatic

or electric line of this type consists of two connectors with a line
between them. Both connectors can be used as the starting point
for further connections. The conduction lines can only be drawn
horizontally or vertically.
You open a dialog window where you can make various settings for
the line to be dragged using the Insert Conduction Line... menu
item or the button on the toolbar.
Figure 7/8: Conduction Line... dialog window
Type of connection line Selects the conduction line type. The following are available:
“Pneumatic” and “Electric”.

Define multiple lines Multiple conduction lines can be set one after the other if this
option is active. You can cancel the action by pressing the Esc
key.
If multiple conduction lines with the same distance between them

are to be drawn horizontally or vertically then change the number in
the “Number of lines” field. You specify the distance to be main-
tained between the lines using “Distance”.
Under “Start Point Appearance” and “End Point Appearance” you

can define the representation of the respective end point. If the
“Display Identification” option is selected then the identification for
the start point is displayed. In order to guarantee that the same
identification is displayed for the start point and the end point, a
text reference for the start point is displayed for the end point
instead of its identification.
Interruptions are used as end points for conduction lines.
After confirming the dialog window you switch to a special mode

where you define the end points of the line with two consecutive
mouse clicks. Alternatively you can also draw a line by clicking and
dragging.
An electric conduction line can constitute a potential line. This is

described under Potentials and conduction lines.
7.4.3 Line
A line is drawn by defining two points. In contrast to a conduction

line this line is purely a drawing element. As such it can be drawn
with any desired angle but does not allow connections with pneu-
matic or electric connectors.
The line-specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Proper-

ties tab of the Properties dialog window for the line:

Figure 7/9: Properties dialog window for a line: Drawing Properties
tab
Start Point Defines the x/y coordinate of the start point.
End Point Defines the x/y coordinate of the end point.
Scale Defines the scaling in the x or y direction.
Rotation Defines the angle of rotation in degrees.
Override Color Defines the color of the drawing element.
Line Style Defines the line style.
Line Width Defines the line thickness.
Start Cap Defines how the beginning of the line is displayed.
End Cap Defines how the end of the line is displayed.
Background

Sets the location of the drawing element to the background. This
means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this. For example
symbols are not covered by filled drawing elements.
Foreground Sets the location of the drawing element to the foreground. This
means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this. For ex-
ample symbols are covered by filled drawing elements.
Reset Reset the settings to the default values.
7.4.4 Polyline (set of connected lines)
A polyline (also called a set of connected lines or polygonal chain)

is drawn by defining two or more points. Each mouse click sets a
further vertex. The polyline is ended by clicking the same point
twice.
The properties of the polyline can be defined in the Drawing Proper-

ties tab in the Properties dialog window:

Figure 7/10: Properties dialog window for a polyline: Drawing
Properties tab
Position Defines the coordinates of the upper left corner.
Scale Defines the scaling in x or y direction.
Color Sets the color of the polyline.
Fill Area Fills the polyline with the color listed. When the individual lines
overlap, the resulting subareas are alternately shown filled and
transparent, to allow for identifying the line course.
Hatching Determines, that enclosed areas are crosshatched in the selected

style. When the individual lines overlap, the resulting subareas are
alternately shown crosshatched and transparent, to allow for iden-
tifying the line course.

Line Width Defines the line width.
Background Sets the location of the drawing element to the background. This
means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this. In particular
it means that symbols are not covered by filled drawing elements,
for example.
means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this. In particu-
lar it means that symbols are covered by filled drawing elements,
for example.
To change the vertices of a polyline or to set new vertices switch to

the “polyline editing mode” by selecting the Edit Edit Poly Line
menu item or activating the button on the toolbar.
You can move the existing vertices by clicking and dragging. The
mouse pointer changes to when you mouse over an existing
vertex. If the mouse pointer is over a line without a vertex is
displayed and a new vertex is inserted as soon as you click.
7.4.5 Rectangle
A rectangle is drawn by defining two diagonally opposite corner

points.
The rectangle-specific properties can be defined in the Drawing

Properties tab of the Properties dialog window for the rectangle:

Figure 7/11: Properties dialog window for a rectangle: Drawing
Properties tab
Size Defines width and height of the rectangle.
Color Sets the color of the rectangle.
Fill Area Fills the rectangle with the color listed.
Hatching Sets the hatch style of the rectangle.
Background

Sets the location of the drawing element to the background. This
7.4.6 Circle
A circle is drawn by defining a middle point and a radius. You can

draw a circular arc by subsequently entering the beginning and
final angles into the Drawing Properties tab in the Properties dialog
window of the circle.
The circle-specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Proper-

ties tab of the Properties dialog window for the circle:

Figure 7/12: Properties dialog window for a circle: Drawing Proper-
ties tab
Size Defines the radius for the circle. If values for rx and ry are different,
an ellipse is created.
Arc Defines the starting and final angles of a circular arc.
Color Sets the color of the circle.
Fill Area Fills the circle with the color listed.
Hatching Sets the hatch style of the circle.
Fill mode Sets the fill mode of the circle.

7.4.7 Ellipse
An ellipse is drawn by defining a middle point and two radii with

parallel axes. You can draw an ellipse by subsequently entering the
beginning and final angles into the Drawing Properties tab in the
Properties dialog window of the ellipse.
The ellipse-specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Prop-

erties tab of the Properties dialog window for the ellipse:

Figure 7/13: Properties dialog window for an ellipse: Drawing
Properties tab
Size Defines the radii for the ellipse. Using identical values for both rx
and ry will result in a circle.
Arc Defines the starting and final angles of an ellipse.
Color Sets the color of the ellipse.
Fill Area Fills the ellipse with the color listed.
Hatching Sets the hatch style of the ellipse.
Fill mode Sets the fill mode of the ellipse.

7.4.8 Text
A text is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer by clicking.

The dialog window Properties for entering the text and setting the
attributes then opens.
7.4.9 Image
An image is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer by click-

ing. The dialog window for selecting an existing image file then
opens.
Large background images can massively decrease the processing

speed as the screen has to be re-drawn whenever symbols are
moved or edited.
The image-specific properties can be defined in the Drawing Prop-

erties and Picture tabs of the Properties dialog window for the
image:

Figure 7/14: Properties dialog window for an image: Drawing
Properties tab

Figure 7/15: Properties dialog window for an image: Picture tab
File Defines the image file for the image.
External Link When this option is active FluidSIM only saves a link to the image
file. However if this option is deactivated then the image is embed-
ded in the circuit diagram. This is the preferable variant if you wish
to pass on or archive the circuit diagram.
7.5 Check drawing
You can use Check Drawing in the Page menu to have FluidSIM
check your drawing for possible drawing errors. FluidSIM displays
the following messages where necessary:
— Duplicated identification labels
— Unresolved link targets
— Superimposed objects

— Lines through connectors
— Open connectors
— Duplicated cross-reference labels
— Superimposed lines
— Cyclic object references
— Objects outside the drawing area
— Missing translations
— Ambiguous terminal strip references
— Unassigned cables
— Unassigned terminals
— Duplicated terminal references
— Two digital outputs are connected to each other.
— Digital loop detected.
— Connection errors found in the GRAFCET diagram.
If messages are displayed then the corresponding objects are

selected after confirmation in the dialog window.

Simulating with FluidSIM
Chapter 8
8. Simulating with FluidSI M
8.1 Simulation of existing circuits
FluidSIM comes supplied with a series of functional circuits. These

include circuits used in training material, which are discussed in
more detail in the various basic and advanced level workbooks
from Festo Didactic SE.
You can find these sample circuits under Circuits for exercises
(TP)... in the Didactics menu. The names of the folders match
those of the corresponding workbooks from Festo Didactic SE. The
sample circuits can be edited and simulated as desired. However,
bear in mind that your modifications may alter the function of the
circuit and consequently also the training material. We therefore
recommend saving any modified sample circuits under a different
name or in their own folder.
→ Open the circuit demo1 and start the simulation via Execute
Start or using the symbol .
FluidSIM switches to Simulation Mode and starts the simulation of

the circuit. In Simulation Mode, the mouse pointer changes into the
hand symbol .
At the start of the simulation, FluidSIM first creates a physical

model of the entire system. Construction of the model is usually a
complex operation, which can take several seconds depending on
the complexity of the circuit and the speed of the computer. Con-
tinuous calculation of the model using mathematical methods then
follows. It cannot always be guaranteed that the subsequent dy-
namic simulation will take place in real time. The percentage of real
time achieved is displayed by FluidSIM in the status bar at the
lower edge of the screen.
The line animation display during the simulation can be customized

in Options... .

The exact numerical values for the pressures, flow rates, voltages,
and currents are displayed on the connected measuring devices.
Section "Displaying quantity values" describes how you can dis-
play the numerical values for all or some quantity values in the
circuit even without measuring devices.
The simulation is based on physical models which were calibrated

with the pneumatic, hydraulic, and electric components in the Festo
Didactic SE equipment sets. The calculated values should therefore
closely match the values recorded by your measurements. When
comparing the two, please bear in mind that in practice, measure-
ments can be subject to large fluctuations. The reasons for differ-
ences range from component tolerances and tube length, to air and
oil temperatures.
The calculation of the quantity values also forms the basis for the
exact, real-time-proportional animation of the cylinders.
Real-time-proportional guarantees the following property: If in

reality a cylinder moves twice as fast as another one, for example,
that will also occur in the animation. In other words, the real-time
ratio is retained in the simulation.
Manually operated valves and switches can be switched by clicking

them with the mouse:
→ Move the mouse pointer onto the left-hand switch.
The mouse pointer changes into a hand with pointing finger

indicating that the switch beneath can be flipped.
→ Click the switch.
When you click a manually operated switch, its real behavior is

simulated. In our example, the clicked switch is closed and recalcu-
lation begins automatically. Following the calculation, the new
pressure and flow values are displayed and the cylinders move into
their initial positions.
The switching of components is only possible while a simulation is

running ( ) or when a simulation is paused ( ).

If you wish to simulate another circuit, you do not need to close the
currently loaded circuit. FluidSIM allows you to have multiple
circuits open at the same time and to simulate them either sepa-
rately from one another or as a total system within one project.
→ Click or Execute Stop to switch the currently active

circuit from Simulation Mode to Edit Mode.
When you switch from Simulation Mode to Edit Mode, the non-
adjustable components are automatically reset to their “normal”
state. In other words, the switches are set to their initial position,
the valves switch to their normal position, the cylinder pistons are
set to the position previously set for them, and all calculated quan-
tity values are deleted. Components used to adjust or harmonize
the system on the other hand, such as flow control valves, pres-
sure-reducing valves or potentiometers, retain the values set by the
user during the simulation.
By clicking (alternatively: Execute Pause ) you can switch

from Edit Mode to Simulation Mode without starting the simulation.
This is useful if you want to switch any components before starting
a simulation (e.g. to simulate a protection circuit where two switch-
es need to be pressed at the same time).
8.2 The different simulation modes
In addition to the functions for simulating circuits as presented in

the previous section ( , , ) there are also the following sup-
plementary functions:
Simulation reset and restart
Simulation in single step mode
Simulation up to a state change

8.2.1 Reset and restart of the simulation
With or Execute Reset , a running or paused simulation of a

circuit is reset and the circuit is returned to its initial state. The
simulation is then restarted immediately.
8.2.2 Single step mode
In single step mode, the simulation will stop after a small step.
More exactly, clicking or Execute Single Step starts the
simulation for a short period of time (about 0.01-0.1 seconds of
simulation time in the real system) before switching back into
pause mode ( ).
You can switch into single step mode directly from an actively
running simulation. This makes it easy to focus on key moments in
the simulation.
8.2.3 Simulation to a state change
Clicking or Execute Simulate until State Change causes the

simulation to start and run until a state change happens; the simu-
lation then pauses ( ). A state change happens when one of the
following takes place:
1. A cylinder piston moves against a stop
2. A valve switches over or is actuated
3. A relay switches over
4. A switch is actuated

You can switch into state change mode directly from an actively
running simulation.
8.3 Simulating circuits you create yourself
This section assumes that you are already familiar with the basic
concepts involved in creating circuits. If necessary, read the section
Create a new circuit drawing" first.
Circuit diagrams can be created and modified in Edit Mode only.

You can identify Edit Mode by the mouse arrow pointer .
8.3.1 Example with a pneumatic circuit
→ Create the circuit shown in the figure.

Figure 8/1: Simple pneumatic circuit
To define the valve’s actuation type, double click the valve. The
valve’s property dialog opens.
→ Go to the “Configure Valve” tab. Then, in the top drop-down

list on the left side, select a manual actuation with detenting.
On the right side, click the “Spring-returned” field.
If required, you can also set the standard nominal flow rate of the
valve.
Close the dialog box with OK . As port “3” on the valve is only
needed as an air outlet, set a silencer there.
→ Double click the port.

A dialog box opens where you can select a Terminator by clicking
the downward-pointing arrow to the right of the list and selecting
the blanking plug or a silencer symbol.
→ Select the third symbol (the simple silencer) and close the
dialog box.
The valve should now look like this:
Figure 8/2: Manually operated 3/2-way valve
Now try to simulate this circuit.
→ Start the simulation with (or with Execute Start or with

F9 ).
→ Move the mouse pointer onto the valve and click the valve with
the pointing finger .

Figure 8/3: Simulated circuit
Once the cylinder has advanced, the pressure in the cylinder supply
line must inevitably increase. This situation is detected by FluidSIM
and the parameters are recalculated; the pressure at the com-
pressed air supply increases to the set operating pressure.
→ Click the valve to make the cylinder retract.
In complex circuits, or for the transmission of high switching forces,

valves may also be activated indirectly. In the following we will
replace the direct manual activation of the valve with indirect
pneumatic activation.
→ Activate Edit Mode with (or with Execute Stop or with

F5 ).

→ Select and delete the line that connects the cylinder and the
valve.
→ Drag another 3/n-way valve onto the drawing area and open
the valve configuration dialog box by double clicking (or by
Edit Properties... ). “Construct” a pneumatic valve (normally
closed), close the dialog box, put a silencer on port “3” again,
and arrange the components as follows:
Figure 8/4: Circuit with unconnected components
→ Connect the new valve’s outlet port to the cylinder.
→ Draw a line from the outlet port of the manually operated valve
to the control port of the pneumatic valve.
→ If necessary, drag the line segments until the drawing is ar-

ranged clearly.

The circuit should now look something like this:
Figure 8/5: Circuit with indirect activation
→ Save this circuit with (or with File Save File ). FluidSIM
automatically opens the file selection box if the file did not al-
ready exist; you can enter a file name in that box.
→ Start the simulation with and click the manually operated

valve.
When you click a valve, the real behavior of the valve is simulated.
In our example, the clicked valve is switched over and recalculation
begins automatically. As a result, the indirectly activated pneumatic
valve is switched and the cylinder advances.
FluidSIM not only animates the switching of manually actuated

components, but nearly all components which have multiple states.

The following figure shows a 3/2-way valve in closed position and
in open position:
Figure 8/6: Closed and open 3/2-way valve
When non-detenting components are clicked, they remain actuated

as long as the mouse button is held down.
→ Stop the simulation and switch to Edit Mode. Select the state
diagram from the component library and move it into the circuit
window.
The state diagram records the quantity values for the most im-
portant components and displays them in graph form.
→ Move the state diagram to a free space in the circuit drawing

and drag and drop the cylinder onto the diagram.
A dialog box opens where you can select the quantity values you
are interested in. In this instance, only the position is of interest, so
you can remove the check marks for the other values (velocity,
acceleration).
→ Start the simulation and observe the diagram.

Figure 8/7: Circuit with state diagram for the cylinder
→ Set the simulation to “ Pause ” and move the mouse pointer

onto the curve on the diagram.
If the mouse pointer rests on the diagram for a second, a box ap-
pears showing the exact values for time and the relevant quantity
value. If you move the mouse along the curve, the display alters
accordingly, updating the values as the mouse pointer moves.

Figure 8/8: Display of the exact values in the state diagram
You can use multiple state diagrams in one window, and can also
display multiple components in the same diagram. You can add a
component to a state diagram by dragging it onto the diagram. A
dialog will open, where you can select the quantity values to be
logged and can assign different colors to them. Dragging onto the
diagram again opens the dialog box again, allowing you to change
your selection. If no quantity value is assigned to a component, it is
not displayed in the diagram.
This concludes the example. Further editing and simulation con-

cepts are described in the next section.
8.3.2 Example with a hydraulic circuit

Figure 8/9: Simple hydraulic circuit
To define the valve’s actuation type, double click the valve. valve’s
property dialog opens.
→ Go to the “Configure Valve” tab. Then, in the top drop-down

list on the left side, select a manual actuation and the valve
bodies “Crosswise” and “Parallel”. Then on the right side, click
the “Spring-returned” field.
If required, you can also set the hydraulic resistance of the valve.
Close the dialog box with OK .
The valve should now look like this:

Figure 8/10: Manually operated 4/2-way valve

F9 ).
Then all pressures and flow rates are calculated, the lines are
colored, and the cylinder advances:

Once the cylinder has advanced, the pressure in the cylinder supply
line should increase. This situation is detected by FluidSIM and the
parameters are recalculated; the pressure on the pump side in-
creases to the value predefined by the limit protection in the pump
unit.
To limit the pressure to a lower value, you have to safeguard the

pump unit with a pressure relief valve.
→ Activate Edit Mode with (or with Execute Stop or with

F5 ).

→ Drag a pressure relief valve and a second tank onto the draw-
ing area.
→ If necessary, drag the line segments until the drawing is ar-

ranged clearly.
The circuit should now look something like this:
Figure 8/12: Circuit with pressure relief valve
→ Save this circuit with (or with File Save File ). FluidSIM
automatically opens the file selection box if the file did not al-
ready exist; you can enter a file name here.
→ Start the simulation with .

The cylinder advances. Once it reaches its stop, a new situation is
created. This situation is detected by FluidSIM and the parameters
are recalculated; the pressure relief valve opens, and the resulting
distribution of pressure is shown:
Figure 8/13: Circuit with open pressure relief valve
FluidSIM not only animates the switching of manually actuated

components, but nearly all components which have multiple states.
The following figure shows a pressure relief valve in closed position

and in open position:

Figure 8/14: Closed and open pressure relief valve
Remember that manually operated valves and switches can be

switched during Simulation Mode by clicking them with the mouse:
→ Move the mouse pointer onto the left-hand side of the direc-
tional control valve.
The mouse pointer changes into a hand with pointing finger

indicating that the valve can be switched over.
→ Click the left-hand side of the valve and hold down the mouse
button.
When you click a valve with the mouse, the real behavior of the
valve is simulated. In our example, the clicked valve is switched
over and recalculation begins automatically. As a result, the pres-
sure relief valve closes and the cylinder retracts. As soon as the
cylinder reaches its left-hand stop, the pressure relief valve opens
again.
When non-detenting components are clicked, they remain actuated

as long as the mouse button is held down.
window.

and drag and drop the cylinder onto the diagram.
are interested in. In this instance, only the position is of interest, so

you can remove the check marks for the other values (velocity,
acceleration).
→ Start the simulation and observe the diagram.
Figure 8/15: Circuit with state diagram for the cylinder

If the mouse pointer rests on the diagram for a second, a box ap-
pears showing the exact values for time and the relevant quantity
value. If you move the mouse along the curve, the display alters
accordingly, updating the values as the mouse pointer moves.


8.3.3 Example with an electronic circuit

Figure 8/17: Simple electronic circuit

F9 ).
Then all voltages and currents are calculated, and the potential
from the positive terminal of the electrical power source to the
pushbutton is colored.
→ Click the pushbutton and hold down the mouse button.
The current now flows through the pushbutton to the ground via
the ammeter and the light:

The values for current and voltage can be read on the measuring
devices. So far, the circuit is a purely electric circuit, strictly speak-
ing. Now let’s add an electronic component: the diode.
→ Stop the simulation and switch to Edit Mode. Modify the circuit
as shown in the figure and start the simulation.
Ensure that the diode is installed as shown. When you actuate the
pushbutton, you will see that the potential only reaches as far as
the diode:

Figure 8/19: Diode installed in reverse direction
→ Remove the diode and install it the other way around.
In this case rotating or mirroring the diode is not enough because

while that would turn the component around, it would not change
the line connections. That means that the lines would run through
the component and the drawing would look correct.
FluidSIM detects drawing errors of this kind, highlights the critical

sections, and issues a warning:

Figure 8/20: Warning of error in line layout
Once the diode is installed correctly, the current will flow through
the diode and the light will light up:

Figure 8/21: Diode installed in forward direction
In practice it is important in electronics to pay attention to the exact

currents and voltages. Electronic components are very sensitive
and can be destroyed quickly if subjected to excessive loads.
Next, the pushbutton will be replaced by a potentiometer.
→ Stop the simulation and switch to Edit Mode. Modify the circuit
as shown.

Figure 8/22: Simple circuit with a potentiometer
The potentiometer allows the resistance to be modified using a

rotating or sliding controller. In FluidSIM you can click the potenti-
ometer during the simulation and modify the resistance value as
with a real potentiometer.
→ Start the simulation and display the amperages using View

Quantity Values... . Alternatively, you can also press the I key
repeatedly. Now click the potentiometer and watch how the
current flow changes.
window.

and drag and drop the ammeter onto the diagram.
are interested in. In this instance, only the amperage is of interest.

→ Start the simulation, vary the resistance value of the potenti-
ometer, and observe the diagram.
Figure 8/23: Circuit with state diagram for the ammeter

If you move the mouse along the curve, the display alters accord-
ingly, updating the values as the mouse pointer moves. If you move

the mouse along the curve, the display alters accordingly, updating
the values as the mouse pointer moves.


Advanced concepts in simulating and creating circuits
Chapter 9
9. Advanced concepts in simulating and creating circuits
This section describes advanced concepts and functions for simula-

tion and circuit creation in FluidSIM.
9.1 Adjusting the component parameters
Most of the symbols in FluidSIM’s component library are basic

symbols representing various different versions of a component.
You can use the properties dialog box to customize the compo-
nent’s parameters, size, characteristic curves etc..
In Expert Mode there are sometimes many more parameters

available, depending on the component. These allow you to modify,
for example, spring forces, friction, or effective area. These parame-
ters are hidden in the standard mode. To avoid having to switch
Expert Mode on and off continuously, you can use the “Show all
settings” option to temporarily display all parameters or to hide the
advanced settings.
→ Drag a one-way flow control valve (throttle check valve) onto

the drawing area and open the properties dialog box by double
clicking.
You can access the adjustable parameters on the “Component

Parameters” tab.

Figure 9/1: Adjustable parameters of the one-way flow control
valve
Show designation Shows the designations of the parameters displayed using the
Display option.
Show variable Shows the variables of the parameters displayed using the Display
option.
Show Unit Shows the units of measurement of the parameters displayed using
the Display option.

Display Check this box if you want that parameter to be displayed in the
circuit.
Variable Clicking this button takes you to a dialog box with assignment
options for accessing the parameter in GRAFCETs or for controlling
it with a game controller.
→ In the Opening level row, click the button for variable assign-
ment.

Figure 9/2: Variable and controller assignment of a parameter
Predefined variable This is the standard, complete variable name. It is made up of the
identification entered by you and the internal parameter name. You
can use this variable name to access the parameter in GRAFCETs in
order to query it or modify its value.
User-defined alias If you do not like the predefined variable name, you can enter your
own name for it here. Note that this alias has to be unique across
the entire page or project. FluidSIM issues a warning if an alias
name is entered twice.

Controller assignment As described in the "Adjusting component parameters during the
simulation" section, many component parameters can be altered
with the mouse during the simulation. FluidSIM also offers the
option of controlling parameters via connected game controllers
(e.g. Microsoft Xbox controller). This is especially practical when
you need to modify several parameters at the same time during a
simulation.
Axis Here you can define which axis you want to use to control the
parameter during the simulation. To assign an axis, simply click in
the field and briefly actuate the desired controller axis. FluidSIM
then enters the desired axis.
Dead-zone This value determines how much movement of the controller axis is
required to trigger a signal. This prevents unintended modification
of values from very small movements of the fingers.
Range Sometimes you may wish to use the game controller to control only
a certain range. This can be necessary above all because the con-
trol levers on most controllers spring back to their zero position
automatically as soon as they are released. Using the mouse to-
gether with the straight line on the graph, you can interactively
determine how the controller position relates to the parameter.
Controller assignment is not available for the simulation variables

calculated by FluidSIM (piston positions, velocities, pressures, flow
rates, etc.) because these variables only permit read access. Simi-
larly, these variables cannot be assigned in GRAFCETs. FluidSIM
displays a warning if an attempt is made to modify a simulation
variable.
Simulation variables therefore have only the option of variable

assignment.

Figure 9/3: Variable assignment of a simulation parameter
9.2 Special settings for cylinders
To adapt a cylinder, drag a representative cylinder into the circuit

and open the properties dialog box. It contains settings that you
can use to determine the appearance and function of the compo-
nent. See section "Configure cylinders" for the basic functions for
configuring the cylinder properties.
9.2.1 Cylinder friction and cylinder mass
If the options “Show all settings” and “Enter manually” are select-
ed, you can specify parameters defining a velocity-dependent
characteristic curve and the mass moved by the cylinder. If you
select “Calculate automatically”, an heuristic is applied which
calculates the settings on the basis of the cylinder dimensions.
Clicking an input field in the “Cylinder friction” section activates a

“...” button that can be used to open a dialog box containing a
graph displaying the cylinder friction as a function of the cylinder
velocity.

Figure 9/4: Friction curve of a pneumatic cylinder
9.2.2 External load and friction

Figure 9/5: External load on the cylinder
Moving mass Enter here the mass of the load that you want the cylinder to move.
The mass of the cylinder piston and piston rod is calculated auto-
matically by FluidSIM from the entered cylinder dimensions, so the
mass entered here refers only to the external load. In particular, an
entry of “0” does not mean that the moving parts in the cylinder
have no mass.
Friction The static friction and sliding friction define the friction of the
moving load on a surface. The internal friction in the cylinder is
calculated automatically by FluidSIM from the entered cylinder

dimensions. If the load is lifted or pulled without coming into con-
tact with a surface, enter “0” for both values. In practice it is very
difficult to arrive at reliable values for friction. FluidSIM therefore
offers set friction coefficients for some combinations of materials,
to provide a rough guide. If you compare other tables of friction
values, you will notice that the specifications (usually measured in
experiments) vary greatly from table to table. You should therefore
be cautious when interpreting the results of simulations influenced
by friction. Nonetheless, varying the friction values does allow you
to see clearly the physical effects of static and sliding friction. Note
also that the mounting angle influences the friction force from the
moved load. You can adjust the mounting angle on the “ Component
Parameters” tab.

9.2.3 Force profile
Figure 9/6: Force profile of the cylinder
Constant force If you want a constant force to be applied over the entire range of
cylinder movement, select this option and enter a force.
Apply force profile Select this option if you want the force to change depending on the
cylinder’s position. By clicking the mouse in the graph field, you
can interactively set reference points which will be interpolated to

form a line. Alternatively, you can select an existing reference point
and numerically enter the two values in the input fields for the
piston position and the corresponding force.
You can use the sliders to adjust the displayed value ranges for
position and force. As the force on the y-axis covers an especially
wide numerical range, it is advisable to start by restricting that
interval so that the shape of the curve can be seen clearly.
Retraction = Extraction Select this option if you want to apply the same force profile for
advancing and retraction. Otherwise, remove the checkmark and
enter separate force profiles on the tabs “Extraction” and “Retrac-
tion”.

9.2.4 Actuating labels
Figure 9/7: Actuating labels on the cylinder
Here you can create new actuating labels or modify existing ones.
This dialog box is identical to the one that opens when you double
click an distance rule.

Displacement encoder In addition to the actuating labels you can also enter a special label
for a continuous displacement encoder or select from the list of
counterparts already present in the project.
9.3 Special settings for directional control valves
To adapt a directional control valve, drag a representative cylinder

into the circuit and open the properties dialog box. It contains
settings that you can use to determine the appearance and function
of the component. See section "Configure a way valve" for the
basic functions for configuring the valve properties.
9.3.1 Hydraulic resistance
For hydraulic valves, you can adjust the hydraulic resistance. In

practice the hydraulic resistance is often given by a curve or a pair
of values (pressure drop/flow rate). In the field “ Hydraulic re-
sistance” you can either enter a specific value or alternatively click
the “...” button. That takes you to a dialog box where you can
define the parabola either by interactively clicking in the graph field
or by entering a pair of values.

Figure 9/8: Hydraulic resistance curve
Starting in Version 5 of FluidSIM, it is possible to define fluid prop-

erties (e.g. density and viscosity) for a circuit or a project. For
compatibility reasons an oil of type HLP 22 is used as a base for
calculations when defining the hydraulic resistance. If another fluid
is defined in “Fluid type”, the hydraulic resistance is internally
converted based on this medium.
9.4 Additional simulation functions
This section describes additional functions for the simulation of

circuit diagrams.

9.4.1 Simultaneous actuation of several components
So that you can actuate multiple pushbuttons or spring-returned

valves at the same time, you can put them in a permanently actuat-
ed state. You can permanently actuate a pushbutton (or valve with
manual actuation) by clicking it with the mouse while pressing the
Shift key. You can release this permanent actuation by clicking
once on the component.
Sometimes it may be necessary for multiple actuated objects to be

released at the same time. In that case, when clicking the object,
hold down the Ctrl key instead of the Shift key. The switched
components then remain in the actuated state until you release the
Ctrl key again, at which time all the objects actuated in this way
return to their initial position simultaneously.
For more complex switching operations or continuous adjustments,

we recommend using a game controller. For more details, see
"Adjusting the component parameters".
9.4.2 Simulation of individual pages and entire projects
In FluidSIM it is possible for multiple circuits to be open at the same

time. Circuits whose pages belong to a project are simulated as an
entire system. This is practical if, for example, you want to create
the hydraulic or pneumatic part and the electrical part on separate
pages. You can also divide large drawings across multiple pages
and define the line connections using interruption points. When a
circuit belonging to a project is simulated, all the other pages of the
project switch into Simulation Mode as well when the simulation is
started. While the simulation is running, it is therefore not possible
to edit any pages belonging to the open project.
In contrast, if pages that do not belong to the project are edited or

simulated, the editing or simulation always applies only to the

currently active circuit window. In such cases, it is therefore possi-
ble to simulate one circuit while editing another.
9.5 Displaying quantity values
The numerical values for all or some quantity values in a circuit can
be displayed even without measuring devices.
→ In the View menu, click Quantity Values... to open the

dialog box for the display of quantity values:

Figure 9/9: Dialog box for adjusting the quantity values display
Here you can define how every quantity value listed (“Velocity”,
“Pressure”, etc.) will be displayed.
For the display of pressure values, flow rates, and forces, you can
choose between different units of measurement. These settings
take effect when quantity values are displayed at connectors and
components and on state diagrams.
None Do not display any values for this quantity value.
Individual Display values only at connection points previously selected by the

user.

All Display all values for this quantity value.
Display measurement units Activate this option if you also want the unit of measurement to be
displayed for the quantity values.
You can use the key in the “Shortcut” column to switch between
the display types “ None ”, “ Individual ” and “ All ” for that
particular quantity value without having to open the dialog box.
Proceed as follows to select connection points for the display of

individual quantity values:
→ Open a circuit.
→ In Edit Mode, double click a component connector, or select

the menu item Edit Properties... .
The dialog box for the connector’s settings then opens. In the
“Display quantity values” field, you can choose which quantity
values are to be displayed at that connector when the “ Individual
” option is activated for that parameter in the dialog box for quanti-
ty values display.
9.5.1 Display of direction of quantity values in FluidSIM
Vectorial quantity values are characterized by their quantity and

their direction. In circuit diagrams, the direction is displayed at the
component connectors by a mathematical sign (“+” = into a com-
ponent, “–” = out of a component). If the amount of the quantity
value is close to zero, the exact numerical value is not displayed.
Instead, “> 0” is displayed for a small positive value and “< 0” for a
small negative value.
In the case of fluidic flows, the direction is also indicated by an

arrow in the middle of the line segment. The visual impression is
reinforced by conveyor-belt-style animation of the lines.

9.5.2 Reference arrows
To indicate directions, such as the direction of current and voltage

on measuring instruments, so-called “reference arrows” can be
shown or hidden using the menu option View Show Reference
Arrow . In electrical engineering, the reference arrows always refer
to the technical direction of current.
The arrows indicate the direction from the higher potential to the
lower. If a negative value is displayed on a measuring instrument,
the direction of current is the opposite of the arrow.
Figure 9/10: Reference arrows for a voltmeter and an ammeter
9.6 Virtual measuring instruments
Measuring instruments can be installed in the circuit diagram as

symbols, displaying the corresponding values during the simula-
tion. Just as in reality, the measuring instruments in FluidSIM have
physical characteristics that affect the variables being measured.
For example, an ammeter has an electrical resistance. The value
measured is therefore not exactly the same as the value that would
exist without the measuring instrument installed. In FluidSIM, the
position of the measuring instruments cannot be modified during
the simulation.
Virtual measuring instruments, on the other hand, can be installed

and moved both in Edit Mode and in Simulation Mode. They do not
have a physical model of their own, but instead directly utilize the
simulation values calculated at the connectors of the symbols. As a
consequence, unlike a real measuring instrument, they do not
influence the variable being measured.

Virtual measuring instruments can be inserted into the circuit
diagram via the menu option Diagnosis . Alternatively, you can
use the corresponding symbol in the diagnosis toolbar. To simplify
their use, virtual measuring instruments for the most important
measured variables (voltage, current, pressure, and flow rate) are
provided in both the menu and the toolbar.
9.6.1 Inserting virtual measuring instruments
→ Use the menu Diagnosis or the diagnosis toolbar to select a

virtual measuring instrument and position it by left-clicking on
a free location in the circuit diagram.
Figure 9/11:
Figure 9/12:
You then automatically enter a mode in which you can move the
measuring tip.

Figure 9/13:
When the mouse pointer is moved over a valid measuring position

(connector or line), it switches to a crosshair. If the measuring tip is
dropped onto a line, it will lock onto the nearest connector.
Figure 9/14:
Clicking again drops the measuring tip there and you can then drop
the second measuring tip for the voltage measurement.
Figure 9/15:
The measuring cables are displayed and the measurement can be

carried out during the simulation.
Figure 9/16:
Press the ESC key to cancel the placement of the measuring tips.

A positive value is displayed if the potential (or pressure) is higher
at the red measuring tip than at the black measuring tip, or if the
flow direction is from the red measuring tip to the black one.
9.6.2 Deleting virtual measuring instruments
In Edit Mode, you can delete virtual measuring instruments by

selecting them and then pressing the Del key, or via the menu Edit
Delete , or by right-clicking to access the context menu.
In Simulation Mode, you cannot select symbols by clicking them

with the mouse. Deletion is then only possible via the context
menu.
9.6.3 Measurements of currents and flow rates
In FluidSIM, currents and flow rates are calculated in the connect-

ors of the symbols. Consequently only one measuring tip is re-
quired when measuring currents and flow rates. Nevertheless, two
measuring cables are displayed, as would be used in reality.

Figure 9/17: You drop only one measuring tip
Figure 9/18: Display of two measuring cables
9.6.4 Properties dialog window
At any time, you can use the Properties dialog window of the virtual
measuring instrument to modify the choice of measured variable
and the position of measuring tips. Each specific virtual measuring
instrument corresponds to a universal measuring instrument for
which the measured variable is selected in advance.
The Properties dialog window is adapted dynamically according to

the measuring mode selected. The number of measuring tips re-
quired depends on the measured variable. For example, only one
measuring tip is required for a pressure measurement, but two for a
voltage measurement.

Figure 9/19:
Electrics Restricts the measured variables available for selection according-

ly.
Fluidics Restricts the measured variables available for selection according-

ly.
Display Displays the description of the variable measured in the virtual

measuring instrument.
Show variable Displays a symbol in the virtual measuring instrument that corre-
sponds to the measured variable selected, e.g. “U” for voltage.
Show Unit Displays the unit of the selected measured variable in the virtual
measuring instrument.
Set measuring tip By pressing this button you can set the corresponding measuring
tip again. Which measuring tips are available depends on the
measured variable selected.
Delete measuring tip

Pressing this button deletes the corresponding measuring tip.
Which measuring tips are available depends on the measured
variable selected.
Reverse measurement direc- The measurement direction depends on the order in which the
tion measuring tips were set. In the case of measured variables that
require only one measuring tip in FluidSIM (such as current), the
measurement direction selected automatically may not be the
direction desired. You can use this button to swap the measuring
cables afterward, thus reversing the measurement direction.
9.6.5 Setting measuring tips again and deleting them
In both Edit Mode and Simulation Mode, you can use the Properties
dialog window to set the measuring tips of virtual measuring in-
struments again or move them. In Edit Mode, you can open the
dialog window by double-clicking or via the menu Edit Proper-
ties... .
In the Simulation Mode, a single click will open the dialog window,
and you can also move the measuring tips directly by drag and
drop, without going through the dialog window.
9.7 Displaying state diagrams
portant components and displays them in graph form. Quantity
values or output variables all those values calculated by FluidSIM
during the simulation or set by the user, such as: position, velocity,
acceleration, force, switching position, pressure, flow rate, opening
level, revolutions/rpm, voltage, current, digital state, etc.

selection dialog box will open, where you can select the quantity
values to be logged and can assign different colors to them. Drag-
ging onto the diagram again opens the dialog box again, allowing
you to change your selection.
→ In Edit Mode, double click a state diagram, or select the menu

item Edit Properties... .
The following dialog box will open:
Figure 9/20: Dialog box for the state diagram
Display interval Here you can enter the start and end times of the interval during
which you want the quantity values to be logged. You do not nec-
essarily need to know before starting the simulation the times at
which the important events will occur; you can always change the
display interval as desired after the simulation because FluidSIM
always logs all values internally for the entire simulation period. If
you select the “Adjust automatically” field, the entered limits are
ignored and the time axis is scaled so that the entire simulation
time is displayed. Activate the “Scroll automatically” field if you

want the diagram to display the last n seconds. In this case, the
time axis will be displaced toward the left-hand side once the
simulation period exceeds the defined time window. In the input
field, you can specify the number of seconds to be displayed in the
time window.
Diagram columns Here you can select which columns you want to be displayed at the
left-hand side of the diagram. You can choose the columns “De-
scription”, “Identification”, and “Quantity value” in any combina-
tion.
Log file If you wish, FluidSIM can create a log file of the quantity values.
Activate this option by entering the full path for the file in the input
field and select a suitable time increment. Please note that entering
very small increments may result in a very large volume of data.
You may need to reduce the simulation time or increase the time
increment.
Color Defines the color of the diagram.
Fill Area Defines whether the entire area is filled with the chosen color or
just the border of the diagram.
Layer In this drop-down list, you define the Layer of the diagram. You can
set the Layer by clicking the downward-pointing arrow to the right
of the list and selecting a layer. Depending on the setting for draw-
ing layers, the diagram might not be displayed or might not be able
to be edited. In order to see the object or change its settings, you
have to temporarily activate the drawing layers with menu item
View Drawing Layers... .
Quantity values This list contains all the quantity values displayed in the diagram.
Every component is listed together with its identification, and all its
output variables are listed below it. Every variable can be selected
and deselected with a checkmark. Once you have marked a varia-
ble, you can use the buttons at lower right to define the color, line
style, and line thickness for it. You can use Add to select the
components you want. Delete deletes the marked component
together with its quantity values, and Find Target... takes you to
the relevant component in the circuit.

9.8 Coupling hydraulics, pneumatics, electrics and mechanics
All three available technology versions, FluidSIM-P, FluidSIM-H and

FluidSIM-E, allow you to create basic electrical circuits. In the
pneumatics and hydraulics versions, they are used primarily to
control the fluidic components. Because these simple electrical
components are simulated completely with full physical accuracy,
just as much as the electronic components are, they can be used
and interchanged across all FluidSIM versions and can be combined
with the electronic components in FluidSIM-E.
The following figure shows a small example:
Figure 9/21: Simple electrical circuit
→ Create this circuit on your computer.
→ Start the simulation and observe that the indicator light lights
up.
There are electrical components that link electrical circuits with

pneumatic or hydraulic circuits. These include switches that are

operated pneumatically or hydraulically, and solenoids for the
control of valves.
As the electrical circuit is drawn separately from the fluidic circuit,

you need a way of creating a definite link between electrical com-
ponents (e.g. a valve solenoid) and fluidic components (e.g. a
certain valve position). One way of doing this is with so-called
labels.
A label has a specific name and can be assigned to a component. If

two components have labels with the same name, they are con-
nected even if there is no visible line drawn between them.
You can enter the name for a label in a dialog box which you open
either by double clicking the component or by selecting the compo-
nent and clicking Edit Properties... . With electrically operated
valves (solenoid actuated), the labels are entered on the left and
the right by double clicking the appropriate “connector”, as op-
posed to clicking in the middle of the component.
The following example illustrates how labels are used in FluidSIM.
→ Activate Edit Mode with or with Execute Stop .
→ Expand the circuit as shown in the following figure:

Figure 9/22: Simple electro-pneumatic circuit
So that the valve can be controlled by the solenoid, these compo-

nents need to be linked using labels.
→ Double click the valve solenoid or select the solenoid and click
Edit Properties... .
The following dialog box appears:

Figure 9/23: Dialog box for the valve solenoid
Identification This text field is for entering a label name. A label name can be up
to 32 characters long and can contain numerals and special charac-
ters as well as letters.
→ Enter a name (e.g. “Y1”) for this label.
→ Double click the outside of the solenoid on the valve to open

the dialog box for the label name.
→ Enter the same label name there as for the solenoid (“Y1”).
The solenoid is now connected to the valve.
In reality, the valve solenoid would not be activated directly via the
switch but via an intermediate relay. This is left out here for the
sake of simplicity.
→ Start the simulation.
The electrical current and the pressure and flow distribution are
calculated, and the resulting pressures are shown in color.
If you want to view the exact values for the quantity values, you can
activate them in the dialog box accessible via View Quantity
Values... . The activated quantity values are shown at the compo-

nent connection points. For more detailed information about this,
see "Displaying quantity values".
→ Operate the electrical switch.
The valve then switches over and the cylinder advances:
Figure 9/24: Simulation of the electro-pneumatic circuit
In addition to manual actuation or electrical control, some valves

can also be switched over mechanically by the piston rod of a
cylinder or by a permanent magnet on the piston. Mechanical
linkages like this are created in the same way as those with electri-
cal components: The connection is established by applying a label
to the cylinder’s distance rule and another to the mechanical “con-
nector” on the valve.
→ Drag a configurable valve into a circuit window and specify a

mechanical actuation (e.g. the stem).

Figure 9/25: Valve with mechanical actuation
→ Double click the end of the stem.
A dialog box will open in which you can enter a label. If you enter
the same label on the cylinder’s distance rule, the valve will be
actuated mechanically when the cylinder’s piston rod reaches the
specified position.
A special instance of this type of linkage is the connection of a

cylinder to a displacement encoder. You can use such connections
to construct closed-loop control systems in combination with
proportional valves, for example. Further information about propor-
tional control systems can be found in section "Open-loop and
closed-loop control by using continuous valves".
→ Double click a cylinder.
A dialog box will open in which you can adjust the cylinder’s prop-
erties. Go to the “Actuating labels” tab.

Figure 9/26: Cylinder configuration dialog box
→ Enter a label under “Displacement encoder”.
→ Add the displacement encoder from the component library to

the circuit and double click to open the properties dialog box.
Enter the same label there as you entered for the cylinder.

Figure 9/27: Linking the displacement encoder to the cylinder
The displacement encoder returns a voltage at its output which is

proportional to the piston position of the linked cylinder. When the
cylinder is fully retracted, this voltage will be the set minimum;
when the cylinder is fully advanced, it will be set maximum.
9.8.1 Display styles for labels
As with component designations, it is often desirable to surround

labels with a rectangular frame. You can select this in the basic
settings for fluidic and electrical labels in the Options... menu.
However, you can also set the frame for specific texts to be differ-
ent from the standard frame. To do so, double click the specific
text:

Figure 9/28: Dialog box for setting the text frame
Under Text Attributes you can set the option Frame Text.
FluidSIM automatically positions the labels so that they appear at

an appropriate position near the component or connector. Howev-
er, you can also move the labels using the mouse or the keyboard.
To do so, click the label and drag it to the desired position. To
modify the position with the keyboard, select the label (or the
associated connector) and move the label using the cursor keys.
If you have inadvertently moved a label text so far that you cannot
tell which component it belongs to, you can double click the label
to open the properties dialog box and then activate the associated
component with Find Target... .
9.9 Operating switches
This section describes how switches can be actuated by cylinders,

relays, pressure, or by other switches.

9.9.1 Switches at cylinders
Limit switches, proximity switches, and mechanically actuated

valves can be activated by the piston of the cylinder. To make this
possible, first you have to place a distance rule on the cylinder so
that the switches can be positioned.
→ Drag the cylinder onto the drawing area and open its proper-
ties by double clicking. Go to the “Actuating labels” tab and en-
ter a label along with the start and end positions.
When you close the dialog box, the distance rule will appear auto-
matically above the cylinder. You can move or copy the distance
rule from one cylinder to another. When the distance rule comes
close to a cylinder, it slots automatically into the correct position.
The correct position for a distance rule depends on the cylinder

type. Distance rules can be positioned over the cylinder housing, in
front of the cylinder housing (next to the advanced piston rod) or in
both positions at the same time:
Figure 9/29: Examples of distance rule positions
To modify the labels or positions or to add more, you can either

open the properties for the associated cylinder or enter these
details directly on the distance rule.
→ Double click the distance rule.

Figure 9/30: Dialog box for the distance rule
Label The text fields in the left-hand column are used to enter the label
names of proximity switches or limit switches in the electrical
circuit that you want the cylinder piston to actuate.
Position The text fields in the right-hand columns define the exact start and
end positions of the switches on the cylinder.
→ Enter “Y1” as the label in the first row and enter 35 for both
the start and end positions, and close the dialog box by clicking
“ OK ”.
A dash with the label name will appear immediately at the corre-
sponding position under the distance rule:
Figure 9/31: Cylinder with distance rule
This means that this cylinder will activate the switch or valve la-
beled “Y1” once its piston has moved 35 mm, assuming that the
same label was entered on the switch in the electrical part of the
circuit or on the mechanical “connector” of the valve.

Once the cylinder in the above example passes the 35 mm position,
the switch will drop out again. If you want the actuation to be
maintained over a longer distance, enter the start and end posi-
tions accordingly in the dialog box.
To place labels on electrical switches, double click the component.

Valves with mechanical actuation have a special connector for this
purpose, which may be on the end of the stem or in the center of
the roller, for example. If there is already a label on the component
or connector, you can also double click the label directly and then
click Find Target... to open the corresponding dialog box for
editing the label.
9.9.2 Relays
A relay or solenoid can be used to actuate multiple switches or

contacts simultaneously. It is of course necessary to link the relay
to the relevant switches. Therefore in FluidSIM, relays too have
labels, which can be used to define an association with switches in
the usual way. When you double click a relay, the dialog box for the
label name will open.
The following figure shows an electrical circuit diagram in which a

relay simultaneously actuates two break switches and two make
switches:
Figure 9/32: Relay with linked switches
In addition to the simple relay, there are also relays with switch-on
delay, relays with switch-off delay, and counting relays. They en-
sure that the linked switches are not actuated until a defined time
or number of pulses is reached. With these relays too, double
clicking will open the corresponding dialog boxes for entering the
values.

9.9.3 Coupling mechanical switches
The mechanical linkage of mechanical (manually operated) switch-

es is accomplished in FluidSIM by assigning a label. If multiple
mechanical switches have the same label, actuating one of them
will cause all the identically labeled switches to be actuated with it.
9.9.4 Automatic switch altering
FluidSIM identifies delay switches, limit switches, and pressure

switches by their method of installation and by their labels and
automatically adds the corresponding symbol to the switch in the
electrical circuit: for switch-on delayed, for off-delayed, for
mechanical actuated switches and for pressure switches. In the
case of switches actuated by the cylinder piston, you can choose
how they are displayed in the properties dialog box for the closer,
opener, and changeover:

Figure 9/33: Dialog box for general electrical switches
This means that special symbols do not need to be used for these
switches in FluidSIM. The simple switch symbols can be used
instead:
Figure 9/34: Simple switch symbols
9.10 Adjusting component parameters during the simulation
Most components have parameters that can be adjusted in Edit

Mode. Some of these components have already been discussed in
earlier sections.

You can open the dialog box for adjusting the parameters by dou-
ble clicking or with Edit Properties... .
Several components can be adjusted during the simulation in the

same way as they would be in reality. For example, the operating
pressure of the compressed air supply, the delivery rate of the
pump, the opening level of the throttle valve, or the resistance of
the potentiometer can be altered continuously. To do this, you do
not need to open the properties dialog box and then close it with
OK ; all you need to do is click once on the component to open a
window with sliders. Your changes take effect on the simulation
immediately. As soon as you click another component or an empty
space in the window, the dialog window with the sliders disappears
automatically.
In Simulation Mode, when you move the mouse over a component

that allows such real-time adjustments, the mouse pointer changes
into the slider symbol .
Figure 9/35: Adjusting the opening level during the simulation
For precision adjustment, some sliders allow you to select the

control range. However, you can also enter the numeric value
directly as a number in the input field.
Most parameters can also be controlled using a game controller.

For details, see "Adjusting the component parameters".

9.11 Settings for simulation
In the Options... menu, basic parameters and options for the

simulation can be set under Simulation, Environment parameters,
Fluid properties, and Sound.
Note that these settings are only used if no others are defined in
the page or project properties. Newly created pages and projects
are preset with the standard values set under Options... .
9.12 Use of the EasyPort-hardware
FluidSIM can directly address EasyPorts connected to the serial

ports of the PC. No additional drivers or auxiliary programs are
required. These days, however, serial ports are rare outside indus-
trial environments. To use the EasyPort via a USB cable, you may
require drivers that you will find on the installation DVD and which
you can also download online from Festo Didactic SE.
The EasyPort hardware is linked to the components in FluidSIM via

special electrical input/output components, which each have either
eight digital inputs/outputs or two analog outputs/four analog
inputs.
The EasyPort hardware can also be addressed using DDE and OPC
communication. This allows you to control even remote EasyPort
modules that are not connected locally (e.g. via a network connec-
tion). However, if the EasyPort modules are connected directly to
the simulating PC, it is recommended to set up the direct connec-
tion.
→ Drag a digital input or output component from the component

library into a circuit window and open the properties dialog box
by double clicking or via the menu item Edit Properties... .

Figure 9/36: Dialog box for the EasyPort components
Direct EasyPort connection Here you can set the serial port by which the hardware is connected
to the PC, which EasyPort module and port number is assigned to
the input/output component. If you do not know the exact number
of the serial port, leave the setting as “Automatically”. FluidSIM
then searches all COM ports for connected EasyPorts.
Older EasyPorts are fitted as standard with only a serial port, of the
kind used for many years on PCs and also in industrial applications.
Modern PCs and especially portable computers, however, increas-
ingly do not feature this connection. Nonetheless the serial port
interface can be retrofitted easily using an inexpensive USB-to-
serial converter, allowing the EasyPort to be connected and operat-
ed anyway. The converter’s software does this by setting up a
virtual COM port, which is assigned a number higher than the
physically existing ports (usually COM 5). The hardware can be
addressed in the usual way via this virtual port.
Connector color Defines the color of the connection indicators for the input/output
component when the EasyPort connection is active and when the
connection is not present or is disrupted.

Voltage range With the analog interface components, you can select the voltage
range. This can be either from 0V to 10V or from -10V to 10V.
If FluidSIM does not find any EasyPort hardware at the start of the
simulation, a corresponding warning is issued. You can start the
simulation anyway, but if you do so FluidSIM will not make any
further attempts to find EasyPorts until the simulation is closed and
restarted. If, on the other hand, the connection is terminated while
the simulation is running (e.g. by inadvertently pulling out the
connecting cable), the simulation will continue to run without the
EasyPort link, but FluidSIM will attempt to restore the connection.
As soon as the hardware is once again available at the set port, the
connection is restored and the simulation continues with EasyPort
communication.
9.13 OPC and DDE communication with other applications
FluidSIM is capable of exchanging data with other applications,

allowing it to work together with a PLC, for example. A prerequisite
for this link is that the other application has an “OPC interface” or a
“DDE interface”. The link is established using the same interface
components as for the use of FluidSIM with the EasyPort.
→ Drag an input or output component from the component

library into a circuit window and open the properties dialog box
by double clicking or via the menu item Edit Properties... .

Figure 9/37: Dialog box for the OPC components
→ In the “Connect EasyPort via” list, select the “OPC connection”

option.
OPC server Enter the OPC server here or press the Pick... button and select it
from the list.
Item Enter the data item here or press the Pick... button and select it
from the list.
In order to establish communication via a DDE interface, first en-

sure that the DDE interface is active. You can do this with the global
option under DDE Connection.
→ In the “Connect EasyPort via” list, select the “DDE connection”

option.

Figure 9/38: Dialog box for the DDE components
Server This is the server name that FluidSIM uses when it registers in the
system as a DDE server. As the server name is a global setting, it
cannot be changed directly in this dialog box. Pressing the Global
DDE server name... button takes you to the options dialog box
where you can change the server name for the entire system.
Topic Here, enter the “topic” via which you would like to address the
components.
Label Here, enter the label or the “item” via which you would like to
address the components.
9.14 Open-loop and closed-loop control by using continuous

valves
In addition to simple directional control valves, which only have

discrete switching positions, FluidSIM also offers some continuous

valves. These are characterized by their ability to adopt a continu-
ous range of intermediate positions. Like electrically actuated
directional control valves, these components are controlled via a
proportional amplifier or via a valve solenoid. These valves, howev-
er, are represented by special symbols:
Figure 9/39: Proportional valve solenoid and amplifier
The separate proportional valve solenoid is used for position-

controlled continuous valves where the control and amplifier com-
ponent is built into the valve.
If you inadvertently use a label to link a directional control valve to

a proportional valve solenoid, or a proportional valve to a simple
valve solenoid, FluidSIM issues a warning.
The following two sections provide a brief introduction to the

options for open-loop control and closed-loop control with
FluidSIM.
The term “open-loop control” means that an output variable

changes as a function of an input variable. In this specific case, the
voltage on the proportional valve solenoid or amplifier represents
an input variable. The valve piston of the proportional valve is
shifted in a particular direction to a greater or lesser distance as a
function of the value (and the direction) of the electrical current
caused by that voltage (by means of an amplifier). This piston
displacement is the output variable. If the pressure at the valve
port is constant, the flow rate can be controlled in this way. If, on
the other hand, the flow rate is constant, the pressure drop will
change as a function of the opening level, determined by the valve
position.
The term “closed-loop control” is used when the output variable (or
a quantity value affected by it) is used in turn as the input variable.
It is also quite possible for multiple output variables (and quantity
values dependent on them) to be combined together with addition-

al input variables, using a calculation rule. A classic example is
position control, where a cylinder needs to move to a certain posi-
tion. The valve is activated electrically so that the cylinder moves.
The cylinder’s position (resulting from the movement caused by the
valve setting) is used in turn as an input variable, to determine the
deviation between the cylinder’s position and its setpoint position.
Once the cylinder has reached its target position, the deviation is 0
and the valve returns to its mid-position (closed position). The
cylinder thus comes to a halt. If inertia or external disruption caus-
es the cylinder to move past its target, the valve switches over to
the other side, reversing the flow direction, and the cylinder moves
back. This is the simplest form of closed-loop control, known as “P
control” (proportional control).
9.14.1 Open-loop control in pneumatics
In order to understand how the continuous components function,

please construct the following circuit (power supply, function
generator, voltmeter, proportional valve solenoid, regulating
valve):
Figure 9/40: Simple open-loop control of the regulating valve
Do not forget to fit silencers on the valve’s five pneumatic ports, in

order to prevent warnings from FluidSIM.
→ Start the simulation and observe the regulating valve.
The function generator generates a signal between 0 and 10 volts.

This varying voltage is converted by a proportional amplifier in the

valve into a corresponding current that actuates the proportional
valve solenoid, so that the valve connected to it is shifted to either
side to the maximum extent according to the signal voltage applied.
To switch over the valve to a lesser extent, the valve requires a

lesser maximum voltage. You can set that by opening the proper-
ties dialog box for the function generator, by double clicking.
Figure 9/41: Properties dialog box for the function generator
→ Enter 2 as the “Amplitude”, close the dialog box, and restart

the simulation.
The voltage will now vary between 3 and 7 volts. As a result, the
valve will still shift symmetrically, but with less displacement from
the mid-position.
→ Open the function generator properties again and set 3 as the

y offset.
The function generator now supplies a voltage between 1 and 5

volts, with the valve moving further to the left than to the right.

→ Open the function generator properties again and set “ Con-
stant” as the signal type.
The sliders of the function generator for “Frequency” and “Ampli-

tude” have no function when the signal type is set to “Constant”.
This allows us to use it to simulate a manually adjustable potenti-
ometer.
→ Start the simulation and click the function generator (with a

single click).
A window opens showing the sliders of the function generator.
Figure 9/42: Adjusting the function generator during the simulation
→ Change the y offset very gradually, while observing how the

valve moves as a function of the slider setting.
9.14.2 Open-loop control in hydraulics
In order to understand how the continuous components function,

please construct the following circuit (power supply, function

generator, voltmeter, proportional valve solenoid, regulating
valve):
Figure 9/43: Simple open-loop control of the regulating valve
Do not forget to fit blanking plugs on the valve’s four hydraulic

ports, in order to prevent warnings from FluidSIM.
→ Start the simulation and observe the regulating valve.
The function generator generates a signal between -10 and 10

volts. This varying voltage is converted by a proportional amplifier
in the valve into a corresponding current that actuates the propor-
tional valve solenoid, so that the valve connected to it is shifted to
either side to the maximum extent according to the signal voltage
applied.
To switch over the valve to a lesser extent, the valve requires a

lesser maximum voltage. You can set that by opening the proper-
ties dialog box for the function generator by double clicking.

Figure 9/44: Properties dialog box for the function generator
→ Enter 4 as the “Amplitude”, close the dialog box, and restart

the simulation.
The voltage will now vary between -4 and 4 volts. As a result, the
valve will still shift symmetrically, but with less displacement from
the mid-position.
→ Open the function generator properties again and set 2 as the

y offset.
The function generator now supplies a voltage between -2 and 6

volts, with the valve moving further to the left than to the right.
→ Open the function generator properties again and set “ Con-

stant” as the signal type.
The sliders of the function generator for “Frequency” and “Ampli-

tude” have no function when the signal type is set to “Constant”.
This allows us to use it to simulate a manually adjustable potenti-
ometer.

→ Start the simulation and click the function generator (with a
single click).
A window opens showing the sliders of the function generator.
Figure 9/45: Adjusting the function generator during the simulation
→ Change the y offset very gradually, while observing how the

valve moves as a function of the slider setting.
9.14.3 Closed-loop control in pneumatics
Your task now is to set up a simple system of closed-loop position

control. To do so, modify the circuit as shown in the following
figure. Remember that you need to remove the silencers on the
valve ports before you can drag lines. Instead of the function gen-
erator, it is now the displacement encoder that supplies the input
voltage for the proportional valve solenoid. So you can apply the
label to the cylinder, open its properties dialog box, go to the
“Configure Cylinder” tab and set the “Sensing” option.

Figure 9/46: Simple closed-loop position control
Note that the regulating valve is mirrored horizontally in this exam-

ple.
→ Start the simulation and observe that the cylinder stops once it
has traveled half the distance.
Now we want to expand the circuit so that the cylinder can move to
any position we set on a slider during the simulation, as quickly as
possible but still accurately. This is done using a PID controller.
→ Construct the following circuit and set the parameter values for
the PID controller as shown.
Note that the regulating valve is mirrored from its position in the
example above.

Figure 9/47: Position control with PID controller
→ Start the simulation and slowly move the y offset of the func-
tion generator between 0 and 10.
The cylinder moves until it reaches its setpoint position, where it

stops. The cylinder’s target position is proportional to the voltage
set on the function generator, with 0 V equating to “fully retracted”
and 10 V meaning “fully advanced.” The value 5 thus represents

the cylinder piston’s mid-position. It does not matter what position
the cylinder starts from; it will always stop at the specified target
position.
→ Vary the initial piston position and observe how the cylinder
reaches its setpoint position every time without fail.
To study the closed-loop control procedure more closely, let’s

examine the cylinder’s displacement and velocity up to its setpoint
position. You can do this by adding a state diagram, adjusting it to
a suitable size, and dragging the cylinder onto the diagram. A
dialog box will open where you should select the two quantity
values “Position” and “Velocity”.
Pneumatics are fast. So you can more clearly observe the effects
described below, set the stroke of the cylinder to 5000 mm.
→ Set the y offset of the function generator to 5 and the start

position of the cylinder to 0 and start the simulation.
The cylinder advances to the middle, losing velocity continuously

until it comes to a stop.

Figure 9/48: Position displacement and change in velocity during
closed-loop control
It is often desirable for the cylinder to move at maximum velocity

until it reaches its setpoint position and then to stop as suddenly as
possible. You can do this by amplifying the position signal of the
displacement encoder, which will accelerate the switchover of the
regulating valve. This makes use of the fact that the PID controller
limits the output voltage for the proportional valve solenoid to 10
V.
→ Set the “Proportional gain” of the PID controller to 3 and start

the simulation.

Figure 9/49: Position displacement and change in velocity with
amplified input signal
You can see clearly that the cylinder now moves at a constant
velocity for a long distance. It then brakes sharply and comes finally
to a stop.
However, you can see that the cylinder piston moves clearly beyond
its target, due to its inertia and the compressibility of the air, and
moves back and forth several times before finally coming to rest.
These oscillations around the setpoint position are typical for this
kind of simple closed-loop control. In practice, you would try to
reduce these oscillations by tweaking the parameters of the PID or
loop controller. However, at this stage we will stop at the simple

basic principles, and refer you to the literature on proportional and
closed-loop systems for further reading.
9.14.4 Closed-loop control in hydraulics
Your task now is to set up a simple system of closed-loop position

control. To do so, modify the circuit as shown in the following
figure. Remember that you need to remove the blanking plugs on
the valve ports before you can drag lines. Instead of the function
generator, it is now the displacement encoder that supplies the
input voltage for the proportional valve solenoid. So you can apply
the label to the cylinder, open its properties dialog box, go to the
“Configure Cylinder” tab and set the “Sensing” option.
Figure 9/50: Simple closed-loop position control
→ Start the simulation and observe how the cylinder retracts and
the valve moves further and further into its closed position.
This makes the cylinder slower and slower until it is fully retracted.
Strictly speaking this is not really position control, because the
cylinder would have stopped when it reached its physical stop
anyway. So now let’s change the relationship in the displacement
encoder between the piston position and the output voltage. For
example, if we want the cylinder to stop in the middle, the valve

must be in its closed position at the exact time when the cylinder
reaches that position. As the output voltage is proportional to the
piston position, it is easy to calculate how the voltages at the two
limits (cylinder retracted/cylinder advanced) need to be selected in
order for the voltage to be 0 V halfway through the cylinder stroke:
Figure 9/51: Adjusting the voltage limits for the displacement

encoder
→ Start the simulation and observe that the cylinder stops once it
has traveled half the distance.
Now we want to expand the circuit so that the cylinder can move to
any position we set on a slider during the simulation, as quickly as
possible but still accurately. This is done using a PID controller.
→ Construct the following circuit and set the parameter values for
the PID controller as shown.
Note that the pump unit and the tank are mirrored from their posi-
tions in the example above.

Figure 9/52: Position control with PID controller
→ Start the simulation and slowly move the y offset of the func-
tion generator between -10 and 10.
The cylinder moves until it reaches its setpoint position, where it

stops. The cylinder’s target position is proportional to the voltage
set on the function generator, with -10 V equating to “fully retract-

ed” and 10 V meaning “fully advanced.” The value 0 thus repre-
sents the cylinder piston’s mid-position. It does not matter what
position the cylinder starts from; it will always stop at the specified
target position.
→ Vary the initial piston position and observe how the cylinder
reaches its setpoint position every time without fail.
To study the closed-loop control procedure more closely, let’s

examine the cylinder’s displacement and velocity up to its setpoint
position. You can do this by adding a state diagram, adjusting it to
a suitable size, and dragging the cylinder onto the diagram. A
dialog box will open where you should select the two quantity
values “Position” and “Velocity”.
→ Set the y offset of the function generator to 0 and the start

position of the cylinder to 0 and start the simulation.
The cylinder advances to the middle, losing velocity continuously

until it comes to a stop.

Figure 9/53: Position displacement and change in velocity during
closed-loop control
It is often desirable for the cylinder to move at maximum velocity

until it reaches its setpoint position and then to stop as suddenly as
possible. You can do this by amplifying the position signal of the
displacement encoder, which will accelerate the switchover of the
regulating valve. This makes use of the fact that the PID controller
limits the output voltage for the proportional valve solenoid to 10
V.

→ Set the “Proportional gain” of the PID controller to 10 and start
the simulation.
Figure 9/54: Position displacement and change in velocity with

amplified input signal
You can see clearly that the cylinder now moves at a constant
velocity for a long distance. It then brakes sharply and comes
quickly to a stop.
If the cylinder had to move a load, its inertia would cause it to move
slightly beyond its target and it would have to move back and forth

several times before coming to rest. These oscillations around the
setpoint position are typical for this kind of simple closed-loop
control. In practice, you would try to reduce these oscillations by
tweaking the parameters of the PID or loop controller. However, at
this stage we will stop at the simple basic principles, and refer you
to the literature on proportional and closed-loop systems for fur-
ther reading.
9.15 Use of the oscilloscope in electronics
For graphic display of the physical simulation variables, the state

diagram is available. However, for visual representation of high-
frequency and periodic signals, an oscilloscope is better. FluidSIM
has such an oscilloscope in its electronics library, which can be
installed in electrical circuits and connected like other measuring
devices (e.g. voltmeter und ammeter). Any number of oscilloscopes
can be installed and used at the same time.
→ Create a circuit comprising a function generator and an oscillo-

scope.
Figure 9/55: Simple circuit with function generator and oscillo-

scope
→ Set the function generator to the sine function and the fre-
quency to 1 kHz. Now start the simulation and click the oscillo-
scope.
A dialog window opens with a display modeled on a real oscillo-

scope.

Figure 9/56: Modeling of a real oscilloscope

→ Turn the various dials and observe how the displayed curve
changes.
9.16 Simulation of rotating machines
A complete mathematical model and very accurate values for the

machine’s characteristic data are required in order to ensure cor-
rect physical simulation of a rotating electric machine. Characteris-
tic data include, for example, resistance and inductance of the
stator and rotor windings, the number of pole pairs and idling
speed without load.
However, these values are not included in the manufacturer’s

specifications or on the rating plates of common electric motors.
The values specified there describe the status of the motor at
nominal load. These usually include mechanical output power and
motor speed at a specified voltage, amperage and line frequency.
However, these data alone do not permit physically correct simula-

tion of an electric motor. The machine’s above mentioned “inner”
values are required.
And thus FluidSIM attempts to ascertain these required inner

values on the basis of the specified performance data in different
ways, especially in light of the fact that for some machines these
parameters are not easy to measure. And thus there’s no need for
you, as a user, to get involved with the complicated internal layout
of a machine, and all you have to do is enter the machine’s perfor-
mance data, for example from the rating plate, after which the
machine can be simulated.
In the case of electric machines with a simple layout, above all DC

motors due to their engineering design, the characteristic data can
be readily derived from the performance data and directly calculat-
ed. Idling speed is additionally required in order to be able to
obtain unambiguous values.
But things are not that simple in the case of machines with more
complex designs such as asynchronous AC motors, capacitor mo-
tors and synchronous motors. Here it’s much more difficult to arrive

at the characteristic parameters on the basis of the machine’s
specified performance data. The physical relationships which are
taken advantage of in order to generate rotary motion in these
motors are so complex, that the machine’s inner values cannot be
calculated directly from the nominal values.
For this reason, FluidSIM attempts to ascertain the characteristic

data on the basis of various heuristic estimates and, to some ex-
tent, dynamic simulations, so that they are matched as well as
possible to the entered performance data. These calculations are
executed in the background after the machine’s parameters have
been entered or changed. When estimating the characteristic data,
FluidSIM always attempts to select data in such a way as to ensure
that the machine’s specified performance data are approached as
closely as possible, and that the machine’s specified performance
represents its maximum performance.
The fact that the inner values can only be approximated and not
precisely calculated results in the following effects in the simula-
tion:
— Under certain circumstances it might not be possible to start

the simulation immediately.
After entering the parameters of a rotating electric machine, it
may take a moment before the simulation can be started. This
is because the machine’s characteristic data are calculated in
the background after the parameters have been entered (e.g.
winding resistance). The simulation cannot be started until
these parameters have been determined. These data are al-
ways determined once only after parameter values have been
entered or changed. As long as the parameters are not
changed, there’s no need to repeat the calculation.
— Changed performance data in the simulation

FluidSIM always attempts to ascertain the characteristic pa-
rameters which best suit the attributes based on the entered
performance data. If you use the performance data of an actual
machine, this should usually work. But even if the entered per-
formance data do not correspond to an actual machine,
FluidSIM nevertheless attempts to find values for the charac-
teristic data so that a simulation can be run for the machine.
However, in this case some of the performance data in the sim-
ulation might not correspond with the entered data. Flow of
current through the machine, for example, serves as an addi-

tional degree of freedom for the calculation of the characteris-
tic data, which may deviate from the value in the simulation en-
tered by you. If FluidSIM doesn’t find any appropriate parame-
ters based on the user entries, a similar machine is calculated
which corresponds at least to the most important attributes. If
this works, the symbol is identified in gray in order to indicate
that not all of the entries have been used. The parameters
which could not be taken into consideration are displayed in
the component’s characteristics dialog box. The affected entry
fields are identified there in color.
— The simulation cannot be run with the selected parameters.

After entering the parameters, the characteristic data of the
electric machine are determined in the background. During this
process the program might discover that a given component
cannot be physically implemented with the entered data. In this
case the respective symbol is identified in the circuit diagram
and a corresponding error text is displayed. If this is the case,
check to make sure that you have entered all of the parameters
from the manufacturer’s specifications or the rating plate cor-
rectly. The parameters which might be incorrect are displayed
in the component’s characteristics dialog box. The affected en-
try fields are identified there in color.
The goal of the process run by FluidSIM is to provide you with a

correct physical simulation of electric machines without requiring
you to be precisely familiar with the details.

GRAFCET
Chapter 10
10. GRAFCET
This chapter provides an introduction to creating and simulating

GRAFCET plans with FluidSIM. See norm DIN EN 60848 for the
complete specification of the GRAFCET description language. Festo
Didactic provides a range of training documentation for more
detailed introductions to GRAFCET.
Unlike an SPS programming language, such as Sequential Function

Chart (SFC), GRAFCET is a graphic description language that de-
scribes the logical behavior and operation of a control system or a
process - regardless of the technical software and hardware imple-
mentation. FluidSIM can be used to both create and simulate
GRAFCET plans. The term GRAFCET is also used as a synonym for a
GRAFCET plan. It should be obvious from the context whether the
word GRAFCET refers to the plan or the language.
A GRAFCET essentially describes two aspects of a control system,

according to specified rules: the actions (commands) to be carried
out and the sequence of execution. The elementary components of
a GRAFCET are steps, actions and transitions and can be used in the
same way as pneumatic or electrical components. To achieve a
uniform operating concept, the GRAFCET elements feature connec-
tions that can be used to link them to each other (as with all other
FluidSIM components).
10.1 The various GRAFCET modes
FluidSIM accommodates various GRAFCET training aims by means

of three modes, which differ in terms of the degree of interaction
they provide between GRAFCET on the one hand and the pneumat-
ic, hydraulic, and/or electrical circuits on the other hand.

10.1.1 Drawing only (GrafEdit)
The simplest mode, also referred to as “GrafEdit” in the following

sections, allows you to draw GRAFCET diagrams. Simulation or
animation of a GRAFCET is not possible in this mode. You can draw
a GRAFCET together with a fluidic or electrical circuit on one page or
on a separate page within a project. However, in this mode the
GRAFCET has no effect on circuit function, and the component
states are not transmitted to the GRAFCET. The GRAFCET is a draw-
ing only, with no action. This mode can be useful in practice in
order to prepare the draft circuit conceptually with a GRAFCET and
to verify it without the assistance of FluidSIM.
10.1.2 Observation (GrafView)
In this mode (also called “GrafView”), a GRAFCET can be drawn as

described above, but unlike the simple GrafEdit mode, the condi-
tions in GRAFCET objects can linked directly to variables in a corre-
sponding circuit (see section "Access to variables of circuit compo-
nents"). The GRAFCET can only have read access to the circuit
elements. The GRAFCET observes the circuit during the simulation
and is processed and visually presented according to the condi-
tions in transitions and actions.
This mode is practical for simple checking of whether the intended

function of the GRAFCET sequence matches the simulated system
characteristics. In this mode, the processing of the actions of the
GRAFCET has no effect on the other circuit elements. Control of the
circuit is therefore not possible.
10.1.3 Control (GrafControl)
The “GrafControl” mode expands the GrafView mode by not only

allowing read access to the fluidic and/or electrical circuit ele-

ments, but also permitting the GRAFCET actions to actively modify
the values of those elements. This means GRAFCET cannot only
take the place of an additional control, but can also initiate user
actions. For example, pressing a pushbutton or switching over a
manually operated valve can be simulated. This opens up a wide
range of control possibilities because the GRAFCET can query all
component parameters and also modify them when required. This
includes the initiation of switching operations, the adjustment of
flow control valves, and the modification of electrical resistances.
10.2 Setting the GRAFCET mode
Like the other simulation settings, the GRAFCET mode can be set for
a single page, for an entire project node, and also in the global
settings. For example, you can set the global GRAFCET settings
under Tools Options... , GRAFCET tab and you can set the page-
specific GRAFCET settings under Page Properties... , GRAFCET
tab.
So it is always clear which GRAFCET mode is active, FluidSIM in

Simulation Mode applies a colored border to pages containing a
GRAFCET. A gray frame shows that the GRAFCET is not simulated,
i.e. that GrafEdit mode is active. A blue frame indicates the
GrafView mode, in which the GRAFCET can read simulation parame-
ters. Finally, the red frame shows that the GRAFCET is in GrafControl
mode, meaning that it has both read and write access to the com-
ponent parameters.
10.3 GRAFCET elements
The following sections describe the individual elements offered by

FluidSIM to allow creation of GRAFCET plans that comply with the
GRAFCET standard.

10.3.1 Steps
Steps are either active or inactive and can be linked by actions. The
actions of active steps are executed. The sequence of a GRAFCET is
described by the transitions from a previous to a subsequent step.
Steps and transitions have to alternate in the plan.
The creation and simulation of GRAFCETs in FluidSIM is illustrated

in the following using simple examples.
→ Drag a step into a newly created circuit diagram.
Figure 10/1: Simple step
Each step has to be assigned a name. All newly created steps are
consecutively numbered automatically. If a step is to be active at
the start of the sequence control, it is marked as the initial step.
→ Open the step’s dialog box by double clicking it or via the

menu item Edit Properties... and select “Initial step” as the
type.

Figure 10/2: Step
Figure 10/3: Initial step
→ Start simulation with or via the menu ( Execute Start ).
Figure 10/4: Active step
Active steps are marked with a point. Additionally, active steps are
framed in green.

10.3.2 Actions
To execute commands, you can link any number of actions to a

step. Actions do not have to be directly linked to a step; you can
also link them to each other. To make it easier to create the draw-
ing, it is enough to place actions next to each other, without having
to draw connecting lines. If the connections for the elements over-
lap each other, they are automatically connected.
Figure 10/5: Actions
Actions can be defined by a textual description or by setting (or

changing) variable values. If you want to simulate a GRAFCET with
FluidSIM, the variable values are taken into account in the simula-
tion. When displaying a GRAFCET graphically, you can decide
whether the variable name or the descriptive text is shown in an
action. If you want to display the description, you can set the
checkmark next to “ Display description instead of formula” in the
action’s properties dialogue (see example:
Grafcet/Grafcet18.ct). At View GRAFCET... , you can
specify whether the descriptions are displayed instead of the for-
mulae for all GRAFCET components.
There are two types of action: continuously effective and stored

effective actions. For a continuously effective action, its associated
variable is set to the Boolean value (logical value) “TRUE” (1),
provided that the step connected to the action is active. If the step
is inactive, the value is set to “FALSE” (0). This way of setting a
variable is referred to as “assignation” in the GRAFCET specifica-
tions.
For a stored effective action, the set value of the variable remains
unchanged until it is changed by another action. This way of setting
a variable is referred to as “allocation” in the GRAFCET specifica-
tions.
At the start of a sequence, all the variable values are initialized with
“0”.

→ Create the following GRAFCET. Select the action “Simple ac-
tion” in the properties dialogue and enter “A ” under “ Varia-
ble/output”. Then start the simulation.
Figure 10/6: Action dialog window
Figure 10/7: Executed action
Step “1” is active and the action connected to the step is executed.
Variable “A” is set to “1”. The value of an action variable is shown
during simulation in brackets after the variable’s name.

10.3.3 Transitions
Transitions are used to describe the sequence of a control system.

To do this, add the following information to GRAFCET:
Figure 10/8: GRAFCET
→ Select “2” as the name of the second (simple) step. The transi-
tion conditions that specify when the system moves from one
step to the next are still missing. A transition is considered re-
leased once all the immediately preceding steps are active. A
transition is triggered once it has been released and its condi-
tion has the value “1”. A transition with the value “1” is dis-
played in green in FluidSIM. You can show a descriptive text in-
stead of the formula, as with the actions.
A Boolean value is automatically generated for each step. The

name begins with an “X”, followed by the name of the step. In the
example here, the variables “X1” and “X2” are generated. The
value of a step variable is “1” if the step is active; otherwise it is
“0”.
Transition conditions can be time-dependent. These have the

following form:
t1 s / “term” / t2 s
Where t1 and t2 have to be replaced by numbers and “term” by a

Boolean term (“s” = seconds, “ms” = milliseconds).

The transition condition becomes true (“1”) t1 seconds after “term”
has changed its value from “0” to “1”. This is called a “rising edge”.
The transition condition becomes false again (“0”) t2 seconds after
“term” has changed its value from “1” to “0”. This is called a “fall-
ing edge”.
The short form t1 s / “term” is also allowed. The system then as-
sumes that t2 is 0 seconds.
→ Enter the transition conditions into the transitions' properties

dialogue as shown and then start the simulation.

Figure 10/9: Transition dialog window
The following cycle runs through:

Figure 10/11: GRAFCET cycle
10.3.4 Stored effective actions (allocations)
In the next example, a counter is to be implemented. This works

using a stored effective action (allocation) and an action on an
event.
To do this, add the following information to GRAFCET:
→ Select “Action on activation” for the action of the second step,

“C” as the variable and “C + 1” as the allocation. “C” will work
as a counter. For the second action of the first step, select “ Ac-
tion on event”, “B” as the variable with the allocation. “1” and
“[ C>2]” as the condition/event. Then start the simulation.

Each time step “2” is activated, “C” is raised by one. As soon as “C”
has the value “3” and step “1” is activated, “B” receives value “1”.
Figure 10/13: GRAFCET simulation
10.3.5 GRAFCET-PLC component
The GRAFCET-PLC component is a control device based on a PLC,

the characteristics of which are described by a related GRAFCET.
The GRAFCET is simulated in isolation regardless of the set
GRAFCET mode, meaning that it has no direct access to the varia-
bles of other circuit components. The GRAFCET can only access the
input and output variables of the related GRAFCET-PLC component.

Figure 10/14: GRAFCET-PLC component
A GRAFCET-PLC component needs to be assigned to a GRAFCET.

This is normally the GRAFCET on the same page. However, you can
also specify a separate page in the project where the related
GRAFCET is located.
You can open the properties dialog box by double clicking. You can
access the adjustable parameters on the “Component Parameters”
tab.
Figure 10/15: Adjustable parameters of the GRAFCET-PLC compo-

nent
Related pages The GRAFCET plans on the specified pages will be assigned to the
GRAFCET-PLC component. If you do not specify any related pages,
the GRAFCET assigned will be the one on the same page as the
GRAFCET-PLC component.

Inputs This list defines the names of the input variables that can be evalu-
ated by the conditions of the related GRAFCET. Specifying a name is
optional. The input variable names “I0” to “I7” are created auto-
matically. The value of an input variable is set to “1” when a volt-
age of at least 24 volts is applied to the corresponding electrical
connection and the GRAFCET-PLC component is connected to a
power supply.
Outputs This list defines the names of the output variables whose values
can be set by the actions of the related GRAFCET. Specifying a name
is optional. The output variable names “Q0” to “Q7” are created
automatically. A voltage of 24 volts is generated at the electrical
connection corresponding to an output variable if that output
variable has a value not equal to “0” and the GRAFCET-PLC compo-
nent is connected to a power supply. In any other situation, a
voltage of 0 volts is generated.
The following simple example illustrates the use of the GRAFCET

PLC component.
Figure 10/16: GRAFCET with its related PLC component
In the properties dialog box for the GRAFCET PLC component, the
alias “E2” is entered for the input “I2”. The output “Q5” was not
given an alias. As soon as the electrical switch is closed, there is a
potential at the input of “I2”; this potential causes the GRAFCET
variable “I2” (and thereby also the alias “E2”) to change its value
from “0” to “1”. As a consequence of this, the condition in the

action becomes true (“1”) and the value of variable “Q5” is set to
“1”. This in turn leads to a potential being created at the output of
“Q5” and the indicator light lights up.
If a GRAFCET is connected to a GRAFCET-PLC component, the

GRAFCET can only access the inputs and outputs of that related PLC
component. As the GRAFCET and PLC component may be on sepa-
rate pages, a frame around the GRAFCET during simulation indi-
cates that it is in this restricted PLC mode.
As soon as the switch is opened again, the following situation

arises:

10.4 Access to variables of circuit components
If the set GRAFCET mode permits it, GRAFCET elements can directly
access the variables of circuit components, with the “GrafView”
mode allowing only read access and the “GrafControl” mode allow-
ing both read and write access to the circuit variables. Also, to
permit this access, every variable used in GRAFCET needs to be
identifiable by a unique name. You can see the predefined name for
every variable in the component parameters dialog box. Clicking
the name of a variable opens another dialog box where you can
specify a user-defined alias. This alias is used like a global variable
and can be addressed directly in a GRAFCET.

Figure 10/19: Variables of a voltmeter
Read access to the variables listed in the component dialog box is

permitted. The complete variable name that can be used in a
GRAFCET is made up of the component identification, a dot “.” as a
separator, and the variable designation. The complete variable
name of the voltage of a voltmeter “-M1” is therefore “-M1.U”, for
example. Alternatively, the user-defined alias can be used.
The complete variable name of the actuated state of a manually

operated switch “-S” is “-S.state”. For the sake of simplicity, an
alias with the switch’s identification is created automatically. In this
example, therefore, “-S” can be used directly in a GRAFCET instead
of “-S.state”.
In the “GrafControl” GRAFCET mode, write access is possible only

to those variables which can actually be modified interactively
during the simulation. With a voltmeter, for example, the resistance

can be specified only in Edit Mode. It cannot be modified during the
simulation.
The following circuit (Grafcet/Grafcet19.circ) illustrates

access to circuit variables.
Figure 10/20: Access to circuit variables
The “GrafControl” GRAFCET mode is set in the circuit properties,

otherwise the action could not act directly on the circuit. The condi-
tion checks if the voltage of voltmeter “-M1” is greater than 10
volts. The complete variable name of the voltage is “-M1.U” as
described above, and is displayed on the action in the circuit. Once
the simulation starts, the voltage can be increased interactively in
the function generator. If the voltage exceeds 10 volts, the action
becomes active.

Figure 10/21: Access to circuit variables
The variable “-S1” is set, which is an (automatic) alias of “-

S1.state”. This sets the state of switch “-S1” to “1” (actuated) and
the switch opens.
10.5 Monitoring with GRAFCET actions
A GRAFCET can be used to monitor the proper functioning of a

fluidic or electrical circuit. The monitoring functionality in FluidSIM
allows you to check whether GRAFCET actions executed in a circuit
resulted in the desired behavior. This is done by evaluating so-
called monitoring conditions in the active actions during the simu-
lation. If a monitoring condition is violated, meaning that its value
is “0” (FALSE), the corresponding action is marked with a color and
the violation of the condition is tolerated for a defined time. Once
that time is exceeded, the monitoring is categorized as failed.
The settings for monitoring can be set along with the choice of
GRAFCET mode (see "Setting the GRAFCET mode").

Figure 10/22: Settings for GRAFCET monitoring
Enable monitoring Here you can define whether you want the monitoring to be carried
out during the simulation.
Monitoring condition false If the monitoring condition of an active action is violated, the action
is marked in the color specified.
Action failed Once a monitoring condition fails, or in other words, once the
tolerance time is exceeded, the corresponding action is marked in
the color specified.
Pause simulation on action If this option is activated, the simulation switches to pause mode
failed when a monitoring condition fails.
Play sound on action failed If this option is activated, an audio signal is sounded when a moni-
toring condition fails.
The following example is designed to illustrate the use of GRAFCET

monitoring (Grafcet/Grafcet21_Hyd.circ or
Grafcet/Grafcet21_Pneu.circ).

Figure 10/23: Circuit diagram with GRAFCET monitoring
The single action in the GRAFCET activates the solenoid valve

directly. This should cause the cylinder piston to advance. A moni-
toring condition in the action will be used to check if the cylinder
actually did advance. A small positive velocity indicates the advanc-
ing of the piston.
To formulate the monitoring condition, open the properties dialog

box for the action by double clicking.

Figure 10/24: Specifying the monitoring condition
Monitoring condition The monitoring condition is entered in this field. Circuit variables
can be assigned to a unit of measurement by writing the desired
unit in square brackets after the variable. This is “1.3.v [m/s]” in
the example shown.
Tolerance time In this field you enter the time period after which a violated condi-
tion is categorized as failed.
The “Templates” button opens a dialog box where a condition can

be compiled interactively.

Figure 10/25: Template of a monitoring condition
Monitoring condition You can use the two drop-down lists to select a template of a moni-
toring condition.
Component Here you can specify the identification of the component to which
the monitoring condition will refer. You can use the “ Browse... ”
button to select the component from an additional selection dialog
box.
Variables / Units Here the variables and units are listed which are used in the select-
ed template.
Parameter Parameters can be adjusted in some templates. For example, in the

template “Cylinder is in interval”, you can specify the limits x1 and
x2 of the interval.

Condition formula The condition generated from the template is shown as a formula in
this field. This formula is transferred into the input field for the
monitoring condition.
Start the simulation and observe how the GRAFCET controls the
circuit and advances and retracts the cylinder piston.
Figure 10/26: Simulation with GRAFCET monitoring
Now close the one-way flow control valve. The solenoid valve still
switches over as a result of the GRAFCET action, but the cylinder
cannot advance now. The monitoring condition of the action is now
violated and the action is marked in yellow to indicate this viola-
tion.

After the set tolerance time of one second, the violated condition is
categorized as failed, the action is marked red, and the simulation
goes into pause mode.

10.6 Quick reference for the FluidSIM-relevant GRAFCET

concepts
The next sections introduce all GRAFCET concepts that are related
to FluidSIM.
10.6.1 Initialization
All the variables in a GRAFCET are preset with the value “0” at the
start of the simulation.

10.6.2 Sequence rules
— A transition is considered released once all the immediately

preceding steps are active. A transition is triggered once it has
been released and its condition has the value “1”. A transition
with the value “1” is shown in green in FluidSIM, regardless of
whether the step linked to it is active or inactive.
— The relevant transition is triggered at the same time and does

not take any time.
— Since triggering a transition does not take any time, a step can
be activated and deactivated at the same time (even across
various intermediate steps). An active step remains active in
this situation. A loop of steps is only run through once at one
point in time (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet06.ct).
10.6.3 Sequence selection
A step can branch off into various partial sequences. In the

GRAFCET specifications, these partial sequences have to be exclu-
sive. Since this can generally only be checked during the sequence,
this exclusivity is not required in FluidSIM (see example:
Grafcet/Grafcet07.ct).
10.6.4 Synchronization
The GRAFCET synchronization component can be used to imple-

ment synchronizations (see example:

10.6.5 Transient sequence / unstable step / virtual triggering
As described in Sequence rules, triggering a transition does not

take any time. As a consequence of this, multiple consecutive steps
can be activated at the same point in time one after the other. This
sequence is called transient (continuous).
The intermediate steps in the sequence chain are referred to as

unstable. The continuously effective actions connected to them are
not displayed in the simulation. The allocations in the stored effec-
tive actions are carried out. Triggering the intermediate steps and
their associated transitions is called virtual triggering (see example:
10.6.6 Determining the values of GRAFCET variables
Variables of continuously effective actions (allocations) receive the

value “1” if the corresponding action is linked to an active step and
any action condition present has the value “1”.
Variables of stored effective actions (assignation) are changed if

the corresponding action is linked to an active step and the rele-
vant action event occurs (e.g. action on event or on activation).
FluidSIM does not check whether the two types of variable identifi-
cation contradict each other for a variable. If this case occurs, the
variable value is determined by an internal calculation, which the
user cannot predict (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet09.ct).
10.6.7 Checking the entries
FluidSIM checks the validity of entries for conditions and assigna-

tions. If this kind of term does not match the specifications, the

term in question is displayed in red. The simulation is only released
once all the terms are valid.
10.6.8 Admissible characters for steps and variables
Steps and variables cannot contain any spaces. Function names

that can be used in a GRAFCET expression are not permitted.
There are no limitations for the descriptions that can be shown for
conditions and actions, because these are only displayed and are
not used for simulation.
10.6.9 Variable names
There are four different types of variables. All variables can be used
in conditions and assignations.
Action Variables Action variables are available throughout GRAFCET and can be set
in actions (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet10.ct).
Step Variables Step variables are inserted automatically for each step and have
the value “1” when and only when the corresponding step is active.
Step variables have the form X + “step name”. If, for example, the
step name is “12”, then the associated variable is “X12”. Step
names are only ever valid within a partial GRAFCET or within the
global GRAFCET. This means that the same step name can be used
in different partial GRAFCETs. In order to be able to address step
variables across partial GRAFCETs in FluidSIM, the step variable has
to be preceded by the partial GRAFCET name. Example: Partial
GRAFCET “1” contains step “2” and is meant to be addressed in the
global GRAFCET. Within the global GRAFCET, the step variable name
“G1.X2” has to be used. Within partial GRAFCET “1”, “X2” is
enough (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet11.ct). Variables of
macro-steps have the form XM + “step name”, macro inputs have
XE + “step name” and macro outputs have XS + “step name” (see
example: Grafcet/Grafcet15.ct).

Partial GRAFCET Variables Partial GRAFCET variables are automatically inserted for each
partial GRAFCET and have the value “1” when and only when at
least one step in the corresponding partial GRAFCET is active.
Partial GRAFCET variables have the form XG + “partial GRAFCET
name”. If, for example, the partial GRAFCET name is “1”, the asso-
ciated variable is “XG1” (see example:
Variables of circuit compo- The variables of circuit components can be used in GRAFCETs as
nents input and output variables (see "Access to variables of circuit
components").
10.6.10 Functions and formula entry
A range of functions can be used in conditions and assignations.

These functions are displayed according to the GRAFCET specifica-
tions (e.g. upwards arrow for rising edge). Entering GRAFCET-
specific functions is supported by the buttons in the dialogues with
the relevant labels:
— “+” (logical OR)
— “*” (logical AND)
— “NOT” (logical NOT)
— “RE” (rising edge)
— “FE” (falling edge)
— “s / / s” (delay)
— “s /” (delay, short form)
— “NOT(s /)” (time limit)
If the functions “NOT”, “RE” or “FE” refer to a term, the term has to
be placed in brackets.
Examples:

NOT a
NOT (a + b)
RE X1
RE (X1 * X2)
The following additional mathematical functions are available:
— abs (absolute amount)
— sign (algebraic sign: +1, 0, -2)
— max (maximum of two numbers)
— min (minimum of two numbers)
— ^ (to the power of, e.g. a^3)
— sqrt (square root)
— exp (to the power of constant “e”)
— log (natural logarithm)
— sin (sine)
— cos (cosine)
10.6.11 Delays / time limits
Delays have the following form (see example:

Grafcet/Grafcet03.ct):
“Time in seconds” s / “Boolean term” / “time in seconds”
or
“Time in seconds” s / “Boolean term”

Examples:
1 s / X1 / 2s 3s/X3
Time limits have the following form:
NOT (“time in seconds” s / “Boolean term”)
Example: NOT(6s/X28)
In addition to “s” for seconds, the following units of time can also
be used.
— d (days)
— h (hours)
— m (minutes)
— s (seconds)
— ms (milliseconds)
Time specifications can also be combined, e.g. “2s500ms” for 2.5

seconds.
10.6.12 Boolean value of an assertion
In GRAFCET, you can use Boolean values to calculate an assertion,

for example: a counter “C” should be larger than 6 and step “X1”
should be activated. “C” is larger than “6” can be calculated as with
a variable. To do this, the assertion has to be set in square brack-
ets. So in this example:
[C > 6 ] * X1
If a Boolean assertion is positioned on its own in a condition, then

you can omit the square brackets in FluidSIM, for example C > 6
instead of [C > 6]. (See example:Grafcet/Grafcet13.ct)

10.6.13 Target information
If you want to interrupt an operative connection from a transition to

a step, you can enter the name of the target step in the transition’s
properties dialogue (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet14.circ).
10.6.14 Partial GRAFCETs
Partial GRAFCETs can be used to separate a GRAFCET into different

hierarchy levels. This function is most often used for enclosing
steps and compulsory commands. The name of a partial GRAFCET is
always preceded by a “G”.
In order to determine partial GRAFCETs in FluidSIM, the partial

GRAFCET frame has to be placed over the relevant GRAFCET part
and you have to assign a name in the properties dialogue. The
preceding “G” is not part of the name that you have to enter; it is
added automatically by FluidSIM and shown at the bottom left of
the partial GRAFCET frame. You can alter the size of the partial
GRAFCET frame by dragging its edges with the mouse (see exam-
ple: Grafcet/Grafcet11.ct). It is important that all the ele-
ments of the partial GRAFCET are located entirely within the rele-
vant frame and that there are no “foreign” elements overlapping
the frame.
10.6.15 Macro-steps
Macro-steps can be specified using a step’s properties dialogue.

The preceding “M” is not a part of the name that you have to enter;
it is added automatically by FluidSIM. You can specify macro inputs
and macro outputs in the same way. The preceding “E” and “S” in
these cases are not part of the name either and are automatically
added by FluidSIM (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet15.circ).

10.6.16 Compulsory commands
Compulsory commands can be used to control partial GRAFCETs

regardless of their normal sequence. There is an entry mask to help
you enter these commands in FluidSIM. There are four types of
compulsory command. They are shown here using four examples
(see example: grafcet/Grafcet16.circ).
G12 {8, 9, 11} Setting a specific situation. This example activates steps 8, 9 and
11 of partial GRAFCET 12.
G12 {*} Freezing a partial GRAFCET. In this example, the current situation
for partial GRAFCET 12 is maintained as it is. No further transitions
are triggered.
G12 Setting a blank situation. All steps in partial GRAFCET 12 are deac-
tivated in this example.
G12 {INIT} Setting the initial situation. In this example, the steps in partial
GRAFCET 12 that are marked as initial steps are activated.
10.6.17 Enclosing step
Enclosing steps can be specified using a step’s properties dialogue.

You can either enter the enclosed partial GRAFCETs directly or
select them from a list. You have to separate individual partial
GRAFCETs with a comma or a blank space.
During simulation, the name of the enclosing step is shown at the

top left of the partial GRAFCET frame, as soon as the step is activat-
ed (see example: Grafcet/Grafcet17.ct).
You have to set the “Activation link” field in the properties dialogue
for steps within the enclosed partial GRAFCET that you wish to
activate when the enclosing step is activated.

10.6.18 Action when a transition is triggered
An action on triggering is a stored effective action which is execut-

ed when the transition connected to the action is triggered. The
action is usually connected to the transition by a straight line (see
example Grafcet/Grafcet20.circ).

Dimension
Chapter 11
11. Dime nsion
FluidSIM allows both automatic and manual dimensioning.
11.1 Draw dimension
The buttons
Horizontal
Vertical
Align
Angular
Flag
activate the corresponding mode for drawing the dimension ar-

rows. Alternatively you can also access the dimensioning functions
in the Draw menu under Dimension .
Horizontal, vertical and diagonal dimensioning is done by defining

two points for the distance as well as then clicking to position the
dimension text. Angular dimensioning requires the center point to
be defined as well as two points for the angle. The fourth click in
turn defines the position of the dimension text. The Flag dimen-
sion function can also be used for general labeling of important
points in the circuit. Two points for a line with any pitch and a final
click for the text are needed for this.

11.2 Settings for the dimension
Figure 11/1: Dimension dialog window
Layer Defines the drawing layer for the dimension.
Automatic Dimensioning Activates or deactivates automatic adaptation of the dimension

when the dimension length is changed.
Length If the Automatic Dimensioning option is deactivated you can enter

any number that will be displayed as the length dimension. A unit
can also be selected. Show Unit defines whether the unit should be
displayed.
Decimals Defines the number of decimal places.
Factor Determines the factor by which the real length is multiplied for the
displayed value. This is necessary if you are creating a drawing with
a scale other than 1:1.
Color Defines the color for the dimension.

Line Style Defines the line style for the dimension.
Line Width Defines the line width for the dimension.
Dimensions, like all other objects in FluidSIM, can be moved, rotat-

ed, mirrored and scaled. The display value of the dimension is
automatically adapted during scaling if the Automatic Dimension-
ing option is activated.

Component attributes
Chapter 12
12. Compone nt attributes
The FluidSIM circuit symbols largely correspond to the components

in the equipment sets from Festo Didactic SE. The parameters of
the components are also entered accordingly in FluidSIM. Open the
Properties dialog window for a component by double clicking a
symbol or by opening the Edit menu and selecting Properties... .

12.1 Component attributes in the Properties dialog window
Figure 12/1: Properties dialog window for a component:
The properties of a component are saved in attribute value pairs.

The attributes are divided into different groups. The first group
contains the general properties:

Figure 12/2: Detail from the Properties dialog window for a compo-
nent: General properties
Symbol Name Displays the name of the circuit symbol. The symbol name is
mapped to appropriate products in the Festo product catalog.
Users cannot edit the symbol name.
Description Contains a more detailed description or the complete name of the

circuit symbol where applicable. Users can edit this. The identifica-
tion is shown as text in the circuit drawing if the “ Display” option is
selected.
Part number The part number uniquely identifies a product within parts lists.
Layer In this selection list you define the drawing layer for the symbol.
Depending on the setting for the drawing layer it may not be possi-
ble to display or edit the symbol. In order to make the symbol
visible or change the settings you have to temporarily activate the
drawing layer on the Drawing Layers... menu item from the View
menu.
Identification Here you can assign an identification that uniquely identifies the
component in the circuit diagram. The identification is shown as
text in the circuit drawing if the “Display” option is selected.
Note: FluidSIM automatically assigns a unique identification when

inserting or copying circuit symbols. An automatically assigned
identification text begins with a question mark and can be edited by
the user (FluidSIM shows a warning if you are assigning an identifi-
cation that already exists).
Display in Parts Lists Deactivate this option if you do not want the symbol to appear in
the parts list.

12.2 User Defined Properties
You can enter your own component attributes in the “ User Defined
Properties” tab.
nent: User Defined Properties tab
In order to edit an entry the corresponding row must be selected by

clicking on it. Clicking on the table cell to be modified again then
enables you to edit the entry in the cell.
A row can be deleted by first clicking the row to highlight it. The
highlighted row can then be deleted using the Del key.
You can add any desired attributes by filling out the empty cells on
the last row.

12.3 Drawing Properties
You can enter a number of drawing properties that influence how

the symbols are displayed in the circuit diagram in the “ Drawing
Properties” tab.
nent: Drawing Properties tab
Scale Defines the scaling in the x or y direction. The scaling factor can
also be defined with the help of the mouse pointer. This is de-
scribed in the “Scale symbols” section.
Rotation Defines the angle of rotation in degrees. The angle of rotation can
also be defined with the help of the mouse pointer. This is de-
scribed in the “Rotate symbols” section.
Override Color If this option is activated then another color can be selected for the
symbol.

Reset Resets the geometrical settings to the default values: Scaling to 1,
rotation to 0 and “Override Color” deactivated.
12.4 Main and secondary components
As described under Component attributes in the Properties dialog

window, the FluidSIM circuit symbols largely correspond to the
components in the Festo product catalog. These symbols are called
main components. However there are also secondary components,
which do not correspond to components in the Festo product cata-
log. These secondary components are usually symbolic representa-
tions of a partial aspect of an associated main component.
All product properties are stored in the main component. The

secondary components only have a description and a reference to
the associated main component. In electrical engineering in par-
ticular, components such as relays are divided into main and sec-
ondary components where the coil is the main component and the
contacts are the secondary components.
12.5 Linking main and secondary components
Main and secondary components are linked using the symbol for
the secondary component. The circuit diagram detail shows a relay
comprising a coil as the main component and two contacts as the
secondary components. The contacts are to be linked with the coil.
This information is evaluated when displaying the contact image.

Figure 12/5: Relay comprising coil with two contacts
The symbol identifications are the defaults used in FluidSIM. The

symbols are not linked together yet.
→ Open the corresponding properties dialog window by double-

clicking a contact.
Figure 12/6: Properties dialog window for a contact
Description Defines a description for the secondary component. In the case of a

contact, this is shown in the terminal diagram.

Contact number You can enter a contact number here, which can, optional, be
shown with the designation. To show the contact number by de-
fault, activate the corresponding option in General.
Triggered by FluidSIM recognizes delay switches, limit switches, and pressure

switches by the nature of their usage and by their labels and sup-
plies the corresponding symbol for the switch in the electrical
circuit The representation of switches that are actuated by cylinders
can be determined by selecting the corresponding switch type in
the component’s properties dialog.
Main Component A compatible main component can be selected from a list. The main
component identification can also be entered directly as text.
Browse... Opens a dialog that shows all compatible main components as a

tree in accordance with the object hierarchy.
Link If this box is checked then the secondary component is logically

linked with the main component. If the main component is then
renamed, the link is retained and the identification of the linked
secondary component is adapted as appropriate to the main com-
ponent identification.
Find Target... If the secondary component is logically linked with a main compo-
nent, a search can be performed for the associated main compo-
nent using this button.
Display If this box is checked then the main component’s identification is

shown as the identification for the secondary component.
→ Select “Q1” from the list of compatible main components.

Proceed in the same way for the second contact.
Selecting from the list of compatible main components automatical-

ly establishes the logical links between the contacts and the coil.
The circuit diagram should now look as follows:

Figure 12/7: Relay comprising coil with two contacts
If you now change the coil identification to “Q2”, the logical links
mean that the identifications at the contacts will also be automati-
cally changed to “Q2”.
Examples of this are relays with the coil as the main component and
the contacts as secondary components as well as electromagnetic
directional control valves with the pneumatic symbol as the main
component and the valve solenoids as secondary components in
the electrical part of the circuit diagram.
12.6 Link solenoid valves and solenoid coils
The coils belonging to solenoid valves are usually displayed sepa-

rately in the electrical part of a circuit diagram. The link between a
solenoid valve and the associated coils is defined at the solenoid
valve symbol.
The following circuit diagram shows a solenoid valve and the sym-
bols for two separate solenoid coils. No link has been established
yet between the solenoid valve and the coils.
Figure 12/8: Solenoid valve and two separate coils
There are two ways of establishing a link between a solenoid valve

and a coil. The first is using the properties dialog window for the
solenoid valve.

→ Open the appropriate properties dialog window by double-
clicking the solenoid valve and select the Connector Labels tab.
Figure 12/9: Properties dialog window, Connector Labels tab
This tab shows all of the solenoid valve’s connectors. Connectors

refer, among other things, to the logical connection options for the
solenoid coils. The input fields of the left-hand electric connector
are described below. The descriptions apply analogously to the
right-hand connector and other types of logical connectors.

Electric Connector (Left) The identification for the left-hand solenoid coil can be entered in
this list box or selected from a list. When you click in this field the
corresponding connector is highlighted in the preview. This helps to
locate the connector, particularly when dealing with turned or
mirrored symbols.
Browse... Opens a dialog that shows all compatible solenoid coils as a tree in
accordance with the object hierarchy.
Link If this box is checked then the solenoid coil is logically linked with
the connector at the solenoid valve. If the solenoid coil is renamed
the link is retained and the identifications of the coils at the sole-
noid valve are changed to match the coil identifications.
Find Target... If the connector at the solenoid valve is logically linked with a coil a
search can be performed for the associated coil using this button.
Display If this box is checked the coil’s identification is shown as the identi-
fication for the solenoid valve connector.
Corresponding components Provided that the valve if electrical actuated, this list contains all
components, which can be combined with this valve connector in
the electrical part of the circuit. You can select the object you want
to use and copy it to the clipboard to insert it into the circuit direct-
ly. Of course, you can also select the corresponding valve solenoid
from the component library later.
→ Select “-K1” from the list of compatible solenoid coils.
Figure 12/10: Left connector linked with coil “-K1”
The second way of linking a solenoid valve with a coil is to double-

click the solenoid valve’s connector directly. The coil connectors are
represented like pneumatic connectors within the solenoid valve by
means of small circles.
→ Double-click the right connector of the solenoid valve.

A dialog window whose fields correspond to the entries for a con-
nector in the Connector Labels tab of the Properties dialog window.
Figure 12/11: Connector dialog window
→ Select “-K2” from the list of compatible solenoid coils.
The (electric) connectors of the solenoid valve are now linked with
the solenoid coils.
Figure 12/12: Link solenoid valve and solenoid coils
12.7 Attributes of the text components
In FluidSIM text components serve, firstly, to insert comments and

labels and, secondly, can be defined by the labels and accessories
without displaying a symbol. Open the dialog window Properties of
the text component by double-clicking on a text or via the Proper-
ties... menu item on the Edit menu.

Figure 12/13: Properties dialog window for a text component:
A text component possesses all of the attributes of a standard

component. The text properties are located on the “Edit Text” tab.

Figure 12/14: Detail from the Properties dialog window for a text
component: Edit Text tab
Edit Text Enter your text into the input field on the left-hand side. You can
also enter text with multiple lines. Press the Enter key to create a
line break.
Alignment Defines the horizontal or the vertical alignment of the text within
the text field.

Font... Defines the text font.
Color... Defines the text color.
Frame Text Draws a frame around the text field.
Fixed Width By default, FluidSIM adjusts the width of the textbox corresponding
to the content. When using tables it might be useful if the space,
which is reserved for the text, is fixed. Activating this option will
swage the text in the given box, when it would usually require more
space.
Attribute Link If this option is activated a text that identifies a link to an attribute
is displayed instead of the text entered. The value of the selected
attribute is displayed in the circuit diagram. You can find a detailed
description of this function under Link text components with attrib-
utes. A predefined placeholder such as the page number can also
be selected using the Predefined variable... button.
12.8 Link text components with attributes
Text components can also display attributes of other components,

values of predefined placeholders, attributes of a circuit or the
project. The text component must be linked to the corresponding
attribute for this. The linked attribute is defined in the input field of
the “Edit Text” tab in the Properties dialog window for the text
component. The activated Attribute Link option defines that the text
in the text field should not be displayed but rather interpreted as a
link.
Example:
Assuming that your project is called “Project1” and possesses the

“Supplier” attribute with the value “Festo”. You project contains
the “Circuit1” circuit and you would like to display the value of the
“Supplier” attribute, in this example namely the value “Festo”, in
this circuit diagram.

→ Insert a text component into the circuit drawing by selecting
the text element on the drawing elements toolbar and then left-
clicking the circuit drawing. The Properties dialog window for
the text component then opens.
Note: You can open the dialog window of an existing text compo-
nent by double-clicking it or using the Edit menu and the Prop-
erties... menu item.
→ Activate the Attribute Link option and then click the Browse...
button.
A window opens displaying the hierarchy of all of the available

attributes. Please note that only those objects are listed that have
an identification assigned by the user. Identifications beginning
with a question mark “?” are not listed. These are identifications
that have been automatically assigned by FluidSIM. The desired
attribute is located under “Attribute Tree” - “Project1” - “Supplier”.
Figure 12/15: Browse Attributes dialog window
→ Select “Supplier” and then click the Select button.

The “Project1.Supplier” value is displayed in the input field and
“Festo” in the preview. The complete and unique name of the
attribute contains all of the hierarchy levels beginning at the pro-
ject. The individual layers in the name are separated by a full stop.
It is also possible to enter only the attribute name into the input
field. In this example: “Supplier”. The hierarchy is then searched
from the bottom up for the attribute, beginning with the text com-
ponents. If the attribute searched for is not found in that compo-
nent then the circuit and then the project are searched for the
attribute.
If the attribute is not found then the attribute name is displayed in

the circuit diagram in angle brackets. The missing attribute can be
created at a later point in time. The link is then created automatical-
ly.
The concept of linking text components with attributes is also

utilized for labeling von drawing frames.
12.9 Text components with specified links
Text components are automatically generated for displayable

component attributes and connector labels which are linked to the
corresponding attributes. Open the Display Attribute dialog window
with which you can adjust how the text is displayed by double-
clicking on the text component or via the Properties... menu item
on the Edit menu.

Figure 12/16: Display Attribute dialog window
Alignment Defines the horizontal or the vertical alignment of the text within
the text field.
Scale Defines the scaling factor of the text in the x or y direction.
Note: You can also change the text size by selecting another font
size in the font type dialog window. You open this dialog window
using the Font... button under Text Attributes.
Rotation Defines text’s angle of rotation in degrees.
Font... Defines the text font.
Color... Defines the text color.
Find Target... The target of a linked text is the attribute which the text refers to.
This button opens the Properties dialog window of the object which
contains this attribute.

12.10 Change the properties of multiple objects simultaneously
If multiple objects are selected, choosing the Properties... menu

item on the Edit menu opens a dialog window with a limited
selection of properties. It only contains those properties which
meaningfully relate to all of the selected objects. This enables you
to change the font for multiple texts in a single operation, for ex-
ample. The more different object types (symbols, connectors,
drawing elements, texts, etc.) that are selected, the less common
properties are available.
The following tabs are available for the common properties de-
pending on the objects highlighted.
12.10.1 Drawing Properties
The dialog elements available within a tab depend on the objects

highlighted.

Figure 12/17: Properties dialog window, Drawing Properties tab:
several highlighted objects
Font... Defines the font type of the text.
Scale Defines the scaling factor of the text in the x or y direction.
Rotation Defines the angle of rotation of the text field in degrees.
Line Width Defines the line width.
means that all of the circuit symbols are on top of this. In particular
this means that symbols are not covered by filled drawing ele-
ments, for example.

means that all of the circuit symbols are underneath this. In particu-
lar it means that symbols are covered by filled drawing elements,
for example.
Reset Reset the settings to the default values.
12.10.2 Main Component
Figure 12/18: Properties dialog window, Drawing Properties tab:

several highlighted objects
Main Component A compatible main component can be selected from a list. The main
component identification can also be entered directly as text.
Browse... Opens a dialog that shows all compatible main components as a

tree in accordance with the object hierarchy.
Link If this box is checked then the secondary component is logically

linked with the main component. If the main component is then
renamed, the link is retained and the identification of the linked
secondary component is adapted as appropriate to the main com-
ponent identification.

Find Target... If the secondary component is logically linked with a main compo-
nent, a search can be performed for the associated main compo-
nent using this button.

Failure models and failure configuration
Chapter 13
13. Failure models a nd fail ure confi gurati on
Just as you can select component parameters, you can also select
predefined failure models for the simulation for a range of compo-
nents. This makes it possible to simulate circuit diagrams with
defective components. The possible failure models are saved with
the components and cannot be modified or expanded by the user.
Failure models can be defined using failure configurations.
13.1 Failure configurations
A failure configuration is a selection of failures that can be grouped

together under one name. A number of configurations can be saved
with a circuit diagram or a project. During a simulation, it is possi-
ble for teaching purposes to use virtual measuring instruments to
find a failure and to repair it with the repair tool. There is a range of
options that can be used to set how the repair can be carried out
and what feedback the students receive.
The failure configurations are saved together with the circuit dia-
gram or project.
You can use the menu Diagnosis Manage failure configura-

tions... to manage the individual configurations and general
settings. The following dialog window opens.

Figure 13/1:
List of failure configurations Contains the defined failure configurations. Each configuration
includes a selection of failures and options that define the type of
repairs possible. The titles of the configurations are displayed in a
list in the toolbar if the Display option is selected. The list can be
sorted using the failure symbols.
New... Creates a new configuration and opens the dialog window contain-
ing the configuration settings. Every configuration must be given a
title.
Edit... Opens the dialog window containing the settings for the selected
configuration.

Delete Deletes the selected configuration.
Prohibit circuit modification Prevents the circuit diagram from being modified when this failure
configuration is selected. Please note that this setting only takes
effect the next time the circuit diagram is opened.
Allow failure-free simulation Defines whether only the specified failure configurations can be
simulated or if a failure-free simulation can be carried out as well. If
this option is active, the failure-free simulation can be selected by
selecting the entry “-” from the list of failure configurations in the
toolbar.
Default failure configuration Defines the configuration that is selected when a circuit diagram or
project is loaded.
Password Defines the password that needs to be entered before failure con-
figuration management can be opened. If the password is not
entered, the user can only select a failure configuration and simu-
late it.
When you select New... or Edit... the following dialog window

opens, where you can manage a particular failure configuration.

Figure 13/2:
Title The title of the configuration is displayed in a list in the toolbar.

Every configuration must be given a unique title.
Description The description is displayed during the simulation together with the
title along the top edge of the window.
Comment The comment can be used to describe the configuration in more

detail. It is used only in this dialog window and in the selection
dialog window.
Various options can be used to set how a repair can be carried out
and how feedback should be provided when repair is completed.

Repair option – - – Determine When the user attempts a repair, a list of possible failures opens.
specific failure The selected component will only be repaired if the selected failure
matches the saved failure.
Repair option – - – Replace The user attempts a repair with a single click, without having to
entire component select a specific failure. This equates to a complete replacement of
the component.
Repair option – - – None If this option is selected, repair of defective components is not
possible.
When a failure configuration is used during a simulation, a status

line is displayed at the top edge of the window. This line contains
the title and description of the selected configuration. The status
line also has a color which varies depending on the following op-
tions.
Status colors – - – At least The status line is highlighted in the color specified until all the
one component is defective defective components have been repaired.
Status colors – - – All compo- The status line is highlighted in the color specified when all the
nents are intact defective components have been repaired.
If you do not want to visibly indicate that a repair has been com-
pleted, select the same color for both options.
Suppress line animations Ordinarily, the user should use measuring instruments to analyze
which components are defective. In FluidSIM, pressures and elec-
trical potentials are normally indicated during the simulation by
colors, which could render the use of measuring instruments super-
fluous under some circumstances. This option can be used to
switch off the line animations.
Every time the user attempts to repair an individual component, a

symbol can be used to indicate whether the attempted repair was
successful. A successful repair is marked by a green “OK” check
mark and a false diagnosis is marked by a red “X” symbol. The
duration of the marking can be set with the following options.
Show permanently The marking is displayed permanently.
Show for a short period The marking is displayed only for a few seconds and is then hidden
again.

Do not show The attempted repair is not marked at all.
The two lists, Non-defective components and Defective compo-

nents, list the components of the circuits selected via the tree
shown under Available objects. You can use the arrow buttons to
move the components between the two lists.
The Defective components list contains the components of the

failure configuration to which a specific failure can be assigned.
This is done via a drop-down list in each row. If a failure requires
additional parameters, the values can be set via the Parameter
button.
Also list objects without If this option is active, all the components are listed in the Non-
designation defective components list. For greater clarity, normally only com-
ponents with designations are listed.
13.2 Create failure configuration
In the following, a simple example is used to show how a failure

configuration can be created. The following circuit diagram is used
in the example.

Figure 13/3:
→ Use the menu Diagnosis Manage failure configurations... to

open the dialog window for managing the failure configuration.
Figure 13/4:
The dialog window contains the general options for all failure
configurations for this circuit diagram. For example, deselect Allow

failure-free simulation if you only want to simulate the failure
configurations you have defined.
→ Use the New... button to create a new failure configuration.

The following dialog window then opens.
Figure 13/5:
→ Enter a title and description.
The title of the selected configuration is displayed in the toolbar.

Figure 13/6:
To make it easier for you to find the components in the

displayed lists, you should previously assign designations to them.
The Non-defective components list is preset to display only the
components with designations.
→ Select the lamp E1 and use the “>” button to move it into the
Defective components list.
Figure 13/7:
→ From the failure model list, select the failure Filament blown.

Figure 13/8:
→ Close the dialog window with OK and create a second

configuration for the circuit diagram. This time you want the fil-
aments of both lamps to be blown.

Figure 13/9: Circuit diagram with two failure configurations

Figure 13/10: Second failure configuration of the circuit diagram
The failure configurations are saved with the circuit diagram.
→ Start the simulation with the first failure configuration.

Figure 13/11:
In the presetting, the line animation is switched off so that the user
is not given any clues about which components could be defective.
The title and description of the selected failure configuration are

displayed at the top edge of the window. In the presetting, this
information is given a yellow background if there are still defective
components in the circuit diagram and a green background once all
the components are repaired. The presettings can be modified in
the Properties dialog window of the failure configuration. How
components are repaired is described in the next section.
13.3 Carry out repairs
The modeled circuit diagram has two failure configurations. In the

first configuration, only the lamp E1 does not light up; in the se-
cond configuration, neither of the two lamps lights up. How to
create the failure configurations is described in the previous sec-
tion.

Figure 13/12:
If the diagnosis toolbar is not shown, you can display it

again using the menu Diagnosis Show Diagnosis tool strip .
→ From the list of failure configurations in the diagnosis

toolbar, select the second failure and start the simulation.
Figure 13/13:
The line animation is switched off in this configuration so that the

user is not given any direct clues about which components could be
defective.
The title and description of the selected failure configuration are

displayed at the top edge of the window. The settings in the failure

configuration specified that this information will have a yellow
background until all the components have been repaired.
Figure 13/14:
→ Click the repair symbol in the diagnosis toolbar. The

mouse pointer then changes.
Figure 13/15:
→ Click a line or component you suspect to be defective,

e.g. the line after the power supply.

Figure 13/16:
The settings in the failure configuration require you to select the

specific failure. In the example, the flow of current might be inter-
rupted. This hypothesis is false, as indicated by a red “X” symbol.
The “X” symbol is hidden again after a few seconds. In the failure
configuration, you can specify whether an “X” symbol should be
displayed as feedback and whether or not it should be hidden
again.
Figure 13/17:
A repair attempt should be a specific and conscious

action. This is why the repair mode is closed after each attempt.
→ Click the repair symbol again for the lamp E1 and this
time select Filament blown as the suspected failure.

Figure 13/18:
This time the hypothesis is correct and the feedback displayed is a

green “OK” a check mark. The yellow color of the title does not
change because not all the defective components have been re-
paired yet. This feedback behavior can also be modified in the
failure configuration.
→ Click the repair symbol again for the lamp E2 and select
“Filament burnt out” as the suspected failure.
Figure 13/19:
Again, this suspicion is correct. This time the color of the title turns
green, which indicates that all the components in the circuit dia-
gram have been repaired.

Parts list management and analyses
Chapter 14
14. Parts list manage ment a nd a nalyses
Various analyses can be inserted into a circuit diagram using the

Insert menu item. Alternatively you can also use the button on
the toolbar. The following dialog window opens.
Figure 14/1: List/Table... dialog window
The following analyses can be inserted into the circuit diagram

using this dialog: Parts List , Terminal diagram , Cable Map ,
Cable List , Wiring List and Tube List .
The use of parts lists is described below. The use and function of
the other analyses are described in the corresponding chapters.
FluidSIM creates parts lists that are automatically updated in the

background while the circuits are being edited.
If a parts list has been added to a circuit diagram as described

above it can be used like a symbol. The use of parts lists as a spe-
cial page type is described under Display parts list.
You can customize the appearance of the parts list under “ Proper-
ties... ” in the “Appearance” tab. You can see the effects of the
settings straight away in the preview on the right-hand side.

If the “Lines per Page” option is selected you can specify the num-
ber of lines to be displayed per page. The relevant pages will also
be output when the circuit diagram is printed. Buttons for naviga-
tion are displayed underneath the page if the list is split across
multiple pages.
Figure 14/2: Buttons for navigating through lists
14.1 Display parts list
We recommend setting up one file specifically for the parts list in a

project. If you wish to create a circuit drawing without creating a
project you can switch the view for this circuit to the parts list view.
Selecting the Parts List menu item from the View menu enables
you to switch from the circuit view to the parts list view. Conversely,
selecting the Circuit Diagram menu item from the View menu
enables you to switch from the parts list view to the circuit view.
A parts list is displayed as a table in the window. You can edit the
following options for editing the table:
— Attributes which the user can edit can be entered directly into
the corresponding table field.
— Clicking on the column header sorts the rows on the basis of

the column clicked. Clicking on the head of the same column
again reverses the sorting order.
— You can adjust the column width by dragging the edges of a

column header.
— You can change the order of the columns by dragging and

dropping a column header in another position.

14.2 Find components from the parts on the circuit diagram
FluidSIM enables you to easily find components on the parts list in

the circuit diagram and vice versa.

Figure 14/3: Finding components from the parts list
You have the following options:
— Clicking on the Find... button on the “Find Target” parts list

column switches to the circuit diagram display and an anima-
tion identifies the corresponding components. If the same cir-

cuit diagram is already open in another window than the parts
list view remains in the active window. The already opened
window containing the circuit diagram is moved into the fore-
ground and an animation identifies the corresponding circuit
diagram symbol.
— When you click a cell in the parts list table an animation identi-
fies the corresponding component in all of the opened windows
displaying the circuit diagram.
— If you click a column header in the parts list table then both the
entire column of the parts list as well as the corresponding
components in the associated circuit diagram windows are se-
lected.
— If you click a component in a circuit diagram then both this

component and the corresponding row in the open parts lists
are selected.
14.3 Set parts list properties
In the parts list view clicking on the Properties... button opens

the Parts List Properties dialog window.

Figure 14/4: Parts List Properties dialog window: Included Pages
tab
Accumulated Parts List Compiles the components with the same attributes.
Single Position Parts List Lists all of the components individually
Sort as Number Interprets the column contents as numbers, so that “10” appears
after “2”, for example.
Include This Page’s Compo- Only lists the components of the corresponding circuit diagram.
nents Only
Include All Project Files Lists all of the components of the active project.
Include Selected Files: Lists all of the components of the selected circuit diagrams belong-
ing to the active project.

Figure 14/5: Parts List Properties dialog window: Listed Attributes
tab
List All Attributes Lists all of the component attributes within a parts list row.
List Selected Attributes: Only lists selected component attributes within a parts list row.

Figure 14/6: Parts List Properties dialog window: Print Options tab
Page Header You can enter an additional text for the header row. Using the
“Adopt Description” option, the page’s description will be used.
Repeat Header On Each Page If the parts list won’t fit on a page completely when printing, addi-
tional pages will be printed automatically. By request, the column
headers can be repeated on each site.
In this tab you can adjust the appearance of the parts list printout.
In the preview on the right-hand side you can immediately see the
effects of the adjustments. You can find information regarding
printing a parts list in the “Print circuit diagram and parts list”
section.

14.4 Export parts list
You can export the parts list as a text file.,
→ Click the Export... button in the parts list view.
A dialog window for selecting a file or entering a new file name

appears. After you have entered a file and left the dialog field you
can define the following format settings for the export in the Parts
List Export dialog window:
Figure 14/7: Parts List Export dialog window
Column Header If this option is selected then the names of the attributes appear in
the first row of the text file.
Quotation Marks Select this option to set the field elements in quotation marks.
Delimiter The selected separator is used to separate the columns.

14.5 Insert tube list
You can insert a tube list into a circuit diagram.
→ In the Insert menu, select Tube List to insert a tube list into
the circuit diagram. Alternatively you can click the button.
In the selection dialog box that opens, select Tube List .
The mouse pointer changes to a crosshair. Click the position in the

circuit diagram where you want to insert the tube list. A dialog
window then opens where you can select the associated tubing and
customize the appearance.

Figure 14/8: Tube List dialog window, Included Pages tab
Include This Page’s Compo- Lists only the tubes in the associated circuit.
nents Only
Include All Project Files Lists all tubes in the active project.
Include Selected Files: Lists all tubes in the selected circuit in the active project.

Figure 14/9: Tube List dialog window, Appearance tab
Lines per Page If the list is not fitting on a page completely, additional pages are
created automatically, which can be cycled through. Using this
option you determine, how many lines per page get listed.
You can customize the appearance of the tube list on the “ Appear-
ance” tab. You can see the effects of the settings straight away in
the preview on the right-hand side.
If the “Lines per Page” option is selected, you can specify the
number of lines to be displayed per page. The relevant pages will
also be printed in a printout of the circuit diagram. Buttons for
navigation are displayed underneath the page if the list is split
across multiple pages.


Manage projects
Chapter 15
15. Manage pr ojects
FluidSIM supports the management of projects by compiling differ-

ent files under one name in a single project file. This has the fol-
lowing benefits: When opening a project all of the associated data
is loaded. It is possible to rapidly access files belonging to a project
via the project window. Parts lists whose elements are located in
different circuit diagram files can be maintained in one project.
15.1 Create new project
→ Select the New... / Project... menu item from the Project

menu and enter a file name for the new project.
Project files possess the prj file suffix. By default they only contain
links to files contained in the project. If you wish to pass on a
project then you must either pass on all of the associated files
along with the project file or activate the “Save Projects as Single
File” option.
When creating a new project, a project folder is automatically

created to store the project file and all other files belonging to the
project. This automatically created project folder has the same
name as the project file. If you create the project file in an empty
folder this will be used for the project (i.e. another new folder will
not be created underneath it). The automatic creation of project
directories can be activated and deactivated in the options under
Save.
In the project window a project is represented hierarchically as a

list. The top element is the project node. Below this are the associ-
ated circuit nodes and parts list nodes which can be differentiated
from each other via the symbol in front of the name.

15.2 Project nodes
Every project possesses one project node as the uppermost ele-

ment. All of the project-specific properties are saved with the pro-
ject node. Right-clicking on a project node opens a context menu.
You can also find the menu items on the Project menu. Here you
can find the functions for adding and removing files, among other
things.
Under the Properties... menu item from the Project menu you
can define properties for the project. Properties that can be speci-
fied for both projects and circuits are described under Circuit and
project properties.
15.2.1 Project archiving
Project files generally consist of links to the files contained therein.

However, where desired FluidSIM can also save the project along
with all of the associated files in one single file. Among other
things, this makes it easier to pass on the project. Activate the Save
Projects as Single File option in the Archiving tab.

Figure 15/1: Project dialog window: Archiving tab
Save Projects as Single File If this option is activated all of the files belonging to the project are
saved in a single file.
Please note the advice displayed under this option.
15.3 Circuit and parts list nodes
A circuit node is created beneath the project node for every circuit
file that belongs to the project. This also applies to parts lists since
they are saved as circuits. These are just displayed differently in the
window. All of the circuit-specific or parts list-specific properties are
saved with the circuit node.
Right-clicking a circuit node opens a context menu containing the

following menu items:

Open...
Opens the selected circuit or the selected parts list in a window.

Double-clicking on the node in the project tree also opens the
window.
Close Windows Closes the window of the selected circuit or the selected parts list.
Remove From List Removes the selected circuit or the selected parts list from the
project.
Rename... Changes the description of the selected circuit or the selected parts
list.
Properties... In this dialog window you can enter data for the circuit or parts list.
Note: Please note that the additional parts list-specific properties

can be set using the window view of the parts list.

Figure 15/2: Page dialog window: Drawing Size tab
Here you can define the circuit dimensions and orientation, both of
which are relevant for printing.

Circuit and project properties
Chapter 16
16. Circuit and project pr operties
Circuits and projects have a host of common properties. The prop-

erties set in the project can be used by circuits in the project. All of
the properties that can be specified for both circuits and projects
are listed below. The screenshots shown are dialog windows for the
circuits.
Figure 16/1: Properties dialog window
Properties The file name field displays the file name of the circuit or project
along with the complete path. The file name is carried over to the
input field for the “Description” and can be edited there. This entry
is displayed in the upper margin of the window as well as beside
the circuit or project node.

Page number Here you can specify a page number. The page number can be
made up of any character string. The page number can be defined
using the “%PageNumber” predefined placeholder. This placehold-
er can be used in text components and drawing frames among
others.
Drawing Frame Here you can make settings for the drawing frame. This function is
described in the section Drawing frame.
16.1 Attributes
Any number of attributes can be created for every circuit or node in

a project. The attributes are listed in a table in the “Attributes” tab.
New attributes can be entered in the empty cells at the end of the
table. The use of attributes is described in the section Attributes of
the nodes in a project.
The attributes of a project node are automatically copied to all

circuit and parts list nodes (inherited) and are thus available in all
of the circuit drawings. This concept is particularly useful for the
drawing frames if project attributes are to be displayed in the
circuit diagram, for example. You can find further information in the
section Link text components with attributes.
Circuit attributes copied from a project cannot be edited initially.

The corresponding row in the Attributes tab of the Page dialog
window is grayed out and the “Inherit From Project” option in the
column is activated.
However it is possible to overwrite a copied attribute in a circuit.

The option in the “Inherit From Project” column must be deactivat-
ed for this. The value of the attribute can then be edited. This
function can be used to assign individual page numbers in the
drawing frame, for example. If the “Inherit From Project” option is
reactivated then the attribute value is copied from the project
again.

Figure 16/2: Attributes tab
Attribute This column contains the name of the attribute.
Value This column contains the value of the attribute.
Action The buttons in this column allow the following actions: if the attrib-
ute was created in the parent project node then the “ Find Target...
” action is available. Clicking this opens the Project or Circuit dialog
window for the project node as the target that contains the corre-
sponding attribute. If the attribute was created in the same node
then the “ Delete ” action that allows you to delete the attribute is
available.
Inherit From Project If the attribute was created in the same node then this option is
deactivated and grayed out. This applies to all of the attributes of
the project node since it does not have a parent node. For child
nodes the value of the attribute from the project node is copied
when this option is activated. After deactivating this option it is
possible to locally overwrite the attribute value.

Comment Here you can enter a comment about the attribute.
16.1.1 Predefined placeholders
FluidSIM provides a host of predefined placeholders. These place-

holders can be used in text components and drawing frames among
others.
The placeholders begin with a percentage sign. The following

predefined placeholders are some of those available:
%PageNumber
The page number is specified in the properties dialog window for

the circuit diagram.
If analyses are split across several pages, the number of the sub-
page is added to the page number with a minus sign. If, for exam-
ple, the entered page number is “42-01” and the page displayed is
the third page in an analysis then the placeholder “%PageNumber”
is replaced by the character string “42-01-03”.
%PageDescription The description for the page is specified in the properties dialog
window for the circuit diagram.
%PageFileName Stands for the file name of the page without the file path.
%PageFullFilePath Stands for the file name of the page with the full file path.
%PageFileDateTime Stands for the date and time of the most recent change to the
circuit diagram.
%PageFileDate Stands for the date of the most recent change to the circuit dia-
gram.
%PageFileTime Stands for the time of the most recent change to the circuit dia-
gram.

16.2 Page Dividers
Page dividers can only be defined for pages. Editing of page divid-
ers is described under Page dividers.
16.3 Basic Unit Length
The symbols in the FluidSIM symbol libraries are created according

to various DIN ISO standards. Instead of specifying absolute units
of length, the standards simply use a relative basic unit of length
“M”. All of the symbols have been created with reference to this
basic unit of length “M”. The actual size of the symbol is not de-
fined until the symbol is inserted into a circuit.
Information on how to convert the basic unit of length “M” is stored

with the circuit diagram. You can change the set values for a circuit
diagram by calling up the properties dialog window for the circuit
diagram using the Page Properties... menu. You will find the
relevant settings in the Basic Unit Length tab.

Figure 16/3: Basic Unit Length tab
As soon as the value of “M” is changed, the sizes of the existing

symbols are recalculated with respect to the specified basic unit of
length. The specification has no effect on elements in the drawing
frame.
The Basic Unit Length tab is also in the project settings. The set-
tings made in this tab are used as a template for circuit diagrams
created from new in the project tree.
16.4 Encryption
Projects and circuit diagrams can be encrypted. The encryption

method used is AES-128.

Figure 16/4: Encryption tab
Enable Encryption This option activates and deactivates encryption. When encryption
is activated the password to be used can be entered in the Pass-
word input field.

16.5 Cross Reference Representation
Figure 16/5: Cross Reference Representation tab
This tab is used to define the settings for the cross-reference repre-
sentation. You can find further information under Cross-reference
representation. If the Inherit From Parent Node option is active then
the settings will be copied from the parent project node.
Example Illustrates the effects of the settings using an example.
Reset Resets the settings to the settings defined in FluidSIM.

Special functions for electric circuits
Chapter 17
17. Special functions for electric circuits
17.1 Potentials and conduction lines
The creation of horizontal and vertical potential lines is supported

by drawing conduction lines. The end points of the conduction line
consist of potentials that also serve as interruptions. In the dialog
window for drawing conduction lines you can specify whether the
potentials should have an identification.
In this example we want to draw three horizontal potential lines

where each line comes from a preceding sheet “1” and is continued
on a sheet “3”.
You open a dialog window where you can make the settings shown
using the Insert Conduction Line... menu item or the button
on the toolbar.

Figure 17/1: Settings for the potential lines to be created
You can then define the end points of the line with two consecutive
mouse clicks.
Figure 17/2: Three horizontal potential lines
The identifications of the potentials can be changed. In this exam-

ple we want to rename the potential from L4 to L6.
→ Double-click the left-hand potential L1. Then enter L4 for the

identification in the dialog window.
Then following prompt then opens.

Figure 17/3:
FluidSIM supports the automatic renaming of the potentials linked

with the source potential. If you answer “Yes”, the potential L1 on
the right-hand side will also be renamed L4.
→ Rename the potentials L2 and L3 to L5 and L6 in the same way.
→ Then enter the corresponding markers for the predecessors or

successors in the properties dialog windows for the potentials.
If the corresponding cross-references have the same markers in
the respective predecessor and successor pages, the potential
lines might look as follows.
Figure 17/4: Three horizontal potential lines with cross-references
17.2 Cables and wiring
Cables and wiring are represented in the circuit diagram by a spe-

cial cable symbol. All of the lines defined by the cable symbol are
assigned to a cable or to wiring. You can define for the symbol
whether it is a cable or wiring.
Wiring only summarizes the defined lines (wires) graphically in the

circuit diagram and is assigned the identification “W” by default.
Wiring is not listed in analyses such as cable maps and cable lists.
Unlike a cable, wiring cannot be assigned to a product. With wiring,
product information can only be saved in the lines.

If the cable symbol represents a cable then a cable object must be
assigned to the symbol. Product properties can be saved in the
cable object and are analyzed in cable maps and cable lists, etc.
Several cable symbols can reference the same cable object. This is
the case if, for example, a cable has to be spread over several
pages.
Figure 17/5: Cable symbol
→ Select the Cable menu item from the Insert menu or click
the button to define a cable or wiring.
This activates a mode that allows you to insert a cable symbol by

making two consecutive clicks. All of the lines that are defined by
the cable symbol are initially assigned to wiring.
If you want to use a cable instead of wiring you can assign a cable
object to the symbol using the properties dialog window for the
cable symbol.

Figure 17/6: Cable Symbol dialog window, Wires tab
Layer Defines the drawing layer for the cable symbol.
Cable – Wiring Defines whether the cable symbol represents a cable or wiring
comprising single wires. Wiring is not listed in cable maps, etc. If
Wiring is selected then an identification can be specified that can
be displayed with Display Identification.
If Cable is selected then an existing cable object can be assigned to

the cable symbol using a drop-down list. A new cable object can be
created using the Create New... button. Clicking Properties...
opens the properties dialog window for the selected cable object.
Wires In order to analyze cable maps the component connections that join
a wire must be determined. The connectors are automatically
entered in the list box if they can be uniquely assigned. If a unique
assignment is not possible, the relevant connector must be select-
ed manually via the list box. The identification for the individual

wires can also be entered. These are saved in the individual lines
(wires). The wire identifications are displayed at the cable symbol
using the Display button.
Reverse Direction The entries in the From and To column are automatically defined as
the direction of the wires when creating the cable symbol. Clicking
the Reverse Direction button reverses the directions of all of the
wires.
Renumber From: Clicking this button renumbers all of the wires defined by the cable
symbol, starting with the number entered in the list box.
Figure 17/7: Cable Symbol dialog window, Display Attributes tab
In the “Display Attributes” tab you can select the attributes of the
associated cable object that are to be displayed at the cable sym-
bol.

→ Click the Create New... button to create a new cable symbol.
The following dialog window opens.
Figure 17/8: New Cable dialog window
Containing Page Indicates the page where the cable object will be saved. This is
important if various cable symbols on different pages reference the
same cable object. The cable object is only saved with one page.
Identification Enter the identification for the cable here.
Number of Wires Enter the number of lines (wires) in the cable here. The number can
be higher than the underlying lines if, for example, a concrete cable
has unconnected wires. If the associated cable symbols overscore
more lines than are defined in the cable object, a warning is output
when the page is checked and the corresponding entries are high-
lighted in color in the cable lists.
After you specify the identification for the cable and confirm the
dialog, the cable object is generated and the cable symbol is as-
signed to it.
→ Click the “ Properties... ” button to edit the properties of the

cable object.

Figure 17/9: Properties dialog window: Cable tab
Number of Wires Defines the number of lines (wires) in the cable. The number can be
higher than the lines overscored by the associated cable symbols if,
for example, a concrete cable has unconnected wires. If the associ-
ated cable symbols overscore more lines than are defined in the
cable object, a warning is output when the page is checked and the
corresponding entries are highlighted in color in the cable lists.
The associated cable symbols are listed in rows in the table. You
can jump to the associated cable symbol using the “ Find... ”
button.
The User Defined Properties tab in the properties dialog window for
the cable symbol lists the cable-specific product properties such as
Cable Type and Length. These properties and the entries in the
Cable tab are analyzed in the cable map, etc.

17.2.1 Manage cables
All cables within a circuit can be listed and renamed using the
Manage Cables... menu item from the Page menu. You open the
properties dialog window for the relevant cable object using the
Properties... button.
You can also call up the cables of all circuits belonging to the pro-
ject using the Manage Cables... menu item from the Project
menu.
Figure 17/10: Manage Cables... dialog window
Containing Page Shows which circuit the cable is assigned to. You can edit this
assignment within a project.
You can add a new cable object to the project using the Create
New... button. Each cable object must be assigned to a page.

Clicking the Create New... button first opens the following dialog
window where you can define the assignment.
Figure 17/11: Browse Pages dialog window
After you click the Select button a dialog window opens where
you can define the name and number of wires for the new cable
object. The dialog window is described under Cables and wiring.
17.2.2 Insert cable map
You can insert an associated cable map for a cable into the circuit
diagram. You do this by inserting a cable map into a circuit diagram
and then assigning a cable to this map.
→ To insert a cable map into the circuit diagram select the Cable
Map menu item from the Insert menu. Alternatively you can

click the button. Select Cable Map in the selection dialog
window that opens.

circuit diagram where you want to insert the cable map. A dialog
window then opens where you can assign the relevant cable and
Figure 17/12: Cable Map dialog window
Cable Defines the relevant cable.
Properties... Opens the properties dialog window for the associated cable sym-
bol.

You can customize the appearance of the cable map in the “ Ap-
pearance” tab. You can see the effects of the settings straight away
in the preview on the right-hand side.
multiple pages.
17.2.3 Insert cable list
You can insert a cable list into a circuit diagram.
→ To insert a cable list into the circuit diagram select the Cable
List menu item from the Insert menu. Alternatively you can
click the button. Select Cable List in the selection dialog
window that opens.

circuit diagram where you want to insert the cable list. A dialog
window then opens where you can select the associated cable and

Figure 17/14: Cable List dialog window, Included Pages tab
Include This Page’s Compo- Lists only the cables in the associated circuit.
nents Only
Include All Project Files Lists all cables in the active project.
Include Selected Files: Lists all cables in the selected circuit in the active project.

Figure 17/15: Cable List dialog window, Appearance tab
You can customize the appearance of the cable map in the “ Ap-
pearance” tab. You can see the effects of the settings straight away
in the preview on the right-hand side.
If the cable symbols of a cable object overscore more lines than are
defined in the cable object, a warning is output when the page is
checked and the corresponding entries are highlighted in color in
the cable list.
multiple pages.

17.2.4 Insert wiring list
You can insert a wiring list into a circuit diagram.
→ To insert a wiring list into the circuit diagram select the Wir-
ing List menu item from the Insert menu. Alternatively you
can click the button. Select Wiring List in the selection di-
alog window that opens.

circuit diagram where you want to insert the wiring list. A dialog
window then opens where you can select the associated wiring and

Figure 17/17: Wiring List dialog window, Included Pages tab
Include This Page’s Compo- Lists only the wirings in the associated circuit.
nents Only
Include All Project Files Lists all wirings in the active project.
Include Selected Files: Lists all wirings in the selected circuit in the active project.

Figure 17/18: Wiring List dialog window, Appearance tab
You can customize the appearance of the wiring list in the “ Appear-
ance” tab. You can see the effects of the settings straight away in
the preview on the right-hand side.
multiple pages.

17.3 Terminals and terminal strips
17.3.1 Set terminals
You can set individual terminals or multiple terminals in one step.
→ Select the Terminal menu item from the Insert menu or

click the button to define an individual electric terminal.
This activates a mode that allows you to insert a terminal by click-

ing a free point on the electric line.
Figure 17/20:
As soon as you have set a new terminal in this way the dialog
window containing the settings for this terminal appears. You can
use this dialog window to assign the terminal to a terminal strip.
This assignment can also be made or changed later.

Figure 17/21: Terminal dialog window
Description Contains the description of the terminal or the terminal designa-

tion.
Display If this box is checked then the description entered will be displayed
beside the terminal.
Layer Defines the drawing layer for the terminal.
Pos. Defines the position of the terminal within the associated terminal
strip. An entry is only possible once the terminal has been assigned
to a terminal strip.
Internal # External Changes the direction of the terminal. The direction is indicated in
the circuit by an arrow that shows which connector is inside the
control cabinet and which is outside. The tip of the arrow points
into the control cabinet.
Show Direction If this box is checked then the direction arrow is displayed at the
terminal.
Terminal Strip Defines the terminal strip containing the terminal in question. The
list contains the terminal strips already created. You call up the

properties dialog window for the selected terminal strip using
Properties... . You can also create a new terminal strip using
Create New... .
Display Identification If this box is checked then the identification for the associated
terminal strip is displayed beside the terminal.
17.3.2 Set multiple terminals
As well as the option of setting individual terminals, FluidSIM also

offers a mode that allows you to set multiple terminals one after
the other. You can keep inserting terminals by simply clicking on
the electric lines until you leave the mode again.
→ To insert multiple terminals select the Multiple Terminals...

menu item from the Insert menu or click the button.
Figure 17/22:
The operation begins with a dialog window where you can make
some settings for the new terminals. Above all you need to first
select an existing terminal strip or create a new one. If a suitable

terminal strip does not already exist then a prompt to create a new
one will automatically appear.
Figure 17/23: Define Multiple Terminals dialog window
Description Defines how the new terminals are to be numbered. The Enumerate
Manually option allows you to specify a start number from which
the numbering continues. Otherwise a free terminal from the se-
lected terminal strip is automatically used. The start number “2”
was specified in the example shown.
Display If this box is checked then the description entered will be displayed
beside the terminal.
Direction Defines the direction of the new terminals. The direction is indicat-
ed in the circuit by an arrow that shows which connector is inside
the control cabinet and which is outside. The tip of the arrow points
into the control cabinet. The direction can also be changed later
using the properties dialog window for the individual terminals.
Layer Defines the drawing layer for the terminals.
Terminal Strip Defines the terminal strip containing the terminals in question. The
list contains the terminal strips already created. You call up the
properties dialog window for the selected terminal strip using

Properties... . You can also create a new terminal strip using
Create New... .
Display Identification If this box is checked then the identification for the associated
terminal strip is displayed beside the new terminals.
17.3.3 Create terminal strips
FluidSIM does not treat terminal strips as visible objects within the
circuit pages which explains why they cannot be interactively
selected using the mouse in order to highlight them, delete them or
change their properties. Terminal strips can either be managed via
the associated terminals or using the Manage Terminal Strips...
menu item under Page or Project .
A terminal strip is always part of a specific circuit. To define a new

terminal strip you must therefore define a circuit file in addition to
the description and number of terminals.
Figure 17/24: New Terminal Strip dialog window
All properties can also be changed later at any time. You open the
properties dialog window for a terminal strip via any terminal in
that terminal strip using the Properties... button.

Figure 17/25: Terminal Strip dialog window
External Target If the target of a terminal inside the control cabinet is unique due to
the wiring, FluidSIM automatically enters the identification for the
connected component. Otherwise the list contains the identifica-
tions of all objects that can be reached from the terminal. The
target search can be controlled by selecting a junction symbol as a
T distributor.
Internal Target The targets of the terminals outside the control cabinet are listed
here. As with the internal targets, unique links are automatically
entered.

Find... Jumps to the associated terminal in the circuit diagram.
17.3.4 Manage terminal strips
All terminal strips within a circuit can be listed and renamed using
the Manage Terminal Strips... menu item from the Page menu.
You open the properties dialog window for the relevant terminal
strip using the Properties... button.
You can also call up the cables of all terminal strips belonging to
the project using the Manage Terminal Strips... menu item from
the Project menu.
Figure 17/26: Manage Terminal Strips... dialog window
Containing Page Shows which circuit the terminal strip is assigned to. You can edit
this assignment within a project.

You can add a new terminal strip to the project using the Create
New... button. Each terminal strip must be assigned to a page.
Clicking the Create New... button first opens the following dialog
window where you can define the assignment.
Figure 17/27: Browse Pages dialog window
After you click the Select button a dialog window opens where
you can define the properties of the new terminal strip. The dialog
window is described under Create terminal strips.
17.4 Terminal diagram
You can insert an associated terminal diagram for a terminal strip

into the circuit diagram. You do this by inserting a terminal diagram
into a circuit diagram and then assigning a terminal strip to this
diagram.

→ Select the Terminal diagram menu item from the Insert
menu or click the button to insert a terminal diagram into
the circuit diagram. Alternatively you can click the button.
Select Terminal diagram in the selection dialog window that
opens.

circuit diagram where you want to insert the terminal diagram. A
dialog window then opens where you can assign the relevant
terminal strip and customize the appearance.
Figure 17/28: Terminal diagram - Properties dialog window
Terminal Strip Defines the associated terminal strip.
Properties... Opens the properties dialog window for the associated terminal
strip.

You can customize the appearance of the terminal diagram in the
“Print Options” tab. You can see the effects of the settings straight
away in the preview on the right-hand side.
multiple pages.
The entries in the “Description”, “Identification” and “Connector”

columns are taken from the object properties of the associated
targets.
17.4.1 Set links
You can set so-called links in a terminal strip. These links are drawn
in the circuit diagram as regular electric lines and marked as links.
The representation of the T distributors can be customized using
their properties dialog window.
The following example shows a circuit diagram with a terminal strip

X1 with 10 terminals and the associated terminal diagram. A link
plug is to be placed at level “1” between terminals “7” and “8” and
at level “2” between terminals “8” and “9”, and a wire link is to be
placed between terminals “9” and “10”.

Figure 17/29:
→ Double-click the electric line between terminals “7” and “8”.

Figure 17/30:
The properties dialog window for the electric line opens. The op-
tions for setting the links are in the top right:
Figure 17/31: Detail of the Line (electric) dialog window
Link Defines that this line is to be treated as a link.
Link Plug Defines that the link is a link plug.
Level Specifies the level if a link plug was selected.
Wire Link Defines that the link is a wire link.
→ Set “Link”, “Link Plug” and “Level 3”.
FluidSIM tracks the line across one distributor point at most. This
means that the specified link will find the contacts “7” and “8”. This
link will be represented in the terminal diagram as follows.

Figure 17/32:
→ Proceed in the same way to set a link plug between “8” and
“9” at level “2” and a wire link between “9” and “10”.
The terminal diagram then has the following appearance.

Figure 17/33:
17.5 Contact images
The contact images can be displayed within a circuit diagram be-

neath relay coils and similar symbols. The contact images list all the
contacts of the associated relay coil and show which current paths
these contacts are in. The division of the page or circuit diagram
can be defined using the page dividers.
→ To do this, select the Display Contact Images menu item

from the View menu.
The contact images of the current circuit diagram are shown or

hidden.
Contact images can be highlighted, moved and aligned like other

symbols.

Figure 17/34:
You can have all of the contacts in a contact image displayed in a

list and customize the appearance by double-clicking the contact
image or highlighting the contact image and selecting the Proper-
ties... menu item from the Edit menu.

Figure 17/35: Contact Image dialog window
You can customize the representation of the contact image in the

“Print Options” tab.
The “Contacts” tab lists all of the associated contacts. You can
jump to the corresponding contact in the circuit diagram using the
Jump to Target button.

Circuit input and output
Chapter 18
18. Circuit input and output
18.1 Print circuit diagram and parts list
FluidSIM circuits and parts lists can be printed by opening the Print
dialog window via the Print... menu item on the File menu.
In FluidSIM a parts list is the representation of a circuit as a table. If

you wish to print an individual parts list then the corresponding
circuit must be shown in the parts list display.

Figure 18/1: Print dialog window:
Printer Select the desired output device from the list of the available print-
ers.
Properties... This button enables you to open the dialog window for setting the
printer options.
Print to File Activate this option if you wish to write the print data to a file.
Print Project Files When you work in a project you can select which circuits and parts
lists are to be printed.
Copies

Select the number of copies. If the printout consists of multiple
pages you can cause FluidSIM to print a correspondingly sorted
sequence.
Scale You can increase or decrease the output size by entering a scaling
factor. If the dimensions of the area to be printed are larger than
the printable area on the paper then the printout is spread across
multiple pages (tiled). You can see the page divisions in the print
preview.
Note: Please note that it may not always be possible to precisely

comply with the page margins. Therefore you should plan a certain
amount of leeway for the page margin.
Page Here you can specify additional margins in order to manually cus-
tomize the print area.
Margins You can select which page the print preview displays.
18.2 Import DXF file
Files saved in the DXF format can be imported and retain most of
their element attributes. If several special points were taken into
account when creating the drawing using a CAD program then
FluidSIM can easily expand the symbol library.
18.3 Export circuit
The FluidSIM circuits can be saved as a file with a variety of differ-

ent formats. The BMP, JPG, GIF, WMF, PNG, DXF, TIF and PDF for-
mats are available. Once you have selected the Export... menu
item from the File menu a dialog window opens where you can
define the different settings for the export. The settings depend on
the format selected.

Figure 18/2: Export Page dialog window
You are then prompted to select a file name or enter a new one.
Select a suitable resolution for the image file.
Please note that a high resolution generates extremely large files

which mean the export may take longer. However you can cancel
the image export at any time.

Options
Chapter 19
19. Options
You can access the various program settings in the Options dialog
window via the Options... menu item on the Tools menu.
19.1 General
Figure 19/1: Options dialog window: General tab
Display Snap Radius In order to simplify connection of connectors FluidSIM draws a

small circle around the connectors on the circuit symbols. Deacti-
vate the Display Snap Radius option in order to disable the display
of the snap-in circles.
Show contact number Activate the option Show contact number, to show, additional to
the designation of the corresponding coil, the individual contact

number. Changing this option doesn’t affect already existing con-
tacts but defines the default behavior for newly inserted contacts.
Frame fluidic identification Activate the Frame fluidic identification option if you want fluidic
identifications to be framed automatically. This simplifies the
depiction of circuits in accordance with standards.
Frame Electric Identification Activate the Frame Electric Identification option if you want electri-
cal identifications to be framed automatically. This simplifies the
depiction of circuits in accordance with standards.
Zoom Here you can set how you can zoom in or out of the page view with
the mouse.
Show actuated make contact When this option is activated, make switches that are actuated in
as break contact their initial position are displayed as break switches. Conversely,
break switches that are actuated in their initial position are dis-
played as make switches.
Grid Here you can set the grid width and the style. To display the grid,
select the Show Grid menu item on the View menu.
As well as absolute values such as “mm” you can also specify the
relative basic unit length “M”.

19.2 Save
Figure 19/2: Options dialog window: Save tab
Compress Files FluidSIM normally compresses the saved files in order to save
space on the disk. If you deactivate the option the files are saved as
XML files without compression. You can find further information in
the Circuit files section.
Create Backup Files The “Create Backup Files” option causes the previous versions of
saved files are created with the bak file suffix. This enables you to
restore previous versions.
Save New Projects as Single Project files generally consist of links to the files contained therein.
File However, where desired FluidSIM can also save the project along
with all of the associated circuit files in one single file. This serves
to simplify passing on or archiving the project, among other things.
You can set whether a project saves links or all of the associated

files using the Project dialog window – Properties of the project.
This option defines the default setting for new projects.
Create Folder For New Pro- A folder with the project name where all project files are stored is
jects automatically generated when a new project is created if this op-
tion is active.
19.3 Folder Locations
Figure 19/3: Options dialog window: Folder Locations tab
Page Files This is the default path for opening and saving circuits.
Project Files This is the default path for opening and saving projects.
Library Files This is the default path for opening and saving libraries.

Drawing Frames This is the default path for opening and saving drawing frames.
19.4 Language
Figure 19/4: Options dialog window: Language tab
Program Defines the languages for the program interface including dialog
windows and messages.
19.5 Dimension
This tab is used to define the default settings for the dimensions.
You can find further information under Dimension.

Figure 19/5: Options dialog window: Dimension tab
All of the settings are only applied to newly generated dimensions.

They have no effect on existing dimensions in the circuit.
Layer Defines the drawing layer where the newly generated dimensions
are placed.
Automatic Dimensioning Activates and deactivates automatic dimensioning. If this option is

activated then the displayed dimension value is automatically
adapted if the dimension is scaled.
Unit Defines the unit to be used for the dimension.
Show Unit Defines whether the unit should be displayed.
Decimals Defines the number of decimal places.
Scale Factor

Determines the factor by which the real length is multiplied for the
displayed value. This is necessary if you are creating a drawing with
a scale other than 1:1.
19.6 Cross Reference Representation
Figure 19/6: Options dialog window: Cross Reference Representa-

tion tab
This tab is used to define the default settings for the cross-
reference representation. You can find further information under
Cross-reference representation.
The settings are only applied to newly generated projects or cir-

cuits. They have no effect on existing objects.

Example Illustrates the effects of the settings using an example.
Reset Resets the settings to the settings defined in FluidSIM.
19.7 Connector Links
Figure 19/7: Options dialog window: Connector Links tab
Allow connections between Only connectors of the same type can be connected if this option is
same connector types only active. For example a line from an electric connector to a pneumatic
connector cannot be created in this case.
FluidSIM supports the automatic connection of connectors. The

following settings define which connections should be automatical-
ly created.

Connect Automatically FluidSIM supports the automatic connection of connectors. You can
define the automatic connection for each connector type individual-
ly.
Horizontal Connectors that are on one horizontal line will be automatically

connected when a symbol is inserted or moved.
Vertical Connectors that are on one vertical line will be automatically con-
nected when a symbol is inserted or moved.
19.8 Warnings
Figure 19/8: Options dialog window: Warnings tab
Show Warnings Different types of warnings that FluidSIM should or should not
deliver can be activated and deactivated here. These warnings

include “Duplicated identification labels” and “Superimposed
objects”.
Enable Background Check All of the circuits will be checked during editing if this option is
active. Only the criteria that would lead to the warnings specified
under “Show Warnings” are checked. Objects that caused an error
are highlighted in red in the circuit. If this option is not active then
the check must be initiated manually using the Page – Check
Drawing menu.
19.9 Automatic Updates
Figure 19/9: Options dialog window: Automatic Updates tab
Check for updates at startup FluidSIM can search on the Internet for a new version when the
program starts. You can activate or deactivate the automatic search
here.

Check for updates now... As soon as there is an Internet connection you can use this button
to initiate the search for a new FluidSIM version.
19.10 Simulation
Figure 19/10: Options dialog window: Simulation tab
Slow-motion factor You can use this factor to set the ratio of time in which the simulat-
ed processes should take place. A value of “1:1” means simulation
in real time; “1:10” would mean that the simulation takes place in
slow motion, in this case ten times slower than in reality. A ratio of
“1:0.1”, for example, would mean the simulation is accelerated ten
times. Specifications for real time or accelerated processes can only
be fulfilled if the computer has sufficient processing power.
Line colors During the simulation, the pneumatic, hydraulic, electrical, and
digital lines will be colored according to their state. You can cus-

tomize the colors for each state. Electrical lines additionally offer
the possibility to choose if the line color is determined by current or
potential.
Treat connection lines as By default, pneumatic and hydraulic lines are seen as ideal connec-
ideal (no restistance, etc.) tions, meaning during simulation pressure loss is not considered.
Optional physical models can be chosen in the property dialog of
the corresponding lines. For the schematic design these models,
being very complex to simulate, are not necessary. Using this
global option, the simulation is instructed to ignore the values
assigned to the lines.
In digital technology, it is useful if unused inputs on AND, NAND,

and NOT components are automatically set to Hi. Otherwise, for
example, an AND gate with three inputs would not function as
expected if only two inputs were wired. So that the circuit does not
become cluttered with unnecessary permanently Hi level signals,
FluidSIM sets unused inputs on the relevant components to Hi
automatically. To prevent misunderstandings regarding unused
digital inputs, FluidSIM can display a corresponding warning at the
start of every simulation.
Note that these values are only used if no others are defined in the
page or project properties.

19.11 GRAFCET
Figure 19/11: Options dialog window: GRAFCET tab
GRAFCET mode Here you can set the mode that FluidSIM will apply when handling
GRAFCETs during the simulation.
GrafEdit (GRAFCET is not In this mode, GRAFCETs are treated as drawings only. They are not
simulated) incorporated into the simulation. See also Drawing only (GrafEdit).
GrafView (GRAFCET visual- This mode uses GRAFCETs for visual presentation of the simulation.
izes simulation) The defined actions, however, have no effect on the simulation. In
particular, they do not in any way control the fluidic or electrical
components. See also Observation (GrafView).
GrafControl (GRAFCET con- In this mode, the GRAFCET has access to all the circuit variables
trols simulation) that can be set from outside. This allows it to switch valves over or
to adjust throttle valves See also Control (GrafControl).

Enable monitoring When this option is switched on, the GRAFCET monitors the proper
functioning of a fluidic or electrical circuit. For this purpose, you can
formulate conditions in the actions which will be checked during
the simulation. For more details, see Monitoring with GRAFCET
actions.
Note that these settings are only used if no others are defined in
the page or project properties.
19.12 DDE Connection
Figure 19/12: Options dialog window: DDE Connection tab
Here you can set the default values for the DDE interface.
Server This is the server name, by which other via DDE linked applications
can contact FluidSIM.

Enable DDE connection Enables the DDE connectivity.
Note that the server name is a global setting of the specific system
environment and is not saved with the circuit data. If you want to
use the DDE interface in other environments, ensure that the DDE
options are adapted accordingly. In particular, ensure that the DDE
connection is activated, because it is switched off by default for
security reasons.
19.13 Environment parameters
Ambient temperature The ambient temperature influences different physical models, e.g
the temperature-dependent NTC-resistor or the circuit breaker.
Atmospheric pressure In pneumatics all models use absolute pressures. Indicated pres-
sures are shown as relative pressures compared to the selected
atmospheric pressure.

Figure 19/13: Options dialog window: Environment parameters tab
Here you can set the default values for the environment parame-
ters.

19.14 Fluid properties
Figure 19/14: Options dialog window: Fluid properties tab
Fluid type Fluid properties influence different physical models. Density and
viscosity in particular influence the calculation of resistance e.g. for
valves. This list contains typical oils and other fluids. If you select a
predefined fluid, the listed values will be set accordingly.

19.15 Sound
When you click the “Sound” tab in the Options... menu, a dialog
box appears with parameters for the sound settings:
Figure 19/15: Options dialog window: Sound tab
Enable sound You can activate/deactivate an audible signal for the components
Switch/Contact, Relay, Valve, Cylinder, and Buzzer.

19.16 Text Sizes
Figure 19/16: Options dialog window: Text Sizes tab
This tab defines the font sizes to be used for objects newly inserted
into the circuit diagram.
Label/Attribute This group lists the font sizes used for identifications and cross-
references, etc.
List/Table This group lists the font sizes used for analyses and tables.

Menu overview
Chapter 20
20. Menu overview
20.1 File
New
New / File...
Opens a new window for creating a new circuit drawing.
New / Project...
Opens the dialog window for creating a new project.
Open
Open / File...
Opens a new window for selecting an existing circuit drawing.
Open / Project...
Opens the dialog window for selecting an existing project.
Add
Adds files, etc. to the active project.

Add / New Page
Creates a new circuit file and adds it to the active project.
Add / New Parts List...

Creates a new parts list and adds it to the active project.
Add / Existing Files...

Opens the dialog window for selecting existing files to be added to
the active project.
Close
Closes the active window or project, etc.
Close / File...
Closes the active window.
Close / Project...
Closes the active project.
Save File
Saves the circuit diagram in the active window to disk.
Save File As...

Saves the circuit diagram in the active window to disk under a new
name.
Save Project
Saves the active project.

Save Project As...
Saves the active project under a new name on the data storage
medium. Files that are within the project folder are duplicated while
references to external files are left. With external file references you
must therefore consider that changes to these files affect all pro-
jects containing them.
Save as Component Library...

Saves the active project as a library. As a result a new library sym-
bol is generated for every circuit. The new library bears the name of
the project with the lib file suffix.
DXF Import...
Opens the dialog window for selecting a saved DXF file. The select-
ed file is subsequently converted into a FluidSIM circuit diagram.
The original file remains unchanged.
Export...
Exports the circuit diagram in the active window to the data storage
medium as a BMP, JPG, GIF, WMF, PNG, DXF or TIF file.
Page Setup...
Sets up the printer properties for a page to be printed.
Print Preview
Opens a print preview as a page view.
Print...
Opens the FluidSIM Print dialog window to set the print options for
the active circuit.

Recent Files
A file can be selected for opening from a list of the recently opened
files.
Recent Projects
The most recently opened projects can be selected for opening
from a list.
Exit
Ends FluidSIM.
20.2 Edit
Undo
Undoes the last editing action for the active circuit.
Redo
Takes back the last undo-action for the active circuit.
Cut
Deletes the selected objects and adds them to the clipboard.
Copy
Copies the selected objects to the clipboard
Paste
Pastes the objects from the clipboard into the active circuit.

Delete
Deletes the selected objects from the active circuit.
Select All
Selects all of the objects from the active circuit.
Group
Groups the selected objects.
Create Macro Object

Creates a macro object out of the selected objects.
Create Cross-reference
Creates a cross-reference.
Ungroup/Break Off
Ungroups the selected groups or macro objects.
Enable Scale
Activates or deactivates the “enable scaling” mode which enables
the scaling of symbols with the help of the mouse pointer.
Enable Rotate
Activates or deactivates the “enable rotate” mode which enables
the rotation of symbols with the help of the mouse pointer.
Edit Poly Line

Activates or deactivates the “Edit Polyline” mode that allows you to
edit a polyline.

Align
Aligns the selected objects with each other.
Rotate
Rotates the selected objects by 90, 180 or 270 degrees anti-
clockwise. Grouped objects are rotated around the center point of
the group rectangle.
Mirror
Mirrors the selected objects horizontally or vertically. Grouped
objects are mirrored along the axis of the group rectangle.
Properties...
Opens the Properties dialog window for the selected circuit sym-
bols in order to enter the component properties.
The Connector dialog window is opened for the selected compo-

nent connector enabling you to enter the connector properties.
When a line segment is highlighted a dialog window opens ena-

bling you to enter the line properties.
If multiple objects are selected then a dialog window with a limited

selection of properties appears. It only contains those properties
which affect all of the selected objects.
20.3 Insert
Find Symbol Description...

Opens the search dialog for selecting a symbol via its appearance
or its description.

Conduction Line...
Opens a dialog window that defines the settings for one or more
conduction lines that are to be inserted in the circuit diagram after
the dialog window is confirmed.
Interruption/Potential...
Adds an interruption or an electric potential to the circuit diagram.
Parts List
Inserts a parts list into the circuit diagram.
Terminal
Inserts a terminal into the circuit diagram.
Multiple Terminals...
Inserts multiple terminals into the circuit diagram.
Terminal diagram
Inserts a terminal diagram into the circuit diagram.
Cable
Inserts a cable into the circuit diagram.
Cable Map
Inserts a cable map into the circuit diagram.
Cable List
Inserts a cable list into the circuit diagram.

Wiring List
Inserts a wiring list into the circuit diagram.
Tube List
Inserts a tube list into the circuit diagram.
20.4 Draw
This menu contains functions for freely drawing graphical elements

such as lines, rectangles, circles, etc. as well as for inserting texts
and images.
Line
Draws a line by defining two defined end points.
Poly Line
Draws a polyline by defining the vertices with successive mouse
clicks. The drawing operation can be cancelled by pressing the
Esc key or clicking the right mouse button. The last vertex must
be set with a double-click.
Rectangle
Draws a rectangle by defining two diagonally opposite corner
points.
Circle
Draws a circle by defining a middle point and a radius.

Ellipse
Draws an ellipse by defining a middle point and two radii on paral-
lel axes.
Text
Inserts a text at the mouse position.
Picture
Inserts an image at the mouse position.
Dimension
Inserts a dimension symbol.
20.5 Page
Check Drawing
Checks the active circuit drawing for drawing errors.
Paper Size...
Opens a dialog window enabling you to set the paper size.
Manage Terminal Strips...

Opens a dialog window enabling you to manage the terminal strips
in the circuit.
Manage Cables...
Opens a dialog window enabling you to manage the cable objects
in the circuit.

Properties...
Opens a dialog window enabling you to set the circuit properties.
20.6 Execute
Stop
Switches the currently active circuit into Edit Mode.
Start
Starts the simulation (animation) in the currently active circuit.
Pause
Pauses the simulation in the currently active circuit without exiting
Simulation Mode.
If Pause is clicked when in Edit Mode, the currently active circuit

switches to Simulation Mode without starting the simulation. This
allows you to set component states before starting the simulation.
Reset
Resets a circuit to its initial state when a simulation is running or
paused. The simulation is then restarted immediately.
Single Step
Stops the simulation after a small step. In other words, the simula-
tion is started for a short period of time before being switched back
into pause mode ( ). You can switch into single step mode directly
from an actively running simulation.

Simulate until State Change
Starts the simulation and runs it until a state change happens; the
simulation is then paused ( ). A state change happens when a
cylinder piston moves against a stop, a valve switches over, or a
relay or a switch is actuated. You can switch into state change
mode directly from an actively running simulation.
Next topic
Switches to the next topic in a presentation.
20.7 Didactics
Component description
Opens the help page for the selected component. It contains the
DIN symbol for the component, a short description of the compo-
nent function, the terminal designations, and a list of any adjusta-
ble parameters, with value ranges for those parameters.
Tutorial ’Simulating with FluidSIM'

Opens the tutorial “Simulating with FluidSIM”.
Component Library
Opens the reference containing information about the components
in the component library.
Didactics Material
Opens an overview of the didactics material. If you copied the film
files onto your hard disk during installation, the list of training film
chapters will also appear here.

Circuits for exercises (TP)...
Opens a dialog box with exercise circuits for the Festo technology
packages.
Presentation...
Opens a dialog box that you can use to retrieve and create presen-
tations. Presentations allow you to combine separate training
topics into a cohesive teaching unit.
Extended Presentation...
Opens a dialog box that you can use to retrieve existing presenta-
tions in Microsoft PowerPoint format. The presentation files of the
extended presentations are located in the ppx subfolder of your
FluidSIM installation. You can create your own PowerPoint presen-
tations and add them by saving them in “ppt” or “pps” format to
the ppx folder.
20.8 Diagnosis
Show Diagnosis tool strip

Shows/hides the diagnosis toolbar. The toolbar contains infor-
mation about any failure configuration that may have been select-
ed, a button for carrying out repairs, defective components, and
buttons with virtual measuring instruments.
Insert virtual measuring instrument: Voltage U

Inserts a virtual measuring instrument into the circuit diagram to
measure a voltage.
Insert virtual measuring instrument: Current I

measure a current.

Insert virtual measuring instrument: Pressure p
measure a pressure. The measuring tips for it can be connected to
either a pneumatic component or a hydraulic component.
Insert virtual measuring instrument: Flow q

measure a flow rate. The measuring tip for it can be connected to
either a pneumatic component or a hydraulic component.
Insert universal virtual measuring instrument

Inserts a universal virtual measuring instrument into the circuit
diagram. You can then use the Properties dialog window of the
measuring instrument to select the variable you want to measure.
Activate repair mode

Activates the repair mode. This function is only available if a failure
configuration has been selected in the circuit diagram and the
Simulation Mode is active. A component that was previously given
a failure can be repaired by clicking it. The repair mode is deac-
tivated again after each attempted repair.
Manage failure configurations...

Opens a dialog window where the failure configuration of the circuit
diagram can be managed. Each failure configuration includes a list
of components for which specific failures have been selected.
20.9 Project
Add Current Window

Adds the active window to the file list of the open project.

Remove Current Window
Removes the active window from the file list of the open project.
Manage Terminal Strips...

Opens a dialog window enabling you to manage the terminal strips
in the project.
Manage Cables...
Opens a dialog window enabling you to manage the cable objects
in the project.
Manage Cross References...

Opens a dialog window enabling you to manage the cross-
references in the project.
Properties...
Opens the dialog window for entering the project properties.
20.10 View
Circuit Diagram
Switches from the parts list view to the circuit diagram view.
Parts List
Switches to the parts list view.
Library
Shows or hides the libraries window.

Project
Shows or hides the window for managing the project files.
Standard Size
Displays the circuit diagram in its original size.
Previous View
Displays the previous view of the circuit diagram. Repeatedly
activating this function switches back and forth between the views
previously used.
Fit to Window
Set the zoom level to fit the entire circuit diagram into the window.
View Detail
Defines the new view by drawing a rectangle while holding down
the left mouse button.
Zoom In
Zooms the view of the circuit diagram in by one step. Three steps
correspond approximately to doubling the zoom factor.
Zoom Out
Zooms the view of the circuit diagram out by one step. Three steps
correspond approximately to halving the zoom factor.
Hide didactics explanations

Shows/hides the explanatory text from teaching materials. The
explanatory text can be found in pages that can be viewed via the

menu option Didactics Pneumatic Didactics Material or Di-
dactics Hydraulic Didactics Material .
Full screen (press ESC to exit)

Some teaching materials include films. These films can be shown in
full-screen mode. You can exit the full-screen mode using the ESC
key.
Show Page Borders

Shows or hides the page borders in the form of a red rectangle. This
rectangle displays the borders of the paper format defined on the
Paper Size... menu. Using the print preview you can decide
whether and how the drawing is distributed among multiple sheets
when printing.
Show Grid
Shows a background grid in the active circuit window. The grid
settings can be made in the General tab under the Options...
menu item from the Tools menu.
Show Rulers
Shows or hides the rulers in the active circuit window.
Show Page Dividers

Shows or hides the page dividers in columns and rows. Cross-
references can refer to the column and row containing a symbol.
The position and number of the columns and rows can be interac-
tively defined via the page dividers shown.

Quantity Values...
Opens a dialog box for display of quantity values. Here you can
define how each quantity value listed (“velocity”, “pressure”,
“current”, ...) is to be displayed (“ None ”, “ Individual ”, “ All ”).
Show Flow Direction

If this option is active, small arrows are placed on lines as a visual
indication of the flow direction.
Show Flow Animation

If this option is active, lines are animated like conveyor belts as a
visual representation of the flow.
GRAFCET...
Opens a dialog box for display of GRAFCET descriptions. Here you
can set whether to display the descriptions or the formulas of
GRAFCET elements. Note that this option may overwrite the specific
settings of individual elements.
Display Current Path Numbering

When this option is active, the current path designations are shown
in the electrical circuits. The division of the page or circuit diagram
can be defined using the page dividers.
Show Connector Descriptions

Shows or hides the connector descriptions. The Display option can
be selected in the properties dialog window for the connectors. This
option is only evaluated if “ Individual ” was selected.
Show Connector Descriptions / All

Shows all connector descriptions regardless of the settings at the
connectors.

Show Connector Descriptions / Individual
Shows only the connector descriptions for those connectors with
the Display option activated.
Show Connector Descriptions / None

Hides all connector descriptions regardless of the settings at the
connectors.
Show Terminal Directions

Shows or hides the direction arrows at the terminals. The tip of the
arrow points into the control cabinet here.
Show Reference Arrow

Shows/hides the reference arrows on measuring in-
struments to indicate the direction of current.
Show Reference Arrow / All

Shows all arrows regardless of the settings at the terminals.
Show Reference Arrow / Individual

Shows only the arrows for those terminals with the Show Direction
option activated.
Show Reference Arrow / None

Hides all arrows regardless of the settings at the terminals.
Display Contact Images

Shows or hides the contact images.

Drawing Layers...
Opens a Drawing Layers dialog window enabling you to set the
properties of the drawing layers.
20.11 Library
Setup units...
Defines, which unit system should be used by default.
Create New Library...

Creates a new library.
Add Existing Library...

Opens the dialog window enabling you to select a saved library file
with the lib file suffix. The library saved in the file is added to the
library window.
Add Existing Symbol Folder...

Opens the dialog window for selecting an existing folder. The entire
contents of the selected folder, including all of the circuit symbols
and sub-folders contained therein are displayed as a library.
Close Current Library

Removes the active library from the list in the library window. The
library file is not deleted by this action and can be opened again
using the Library menu and the Add Existing Library... menu
item.

Rename Active Library...
Opens a dialog window for entering the name of the library. This
function is only available to libraries which the user has created.
For write-protected libraries the folder name is shown in the tab.
Sort Current Library Alphabetically

Sorts the contents of the active library alphabetically. This function
is only available to libraries which the user has created. Write-
protected libraries are automatically sorted and cannot be resorted
by the user.
20.12 Tools
Options...
Opens the dialog window with program settings, file paths and
language options.
Expert Mode
Switches Expert Mode on and off. Expert Mode provides advanced
options for editing and simulation.
Restore Defaults...
Resets the program settings to the default values. This enables you
to undo unintentional settings made.
Note: Use this function if you feel that FluidSIM is behaving unex-
pectedly or files and windows have suddenly disappeared.

20.13 Window
New Window
Opens a window with an additional view of the active window.
Navigation Pane
Opens an overview window with a scaled-down view of the entire
circuit diagram. The currently visible area of the active window
appears as a white area. The non-visible area of the drawing is
shaded grey. By drawing a rectangle in the overview window with
the mouse pointer you can define the section of the circuit diagram
displayed in the active window. Simply left-clicking on the overview
window moves the visible area while retaining the zoom level.
Cascade
Arranges the windows so that they overlap.
Tile Horizontally
Arranges the windows into horizontal tiles.
Tile Vertically
Arranges the windows next to each other.
Close All
Closes all open windows.

20.14 Help
Contents
Displays the contents of the FluidSIM help pages.
Index
Displays the index of the FluidSIM help pages.
Search
Displays the search dialog for the FluidSIM help pages.
Register as user...
Opens a dialog box via which you can register if you would like
assistance and information about FluidSIM.
Check for updates...

As soon as there is an Internet connection you can use this menu
item to initiate the search for a new FluidSIM version.
About...
Displays the FluidSIM program information.

Functional diagram
Chapter 21
21. Functional diagra m
You can find the function diagram in the standard FluidSIM library.
You can apply the functions from the Edit menu to the function
diagram. Double-click the function diagram or open the Functional
diagram using the Properties... menu item on the Edit menu.
The buttons in the upper toolbar of the editor are for editing a
function diagram. The following six buttons determine the editing
mode:
Edit Mode
Draw diagram curves
Insert signal elements
Insert text boxes
Draw signal lines and insert signal connections
Insert additional signal lines
The selected mode is highlighted in white or displayed as a pressed

button. shows that signal lines can be drawn in the diagram
area by clicking, for example.
If you hover the mouse pointer over a button for a short period of
time then a short description is displayed.

Figure 21/1:
21.1 Edit Mode
This mode serves to adjust the objects in the function diagram.

Elements in the diagram can be moved. Changing the size of text
boxes is only possible in this mode.
Movement and dragging operations can be cancelled using the

Esc key.
If the mouse pointer is moved outside the window area while the
left mouse button is held down the view automatically scrolls.
Double-clicking on a diagram element (diagram row, text box,

signaling element, etc.) opens a dialog window in which you can
make the desired adjustments.
21.1.1 Set diagram properties
Clicking on the button opens a dialog window in

which you can set the diagram properties.

Figure 21/2:
Text columns – Number If the number of text columns is changed than all of the table text
boxes are distributed horizontally and evenly.
Text columns – Width If the width of the text columns is changed than all of the table text
boxes are distributed horizontally and evenly.
Diagram columns – Number The diagram columns are located on the right-hand side of the
function diagram. The diagram curves can be drawn in this area.
The number of diagram columns can also be changed by dragging
the mouse pointer to the right-hand edge of the diagram.
Diagram columns – Width Defines the width of the diagram columns.
Color The color which the grid lines are drawn in the diagram area.
Row height Defines the row height of all of the rows.
21.1.2 Table textboxes
The table textboxes are located on the left-hand side of the function
diagram.

Figure 21/3:
Double-clicking on a table textbox opens the corresponding dialog

window.
Figure 21/4:
Font size The font size of the text to be shown.
Color A selection from sixteen standard colors for the text to be dis-
played.
Frame If this field is selected then a frame is drawn around the textbox.
Width The width of the selected table column can be changed by dragging
the mouse pointer.
Height The height of the selected table column can be changed by drag-
ging the mouse pointer.
Horizontal adjustment The following alignment options are available: “Left” “Center” and
“Right”.

Vertical adjustment The following alignment options are available: “Top”, “Center” and
“Bottom”
Alignment within a table cell If a text within a textbox should resemble a table then set a tab stop
between the text parts. The text is displayed in the textbox in ac-
cordance with the number of tab stops and the specified horizontal
and vertical alignment. To enter tab stops hold down the Ctrl
key.
Examples:
1.
2.
Insert text boxes

21.1.3 Adjust the presentation of the diagrams
The area in which curves can be drawn is located on the right-hand

side of a diagram row.
Figure 21/5:
Double-clocking on this area opens a corresponding window in

which you can define the appearance of the drawing area. Please
ensure that no diagram element, such as a signaling element, for
example, is underneath the mouse pointer.
Figure 21/6:
States – Number The entry defines the number of states and thus the number of
horizontal lines in the diagram row.

States – Base state Horizontal lines are drawn through the base state with a thin pencil.
Numbering – Start column The start column defines which column the numbering should
begin with.
Numbering – Start number The start number defines which number the numbering should
begin with.
Numbering – Number The number specified how many steps need to be numbered.
Numbering – Step width Defines the step width between two numbers.
Numbering – Loop If this field is selected then an equals sign and the start number are
always displayed after the last number.
Representation – Display If this field is selected then two arrows are displayed.
arrows
Representation – Display grid If this field is selected then the background grid is displayed.
Representation – Display text If this field is selected then a textbox is shown which can serve as a
1 label. This textbox belongs to the selected row and cannot be
moved to another row.
Representation – Display text If this field is selected then an additional textbox is shown which
2 can serve as a label. This textbox belongs to the selected row and
cannot be moved to another row.
Representation – Line color Sets the color of the diagram lines.
21.2 Draw diagram curve
In this mode diagram curves can be drawn. Supporting points

can only be inserted on the grid. A supporting point is drawn at
every left-click.
1. 2. 3. 4.

If you hold down the left mouse button then supporting points can
be moved as in the selection mode.
Selected supporting points are shown in grey. Use the Del key to
delete a selected symbol.
21.3 Insert signal elements
In this mode signaling elements can be inserted by left-clicking.
1. 2.
If you hold down the left mouse button then signaling elements can
be moved as in the selection mode.
Selected signaling elements are shown in grey. Use the Del key
to delete a selected signaling element.
Double-clicking on a signaling element in the selection mode opens

a dialog window in which you can modify how the signaling element
is shown.

Figure 21/7:
Display Text If this field is selected then a text is shown which can serve as a
label for the signaling element.
Color The signaling element is displayed in this color.
21.4 Insert text boxes
In this mode textboxes can be inserted by left-clicking.
1. 2. 3.
Selected textboxes are shown in grey. Use the Del key to delete
a selected textbox.
In “Edit Mode” the size and position of a textbox can be changed

using the mouse pointer.

Adjust size:
1. 2. 3.
Move textbox:
1. 2. 3.
Double-clicking on a textbox in the selection mode opens a dialog

window in which you can modify how the textbox is shown.
Figure 21/8:
Font size The font size of the text to be shown.
Color A selection from sixteen standard colors for the text to be dis-
played.

Frame If this field is selected then a frame is drawn around the textbox.
Width The width of the textbox.
Height The height of the textbox.
Horizontal adjustment The following alignment options are available: “Left”, “Center” and
“Right”.
Vertical adjustment The following alignment options are available: “Top”, “Center” and
“Bottom”
Table textboxes
21.5 Draw signal lines and insert signal connections
In this mode signal lines can be drawn freely or automatically

laid from signaling elements.
21.5.1 Free-draw signal lines
An additional supporting point is set with every left-click. The

process ends when you click the current line while holding down
the Ctrl key, press the Esc key or switch the editing mode. Use
the Del key to delete a selected signal line. If only a supporting
point is selected then only this is removed from the line.
In “Edit Mode” the supporting points belonging to the signal lines

can be moved. If the Shift is held down while setting or moving
supporting points then the supporting point is vertically or horizon-
tally aligned.

In the selection mode double-clicking can change the way the line
is displayed.
Figure 21/9:
Display description A framed label on the line and a label next to the framed label are
shown. The framed label can be moved freely along the line. The
additional label can be moved freely.
Start with arrow An arrow is displayed at the beginning of the line. The arrow can be
moved freely along the line.
End with arrow An arrow is displayed at the end of the line. The arrow can be
moved freely along the line.
Color Line color
If you click a finished signal line to activate the “Freely move signal
lines” mode then a signal logic is inserted. This logic point
(snap point) can then be freely moved along the line 1.
2. 3. + 4. .
In the selection mode you can change how the signal logic is dis-
played by double-clicking on it.

Figure 21/10:
21.5.2 Drawing signal lines from signals
In the “Freely draw signal lines” signal lines can be drawn from
signals. Left-click a signal and hold down the mouse button. Drag
the mouse pointer to a position which you have selected as the end
point of a signal line. The signal line will be drawn once you release
the mouse button.
1. 2. 3.
21.5.3 Draw signal lines from diagram support points
In the “Freely draw signal lines” mode signal lines can be

drawn from curve support points. Left-click a supporting point and
hold down the mouse button. Drag the mouse pointer to a second
supporting point. The signal line will be drawn once you have the

mouse pointer over the second supporting point and release the
mouse button.
1. 2. 3.
21.6 Insert additional signal lines
In the “Insert additional signal lines” mode additional support-

ing points can be inserted into existing signal lines.
1. 2. 3.
21.7 Insert row
Clicking on the “Insert row” button inserts a new diagram row

above the current selection. If no cell is market then a new row is
attached to the end of the diagram.
21.8 Delete row
Clicking on the “Delete row” button deletes a selected diagram

row. If nothing is selected then the function is not available.

21.9 Additional editing functions
21.9.1 Zoom
Using the button the view is reset to the standard zoom level.
Using the button increases the zoom level.
Using the button decreases the zoom level.
21.9.2 Undo editing steps
Using the button you can undo the last 50 editing steps.
Using the button you can redo the previously undone editing
steps.

The Component Library
Chapter 22
22. The Component Library
In FluidSIM each component in the component library is assigned a

physical model. Using these models, FluidSIM first creates a global
behavior model of the circuit which is then processed during simu-
lation.
This chapter provides for a short description of the components in

FluidSIM ’s component library. If the component has adjustable
parameters, their value ranges are given. A number in brackets
after the value range indicates the default setting for the parame-
ter.
22.1 Hydraulic
22.1.1 Supply elements
Pump unit
The pump unit supplies a constant volumetric flow. The operating

pressure is limited by the internal pressure relief valve. The pump
unit has two tank connections.
Adjustable parameters
Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (6)
Revolution: 0 ... 5000 1/min (1450)
Displacement: 0.1 ... 5000 cm3 (1.6)
Internal leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.002)

Pump unit (simplified representation)
Simplified representation of the detailed pump unit. The compo-

nent does not have tank connections in the circuit diagram.
Delivery rate: 0 ... 500 l/min (2)
Maximum pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (6)
Internal leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0)
Fixed displacement pump
The fixed displacement pump delivers a constant volumetric flow

rate dependent upon the revolutions and the displacement volume.
Revolution: 0 ... 5000 1/min (1320)
Displacement: 0.1 ... 10000 cm3 (1.6)
Maximum pressure: 0.1 ... 40 MPa (6)
Variable displacement pump
The revolutions of the variable displacement pump can be changed

under operating conditions. The pump delivers a variable volumet-
ric flow rate dependent upon the variable revolutions and the
displacement volume.
Revolution: 0 ... 5000 1/min (1320)
Displacement: 0.1 ... 10000 cm3 (1.6)
Flow rate ratio: 0 ... 100 % (100)

Reversible pump-motor unit with two directions of flow and varia-
ble displacement volume, external drain and two directions
The pump/motor-unit can be used as a pump as well as a motor.

The mode of operation has to be selected for simulation. In opera-
tion mode “Pump” the number of revolutions selected by the user
is imparted. In operation mode “Motor” the number of revolutions
results from the flow rate among other things.
The number of revolutions can be set for both rotation directions.

The displacement volume can also be changed during simulation.
The leakage flow has to be diverted using connector L.
Operating mode: Pump,Motor (Pump)
Revolution: -5000 ... 5000 1/min (1450)
Flow rate ratio: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Maximum pressure: 1 ... 400 bar (160)
Displacement: 0.001 ... 5 l (0.008)
Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.01)
External torque: -1000 ... 1000 N.m (0)
Friction: 0.001 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (0.0108)
Moment of inertia: 0.0001 ... 10 kg.m2 (0.0001)
Proportional adjustable pump
The revolutions of the variable displacement pump can be changed

proportionally from zero to maximum through a voltage signal
between 0 V and 10 V and the assistance of a proportional-
amplifier. The pump delivers a variable volumetric flow rate de-
pendent upon the variable revolutions and the displacement vol-
ume.
Mode of control: Displacement control,Speed control (Displace-
ment control)
Displacement: 0.1 ... 5000 cm3 (1.6)

Revolution (min): 0 ... 5000 1/min (0)
Revolution (max): 0 ... 5000 1/min (1320)
Flow rate ratio (min): 0 ... 1 (0)
Flow rate ratio (max): 0 ... 1 (1)
Variable vane pump, pilot operated
The pump sucks fluid via connection S and displaces it while pres-
sure at connection P is below the zero stroke pressure “p0”, set on
the pressure controller. Starting at a pressure of “p0 – p_reg” the
control piston gets deflected and the flow is reduced. The leakage
flow at maximum pressure“p_max” is regulated by “q_L”.
The average control time for on-stroke control and off-stroke con-
trol is defined by “t_ctr”.
The maximum theoretical flow is defined by the product of “V” and

“rpm”. The actual maximum flow can be limited by setting
“q_max”. To take effect, “q_max” has to be less than the maximum
theoretical flow.
Nominal pressure: 0.1 ... 400 bar (30)
Pressure regulation range: 0.1 ... 100 bar (5)
Max. flow rate: 1 ... 400 l/min (21)
Revolution: 0 ... 5000 1/min (1450)
Displacement: 0.1 ... 400 cm3 (14)
Maximum pressure: 1 ... 400 bar (160)
Internal leakage @ p_max: 0.001 ... 100 l/min (2.7)
Control time (Ø): 1 ... 1000 ms (100)
Piston pump, pneumatically operated
This piston pump delivers a hydraulic medium from tank connec-

tion S to connection P2. It is actuated by a pneumatic cylinder via

connections P1 and P2. The actuating piston is equipped with a
reset spring. The hydraulic part is secured with a rupture disc
against high pressures.
The pneumatic / hydraulic transmission can be defined by “r”. The

transmission ratio is calculated by 1 : r. The flow can be adjusted by
a stroke limitation during simulation. It is defined by “x_max_rel” in
percent relative to the maximum stroke.
Please note, that using this component in FluidSIM requires a

license for hydraulics as well as for pneumatics.
Displacement: 0.01 ... 10000 cm3 (0.5)
Ratio 1:: 0.1 ... 1000 (28)
Burst pressure: 0.1 ... 1000 bar (160)
Total stroke (%): 0.1 ... 100 % (100)
Total stroke: 1 ... 1000 mm (50)
Hydraulic power pack with LS variable and constant displacement

pump combination
The hydraulic power pack is suitable for all basic experiments in

mobile hydraulics. Both pumps are powered by a single electric
motor.
The controllable axial piston pump has a load-sensing pump con-

troller. The constant displacement pump is protected by a pressure
relief valve.
The motor-pump unit is located on top of the tank. There’s a return

filter in the return line to the tank. The tank vent is also filtered. The
oil level can be read at the sight glass with temperature indicator.
The motor is switched on and off with an on/off switch. The motor
is protected against overloading, and is secured against restart
after power failure.

Revolution: 0 ... 5000 1/min (950)
Displacement (Variable displacement pump): 0 ... 10000 cm3
(5.3684)
Leakage: 0.0001 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.0075)
Spring preload: 0.1 ... 10 MPa (1.05)
Pressure regulation range: 0.01 ... 10 MPa (0.1)
Time constant: 0.001 ... 10 s (0.02)
Displacement (Fixed displacement pump): 0 ... 10000 cm3
(4.7368)
Leakage: 0.0001 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.01375)
Opening pressure (Fixed displacement pump): 0 ... 40 MPa (5)
Hydraulic power pack with LS variable and constant displacement

pump combination
The hydraulic power pack is suitable for all basic tests of mobile
hydraulics. The two pumps are both driven by one electric motor.
The vane pump with adjustable delivery rate has a load sensing
pump controller. The fixed displacement pump is secured by a
pressure relief valve. The pump/motor unit sits on the tank. The
return into the tank passes through a return flow filter. The ventila-
tion of the tank is also filtered. The oil level can be seen on the
sight glass with temperature display. The motor is switched on and
off from a control console and is safeguarded against overloading.
Revolution: 0 ... 5000 1/min (910)
Displacement (Variable displacement pump): 0 ... 10000 cm3
(5.6044)
Opening pressure (Variable displacement pump): 0 ... 40 MPa (5)
Spring preload: 0.1 ... 10 MPa (1.17)
Leakage: 0.0001 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.028333)
Displacement (Fixed displacement pump): 0 ... 10000 cm3
(4.5055)
Opening pressure (Fixed displacement pump): 0 ... 40 MPa (5)
Leakage: 0.0001 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.003333)

Steering unit (Orbitrol)
The steering unit is used to steer vehicles that are equipped with
hydrostatic steering.
The steering unit consists of a proportional rotary valve, a pump

control valve and a dosing pump. The rotary valve is opened pro-
portional to torque (steering force) and direction of rotation. The
control edges of the proportional valve are arranged radially at
several levels on the rotary piston and the inside of the rotary valve
housing. A spring package assures a spring centered, closed mid-
position.
Displacement: 0 ... 10000 cm3 (32)
Hydraulic resistance: 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.1)
Steering unit (Orbitrol)
The steering unit is used to steer vehicles that are equipped with
hydrostatic steering.
The steering unit consists of a proportional rotary valve, a pump

control valve and a dosing pump. The rotary valve is opened pro-
portional to torque (steering force) and direction of rotation. The
control edges of the proportional valve are arranged radially at
several levels on the rotary piston and the inside of the rotary valve
housing. A spring package assures a spring centered, closed mid-
position.
Displacement: 0 ... 10000 cm3 (32)

Tank
The tank is integrated into the pump unit and has a pressure of 0
MPa. It can be inserted into the circuit diagram as an independent
component.
Hose with quick-action coupling
The hose is available in 3 lengths: 600 mm, 1500 mm, and 3000
mm. The pressure loss in a hose is taken into account by specifying
a hydraulic resistance. In FluidSIM no pressure loss is simulated
with simple connections between two components.
Reservoir
The reservoir enables the performance of a hydraulic system to be

optimized. For example, it can be utilized as an energy reservoir
and for the absorbance of pressure surges or flow fluctuations.
Reservoirs are capable of absorbing a defined volume of fluid under
pressure and releasing it again with minimal losses. The construc-
tion consists essentially of a pressure resistant container, generally
a gas charge of nitrogen and a separator e.g. a piston, a membrane
or a bubble elastomer. Hydraulic fluid only starts to flow into the
reservoir when the fluid pressure is greater than the gas-preload
pressure.
Volume: 0.01 ... 100 l (0.32)
Pre-load pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (1)
Polytropic exponent: 0.5 ... 3 (1.4)

Reservoir
The reservoir enables the performance of a hydraulic system to be

optimized. For example, it can be utilized as an energy reservoir
and for the absorbance of pressure surges or flow fluctuations.
Reservoirs are capable of absorbing a defined volume of fluid under
pressure and releasing it again with minimal losses. The construc-
tion consists essentially of a pressure resistant container, generally
a gas charge of nitrogen and a separator e.g. a piston, a membrane
or a bubble elastomer. Hydraulic fluid only starts to flow into the
reservoir when the fluid pressure is greater than the gas-preload
pressure.
Volume: 0.01 ... 100 l (0.32)
Polytropic exponent: 0.5 ... 3 (1.4)
Diaphragm accumulator with shutoff block
Stores the pressure and is equipped with a pressure relief valve to

prevent overpressure.
Volume: 0.01 ... 100 l (0.32)
Filter
The filter limits the contamination of the fluid respecting a certain

tolerance value in order to reduce the risk of damage at the com-
ponents.

Cooler
An unacceptable fall in the hydraulic fluid’s viscosity can be avoid-

ed through the use of a cooler.
Heater
The hydraulic fluid’s optimal viscosity can be reached quickly

through the use of a heater.
Pressure intensifier
The pressure intensifier converts a low input pressure to a higher

output pressure according to the intensification ratio “r”.
An oscillating pump piston, which will be automatically reversed in

the end positions by a hydraulically-operated valve, is installed in
the intensifier. The ratio of the piston areas corresponds to the
intensification ratio “r”. For unhindered flow in the low-pressure
range, the pump piston will be bypassed by means of a bypass-line.
A pilot-controlled check valve shuts off the high pressure.
An internal leakage between connections IN and R can be defined

by “G_leak”.

The exact component parameters are not available in general. The
characteristics Transmission ratio, Maximum pressure (IN), Max.
flow rate (IN) and Max. flow rate (H) can be taken from the data
sheets. The component parameters are estimated based on the
data sheets.
“q_max_hi” (Max. flow rate (H)) relates to a flow at connection H

with a counter pressure of 60% of the maximum operating pres-
sure.
Transmission ratio: 1.1 ... 20 (2)
Leakage IN-R: 0 ... 100 l/(min.bar) (0.05)
Maximum pressure (IN): 1 ... 500 bar (125)
Max. flow rate (IN): 0.1 ... 100 l/min (14)
Max. flow rate (H): 0.1 ... 100 l/min (1.3)
T distributor
The distributor can be used anywhere to create a branch.
4-way distributor plate
All quick connection couplings are connected via holes in the dis-
tributor block.

4-way distributor plate, with pressure gauge
All quick connection couplings are connected via holes in the dis-
tributor block. The coupling nipple on the side can be swapped with
the blanking plug on the opposite side. The pressure in the distrib-
utor can be read off on the pressure gauge.
Connection (hydraulic)
A hydraulic connection is a place where a hydraulic line can be

attached to. To simplify the line drawing process, a connection
appears as a small circle in Edit Mode. Hydraulic connections can
be shut by means of a blind plug. An open hydraulic connection
may result in leaking oil; FluidSIM thus pops up a warning mes-
sage, if some hydraulic connection was left open. Note that at each
hydraulic connection values for the flow and pressure can be dis-
played.
Line (hydraulic)
A hydraulic line is used to connect two hydraulic connectors. These

may be either a simple hydraulic connection or a T-junction.A
hydraulic line is normally treated as an ideal connection, with no
pressure drop being included in the simulation. A frictional loss
can be entered via the “Physical model” options. If you select
“Simple resistance”, only the “Hydraulic resistance” parameter will
be included in the simulation. If you select “Pipe model (Hagen-
Poiseuille/Blasius)”, a complex empirical calculation is carried out
using a model based on Hagen-Poiseuille for laminar flows and a
model based on Blasius for turbulent flows, utilizing the Reynolds
number and the wall surface roughness.
Error models

Component clogged: The component is clogged. The restricted
flow can be adjusted.
Hydraulic T-connection
A T-junction joins up to four hydraulic lines, thus having a single

pressure potential. Note that T-junctions are introduced automati-
cally by FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto
another line in Edit Mode.
22.1.2 Directional valves, Configurable
2/n Way Valve
The configurable 2/n way valve is a way valve with two connec-
tions, where both its body elements and its operation modes are
user-definable.
Additionally, the hydraulic connections can be closed with blind

plug.
Desired position: 0 ... 4 (0)
Positioning time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.02)
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum voltage: 0.1 ... 300 V (20)
Electrically left at U_min: 0.01 ... 100 N (70)
Electrically right at U_min: 0.01 ... 100 N (70)
Mechanically left: 0.01 ... 100 N (100)
Mechanically right: 0.01 ... 100 N (100)
Physical spring force: 0.01 ... 100 N (30)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Min. pilot control force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)

Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Pilot control left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Pilot control right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
Piston blocked: The valve can not change its switching position.
3/n Way Valve
The configurable 3/n way valve is a way valve with three connec-
user-definable.

plugs.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

4/n Way Valve
user-definable.

plugs.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
5/n Way Valve
user-definable.

plugs.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
6/n-way directional valve
user-definable.

plugs.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)

Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
user-definable.

plugs.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)

Error models
22.1.3 Directional valves, Mechanically operated
2/2-way stem-actuated valve
If the cylinder piston actuates the stem, flow is enabled from P to A.
This valve is derived from a configurable 2/n way valve. You find
this valve in the component library “Frequently used Way Valves”,
under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)

Error models
2/2-way stem-actuated valve
If the cylinder piston actuates the stem, the flow from P to A is shut
off.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

3/2-way hand-lever valve
In normal position the connection P is closed and A to T opened.

When manually actuated T is shut off and P to A opened. This valve
is derived from a configurable 3/n way valve. You find this valve in
the component library “Frequently used Way Valves”, under the
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
4/2-way hand-lever valve (i)
In normal position the connection P is open to B and A to T. When

manually actuated the valve is set to parallel position. This valve is
derived from a configurable 4/n way valve. You find this valve in
Library menu.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
All ports connected in position 2: In switching position 2 all con-
nectors are internally connected.
4/2-way hand-lever valve (ii)
In normal position the connection P is open to A and B to T. When

manually actuated the valve is set to crossover position. This valve
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)

Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
4/3-way hand-lever valve with shutoff position (i)
In normal position all connections are closed. When manually

actuated the valve is set to parallel or crossover position. This
valve is derived from a configurable 4/n way valve. You find this
valve in the component library “Frequently used Way Valves”,
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)

Error models
4/3-way hand-lever valve with shutoff position (ii)
In normal position all connections are closed. When manually

actuated the valve is set to crossover or parallel position. This
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

4/3-way hand-lever valve with floating position (i)
In normal position the connections A and B are open to T. When

manually actuated the valve is set to parallel or crossover position.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
4/3-way hand-lever valve with floating position (ii)

manually actuated the valve is set to crossover or parallel position.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
4/3-way hand-lever valve with bypass position (i)
In normal position the connections A and B are closed and P to T

opened. When manually actuated the valve is set to parallel or
crossover position. This valve is derived from a configurable 4/n
way valve. You find this valve in the component library “Frequently
used Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)

Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
4/3-way hand-lever valve with bypass position (ii)

opened. When manually actuated the valve is set to crossover or
parallel position. This valve is derived from a configurable 4/n way
valve. You find this valve in the component library “Frequently used
Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)

Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
22.1.4 Directional valves, Solenoid operated
4/2-way solenoid valve (i)
In normal position the connection P is open to B and A to T. When

actuated by the control solenoid, the valve is set to parallel posi-
tion. If no current is flowing through the control solenoid, the valve
can be manually actuated. This valve is derived from a configurable
4/n way valve. You find this valve in the component library “Fre-
quently used Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)

Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
4/2-way solenoid valve (ii)
In normal position the connection P is open to A and B to T. When

actuated by the control solenoid, the valve is set to crossover
position. If no current is flowing through the control solenoid, the
valve can be manually actuated. This valve is derived from a con-
figurable 4/n way valve. You find this valve in the component
library “Frequently used Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)

Error models
4/3-way solenoid valve with shutoff position (i)
In normal position all connections are closed. When actuated by the

control solenoids, the valve is set to parallel or crossover position.
If no current is flowing through the control solenoids, the valve can
be manually actuated. This valve is derived from a configurable 4/n
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

4/3-way solenoid valve with shutoff position (ii)
In normal position all connections are closed. When actuated by the

control solenoids, the valve is set to crossover or parallel position.
If no current is flowing through the control solenoids, the valve can
be manually actuated. This valve is derived from a configurable 4/n
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
4/3-way solenoid valve with floating position (i)

actuated by the control solenoids, the valve is set to parallel or
crossover position. If no current is flowing through the control

solenoids, the valve can be manually actuated. This valve is derived
from a configurable 4/n way valve. You find this valve in the com-
ponent library “Frequently used Way Valves”, under the Library
menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
4/3-way solenoid valve with floating position (ii)

actuated by the control solenoids, the valve is set to crossover or
parallel position. If no current is flowing through the control sole-
noids, the valve can be manually actuated. This valve is derived
from a configurable 4/n way valve. You find this valve in the com-
ponent library “Frequently used Way Valves”, under the Library
menu.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
4/3-way solenoid valve with bypass position (i)

opened. When actuated by the control solenoids, the valve is set to
parallel or crossover position. If no current is flowing through the
control solenoids, the valve can be manually actuated. This valve is
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)

Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
4/3-way solenoid valve with bypass position (ii)

opened. When actuated by the control solenoids, the valve is set to
crossover or parallel position. If no current is flowing through the
control solenoids, the valve can be manually actuated. This valve is
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (20)

Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
22.1.5 Flow control valves/Shutoff valves
Shutoff valve
The shutoff valve can be manually opened or closed. The hydraulic

resistance relates to the completely opened valve.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Error models
Hand lever 90° rotated: The hand lever was rotated 90° during
assembly. The valve is in the open position when the hand lever is
perpendicular.
Component always open: The component is always open.
Component always closed: The component is always closed.

Check valve
If the inlet pressure at A is higher than the outlet pressure at B,

then the check valve allows the flow to pass, otherwise it blocks the
flow.
Check valve
If the inlet pressure at A is higher than the outlet pressure at B and

the nominal pressure, then the check valve allows the flow to pass,
otherwise it blocks the flow.
Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (0.6)
Check valve with pilot control
If the input pressure is higher than the output pressure, the check
valve opens. Otherwise it is shut. In addition, the check valve can
be opened via a control line, allowing flow in both directions.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)

If the input pressure is higher than the output and nominal pres-
sure, the check valve opens. Otherwise it is shut. In addition, the
check valve can be opened via a control line, allowing flow in both
directions.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Vented pilot to open check valve
The valve is a pilot to open check valve, which may be opened to

permit flow in the reverse direction. It allows free flow from port A
to B, if the differential pressure exceeds the opening pressure and
blocks flow in the opposite direction. Pressure at the pilot port X
will open the valve from port B to port A. Pilot pressure needed to
open the valve is directly proportional to the load pressure at port
B. The valve is insensitive to pressure at port A, because the spring
chamber is connected with the vent port Y.
The area ratio relates to the working area ratio X : B.
If the ports X and Y are not under pressure, the valve starts to open,
when pA - pB > p0.
The pressure regulation range dp is the pressure increment above

the opening pressure, at which the valve is fully open.
The valve is fully open, when pA – pB > p0 + dp.
The hydraulic resistance relates to the fully open valve.

Opening pressure: 0 ... 400 bar (5)
Pressure regulation range: 0 ... 100 bar (5)
Area ratio X : B: 0.1 ... 10 (3)
Double non-return valve, delockable
The valve is made up of two delockable non-return valves.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Double non-return valve, delockable
The valve is made up of two delockable non-return valves.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Pilot to close check valve
If the inlet pressure at A is higher than the outlet pressure at B,

then the check valve allows the flow to pass, otherwise it blocks the
flow. Additionally, the check valve can be closed using the pilot line
X.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)

Pilot to close spring loaded check valve
If the inlet pressure at A is higher than the outlet pressure at B and

otherwise it blocks the flow. Additionally, the check valve can be
closed using the pilot line X.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Shuttle valve
If one of the two input pressures is larger than zero, the shuttle
valve opens (OR function) and the higher input pressure becomes
the output pressure.
Two pressure valve
If both input pressures are larger than zero, the two-pressure valve
opens (AND function) and the higher input pressure becomes the
output pressure.

22.1.6 Pressure control valves
Pressure relief valve
In normal position the valve is closed. If the opening pressure is

reached at P, T opens. When the pressure drops below the preset
level, the valve closes again. The flow direction is indicated by the
arrow. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened
valve.
Error models
Linear scaling: Instead of the nominal value u the lineal scaling y =
slope_err*u+ offset_err is used.
Pressure relief valve
The valve restricts the pressure at port P to the set value compared
with the pressure at T.
If the differential pressure (dp=pP-pT) times the cross-sectional

area of the sealing cone exceeds the spring force, the sealing cone
lifts out of the seat and allows oil through to port T. The valve
closes again once the pressure in port P drops again. The cushion-
ing piston acts like a shock absorber to increase stability during the
control response. The spring pretension can be adjusted at the
hand wheel. Oil flows through the non-return valve if the pressure
at port T is greater than at P.

Hydraulic resistance (Pressure relief valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.08)
Hydraulic resistance (Non-return valve): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2
(0.06)
Error models
Check valve always closed: The check valve is always closed.
Check valve always open: The check valve is always open.
Pressure regulator, balanced
The valve restricts the pressure at port P to the set value compared
with the pressure at T.
If the hydraulic force at the sealing cone exceeds the spring force,
the sealing cone lifts out of the seat and allows oil to flow to port T.
The valve closes again once the pressure in port P drops again. The
cushioning piston acts like a shock absorber to increase stability.
The spring pretension can be adjusted at the hand wheel. Oil flows
through the non-return valve when the pressure at port T is greater
than at P. Since the spring chamber is separated from the oil by the
stem, the pressure in T has no effect on the limiting pressure.
Nominal pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (3)
Hydraulic resistance (Pressure relief valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.09)
(0.7)

Bi-directional pressure relief valve
In initial position the valve is closed. When the differential pressure

between ports 1 and 2 exceeds the opening pressure, the valve
starts to open, regardless of flow direction.
The pressure regulation range dp specifies the additional differen-

tial pressure above the opening pressure, at which the valve is
completely opened (p1 – p2 > p0 + dp or p2 – p1 > p0 + dp).
The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve.
A leakage flow from port 1 to 2 can be specified.
Leakage: 0 ... 100 l/(min.bar) (0)
Counterbalance valve
The valve limits pressure at port P vis-à-vis pressure applied to T to

the selected value.
Pressure regulation range: 0.01 ... 10 MPa (1)
Hydraulic resistance (Pressure control valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.1)
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3)
(0.1)

Pressure sequence valve
The valve connects port P and port T if the pressure at port X is

greater than the total of the spring force and pressure in port T.
If the opening pressure is reached at the control line connection,

the valve opens from P to T. The hydraulic resistance relates to the
completely opened valve.
Priority valve Load Sensing, dynamic
The priority valve assures that priority is given to outlet CF as

opposed to outlet EF.
Spring preload: 0 ... 40 MPa (0.8)
Hydraulic resistance (P-CF): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.9)
Hydraulic resistance (P-EF): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.9)
Hydraulic resistance (CF): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (10)
Hydraulic resistance (LS-EF): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (1450)

Pressure relief valve, piloted
In normal position the valve is closed. If the opening pressure is

reached at P, T opens. When the pressure drops below the preset
level, the valve closes again. In simple terms, the pilot pressure is
generated by the input pressure. The flow direction is indicated by
the arrow. The pilot operated pressure relief valve consists of a
pilot stage and a main stage. When open, there is less volumetric
flow at the pilot stage that leads internally to connection T. The
hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve.
The valve is closed in the idle position. The hydraulic fluid drains off
at T, when the pressure difference at the connections P and T
exceeds the nominal pressure. If the pressure falls below the preset
value, the valve closes again. The flow direction is marked with an
arrow. The pilot operated pressure relief valve consists of a pilot
stage and a main stage. When open, there is less volumetric flow at
the pilot stage that leads to connection Y. The hydraulic resistance
relates to the completely opened valve.

With the help of a pilot actuated pressure relief valve, pressure can
be limited for larger volumetric flow rates than would be possible
with a directly actuated valve. Fundamentally, the valve consists of
3 components: a directly actuated pressure-relief valve as pilot
stage, a pressure balance as primary stage and a throttle nozzle for
limiting control oil.
Oil flows from port P through the throttle nozzle to port X. The pilot
valve limits pressure at X to the desired value. At the same time,
this pressure acts upon the pressure balance. The pressure balance
limits pressure from port P to port T in accordance with the spring,
and pressure applied to X. Pressure within the valve’s working
ranges drops via the throttle nozzle only by an amount equal to
differential pressure resulting from the spring (opening pressure
p0_M) and the primary stage.
The pilot stage can be bypassed using port X. In this way a pressure
shut-off and a pressure switching can be realized.
The pressure regulation range dp_P is the pressure increment

above the opening pressure p0_P of the pilot stage, at which the
pilot stage is fully open.
The pilot stage starts to open, when pX > p0_P. It is fully open,
when pX > p0_P + dp_P.
The pressure regulation range dp_M is the pressure increment

above the opening pressure of the main stage, at which the main
stage is fully open.
The main stage starts to open, when pP > pX + p0_M. It is fully open,
when pP > pX + p0_M + dp_M.
The hydraulic resistances relate to the fully open stages. A leakage

for each stage can be specified.
Opening pressure (Pilot stage): 0 ... 40 MPa (1)
Hydraulic resistance: 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (1)

Diameter: 0.001 ... 100 mm (0.5)
Pressure reducing valve
The pressure regulator valve regulates the pressure at connection A

to the preset operating pressure and equalizes the pressure fluctu-
ations. The valve closes when the pressure at connection A exceeds
the operating pressure. The setting of the real components is
component dependent and cannot be changed. The hydraulic
resistance relates to the completely opened valve.
Variable pressure reducing valve
The pressure regulator valve regulates the pressure at connection A

to the preset operating pressure and equalizes the pressure fluctu-
ations. The valve closes when the pressure at connection A exceeds
the operating pressure.

3-way pressure regulator
The pressure reducing valve maintains a constant output pressure

despite fluctuating input pressure. The hydraulic fluid is drained off
at T when the pressure at connection A exceeds the operating
pressure. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely
opened valve.
3-way pressure reducing valve, piloted
The valve maintains a constant output pressure despite fluctuating

input pressure. If the pressure continues to rise, the hydraulic fluid
is drained off at T. The valve is then working as a pressure relief
valve.
The valve is initially fully open from port P to A until the outlet
pressure at port A exceeds the opening pressure of the pilot stage.
Port A and the pilot stage are connected by a throttle nozzle, whose
diameter can be specified.
When opening pressure of the pilot stage is reached, a pilot flow

occurs, causing a pressure imbalance (due to the throttle nozzle)
across the main spool, which then moves throttling the inlet flow
from port P to A. If the pressure continues to rise, the connection
between port P and A is closed and the connection between A and T
starts to open.
The pressure regulation range dp_P is the pressure increment

above the opening pressure p0_P of the pilot stage, at which the
pilot stage is fully open.
The pilot stage starts to open, if pA > p0_P. It is fully open, when pA
> p0_P + dp_P.

The pressure regulation range p_reg_M is the pressure increment
above the closing pressure of the main stage, at which the main
stage is fully closed.
The transition pressure range p_tr_M is the pressure increment

above the pressure of the fully closed reducing valve needed to
reach the pressure at which the pressure relief valve starts to open.
If pM is the inlet pressure of the pilot stage (behind the throttle

nozzle), the main stage starts to close, when pA > pM + p0_M. It is
fully closed, when pA > pM + p0_M + p_reg_M. As long as the pilot
stage is closed, it is pA = pM.
The main stage starts to open, when pA > pM + p0_M + p_reg_M +

p_tr_M. It is fully open, when pA > pM + p0_M + 2*p_reg_M +
p_tr_M.
The hydraulic resistances relate to the fully open stages. A leakage

for each stage can be specified.
Opening pressure (Pilot stage): 0 ... 40 MPa (1)
Nominal pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (0.1)
Transition pressure range: -5 ... 5 MPa (0)
Diameter: 0.001 ... 100 mm (0.5)
Pressure compensator, upstream (pre)
The pressure compensator maintains the differential pressure

between port A und port X.
If, for example, a throttle point is located between A and X, pres-

sure is held constant over the throttle point. This corresponds to
the function of a 2-way flow control valve.

Pressure compensator, upstream (pre)
The pressure compensator maintains the differential pressure

between port A und port X.
If, for example, a throttle point is located between A and X, pres-

sure is held constant over the throttle point. This corresponds to
the function of a 2-way flow control valve.
Pressure compensator, downstream (post)
The valve is used as a downstream pressure compensator for flow

control in combination with a pump controlled by means of load
sensing (variable volume LS pump).

Pressure compensator, downstream (post)
The valve is used as a downstream pressure compensator for flow

control in combination with a pump controlled by means of load
sensing (variable volume LS pump).
Load-Sensing Pressure compensator for open centre load sensing
P -> T, pX = 0 MPa: Pressure at P pushes the piston against the

spring. As of adjusted pressure, the valve opens: P -> T. P -> T, pX > 0
MPa: Pressure at X is added to spring force. The valve opens as
soon as opening pressure plus spring pressure is greater than pX.
Load-Sensing Pressure compensator for open centre load sensing
P -> T, pX = 0 MPa: Pressure at P pushes the piston against the

spring. As of adjusted pressure, the valve opens: P -> T. P -> T, pX > 0
MPa: Pressure at X is added to spring force. The valve opens as
soon as opening pressure is greater than pX.

Pilot valves (Joystick), 2x2-channel
2-channel hydraulic pilot control is used. Each channel consists of

two pressure regulators. Depending on direction, the hand lever
actuates one of the two pressure regulators via a rocker. Pressure
is then regulated at the respective pilot port proportional to deflec-
tion.
Maximum pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (1.5)
Displacement (Left group): -100 ... 100 % (0)
Displacement (Right group): -100 ... 100 % (0)
Shock and anti-cavitation valve
The valve limits pressure from port A or B vis-à-vis pressure applied

to T to the selected value.
Opening pressure (Left group): 0 ... 40 MPa (3)
Pressure regulation range (Left group): 0.01 ... 10 MPa (3.8)
Hydraulic resistance (Left group): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.08)
Opening pressure (Right group): 0 ... 40 MPa (3)
Pressure regulation range (Right group): 0.01 ... 10 MPa (3.8)
Hydraulic resistance (Right group): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2
(0.08)
Closing pressure compensator
The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent hy-

draulic resistance. The pressure compensator closes when the
pressure difference X-Y exceeds the nominal pressure. A pressure
regulating valve is implemented by the combination of connections
A and X. The pressure balance is also a component of 2-way flow
control valves. The nominal pressure setting of the real compo-

nents is component dependent and cannot be changed. The hy-
draulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve.
Variable closing pressure compensator

draulic resistance. The pressure compensator closes when the
regulating valve is implemented by the combination of the connec-
tions A and X. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely
opened valve.
Opening pressure compensator

draulic resistance. The pressure compensator opens when the
relief valve is implemented by the combination of connections P
and X. The pressure balance is also a component of 3-way flow
control valves. The nominal pressure setting of the real compo-
nents is component dependent and cannot be changed. The hy-
draulic resistance relates to the completely opened valve.

Variable opening pressure compensator

draulic resistance. The pressure compensator opens when the
relief valve is implemented by the combination of connections P
and X. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened
valve.
Opening cartridge valve
The 2/2-way cartridge valve is a 2/2-way valve. It is fitted with two

working ports and the two switch positions “closed” and “open”.
Whether or not the cartridge valve is open or closed depends on
the effective areas A, B and X, the adjacent pressures pA, pB and
pX, as well as the spring force. A+B=X is valid. If pA*A + pB*B >
pX*X + F, then the valve opens, otherwise it is closed. The valve
therefore operates purely pressure dependent and can, with the
appropriate control, assume directional-, flow- and pressure func-
tions. The spring force is specified by means of the nominal pres-
sure. This is the minimum pressure, with pressureless connections
at B and X, necessary at connection A to open the valve. Whether
the valve has one (A=B) or two (A <> B) effective areas can be speci-
fied in the properties window. The relevant symbol is automatically
depicted. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened
valve.
Area A: 0.1 ... 100 cm2 (6)

Area B: 0.1 ... 100 cm2 (3)
Closing cartridge valve
The 2/2-way cartridge valve is a 2/2-way valve. It is fitted with two

working ports and the two switch positions “closed” and “open”.
Whether or not the cartridge valve is open or closed depends on
the effective areas A and X, the adjacent pressures pA, and pX, as
well as the spring force. A=X is valid. If pA*A > pX*X + F, then the
valve closes, otherwise it is open. The valve therefore operates
purely pressure dependent and can, with the appropriate control,
assume directional-, flow- and pressure functions. The spring force
is specified by means of the nominal pressure. This is the minimum
pressure, with pressureless connections at B and X, necessary at
connection A to open the valve. The hydraulic resistance relates to
the completely opened valve.
Area: 0.1 ... 100 cm2 (6)
22.1.7 Pressure switch
Pressure sensor

The pressure switch takes the pressure and actuates the associat-
ed electrical pressure switch if the preset switching pressure is
exceeded.
Switching pressure: -0.1 ... 40 MPa (3)
Hysteresis: 0 ... 10 MPa (0)
Nozzle
The nozzle represents a hydraulic resistance.
Flow control valve
The setting of the throttle valve is set by means of a rotary knob.

Please note that by the rotary knob no absolute resistance value
can be set. This means that, in reality, different throttle valves can
generate different resistance values despite identical settings.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)

Orifice
The orifice represents a hydraulic resistance.
Variable orifice
The orifice represents a variable hydraulic resistance.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Throttle check valve
The setting of the One-way flow control valve is set by means of a

rotary knob. A check valve (see check valve) is located parallel to
the throttle valve. Please note that by the rotary knob no absolute
resistance value can be set. This means that, in reality, different
throttle valves can generate different resistance values despite
identical settings.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Hydraulic resistance (Flow control valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.07)
(0.05)
Error models

2-way flow control valve
If the pressure is sufficient, the preset flow is maintained to a

constant level in the direction of the arrow. The hydraulic resistance
Nominal flow: 0 ... 500 l/min (1)
Error models
Pressure compensator without function: The pressure compensa-
tor does not work. The component is therefore not able to do a
regulation.
If the pressure is sufficient, the preset flow is maintained to a

constant level in the direction of the arrow. The hydraulic resistance
Hydraulic resistance (Flow control valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.4)
(0.08)

Error models
Pressure compensator without function: The pressure compensa-
tor does not work. The component is therefore not able to do a
regulation.
With sufficient pressure, the preset flow rate is kept constant in the
direction of the arrow. The surplus hydraulic fluid is drained at
connection T using a pressure compensator. The inlet pressure pA
is load dependent, i.e. it changes with the outlet pressure pB.
Therefore a parallel circuit of several 3-way flow control valves is
not possible. In this case, the inlet pressures would be defined by
the valve with the lowest inlet pressure. Compared to the 2-way
flow control valve, the 3-way flow control valve is admittedly more
efficient in its energy consumption. The hydraulic resistance relates
to the completely closed pressure compensator.
Flow divider valve
The flow divider valve divides the flow from P into two equal flows
at A and B. This is achieved using two measuring orifices and two
variable control resistors. The control resistors are unified in a
pressure compensator. The hydraulic resistance relates to the
resistance of the individual measuring orifices and control resis-
tors.

Hydraulic resistance (Pressure compensator): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.375)
Hydraulic resistance (Metering orifice): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2
(0.537)
Flow Divider/Combiner
The flow divider/combiner is a spring loaded, sliding spool, pres-

sure compensated valve used to split flow in one direction and
combines flow in the opposite direction by a given flow ratio. A
leakage flow from A to B can be specified.
The pressure regulation range determines the differential pressure

between A and B, when the sliding spool reaches its maximum
displacement. The smaller the pressure regulation range is chosen,
the higher the accuracy of the valve is for a given flow ratio.
Leakage A–B: 0 ... 100 l/(min.bar) (0)
Ratio qA : qB: 0.1 ... 10 (1)
Synchronizing flow divider/combiner
The flow divider/combiner is a spring loaded, sliding spool, pres-

sure compensated valve used to split flow in one direction and
combines flow in the opposite direction by a given flow ratio. A
leakage flow from A to B can be specified.
When one port is blocked, the sliding spool can be maximally

extended depending on the acting pressures. In this case, a flow is
metered from A to B. With the synchronizing feature, this valve can
be used to allow two hydraulic cylinders to fully stroke and syn-
chronize at the end of the stroke.

The pressure regulation range determines the differential pressure
between A and B, when the sliding spool reaches its maximum
displacement. The smaller the pressure regulation range is chosen,
the higher the accuracy of the valve is for a given flow ratio.
Leakage A–B: 0 ... 100 l/(min.bar) (0)
Ratio qA : qB: 0.1 ... 10 (1)
Flush valve with pressure relief valve
If differential pressure exceeds the required force for the spring, the
valve opens from B to the pressure-relief valve.
The pressure-relief valve assures that pressure on the suction side

does not drop to below the required minimum pressure for the
pump.
Hydraulic resistance (Directional valve): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2
(0.08)
Hydraulic resistance (Pressure control valve): 1e-6 ... 1000
bar.min2/l2 (0.08)

22.1.9 Proportional valves
4/3-ways control valve
The regulating valve transforms an analog electrical input signal

into corresponding opening cross-sections at the outputs. The
setpoint signal must be within the range -10 V to +10 V. At 0 V the
hydraulic mid-position is adopted and the valve stops the flow (in
relation to the null overlap).
The cross section area of the flow opening widens with increasing
slide distance. How far the area, and with it the flow at the valve,
changes depends on the shape and form of the control notches. A
triangular shaped notch results in a progressive flow behavior, a
rectangular shaped notch in a linear flow behavior.
The hydraulic resistance relates to a completely opened leading

edge and the internal leakage relates to one leading edge as ap-
propriate. The overlap of the leading edges can be specified rela-
tive to the maximal slide distance. By the use of an integrated
electronic position controller for the slide distance, beneficial static
and dynamic characteristics are achieved that are manifested in a
minimal hysteresis (less than 0,2 %) and a response time of less
than 12 ms at a signal change of 0 - 100.
Control notch shape: Rectangular,Triangular (Rectangular)
Relative spool overlap: -50 ... 50 % (0)
Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.00026)
4/3-way proportional valve
By use of a twin-channel proportional amplifier, the proportional

valve transforms an analog electrical input signal into correspond-
ing opening cross-sections at the outputs. The setpoint signal must

be within the range -10 V to +10 V. At 0 V the hydraulic mid-position
is adopted and the valve stops the flow (in relation to the null
overlap).
The cross section area of the flow opening widens by increasing

slide distance. How far the area, and with it the flow at the valve,
changes depends on the shape and form of the control notches. A
triangular shaped notch results in a progressive flow behavior, a
rectangular shaped notch in a linear flow behavior.
The hydraulic resistance relates to a completely opened leading

edge and the internal leakage relates to one leading edge as ap-
propriate. The overlap of the leading edges can be specified rela-
tive to the maximal slide distance.
Control notch shape: Rectangular,Triangular (Triangular)
Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.001)
Proportional throttle valve
In order to alter the flow rate through the valve, the cross section of
the throttle valve is electrically manipulated with the assistance of
a proportional amplifier. The control voltage must be between 0 V
and 10 V. The deflection of the slide is proportional to the applied
voltage. At 0 V the valve is completely closed (in relation to the null
overlap). The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely opened
valve. The overlap of the leading edges can be specified relative to
the maximal slide distance.
Control notch shape: Rectangular,Triangular (Triangular)

Proportional pressure relief valve
The proportional pressure relief valve, with the assistance of a

proportional amplifier, is a continuous, electrically adjustable
pressure relief valve. The control piston has two adjacent areas
exposed to pressure. The first area is exposed to the pressure at
connection P, the other to connection T. If the magnet is not sup-
plied with electricity, then the piston is fully retracted and the
complete passage from connection P to connection T is free. The
proportional magnet creates a force proportional to its magnetic
current, which moves the control piston according to the balance of
the adjacent forces (magnetic force, spring force and pressures).
The control voltage must be in the range 0 V to 10 V. The minimum

nominal pressure defines the opening pressure through the spring
force at 0 V. The maximum nominal pressure defines the opening
pressure at 10 V. The hydraulic resistance relates to the completely
opened main stage leading edge.
Min. Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (0)
Max. Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (10)
Pilot-operated proportional pressure relief valve
The pilot operated pressure relief valve consists of a pilot stage

with poppet valve and a main stage with control slide valve. The
pressure at connection P acts upon the pilot poppet via a drilling in
the control slide valve.
If the force of the proportional magnet is greater than the pressure

exercised at connection P, then the pilot stage remains closed. A
spring keeps the main stage poppet valve closed and the flow rate
is null.

If the force, that the pressure exercises, exceeds the closing force
of the pilot poppet, then this opens. A lower flow rate develops
from connection P to connection Y. The flow of fluid causes a pres-
sure loss at the throttle valve inside the control slide valve. Thus
the pressure at the spring side is lower than the pressure at con-
nection P. Due to the pressure difference, the control slide valve
opens so far until the spring force re-establishes an equilibrium of
forces and the valve is perfused from P to T.
The control voltage must be between 0 V and 10 V. The minimum

nominal pressure defines the opening pressure at the pilot stage
via the spring force at 0 V. The maximum nominal pressure defines
the opening pressure at 10 V. The hydraulic resistance relates to
the completely opened main stage leading edge.
Min. Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (0)
Max. Opening pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (10)
3-way proportional pressure reducing valve
The valve maintains a constant output pressure despite fluctuating

input pressure. If the pressure continues to rise, the hydraulic fluid
is drained off at T. The valve is then working as a pressure relief
valve.
The nominal pressure p_set is proportional to the control current.

In the de-energized state of the solenoid, port P is closed and port
A is connected with T.
The relation between current and nominal pressure p_set is mod-

eled as a linear function. The current I_min_rel, at which the mini-
mal nominal pressure p_min should be reached, must be specified
relative to the maximum current.
In control mode the connection between P and A is initially fully

open. As soon as the pressure at port A exceeds the nominal pres-
sure, the spool moves and throttles the inlet flow from port P to A.

If the pressure continues to rise, the connection between port P and
A is closed and the connection between A and T starts to open.
The pressure regulation range p_reg is the pressure increment

above the nominal pressure, at which the connection P-A is fully
closed.
The connection P-A starts to close, when pA > p_set.
The connection P-A fully closed, when pA > p_set + p_reg.
The transition pressure range p_tr is the pressure increment above

the pressure of the fully closed connection P-A, at which the con-
nection A-T starts to open. The connection A-T is fully open after an
additional increase by pressure regulation range p_reg.
The connection A-T starts to open, when pA > p_set + p_reg + p_tr.
The connection A-T fully open, when pA > p_set + p_reg + p_tr +
p_reg = p_set + 2*p_reg + p_tr.
The hydraulic resistances relate to the fully open connections P-A

and A-T.
Min. Nominal pressure: 0 ... 400 bar (0)
Max. Nominal pressure: 0 ... 400 bar (110)
Min. Current (% I_max): 0 ... 100 % (10)
Pressure regulation range: 0.1 ... 400 bar (20)
Transition pressure range: 0 ... 400 bar (4)
Pilot-operated proportional pressure reducing valve
The pilot operated proportional pressure regulator valve consists of

a pilot stage with poppet valve and a main stage with control slide
valve. The pressure at connection A acts upon the pilot poppet via a
drilling in the control slide valve. The proportional magnet exercises
the electrically adjustable counter force with the assistance of a
proportional amplifier.

If the pressure at connection A is below the preset value, then the
pilot control remains closed. The pressure on both sides of the
control slide valve is equal. A spring holds the main stage control
slide valve open and the hydraulic fluid flow freely from connection
P to connection A.
If the pressure at connection A exceeds the preset value, then the

pilot stage opens causing less volumetric flow to flow to connection
A. The pressure falls at the throttle valve inside the control slide
valve. Thus the pressure at the spring side is lower than the pres-
sure at connection A. Due to the pressure difference, the control
slide valve closes so far until the spring force re-establishes an
equilibrium of forces. As a result, the flow resistance at the control
edge between connections P and A increases and the pressure at
connection A sinks.
The control voltage must be between 0 V and 10 V. The minimum

nominal pressure defines the opening pressure at the pre stage via
the spring force at 0 V. The maximum nominal pressure defines the
opening pressure at 10 V. The hydraulic resistance relates to the
completely opened main stage leading edge.
Min. Nominal pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (0)
Max. Nominal pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (3)
Proportional 6/3-way hand lever valve
The valve is used to control volumetric flow. Flow rate and direction
of flow are controlled. The mid-position is spring centered. The
piston is pushed out of its mid-position and against the spring with
the hand lever.
Displacement: -100 ... 100 % (0)
Hydraulic resistance (P1->T1): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.045)
Hydraulic resistance (P2->A,B): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.051)
Hydraulic resistance (T2->A,B): 1e-6 ... 1000 bar.min2/l2 (0.0362)

Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (5E-06)
Load-sensing control block
The valve block has two slices, each with a proportional directional
control valve for controlling speed and direction. The directional
control valve in each slice has an upstream pressure compensator.
As a result, the slice functions like a proportional current regulator.
Displacement (Left group): -100 ... 100 % (0)
Displacement (Right group): -100 ... 100 % (0)
22.1.10 Actuators
Configurable cylinder
The configurable cylinder can be customized via its properties

dialog. Almost any combination of piston type (single-acting, dou-
ble-acting), the specification of the piston rods (double ended, with
magnetic coupling or slide) and the number (none, one, two) is
possible. An end position cushioning (without, with, adjustable)
can also be defined. FluidSIM automatically adjusts the symbol
according to the preset configuration. In addition, a load to be
moved (including possible static and sliding friction) and a variable
force profile can be defined in the properties dialog. In the compo-
nent library from FluidSIM there are several pre-configured cylin-
ders that can be inserted in your circuit and directly used. Should
no suitable symbol be available, then simply choose the compo-

nent with the most similarity to the required component, open the
properties dialog and adjust the configuration accordingly.
Piston diameter: 1 ... 1000 mm (16)
Piston rod diameter: 0 ... 1000 mm (10)
Piston Position: 0 ... 5000 mm (0)
Maximum stroke: 1 ... 5000 mm (200)
Mounting angle: 0 ... 360 deg (0)
Parameter input: Calculate automatically,Enter manually (Calcu-
late automatically)
Break-away force: 0 ... 10000 N (65)
Coulomb friction force: 0 ... 10000 N (55)
Viscous friction: 0.1 ... 10000 N.s/m (215)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Spring pressure at x=0: 0 ... 40 MPa (0.4)
Spring pressure at x=x_max: 0 ... 40 MPa (1)
Damping length: 0 ... 100 mm (10)
Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
Internal leakage: An internal leakage occurs. The value can be
adjusted.
High friction: A high friction occurs at the piston. The value of the
friction can be adjusted.
Double acting cylinder
Double acting cylinder with piston rod on one side. The piston of
the cylinder contains a permanent solenoid which can be used to
operate a proximity switch.

late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.
Double acting cylinder with shock adsorber at stroke end
The piston of the cylinder is controlled by the connected pressure

loads. The shock adsorber can be adjusted by means of two ad-
justment screws. The piston contains a permanent solenoid which
can be used to operate a proximity switch.
late automatically)

late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.
Double acting cylinder with in and out piston rod and shock
adsorber at stroke end
The piston of the cylinder is controlled by the connected pressure

loads. The shock adsorber can be adjusted by means of two ad-
justment screws. The piston of the cylinder contains a permanent
solenoid which can be used to operate a proximity switch.
late automatically)

late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.
Single acting cylinder
By connecting a sufficiently high pressure load, the piston of the

cylinder is extended to its stop. To move the piston back, an exter-
nal force must be applied.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)

Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.
Loading unit/cylinder load simulator
Two cylinders are positioned opposite each other. Various cylinder

types and loads can be combined using the four piston surfaces.
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.6)
Loading unit/cylinder load simulator
Two cylinders are positioned opposite each other. Various cylinder

types and loads can be combined using the four piston surfaces.

Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.6)
Hydraulic motor
The hydraulic motor transforms hydraulic energy into mechanical

energy.
The evolutions can be counted with the help of an opto-electrical

sensor.
Displacement: 0.001 ... 5 l (0.008)
Friction: 0.001 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (0.0108)
Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.0126)
Semi-rotary actuator
The semi-rotary actuator is controlled by alternately switching the

pressure. In the end positions the swivel cylinder can activate
switches or valves via labels.
Initial Position: 0 ... 360 deg (0)
Rotation angle (max): 1 ... 360 deg (180)
Displacement: 0.01 ... 1000 l (0.1)
Friction: 0.01 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (0.1)
Moment of inertia: 1e-005 ... 1 kg.m2 (0.0001)

22.1.11 Measuring instruments and sensors
Pressure gauge
The manometer measures the pressure at its connection.
Differential pressure gauge
The differential pressure gauge displays the pressure difference

between the adjacent pressures at the left and the right connection.
Pressure indicator
An optical signal is activated when the pressure at the connection

to the pressure display exceeds the preset switching pressure.
Switching pressure: -0.1 ... 40 MPa (3)
Analog pressure sensor
This symbol represents the hydraulic part of the analog pressure

sensor. The analog pressure sensor measures the adjacent pres-
sure and transforms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal.
In the process, only pressures in the specified pressure ranges are
considered. Within this range, the pressure in the voltage range
from 0 V to 10 V is represented, i.e. the minimum pressure delivers
0 V and the maximum pressure 10 V.

Minimum pressure: -40 ... 40 MPa (0)
Maximum pressure: -40 ... 40 MPa (10)
Voltage at p1: -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage at p2: -100 ... 100 V (10)
Pressure switch, electronic
The electronic pressure switch has a measuring cell that works

according to the strain gauge principle. The measuring cell signal is
digitalized and processed in the pressure switch’s processor. The
processed signal is output as a voltage, current or switching signal
at the connector plug. The integrated digital display shows the
measured pressure. The pressure is shown in the selected unit
(bar, psi, MPa).
The pressure switch has two switching outputs and one analogue
output. The control elements of the pressure switch can be used to
select and set the characteristics of the outputs in the basic setting
menu. Each switching output can be set as either an N/C or N/O
contact.
Output function: Make switch,Break switch (Make switch)
Switching function: Threshold value,Window comparator
(Threshold value)
Switching pressure 1: 0 ... 40 MPa (3)
(Threshold value)
Minimum pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (0)
Maximum pressure: 0 ... 40 MPa (10)
Voltage at p1: -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage at p2: -100 ... 100 V (10)
Minimum voltage: 1 ... 300 V (18)

Flow meter
The flow meter measures the flow rate. Either the current flow or
the total quantity flowed can be displayed. The component image is
automatically adjusted accordingly.
Flow meter
The flow meter consists of a hydraulic motor connected to an RPM

gauge.
In addition to the measurement of speed in rpm via direct contact

with the motor shaft, revolutions can also be counted with the help
of an opto-electrical sensor.
Displacement: 0.1 ... 5000 cm3 (8.2)
Friction: 0.001 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (0.0108)
Leakage: 0 ... 10 l/(min.bar) (0.0126)
Pulses per revolution: 0 ... 20 (3)
Flow Direction: Ignore,Consider (Ignore)
Flow rate (min): -500 ... 500 l/min (0)
Flow rate (max): -500 ... 500 l/min (10)
Voltage (q1): -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage (q2): -100 ... 100 V (10)
Analog flow meter
This symbol represents the hydraulic part of the analog flow meter.
The analog flow meter measures the volumetric flow and trans-
forms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal. In the process,

only flow rates in the specified pressure ranges are considered.
Within this range, the flow rate in the voltage range from 0 V to 10 V
is represented, i.e. the minimum volumetric flow delivers 0 V and
the maximum volumetric flow 10 V.
Voltage (q1): -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage (q2): -100 ... 100 V (10)
22.2 Pneumatic
22.2.1 Supply elements
Compressed air supply
The compressed air supply provides the needed compressed air. It

contains a pressure control valve that can be adjusted to output the
desired operating pressure.
Operating pressure: 0 ... 2 MPa (0.6)
Volume: 0.001 ... 1000 l (0.1)

Compressor
The compressor provides the necessary compressed air. The pres-

sure is restricted to the preset operating pressure.
Volume: 0.001 ... 1000 l (0.1)
Variable compressor
The adjustable compressor provides the necessary compressed air,

whereby the maximum flow rate can be adjusted under actual
operating conditions and in the simulation. The pressure is restrict-
ed to the preset operating pressure.
Volume: 0.001 ... 1000 l (0.1)
Air service unit, simplified representation
The service unit is made up of a compressed air filter with water

separator and a pressure control valve.
Standard nominal flow rate (Pressure regulator): 0.1 ... 5000
l/min (750)
Standard nominal flow rate (Filter): 0.1 ... 5000 l/min (1000)

Error models
Air service unit
The service unit is made up of a compressed air filter with water

separator and a pressure control valve.
l/min (750)
Error models
Start-up valve with filter control valve
The filter with water separator cleans the compressed air of dirt,
pipe scale, rust and condensate. The pressure regulator adjusts the
compressed air supplied to the set operating pressure and com-
pensates for pressure fluctuations. The pressure gauge shows the
preset pressure. The on/off valve exhausts the entire control.
l/min (110)
Standard nominal flow rate (Directional valve): 0.1 ... 5000 l/min
(500)

Error models
Manifold
The manifold enables a control system to be supplied with com-

pressed air eight individual connections.
Air pressure reservoir
The air pressure reservoir serves as compensation for pressure

fluctuations and is utilized (as a reservoir) for abruptly occurring air
consumption. Large time delays can be attained when used in
conjunction with time delay- and throttle valves.
Volume: 0.001 ... 1000 l (0.4)
Air pressure reservoir
The air pressure reservoir serves as compensation for pressure

fluctuations and is utilized (as a reservoir) for abruptly occurring air
consumption. Large time delays can be attained when used in
conjunction with time delay- und throttle valves.
Volume: 0.001 ... 1000 l (0.4)

Air filter
The compressed air filter removes contamination from the com-

pressed air. The size of the filterable particles is dependent upon
the filter class.
Standard nominal flow rate: 0.1 ... 5000 l/min (1000)
Error models
Manual drain filter

the filter class. Condensation, which can occur through sinking
temperatures or the expansion of the compressed air, can be man-
ually drained off.
Error models
Automatic drain filter


the filter class. Condensation, which can occur through sinking
temperatures or the expansion of the compressed air, is automati-
cally drained off.
Error models
Manual drain
The water separator drains off accrued water.
Automatic drain
The water separator drains off accrued water and is automatically

emptied.
Lubricator
The lubricator enriches the compressed air with oil.

Cooler
The cooler cools the compressed air.
Air Dryer
The adsorption dryer reduces the humidity in the compressed air.
Connection (pneumatic)
A pneumatic connection is a place where a pneumatic line can be

attached to. To simplify the line drawing process, a connection
appears as a small circle in Edit Mode. Pneumatic connections can
be shut by means of a blind plug. An open pneumatic connection
may result in leaking air; FluidSIM thus pops up a warning mes-
sage, if some pneumatic connection was left open. Note that at
each pneumatic connection values for the flow and pressure can be
displayed.
Line (pneumatic)
A pneumatic line is used to connect two pneumatic connectors.

These may be either a simple pneumatic connection or a T-junction.

A pneumatic line is normally treated as an ideal connection, with no
pressure drop being included in the simulation. A frictional loss
can be entered via the “Physical model” options. If you select
“Simple resistance”, only the “Standard nominal flow rate” param-
eter will be included in the simulation. If you select “ Empirical
model”, an empirical model is applied that utilizes the length and
inner diameter.
Error models
Pneumatic T-connection
A T-junction joins up to four pneumatic lines, thus having a single

pressure potential. Note that T-junctions are introduced automati-
cally by FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto
another line in Edit Mode.
22.2.2 Directional valves, Configurable
2/n Way Valve
tions, where both its body elements operation modes are user-
definable.
Additionally, the pneumatic connections can be closed with either

blind plugs or exhausts.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Pilot control left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1.3)
Pilot control right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1.3)
air spring left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (0.5)
air spring right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (0.5)
Error models
3/n Way Valve
definable.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)

Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models
Leakage between 1 and 3: An internal leakage between the con-
nectors 1 and 3 occurs. The value of the leakage is adjustable.
4/n Way Valve
definable.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)

Error models
5/n Way Valve
definable.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

Mid-position pressurized: The valve acts like the following one:
5/3-way valve, pneumatically actuated in both directions, mid-
position pressurized
definable.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

definable.

Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

22.2.3 Directional valves, Mechanically operated
3/2-way roller lever valve, normally closed
The roller lever valve is operated by pressing on the lever, for

example through the use of a switching cam of a cylinder. The flow
passes through from 1 to 2. After releasing the lever, the valve
returns to its initial position through the use of a return spring.
Connection 1 is shut. In the Simulation Mode, the valve can be
switched manually by clicking on the component, thus not requiring
a cylinder to operate the valve. This valve is derived from a config-
urable 3/n way valve. You find this valve in the component library
“Frequently used Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

3/2-way roller lever valve, normally open
The roller lever valve is operated by pressing on the lever, for

example through the use of a switching cam of a cylinder. Connec-
tion 1 is shut. After releasing the lever, the valve returns to its initial
position through the use of a return spring. The flow may pass
through freely from 1 to 2. In the Simulation Mode, the valve can
be switched manually by clicking on the component, thus not
requiring a cylinder to operate the valve. This valve is derived from
a configurable 3/n way valve. You find this valve in the component
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

3/2-way idle return roller valve, normally closed
The idle return roller valve is operated when the roller is driven in a
specific direction by the switching cam of a cylinder. After releasing
the roller, the valve returns to its initial position through the use of
a return spring. Connection 1 is shut. When the roller is driven in
the opposite direction, the valve is not operated. In the Simulation
Mode, the valve can be switched manually by clicking on the com-
ponent, thus not requiring a cylinder to operate the valve. This
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

Pressurizing valve
The pressurizing valve with plunger control is operated by the

surface of the cylinder cam. When the plunger is operated, com-
pressed air flows freely until the nozzle is closed. A signal up to the
level of the boost pressure is assembled at exit connection 2. In
the Simulation Mode, the valve can be switched manually by click-
ing on the component, thus not requiring a cylinder to operate the
valve.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

Pneumatic proximity switch, solenoid operated
A permanent solenoid found on the piston of a cylinder drives this

3/2 pneumatic directional valve and triggers the control signal. The
flow passes freely from 1 to 2. In the Simulation Mode, the valve
can be switched manually by clicking on the component, thus not
requiring a cylinder to operate the valve. This valve is derived from
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

3/2-way valve with pushbutton, normally closed
Pressing the pushbutton operates the valve. The flow passes freely
from 1 to 2. Releasing the pushbutton allows the valve to return to
its starting position through the use of a return spring. Connection
1 is shut. By holding down the Shift key and simultaneously
clicking on the component with the mouse cursor, FluidSIM keeps
the valve in permanent operating position. Simply clicking on the
component cancels the operated state and returns the valve to its
starting position. This valve is derived from a configurable 3/n way
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

3/2-way valve with pushbutton, normally open
Pressing the pushbutton operates the valve. Connection 1 is shut.

Releasing the pushbutton allows the valve to returns to its starting
position through the use of a return spring. The passes freely from
1 to 2. By holding down the Shift key and simultaneously click-
ing on the component with the mouse cursor, FluidSIM keeps the
valve in permanent operating position. Simply clicking on the
component cancels the operated state and returns the valve to its
starting position. This valve is derived from a configurable 3/n way
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

3/2-way valve with selection switch or striking button
Pressing the red striking button operates the valve. The flow passes
freely from 1 to 2. Releasing the button has no effect; the valve
remains in its operating position. Turning the button to the right
sets the striking button back to its original position and the valve
returns to its starting position through the use of a return spring.
Connection 1 is shut. This valve is derived from a configurable 3/n
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

5/2-way valve, with selection switch
Turning the selection switch operates the valve. The flow passes
freely from 1 to 4. Releasing the switch has no effect; the valve
remains in its operating position. Turning the switch back to its
original position allows the flow to pass freely from 1 to 2. This
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

22.2.4 Directional valves, Solenoid operated
3/2-way solenoid valve, normally closed
The solenoid valve is controlled by applying a voltage signal at the

solenoid coil. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. By stopping the
signal the valve is set back to its starting position through the use
of a return spring. Connection 1 is shut. If no signal is applied to the
valve, it can be manually operated. This valve is derived from a
configurable 3/n way valve. You find this valve in the component
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

3/2-way solenoid valve, normally open

solenoid coil. Connection 1 is shut. By stopping the signal the valve
is set back to its starting position through the use of a return
spring. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. If no signal is applied to
the valve, it can be manually operated. This valve is derived from a
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

5/2-way solenoid valve

solenoid coil. The flow passes freely from 1 to 4. By stopping the
of a return spring. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. If no signal is
applied to the valve, it can be manually operated. This valve is
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

5/2-way solenoid impulse valve

solenoid coil (flow passes from 1 to 4) and remains in this operat-
ing position even when the signal is cut off. Only by applying an
opposite signal will the valve return to its starting position (flow
passes freely from 1 to 2). If no signal is applied to the valve, it can
be manually operated. This valve is derived from a configurable
5/n way valve. You find this valve in the component library “Fre-
quently used Way Valves”, under the Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

5/3-way solenoid valve, mid-position closed

solenoid coil (flow passes from 1 to 4 or from 1 to 2). By stopping
the signal the valve is set back to its starting position through the
use of a return spring. Connections 1, 2, and 4 are shut. If no signal
is applied to the valve, it can be manually operated. This valve is
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

22.2.5 Directional valves, Pneumatically operated
3/2-way valve, pneumatically operated, normally closed
The pneumatic valve is controlled by applying a pilot pressure at

connection 12. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. By stopping the
of a return spring. Connection 1 is shut. This valve is derived from a
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

3/2-way valve, pneumatically operated, normally open

connection 10. Connection 1 is shut. By stopping the signal the
valve is set back to its starting position through the use of a return
spring. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. This valve is derived from
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

5/2-way valve, pneumatically operated

connection 14. The flow passes freely from 1 to 4. By stopping the
of a return spring. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2. This valve is
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

5/2-way impulse valve, pneumatically operated
The pneumatic valve is controlled by applying reciprocal pilot

pressures at connection 14 (flow passes from 1 to 4) and connec-
tion 12 (flow passes from 1 to 2). The valve’s operating position
remains until an opposite signal is received by the valve. This valve
Library menu.
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

5/3-way pneumatic valve, mid-position closed
The pneumatic valve is controlled by applying reciprocal pilot

pressures at connection 14 (flow passes from 1 to 4) and connec-
tion 12 (flow passes from 1 to 2). By stopping the signals the valve
is set back to its starting position through the use of a return
spring. Connections 1, 2, and 4 are shut. This valve is derived from
Reset time: 1e-4 ... 10 s (0.03)
Minimum force: 0.01 ... 100 N (15)
Left: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Right: 0.01 ... 100 cm2 (1)
Error models

Low pressure amplifier unit, 2 compartments
Each of the two double-level low pressure amplifier units has the
function of a 3/2 directional valve that is normally closed. The
signal at connection 12 is raised to a higher boost pressure level
through the use of a double-level amplifier and is put out by con-
nection 2.
Shuttle valve
The shuttle valve is switched based on the compressed air entering

into either input connection 1 and leaving via an output connection
2. Should both input connections begin receiving compressed air,
the connection with the higher pressure takes precedence and is
put out (OR function).
Quick exhaust valve
The compressed air passes from connection 1 to connection 2. If

the pressure should decrease at connection 1, then the com-

pressed air from connection 2 will escape to the outside via the
installed silencer.
Standard nominal flow rate 1...2: 0.1 ... 5000 l/min (300)
Standard nominal flow rate 2...3: 0.1 ... 5000 l/min (550)
Two pressure valve
The two pressure valve is switched based on the compressed air

entering into both input connections 1 and leaving via an output
connection 2. Should both input connections begin receiving com-
pressed air, the connection with the lower pressure takes prece-
dence and is put out (AND function).
Check valve
If the inlet pressure at 1 is higher than the outlet pressure at 2, then

the check valve allows the flow to pass, otherwise it blocks the
flow.
Spring loaded check valve
If the inlet pressure at 1 is higher than the outlet pressure at 2 and

otherwise it blocks the flow.

If the entering pressure at connection 1 is higher that the outgoing

pressure at 2, the check valve allows the flow to pass freely. Other-
wise, the valve stops the flow. Additionally, the check valve can be
opened via the control line 12. This action allows the flow to pass
freely in both directions.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Spring loaded pilot-operated check valve

otherwise it blocks the flow. Additionally, the check valve can be
released using the pilot line 12, thus enabling the flow in both
directions.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)

Pilot to close check valve
If the inlet pressure at 1 is higher than the outlet pressure at 2, then

the non-return valve allows the flow to pass, otherwise it blocks the
flow. Additionally, the non-return valve can be closed using the
pilot line 10.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Pilot to close spring loaded check valve

the nominal pressure, then the non-return valve allows the flow to
pass, otherwise it blocks the flow. Additionally, the non-return
valve can be closed using the pilot line 10.
Area ratio: 0.1 ... 10 (3.3)
Nozzle
The nozzle represents a pneumatic resistance.

Throttle valve
The setting of the throttle valve is set by means of a rotary knob.

Please note that by the rotary knob no absolute resistance value
can be set. This means that, in reality, different throttle valves can
generate different resistance values despite identical settings.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Orifice
The orifice represents a pneumatic resistance.
Variable orifice
The orifice represents a variable pneumatic resistance.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Throttle check valve
The one-way flow control valve is made up of a throttle valve and a

check valve. The check valve stops the flow from passing in a cer-
tain direction. The flow then passes though the throttle valve. The

cross-section of the throttle is adjustable via a regular screw. In the
opposite direction the flow can pass through the check valve.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
Standard nominal flow rate (Flow control valve): 0.1 ... 5000 l/min
(85)
Standard nominal flow rate (Non-return valve): 0.1 ... 5000 l/min
(110)
Error models
Throttle check valve, x2
These components combine two one-way flow control valves in one

unit.
Opening level (Flow control valve 1): 0 ... 100 % (100)
Opening level (Flow control valve 2): 0 ... 100 % (100)
Pneumatic counter
The counter registers pneumatic signals starting at a predeter-

mined number and counting backwards. If zero is reached, then the
counter releases an output signal. This output signal continues
until the counter is reset either by hand or from at signal at connec-
tion 10.

Counter: 0 ... 9999 (3)
Pneumatic timer, normally closed
The time delay valve is actuated by a pneumatic signal at port 1

after a preset time delay has elapsed. It is returned to the normal
position via return spring when the signal is removed. The time
delay is infinitely adjustable by means of a regulating screw. The
time delay is reset automatically within 200 ms.
Delay time: 0.1 ... 100 s (3)
Pneumatic timer, normally open
After the pilot signal is applied at port 10, a preset time elapses
before the pneumatic timer is actuated. It returns to its initial
position via a return spring once the signal is removed. The time
delay is infinitely adjustable by means of a regulating screw. The
time delay is reset automatically within 200 ms.
Delay time: 0.1 ... 100 s (3)
Ring sensor
The ring sensor is a non-contact pneumatic signal output module. It

is supplied with low pressure at connection 1. If, due to an object,
the entering air flow is disturbed, a low pressure signal will be put
out by connection 2. To simulate an object in the air flow, as pre-

sented above, simply click on the component during FluidSIM
Simulation Mode.
22.2.7 Pressure control valves
The pressure regulator valve regulates the compressed air supply

to the preset nominal pressure and equalizes pressure fluctuations.
The valve closes when the pressure at connection 2 exceeds the
nominal pressure. The setting for the real components is compo-
nent dependent and cannot be changed.

The valve closes when the pressure at connection 2 exceeds the
nominal pressure.

Pressure control valve with manometer
The pressure control valve regulates the supplied pressure based

on the adjustable operating pressure and the variations in the
pressure. The manometer displays the pressure at connection 2.

The compressed air is discharged via connection 3 when the pres-
sure at connection 2 exceeds the nominal pressure. The setting for
the real components is component dependent and cannot be
changed.

The compressed air is discharged via connection 3 when the pres-
sure at connection 2 exceeds the nominal pressure.

Closing pressure compensator
The pressure compensator represents a pressure dependent

pneumatic resistance. The pressure compensator closes when the
pressure difference p3-p4 exceeds the nominal pressure. A pres-
sure regulating valve is implemented by the combination of connec-
tions 2 and 3. The nominal pressure setting of the real components
is component dependent and cannot be changed.
Variable closing pressure compensator

pneumatic resistance. The pressure compensator closes when the
pressure difference p3-p4 exceeds the nominal pressure. A pres-
sure regulating valve is implemented by the combination of connec-
tions 2 and 3.
Opening pressure compensator

pneumatic resistance. The pressure compensator opens when the
pressure difference p3-p4 exceeds the nominal pressure. A se-

quence valve is implemented by the combination of connections 1
and 3. The nominal pressure setting of the real components is
component dependent and cannot be changed.
Variable opening pressure compensator

pneumatic resistance. The pressure compensator opens when the
pressure difference p3-p4 exceeds the nominal pressure. A se-
quence valve is implemented by the combination of connections 1
and 3.
22.2.8 Pressure Operated Switches
Pressure sensor
The pressure sensor measures the pressure and operates the

pressure switch when the adjustable switching pressure has been
exceeded.

Type: Pressure switch,Vacuum switch (Pressure switch)
Switching pressure: -0.1 ... 2 MPa (0.3)
Vacuum switch
The vacuum switch operates the linked pressure switch, when the
pressure falls below the adjustable switching pressure. If the sym-
bol is used as a pressure switch the respective switch is operated
when the pressure exceeds the switching pressure.
Type: Pressure switch,Vacuum switch (Vacuum switch)
Switching pressure: -0.1 ... 2 MPa (-0.04)
Pneumatic to electric converter
The differential pressure switch can be employed as a pressure

switch (connection P1), a vacuum switch (connection P2) or as a
differential pressure switch (P1-P2). The respective pneumatic to
electric converter is operated when the difference in pressure
between P1-P2 exceeds the adjustable switching pressure.
Switching pressure: -2 ... 2 MPa (0.3)

22.2.9 Vacuum technology
Vacuum generator 05 H
The vacuum suction nozzle creates its vacuum based on the ejector
principle. In this case, compressed air flows from connection 1 to 3,
creating a vacuum at connection 1v. A sucker can be connected to
the vacuum connection 1v. Stopping the input of compressed air at
connection 1 stops any suction also.
Maximum vacuum: -0.999 ... 0 bar (-0.85)
Operating pressure for max. vacuum: 0.1 ... 20 bar (5)
Air consumption at 600 kPa: 1 ... 1000 l/min (11.6)
Max. suction rate: 0.1 ... 1000 l/min (6)
Vacuum generator 05 L
The vacuum suction nozzle creates its vacuum based on the ejector
principle. In this case, compressed air flows from connection 1 to 3,
creating a vacuum at connection 1v. A sucker can be connected to
the vacuum connection 1v. Stopping the input of compressed air at
connection 1 stops any suction also.
Operating pressure for max. vacuum: 0.1 ... 20 bar (6)
Air consumption at 600 kPa: 1 ... 1000 l/min (12)

Single-level ejector with push-out unit (Vacuum generator)
The vacuum generator functions like the vacuum suction nozzle,

except that an integrated reservoir is filled with air during the
suction process. When the input line is switched off, the com-
pressed air stored in the reservoir discharges in a pulse via the port
(quick exhaust), securely repelling the suctioned workpiece from
the vacuum cup. The volume can be enlarged by means of an
additional port. This additional volume allows the energy of the
vent pulse to be varied as required.
Operating pressure for max. vacuum: 0.1 ... 20 bar (4.25)
Air consumption at 600 kPa: 1 ... 1000 l/min (11.6)
Volume: 0.001 ... 10 l (0.05)
Vacuum suction cup
The suction cup can be used together with the vacuum suction
nozzle to grip objects by suction. Lowering the cup onto an object
is simulated in FluidSIM in Simulation Mode by clicking on the
component. An additional click lifts the suction cup.
Diameter: 1 ... 1000 mm (20)
Load to be lifted: 0.001 ... 1000 kg (0.1)
Safety factor: 0.1 ... 100 (1)
Leakage: 0 ... 1000 l/min (0)
Vacuum efficiency valve
If multiple suction cups are supplied with vacuum by one vacuum

suction nozzle, the vacuum will collapse if one or more cups do not

form a suction grip on the workpiece or workpieces. To prevent
this, so-called vacuum security valves are used. Vacuum security
valves are installed between the vacuum suction nozzle and the
suction cup. If, during vacuum generation, a suction cup is uncov-
ered, or only partly covered, the vacuum security valve automatical-
ly stops the influx of air. If the suction cup is open to the environ-
ment, the float is pressed up against the housing by the vacuum. In
this position, air can only flow through a small hole at the front of
the float, greatly reducing the air flow. If a workpiece comes in
contact with the suction cup, the air flow is reduced and the spring
forces the float downward. The air flow flows around the float, with
the larger opening allowing generation of a complete vacuum in the
suction cup.
Min. spring pressure: 0 ... 1 bar (0.1)
Max. Spring pressure: 0.01 ... 1 bar (0.2)
Min. Flow rate at p1-p2 = 50 kPa: 0.001 ... 1000 l/min (1.9)
Max. Flow rate at p1-p2 = 50 kPa: 0.1 ... 1000 l/min (4)
Adjustable vacuum actuator valve
The vacuum actuator valve is employed through the conversion of a

vacuum signal. As soon as the vacuum reaches the adjustable
value at connection 1v, the attached valve body is switched.
Switching pressure: -0.1 ... 0 MPa (-0.025)

22.2.10 Valve groups
The sequence valve is operated when the control pressure at con-

nection 12 has been reached. The flow passes freely from 1 to 2.
Removing the signal allows the valve to return to its starting posi-
tion through the use of a return spring. Connection 1 is shut. The
pressure of the control signal is infinitely adjustable via a pressure
setting screw.
Switching pressure: 0 ... 20 bar (3)
Time delay valve, normally closed
The time delay valve is made up of a pneumatically operated 3/2-

way valve, a one-way flow control valve, and small air accumulator.
When the necessary pressure is reached at the control connection
12 of the unit, the 3/2-way valve switches and the flow passes
freely from 1 to 2.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
(10)
Volume: 0.001 ... 100 l (0.01)
(50)

Time delay valve, normally open
The time delay valve is made up of a pneumatically operated 3/2-

way valve, a one-way flow control valve, and small air accumulator.
When the necessary pressure is reached at the control connection
10 of the unit, the 3/2-way valve switches and stops the flow from
passing between 1 and 2.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)
(10)
Volume: 0.001 ... 100 l (0.01)
(50)
Stepper module, type TAA
The stepper module is made up of a memory unit (3/2-way impulse

valve), an AND and an OR component, a viewable announcement,
and an auxiliary manual operation.
Initial Position: Left,Right (Left)
Stepper module, type TAB
The stepper module is made up of a memory unit (3/2-way impulse

valve), an AND and an OR component, a viewable announcement,
and an auxiliary manual operation.

Initial Position: Left,Right (Right)
Quickstepper
The Quickstepper is a ready to be fitted, mechanical/pneumatic

control device with 12 in- and outputs. The outputs are successive-
ly synchronized with the input signals.
Two-hand control block
The control block for two-hand start ZSB is a pneumatic AND ele-
ment. If the inputs 11 and 12 are pressurized within max. 0.5 s one
after the other, the ZSB will switch through: an output signal is
present at port 2. Control takes place via two external 3/2-way
pushbutton valves. As long as both pushbutton valves are activat-
ed, outlet port 2 is pressurized. If one or both pushbuttons are
released, outlet port 2 is unpressurized. The system exhausts from
2 to 3.
Opening level: 0 ... 100 % (100)

22.2.11 Proportional valves
Proportional 5/3-way directional valve
The proportional valve transforms an analog electrical input signal

into corresponding opening cross-sections at the outputs. At half
nominal voltage i.e. 5 V, the pneumatic mid-position is taken. Here
all leading edges are closed, so that no air flows through the valve.
Beneficial static and dynamic characteristics with minimal hystere-
sis (less than 0,3 %), short actuating time (typically 5 ms), and a
higher upper frequency limit (approx. 100 Hz), are achieved
through an integrated electronic position control for the slide
distance. Thus the valve, as control element and especially in
combination with a higher ranked position controller, is suitable for
the positioning of a pneumatic cylinder.
Proportional pressure regulator
The regulating valve is intended for regulating pressure propor-

tionally to a specified setpoint value given by a voltage. A built-in
pressure sensor records the pressure at the working port and
compares this value with the setpoint value. If the actual value
differs from the setpoint value, the regulating valve is actuated
until the outlet pressure reaches the setpoint value.
Voltage (Min.): 0.1 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage (Max.): 0.1 ... 100 V (10)
Nominal pressure (U_min): 0 ... 20 bar (0)
Nominal pressure (U_max): 0 ... 20 bar (6)
Pressure regulation range: 0.01 ... 10 bar (0.15)

22.2.12 Actuators
Configurable cylinder
The configurable cylinder can be customized via its properties

dialog. Almost any combination of piston type (single-acting, dou-
ble-acting), the specification of the piston rods (double ended, with
magnetic coupling or slide) and the number (none, one, two) is
possible. An end position cushioning (without, with, adjustable)
can also be defined. FluidSIM automatically adjusts the symbol
according to the preset configuration. In addition, a load to be
moved (including possible static and sliding friction) and a variable
force profile can be defined in the properties dialog. In the compo-
nent library of FluidSIM there are several pre-configured cylinders
that can be inserted in your circuit and directly used. Should no
suitable symbol be available, then simply choose the component
with the most similarity to the required component, open the prop-
erties dialog and adjust the configuration accordingly.
late automatically)
Reference pressure: 0.1 ... 20 bar (6)
Reference velocity: 0.1 ... 2 m/s (1)
Friction at dp_ref: 1 ... 5000 N (120)
Break-away force at dp_ref: 1 ... 5000 N (12)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)

Spring pressure at x=x_max: 0 ... 10 MPa (0.1)
Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.
Leakage A: A leakage at the left connector A occurs. The value of
the leakage is adjustable.
Leakage B: A leackage at the right connector B occurs. The value of
the leackage is adjustable.
Single acting cylinder
The piston rod of a single acting cylinder is operated by the input of

compressed air at the front end position. When the compressed air
is shut off, the piston returns to its starting position via a return
spring. The piston of the cylinder contains a permanent solenoid
which can be used to operate a proximity switch.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)

Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.
Single acting cylinder, return spring in piston chamber
The piston of the single acting cylinder is extended to its back

position by the input of compressed air. When the compressed air
is switched off, a return spring moves the piston back to its front
position.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)

Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.
Double acting cylinder
The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is operated by the recip-

rocal input of compressed air at the front and back of the cylinder.
The end position damping is adjustable via two regular screws. The
piston of the cylinder contains a permanent solenoid which can be
used to operate a proximity switch.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)

Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.
Cylinder, Double-acting, with in and out Piston Rod
The in and out piston rod of the double acting cylinder is controlled
by alternating the compressed air input. The cushioning can be
adapted with two adjustment screws.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)

Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.
Cylinder, double-acting, with two piston rods and single trestle
This twin cylinder has two in and out piston rods that move in
parallel and that are coupled by a trestle. The construction guaran-
tees minimum torsion when positioning and moving tools or as-
semblies. Moreover, coming along with the same construction
height, the double piston rod conveys the double force as com-
pared to standard cylinders.
late automatically)
late automatically)

Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.
Cylinder, double-acting, with two in and out piston rods and

double trestle
This twin cylinder has two in and out piston rods that move in
parallel and that are coupled by a double trestle. The construction
guarantees minimum torsion when positioning and moving tools or
assemblies. Moreover, coming along with the same construction
height, the double piston rod conveys the double force as com-
pared to standard cylinders.
late automatically)

late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.
Multiple position cylinder, double-acting
By connecting two cylinders of same piston diameter but different

maximum stroke three piston stop positions can be realized. From
the first stop position the third stop can be reached either directly
or via the intermediate stop. Note that the maximum stroke of the
second piston must be larger than the preceding one. When moving
back, an intermediate stop requires a particular control. The shorter
maximum stroke is half of the other maximum stroke.
Total stroke: 1 ... 2000 mm (200)
Intermediate position: 0 ... 1000 mm (0)
External force: -10000 ... 10000 N (0)

Linear drive with solenoid coupling
The sliding of the piston in the double rod cylinder is controlled by

a reciprocal input of compressed air.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.

Linear drive, pneumatic, with shape-fitting adaptor
The sledge of the double acting cylinder without a piston rod is

controlled by alternating the compressed air input. This type of
linear drive conveys forces by means of a shape-fitting piston-
sledge construction. The slitted cylinder prohibits the torsion of the
slider.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.

Linear drive, pneumatic, with shape-fitting adaptor
The sledge of the double acting cylinder without a piston rod is

controlled by alternating the compressed air input. This type of
linear drive conveys forces by means of a shape-fitting piston-
sledge construction. The slitted cylinder prohibits the torsion of the
slider.
late automatically)
late automatically)
Moving mass: 0.01 ... 1000 kg (0.3)
Piston area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (2.0106)
Ring area: 0 ... 10000 cm2 (1.2252)
Error models
adjusted.

Air motor
The air motor transforms pneumatic energy into mechanical energy.
Displacement: 0.001 ... 5 l (0.1)
Friction: 0.001 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (3)
Compressed air motor with mid-exhaust
The motor converts pneumatic energy into mechanical, rotary

energy. In can be operated in both the clockwise and counterclock-
wise directions. With the help of a centrifugal mass, the stopping of
a load and the resulting consequences can be observed.
In addition to the measurement of speed in rpm via direct contact

with the motor shaft, revolutions can also be counted with the help
of an opto-electrical sensor.
Pressure: 0.1 ... 2 MPa (0.3)
Revolution: 1 ... 10000 1/min (975)
Torque: 0.01 ... 100 N.m (0.62)
n_0 : n_N: 1.001 ... 10 (2)
External torque: Torque (braking),Torque (driving) (Torque (brak-
ing))
Pulses per revolution: 0 ... 20 (1)

The semi-rotary actuator is controlled by a reciprocal input of

compressed air.
In the end positions the semi-rotary actuator can activate switches

or valves via labels.
Displacement: 0.01 ... 1000 l (0.1)
Friction: 0.01 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (0.1)
The semi-rotary actuator is controlled by a reciprocal input of

compressed air.
In the end positions the semi-rotary actuator can activate switches

or valves via labels.
An external load is determined by a mass. The distance “e” from

the center of gravity of the mass to the rotation axis can be speci-
fied. An additional moment of inertia is calculated with J = m * e * e
from the distance and the mass. If the rotation axis is horizontal to
the earth surface, also an additional torque is taken into account,
which results from the force of gravity, the rotation angle and the
distance “e”. The position of the mass refers to the angle of rota-
tion 0.
Torque (6 bar): 0.01 ... 1000 N.m (2)

Friction: 0.01 ... 100 N.m.s/rad (0.1)
Axis of rotation: Horizontal,Vertical (Horizontal)
Position: Left,Right,Top,Bottom (Left)
Moving mass: 0 ... 10000 kg (0)
Distance to axis of rotation: 1 ... 10000 mm (10)
Fluidic muscle
Fluidic muscle is a tensile actuator which mimics the natural

movement of a muscle. It consists of contractible tubing and ap-
propriate connectors.
The contractible tubing is formed by a pressure-tight length of

rubber hose, sheathed in high-strength fibres. The fibres create a
rhomboidal pattern with a three-dimensional grid structure.
The tubing stretches in circumferential direction when an internal

pressure is applied, generating a tensile force and a contraction
movement in the longitudinal direction of the muscle. The usable
tensile force is at its maximum at the start of the contraction and
then decreases to zero in a virtually linear manner as a function of
the stroke.
The fluidic muscle can only apply tensile forces. The size of the
stroke which can be achieved through contraction is about 25% of
the total muscle length. External tensile forces permit maximum
pretensioning of 5%.
For the fluidic muscle, not only the force, but the stroke directly
depends on the current working pressure. Positioning in the stroke
direction is very easy. Instead of a displacement encoder which has
to be integrated parallel to the drive, a pressure sensor can be
installed at a favourable position. By allocating pressure and
stroke, almost any number of positions can be realised.
Type: DMSP-10,DMSP-20,DMSP-40,MAS-10,MAS-20,MAS-40
(DMSP-10)
Length: 40 ... 9000 mm (250)

External force: -1000000 ... 1000000 N (0)
Moving mass: 0 ... 10000 kg (0)
Static friction coefficient: 0 ... 2 (0)
Sliding friction coefficient: 0 ... 2 (0)
Fluidic muscle with one double acting cylinder
Fluidic muscle can be guided by coupling it mechanically with a

double-acting cylinder. It is also possible to apply a load to the
muscle via the cylinder.
(DMSP-10)
Length: 40 ... 9000 mm (250)
External force: -1000000 ... 1000000 N (0)
Moving mass: 0 ... 10000 kg (0)
Fluidic muscle with two double acting cylinders
Fluidic muscle can be guided by coupling it mechanically with two

double-acting cylinders. It is also possible to apply a load to the
muscle via the cylinders.
(DMSP-10)
Length: 40 ... 9000 mm (250)

External force: -1000000 ... 1000000 N (0)
Moving mass: 0 ... 10000 kg (0)
Pressure gauge
The manometer displays the pressure at its connection.
Error models
Differential pressure gauge
The differential pressure gauge displays the pressure difference

between the adjacent pressures at the left and the right connection.

Pressure indicator
An optical signal is activated when the pressure at the connection

to the pressure indicator exceeds the preset switching pressure.
Switching pressure: -0.1 ... 2 MPa (0.3)
This symbol represents the pneumatic part of the analog pressure

sensor. The analog pressure sensor measures the adjacent pres-
sure and transforms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal.
In the process, only pressures in the specified pressure ranges are
considered. Within this range, the pressure in the voltage range
from 0 V to 10 V is represented, i.e. the minimum pressure delivers
0 V and the maximum pressure 10 V.
Voltage at p1: -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage at p2: -100 ... 100 V (10)
This symbol represents the pneumatic part of the analog pressure

sensor.
Voltage at p1: -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage at p2: -100 ... 100 V (10)

Flow meter
Flow meter
Analog flow meter
This symbol represents the pneumatic part of the analog flow

meter. The analog flow meter measures the volumetric flow and
transforms it into a proportional electrical voltage signal. In the
process, only flow rates in the specified pressure ranges are con-
sidered. Within this range, the flow rate in the voltage range from 0
V to 10 V is represented, i.e. the minimum volumetric flow delivers
0 V and the maximum volumetric flow 10 V.
Voltage (q1): -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage (q2): -100 ... 100 V (10)

Pressure sensor with switching outputs and display
The pressure sensor is a piezo-resistive relative pressure transduc-

er with integrated amplifier and built-in temperature compensation.
The pressure to be measured is transferred to a piezo-resistive
element via a silicone layer. The signal change generated in the
element is output as a switching signal at the connector plug via an
integrated amplifier.
The pressure sensor has two compressed air connections, each of

which is assigned an independent sensor element. The measured
input values (In A/In B) are output via two configurable switching
outputs (Out A/Out B). The measured pressure is shown numerical-
ly and graphically on the display.
(Threshold value)
Switching pressure 1: -0.1 ... 2 MPa (0.3)
Switching pressure 2: -0.1 ... 2 MPa (1)
(Threshold value)
Idle current (24 V): 1 ... 10000 mA (32)
Pressure sensor with display
The pressure sensor is a piezoresistive relative pressure transducer

with integrated amplifier and built-in temperature compensation.

The pressure to be measured is transferred onto a silicone coated
piezoresistive element. The signal change generated therein is
output as a voltage or switching signal at the connector plug via an
integrated amplifier.
(Threshold value)
Minimum pressure: -0.1 ... 2 MPa (0)
Maximum pressure: -0.1 ... 2 MPa (1)
Voltage at p1: -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage at p2: -100 ... 100 V (10)
Idle current (24 V): 1 ... 10000 mA (32)
Flow sensor
The flow sensor is used to measure and monitor flow rate and air
consumption values. Measurement is carried out by means of a
thermal procedure, whereby the amount of heat drawn from a
heated surface of the sensor by the medium flowing past it is
calculated. The flow rate or the accumulated air consumption is
based on the amount of heat drawn.
Connection to higher-order systems is established via two switch-

ing outputs (Out A/B) and an analogue output (Out C). Switching
points can be defined for both binary outputs. Switching points are
possible for both switching outputs for measuring the flow rate; a
consumption switching pulse for output A (Out A) is possible for
measuring the accumulated air consumption. The flow rate value is
output via the analogue output. The flow rate or air consumption is
shown on the display.

(Threshold value)
Volume measurement: ... (false)
Switching point 1 (Flow rate): -5000 ... 5000 l/min (10)
Hysteresis (Flow rate): 0 ... 5000 l/min (0)
Switching point 1 (Volume): 0 ... 100000 l (100)
Hysteresis (Volume): 0 ... 10000 l (0)
(Threshold value)
Volume measurement: ... (false)
Hysteresis (Flow rate): 0 ... 5000 l/min (0)
Hysteresis (Volume): 0 ... 10000 l (0)
Min. Flow rate: -5000 ... 5000 l/min (0)
Max. Flow rate: -5000 ... 5000 l/min (100)
Voltage at q1: -100 ... 100 V (0)
Voltage at q2: -100 ... 100 V (10)
Idle current (24 V): 1 ... 10000 mA (32)
22.3 Electrical Controls (IEC)
22.3.1 Power supply
Electrical connection 0V
0V connection of the power supply.

Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (0)
Electrical connection 24V+
Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (24)
Function generator
The function generator is a voltage source that can create constant,

rectangle, sine and triangle signals. The voltage range is restricted
to -10 V to +10 V. The frequency, the amplitude and the Y-offset of
the signal can be set within this range. A voltage profile can be
additionally specified. Data points can be set interactively with a
mouse-click in the relevant graphic field. These can then be com-
bined to a closed polygon. Alternatively, existing data points can be
marked and both numeric values for the time and the correspond-
ing voltage can be entered in the input fields. If the option “ Loop”
is selected, then the voltage profile is started again.
Signal type: Rectangle,Sine,Triangle,Constant,Profile (Sine)
Frequency: 0.01 ... 100000 Hz (1)
Amplitude: 0 ... 400 V (5)
y offset: -400 ... 400 V (0)
Min. Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (-400)
Max. Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (400)

Function generator
The function generator is a voltage source that can create constant,

rectangle, sine and triangle signals. The voltage range is restricted
to -10 V to +10 V. The frequency, the amplitude and the Y-offset of
the signal can be set within this range. A voltage profile can be
additionally specified. Data points can be set interactively with a
mouse-click in the relevant graphic field. These can then be com-
bined to a closed polygon. Alternatively, existing data points can be
marked and both numeric values for the time and the correspond-
ing voltage can be entered in the input fields. If the option “ Loop”
is selected, then the voltage profile is started again.
Signal type: Rectangle,Sine,Triangle,Constant,Profile (Sine)
Frequency: 0.01 ... 100000 Hz (1)
Amplitude: 0 ... 400 V (5)
y offset: -400 ... 400 V (0)
Min. Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (-400)
Max. Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (400)
Setpoint value card
Voltage profiles in the range -10 V to +10 V can be created using

the setpoint value card. Up to 8 setpoints W1 to W8 can be speci-
fied in the voltage range -10 V to +10 V. The setpoint card requires
a power supply of 24 V.
The increase from the current setpoint to the next setpoint is de-
fined using 4 ramps R1 to R4 with values between 0 s/V and 10
s/V, i.e. a low ramp value signifies a large increase, whereas a high
ramp value results in a small increase. The active ramp is defined
as follows: R1 by a positive increase of 0 V, R2 by a negative in-
crease up to 0 V, R3 by a negative increase of 0 V and R4 by a
positive increase up to 0 V.
Three operating modes can be selected: “Wait for switching time”,

“Advance setpoints” and “External control”.

In operating mode “Wait for switching time” the setpoints are
sequentially advanced when the preset change over time has
expired.
If “Advance setpoints” is selected then, upon attaining the active

setpoint, the next setpoint is started without delay.
In operating mode “External control” the selection of the active

setpoint is effected by gating the inputs I1, I2 and I3 with at least
15 V. The corresponding setpoint is selected by means of the speci-
fied bit table. During the process, the internal switching time is
inactive.
W1: I1=0 I2=0 I3=0

W2: I1=1 I2=0 I3=0
W3: I1=0 I2=1 I3=0
W4: I1=1 I2=1 I3=0
W5: I1=0 I2=0 I3=1
W6: I1=1 I2=0 I3=1
W7: I1=0 I2=1 I3=1
W8: I1=1 I2=1 I3=1
Connection (electrical)
An electric connection is a place where an electric line can be at-

tached to. To simplify the line drawing process, a connection ap-
pears as a small circle in Edit Mode. Note that at each electric
connection values for the voltage and current can be displayed.
Line (electrical)
An electrical line links two electrical connections. Note that an

electrical connection may be a simple electrical connection or a T-
junction. An electrical line causes no voltage drop, i. e., it has no
electrical resistance.

Physical model: Ideal connection,Simple resistance,Electrical
conductor (Ideal connection)
Length: 0.01 ... 1000 m (0.5)
Inner diameter: 0.1 ... 100 mm (2.5)
Specific resistance: 0.001 ... 1 Ohm.mm2/m (0.0178)
Resistance: 1e-4 ... 1e6 Ohm (0.0018131)
Error models
Current interrupted: The line is interrupted and current cannot
flow.
Faulty resistance value: The resistor specified in the failure con-
figuration is used, in order to simulate an excessive resistance for
example.
Short circuit to ground: The conductor is connected directly to
ground (0V potential) and can trigger a short circuit.
Electrical T-connection
A T-junction joins up to four electrical lines, thus having a single

voltage potential. Note that T-junctions are introduced automatical-
ly by FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto another
line in Edit Mode.
22.3.2 Actuators
DC Motor
The DC motor transforms electrical energy into mechanical energy.

DC motors produce the continual rotation through repeated chang-
es in the direction of current. The characteristics of the 24 V DC
motor relate to the motor used by the Festo Didactic conveyor
belts.

External torque: 0 ... 20 N.m (0)
Idle revolution: 10 ... 20000 1/min (75)
Solenoid
The solenoid converts electrical energy into mechanical energy. An

iron core is pulled when a current flows through a coil. The iron
core is returned to its neutral position by a spring after electrical
current to the coil has been switched off. The solenoid can be used
as a gate or a stopper.
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (20)
Injector
Injectors are used to spray fuel into the intake area or directly into
the cylinders of combustion engines. The amount of fuel injected
can be adjusted by varying the valve opening time.
The model used in FluidSIM represents only the valve solenoid that
opens and closes the valve.
Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated current: 0.001 ... 100 A (0.125)
Time constant (Coil): 0.01 ... 1000 ms (2.5)
Proportional adjustment unit
The proportional adjusting mechanism in FluidSIM is used for visual

representation of a proportional valve as an actuator.

The model used in FluidSIM represents only the proportional sole-
noid of the electrical section. The position of the proportional
solenoid is proportional to the current, and is represented visually.
The maximum displacement is attained at the nominal current.
Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated current: 0.001 ... 100 A (0.125)
Volt meter
With a voltmeter, the voltage between two positions in a circuit can

be measured.
Measure mode: Instantaneous value,Effective (RMS) voltage
without DC component,Effective (RMS) voltage (Instantaneous
value)
Time interval: 0.001 ... 100 s (0.1)
Resistance: 1E-3 ... 10 MOhm (1)
Ampere meter
With an ammeter, the amperage (current strength) of the current

between two positions in a circuit can be measured.

Measure mode: Instantaneous value,Effective (RMS) current
without DC component,Effective (RMS) current (Instantaneous
value)
Time interval: 0.001 ... 100 s (0.1)
Resistance: 1e-6 ... 10 Ohm (1e-3)
Indicator light
If current flows, the indicator light is displayed in the user-defined

color.
Resistance: 0.01 ... 1E4 Ohm (193.5)
Lamp
When current flows through the lamp, an optical signal is activated.

In FluidSIM, the lamp is colored with the set color.
There are two different physical models to choose from.
In the case of a simple resistor, the lamp is modeled as an ohmic

load with a constant resistance. The resistance is given by the
nominal voltage and the nominal power.
If the “temperature-dependent resistor” is chosen, the resistance

increases as the temperature increases, as in a real light bulb. The
relationship between cold resistance and hot resistance is ob-
served here. The hot resistance is given by the nominal voltage and
the nominal power.
Physical model: Simple resistance,Temperature dependent re-
sistance (Simple resistance)
Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated power: 0.1 ... 10000 W (5)

Ratio R_cold:R_warm: 0.001 ... 1000 (0.1)
Error models
Filament blown: No current flows because the lamp has blown.
Short circuit: The lamp causes a short circuit.
Faulty voltage value: The nominal voltage specified in the failure
configuration is used. This may lead to an unexpected flow of
current.
Faulty power value: The nominal power specified in the failure
current.
Two-filament lamp
A two-filament lamp is used in vehicles in devices such as com-

bined brake light/taillights.
Physical model: Simple resistance,Temperature dependent re-
sistance (Temperature dependent resistance)
Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated power: 0.1 ... 10000 W (21)
Rated power: 0.1 ... 10000 W (5)
Error models
Filament blown: No current flows because the left or right lamp
has blown.
Short circuit: The left or right lamp causes a short circuit.
Faulty power value: The nominal power specified in the failure
configuration is used for the left or right lamp. This may lead to an
unexpected flow of current.

Buzzer
If current flows, a flashing ring around the buzzer is shown. Moreo-

ver, if “Buzzer” is activated in the menu under Options... Sound,
the buzzer is activated if a sound hardware is installed.
Resistance: 0.01 ... 1E4 Ohm (100)
Displacement encoder
The displacement encoder is a slide potentiometer with longitudi-

nal contact and no connecting-rods. It delivers a voltage signal that
is proportional to the pickup position. The pickup position is de-
termined by the piston stroke. The voltage range, which will depict
the minimal and maximal piston position, can be defined within the
range -10 V to +10 V by the user. The displacement encoder re-
quires a power supply of at least 13 V.
Voltage (Cylinder retracted): -10 ... 10 V (0)
Voltage (Cylinder extracted): -10 ... 10 V (10)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (100)
Pneumatic analog pressure sensor (electrical part)
This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog-pressure

sensor.

Hydraulic analog pressure sensor (electrical part)
This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog-pressure

sensor.
Pressure switch, electronic (electrical part)
This symbol represents the electrical part of the hydraulic pressure

switch.
Pneumatic analog flow meter (electrical part)
This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog-flow meter.
Hydraulic analog flow meter (electrical part)
This symbol represents the electrical part of the Analog-flow meter.
Pressure sensor with switching outputs and display (electrical

part)
This symbol represents the electrical part of the pneumatic pres-

sure sensor.
Pressure sensor with display (electrical part)
This symbol represents the electrical part of the pneumatic pres-

sure sensor.

Flow sensor (electrical part)
This symbol represents the electrical part of the pneumatic flow

sensor.
Position transmitter
The position transmitter is used for continuous detection of the

piston position of magnetically sensed drives. The piston position
is sensed without contact (magnetic). The measurement result is
output in the sensing range of 50 mm as a current and voltage
signal via two analogue outputs. A displacement-proportional
output signal is supplied within the sensing range.
Voltage (Cylinder retracted): -100 ... 100 V (2)
Voltage (Cylinder extracted): -100 ... 100 V (10)
Current (Cylinder retracted): -10000 ... 10000 mA (4)
Current (Cylinder extracted): -10000 ... 10000 mA (20)
Idle current (24 V): 1 ... 10000 mA (32)
Signal converter
The signal converter converts analogue voltage output signals from

a sensor into switching points. It closes or opens one of the two
circuits (Out A, Out B) when the adjustable switching points are
reached. Possible switching functions are threshold value, hystere-
sis or window comparator. The switching characteristic (N/C, N/O)
can also be selected.
(Threshold value)
Switching point 1: -100 ... 100 V (1)

Hysteresis: 0 ... 100 V (0)
(Threshold value)
Switching time: 1e-5 ... 10 s (0.001)
Idle current (24 V): 1 ... 10000 mA (32)
Stopwatch
The stopwatch can perform timing manually as well as in response

to electrical signals. The stopwatch needs a supply voltage.
Timing is started by a signal at the “Start” input. A signal at the

“Stop” input stops or pauses timing. A signal at the “Reset” input
stops the measurement and resets the measured time.
An “R” appears in the top right corner during simulation. Clicking in

this area stops the measurement and resets the measured time.
Clicking outside this area starts or pauses timing.

22.3.4 General switches
Break switch
General break switch that is tailored depending on the type of

component that actuates it. For example, if the break switch is
linked via a label to a switch-off delay relay, the break switch
changes to a switch-off delay break switch in the circuit diagram.
Make switch
General make switch that is tailored according to the component

that actuates it. For example, if the make switch is linked via a label
to a switch-on delayed relay, the make switch changes to a switch-
on delayed make switch in the circuit diagram.
Changeover switch
General changeover switch that is tailored according to the compo-

nent that actuates it. For example, if the changeover switch is
linked via a label to a switch-on delayed relay, the changeover
switch changes to a changeover switch in the circuit diagram.

22.3.5 Delay Switches
Break switch (switch-on delayed)
Switch with delayed opening after pickup. Switch-on delayed break

switches are created by using a general break switch and setting a
label.
Make switch (switch-on delayed)
Switch with delayed closing after pickup. Switch-on delayed make

switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a
label.
Changeover switch (switch-on delayed)
Changeover switch with delayed changeover after pickup. Switch-

on delayed changeover switches are created by using a general
changeover switch and setting a label.
Break switch (switch-off delayed)
Switch with delayed closing after dropout. Switch-off delayed break

label.
Make switch (switch-off delayed)

Switch with delayed opening after dropout. Switch-off delayed
make switches are created by using a general make switch and
setting a label.
Changeover switch (switch-off delayed)
Changeover switch with delayed changeover after dropout. Switch-

off delayed changeover switches are created by using a general
22.3.6 Limit Switches
Limit switch (break)
Switch that is opened by a cam attached to the cylinder rod. The

switch closes immediately when the cam has passed the switch.
Limit switches are created by using a general break switch and
setting a label.
Switch with roll (break)

Switches with roll are created by using a general break switch,
setting a label and selecting the switch type in the component’s
properties dialog.

Reed contact (break)

Reed contacts are created by using a general break switch, setting
a label and selecting the switch type in the component’s properties
dialog.
Limit switch (make)
Switch that is closed by a cam attached to the cylinder rod. The

switch opens immediately when the cam has passed the switch.
Limit switches are created by using a general make switch and
setting a label.
Switch with roll (make)

Switches with roll are created by using a general make switch,
setting a label and selecting the switch type in the component’s
properties dialog.
Reed contact (make)

Reed contacts are created by using a general make switch, setting a
label and selecting the switch type in the component’s properties
dialog.

Limit switch (changeover)
Switch that is changed over by a cam attached to the cylinder rod.

The switch changes back immediately when the cam has passed
the switch. Limit switches are created by using a general changeo-
ver switch and setting a label.
Switch with roll (changeover)

the switch. Switches with roll are created by using a general
changeover switch, setting a label and selecting the switch type in
Reed contact (changeover)

the switch. Reed contacts are created by using a general changeo-
ver switch, setting a label and selecting the switch type in the
component’s properties dialog.
22.3.7 Switches, Manually operated
Pushbutton (break)
Switch that opens when actuated and closes immediately when

released. In FluidSIM switches can be actuated permanently
(locked) when continuing to hold down the mouse button and

pushing the Shift key. This permanent actuation is released by a
simple click on the component.
Pushbutton (make)
Switch that closes when actuated and opens immediately when

pushing the Shift - key. This permanent actuation is released by
a simple click on the component.
Pushbutton (changeover)
Switch that changes over when actuated and changes back imme-
diately when released. In FluidSIM switches can be actuated per-
manently (locked) when continuing to hold down the mouse button
and pushing the Shift - key. This permanent actuation is released
by a simple click on the component.
Detent switch (break)
Switch that opens and locks when actuated.
Detent switch (make)
Switch that closes and locks when actuated.

Detent switch (changeover)
Switch that changes over and locks when actuated.
22.3.8 Pressure Operated Switches
Pneumatic to electric converter (electrical part)
The converter produces an electrical signal, if the preset differential

pressure of the differential pressure switch is exceeded.
Pressure switch (break)
Switch that opens when the preset switching pressure of the

pneumatic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded. Pressure
label.
Pressure switch (make)
The switch closes when the preset switching pressure of the pneu-
matic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded. Pressure switches
are created by using a general make switch and setting a label.
Pressure switch (changeover)
The switch changes over when the preset switching pressure of the

switches are created by using a general changeover switch and
setting a label.
Pneumatic pressure sensor (electrical part)
The switch relays an electrical signal when the preset switching

pressure at the pneumatic pressure switch is exceeded.
Hydraulic pressure sensor (electrical part)
The switch relays an electrical signal when the preset switching

pressure at the hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded.
22.3.9 Proximity Switches
Magnetic proximity switch
Switch that closes when a solenoid is brought nearby. In the Simu-

lation Mode the proximity switch can also be actuated by clicking
on it.
Inductive proximity switch
Switch that closes when the induced electro-magnetic field is

changed. In the Simulation Mode the proximity switch can also be
actuated by clicking on it.

Capacitive proximity switch
Switch that closes when its electrostatic field is changed. In the

Simulation Mode the proximity switch can also be actuated by
clicking on it.
Optical proximity switch
Switch that closes when the light barrier is interrupted. In the

clicking on it.
22.3.10 Relays
Relay
The relay picks up immediately when current is supplied and drops

out immediately when current is removed.
On-delay: 0.01 ... 10000 ms (10)
Off-delay: 0.01 ... 10000 ms (8)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
Relay
The relay picks up when a certain percentage of the nominal volt-

age is applied and drops out again when the voltage falls below a
certain percentage of the nominal voltage. The buildup and dissipa-

tion of the magnetic field is not modeled. However, a pickup delay
and a dropout delay may be specified.
Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (24)
On-delay: 0.01 ... 10000 ms (10)
Off-delay: 0.01 ... 10000 ms (8)
Rated power: 0.1 ... 10000 W (1.5)
Pick-up voltage: 0 ... 100 % (70)
Drop-out voltage: 0 ... 100 % (30)
Error models
Relay coil broken: The relay cannot pick up because current can-
not flow through the broken relay coil.
Relay coil shortcut: The installation of the coil is faulty, creating a
short circuit. The coil resistance specified in the failure configura-
tion is used.
Relay picked up permanently: The contacts are being actuated
permanently due to a mechanical defect.
Relay does not pick up: The contacts cannot be actuated due to a
mechanical defect.
Relay does not drop out: Once the relay has picked up, it no longer
drops out.
Relay with switch-on delay
The relay picks up after a preset time when current is supplied and
drops out immediately when current is removed.
Delay time: 0 ... 999 s (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)

Relay with switch-off delay

out after a preset time when current is removed.
Delay time: 0 ... 999 s (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
Relay counter
The relay picks up after a predefined number of current pulses

has/have been counted between the connections A1 and A2. If a
potential is supplied between the connections R1 and R2, the
counter is reset to its predefined value.
In the Simulation Mode the relay counter can also be reset by

clicking on it.
The relay works as a simple counter when the default number is set
to 0. In this case the relay never picks up.
Counter: 0 ... 9999 (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
Starting current limiter
The starting current limiter consists essentially of a relay, whose

coil is situated between the connections IN and 0V, and whose
switch contact is situated between the connections 24V and OUT.
An electronic longitudinal controller restricts, with a switched relay

contact, the current flow to the preset value for the specified dura-
tion. The starting current limiter is usually deployed in combination
with the electric motor.
Duration: 1 ... 10000 ms (0.05)
Current limit: 0.01 ... 100 A (2)
Relay with make contact
The relay consists of a coil and a make contact. The response time
varies depending on the time constant of the coil.
The time constant indicates when 63% of the nominal current is

reached if the nominal voltage is applied abruptly.
Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated power: 0.1 ... 10000 W (1.5)
Error models
tion is used.
mechanical defect.
drops out.

Relay with break contact
The relay consists of a coil and a break contact. The response time
varies depending on the time constant of the coil.

Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated power: 0.1 ... 10000 W (1.5)
Error models
tion is used.
mechanical defect.
drops out.
Relay with changeover contact
The relay consists of a coil and a changeover contact. The response

time varies depending on the time constant of the coil.

Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated power: 0.1 ... 10000 W (1.5)

Error models
tion is used.
mechanical defect.
drops out.
Relay coil (AC)
The relay coil is energized when actuated with alternating current.

The relay coil can also be actuated with direct current. In this case
though, it must be noted that a higher actuating current flows
through the coil due to the lack of reactance.
The relay coil is modeled as a series connection of an ideal resistor

and an ideal coil. The resistance and inductance are automatically
calculated from the component parameters.
Effective (RMS) voltage: 0.1 ... 600 V (230)
Apparent power: 0.1 ... 10000 W (15)
Power factor cos φ: 0.001 ... 1 (0.35)
Frequency: 30 ... 100 Hz (50)
Flasher relay
The hazard flasher relay is used for the cyclical switching off and on
of a vehicle’s turn signal lights and hazard flasher system.

Terminal 31 is connected to ground. Once terminal 49 is supplied
with voltage, the internal electronics ensure that the voltage ap-
plied to terminal 49 is switched through cyclically to terminal 49a.
The hazard flasher relay is in fact a specialized pulse-width modu-

lated switch. The switch-on time and the switch-off time are identi-
cal for the hazard flasher relay. The frequency specifies how often
the switch is switched on and off per second.
Frequency: 0.1 ... 100 Hz (1.5)
Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated power: 0.01 ... 100 W (1)
Error models
Component without function: The hazard flasher relay does not
switch through to terminal 49a.
Faulty frequency: The hazard flasher relay switches with the fre-
quency specified in the failure configuration.
22.3.11 Controller
Comparator
The comparator is a discontinuous (switching) two-step action

controller with differential gap (hysteresis). When activated, it
delivers a predefined voltage signal. The switch-on value for the
activation is defined by nominal value + 1/2 hysteresis and the
switch-off value by nominal value - 1/2 hysteresis. The comparator
requires a power supply of 24 V.

Set value voltage: -300 ... 300 V (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (100)
PID controller
The PID-Controller is a continuous controller consisting of three

control elements: Proportional, Integral and Derivative. The adjust-
able parameters refer to the PID-Controller in the Technology
Package TP111 pneumatic control TP511 hydraulic control from
Festo Didactic.
The output voltage restriction can be set within the range (i) -10 V
to + 10 V or (ii) 0 V to +10 V. In the range (i), a manipulated variable
offset from -7 V to + 7 V can be specified, and in the range (ii) a
manipulated variable offset from 1.5 V to 8.5 V can be specified.
The PID-controller requires a power supply of 24 V.
Range selection: -10 .. 10 V,0 .. 10 V (-10 .. 10 V)
Proportional gain: 0 ... 1000 (1)
Integral gain: 0 ... 1000 1/s (0)
Derivation gain: 0 ... 1000 ms (0)
Control quantity offset: -7 ... 7 V (0)
Minimum voltage: 0.1 ... 300 V (21.6)
Loop controller
The status controller is especially suitable for controlling pneumatic

positioning circuits. A pneumatic positioning circuit counts to the
controlled systems that can only be unsatisfactorily controlled with
a standard controller. Three parameters can be attributed to the
present status controller: position, speed and acceleration of the
piston. The controller is therefore referred to as a “triple loop”
controller. Speed and acceleration are not measured with sensors
out of cost reasons. They are calculated by the controller from the

differences in position. The adjustable parameters refer to the
status controller in the Technology Package TP111 Closed-loop
pneumatics TP511 Closed-loop hydraulics from Festo Didactic.
The output voltage restriction can be set within the range (i) -10 V
to + 10 V or (ii) 0 V to +10 V. In the range (i), a manipulated variable
offset from -7 V to + 7 V can be specified, and in the range (ii) a
manipulated variable offset from 1.5 V to 8.5 V can be specified.
The status controller requires a power supply of 24 V.
Range selection: -10 .. 10 V,0 .. 10 V (-10 .. 10 V)
Deviation gain: 0 ... 10 (1)
Velocity damping: 0 ... 100 ms (0)
Acceleration damping: 0 ... 10 ms2 (0)
Total gain: 0 ... 1000 (1)
Control quantity offset: -7 ... 7 V (0)
Minimum voltage: 0.1 ... 300 V (21.6)
22.3.12 EasyPort/OPC/DDE
FluidSIM Output Port
Communication with the EasyPort-Hardware and other applications

is implemented with the FluidSIM-Output.
FluidSIM Input Port

is implemented with the FluidSIM-Input.

FluidSIM Output Port (analog)

is implemented with the analog FluidSIM-Output.
FluidSIM Input Port (analog)

is implemented with the analog FluidSIM-Input.
Multi-pin plug distributor
Communication with EasyPort hardware, as well as with other

applications, is carried out with the multi-pin plug distributor. The
contacts on the right-hand side (1, 3, 5, 7, 9 and 11) represent the
digital outputs, and the contacts on the left-hand side (0, 2, 4, 6, 8
and 10) the digital inputs. If the “Priority for connected hardware”
switch is activated, only the input signals from the external sensors
are taken into consideration, if an EasyPort has been connected.
Universal I/O
The universal input/output-unit is connected with the multi-pin

plug distributor by a label. The component is an input if the label
refers to an input channel of the multi-pin plug distributor. The
component is an output if the label refers to an output channel of
the multi-pin plug distributor.
If used as an input the universal I/O-component is a voltage source.

If the correspondent input channel of the multi-pin plug distributor
on high level, the universal I/O-Component delivers 24 V, otherwise
0V.

If used as an output channel, the universal I/O-component sets the
correspondent output channel of the multi-pin plug distributor on
high level, if there is a higher voltage than 20 V.
22.4 Electrical Controls (NEMA)
22.4.1 Power supply
Electrical connection 0V
Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (0)
Electrical connection 24V+
Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (24)

Indicator light
If current flows, the indicator light is displayed in the user-defined

color.
Resistance: 0.01 ... 1E4 Ohm (193.5)
22.4.3 General switches
Break switch
General break switch that is tailored depending on the type of

component that actuates it. For example, if the break switch is
linked via a label to a switch-off delay relay, the break switch
changes to a switch-off delay break switch in the circuit diagram.
Make switch
General make switch that is tailored according to the component

that actuates it. For example, if the make switch is linked via a label
to a switch-on delayed relay, the make switch changes to a switch-
on delayed make switch in the circuit diagram.

Changeover switch
General changeover switch that is tailored according to the compo-

nent that actuates it. For example, if the changeover switch is
linked via a label to a switch-on delayed relay, the changeover
switch changes to a switch-on delayed changeover switch in the
circuit diagram.
22.4.4 Delay Switches
Break switch (switch-on delayed)
Switch with delayed opening after pickup. Switch-on delayed break

label.
Make switch (switch-on delayed)
Switch with delayed closing after pickup. Switch-on delayed make

switches are created by using a general make switch and setting a
label.
Changeover switch (switch-on delayed)
Changeover switch with delayed changeover after pickup. Switch-

on delayed changeover switches are created by using a general

Break switch (switch-off delayed)
Switch with delayed closing after dropout. Switch-off delayed break

label.
Make switch (switch-off delayed)
Switch with delayed opening after dropout. Switch-off delayed

make switches are created by using a general make switch and
setting a label.
Changeover switch (switch-off delayed)
Changeover switch with delayed changeover after dropout. Switch-

off delayed changeover switches are created by using a general
22.4.5 Limit Switches
Limit switch (break)

setting a label.

Switch with roll (break)

setting a label.
Reed contact (break)

setting a label.
Limit switch (make)

setting a label.
Switch with roll (make)

setting a label.
Reed contact (make)


setting a label.
Limit switch (changeover)

the switch. Limit switches are created by using a general changeo-
ver switch and setting a label.
Switch with roll (changeover)

the switch. Switches with roll are created by using a general
changeover switch, setting a label and selecting the switch type in
Reed contact (changeover)

the switch. Reed contacts are created by using a general changeo-
ver switch, setting a label and selecting the switch type in the
component’s properties dialog.

22.4.6 Switches, Manually operated
Pushbutton (break)
Switch that opens when actuated and closes immediately when

Pushbutton (make)
Switch that closes when actuated and opens immediately when

and pushing the Shift key. This permanent actuation is released

and pushing the Shift key. This permanent actuation is released
Detent switch (break)
Switch that opens and locks when actuated.
Pushbutton (make)
Switch that closes and locks when actuated.
Detent switch (changeover)
Switch that changes over and locks when actuated.
22.4.7 Pressure sensor
Pressure switch (break)
Switch that opens when the preset switching pressure of the

label.

Pressure switch (make)
The switch closes when the preset switching pressure of the pneu-
matic or hydraulic pressure switch is exceeded. Pressure switches
are created by using a general make switch and setting a label.
Pressure switch (changeover)
The switch changes over when the preset switching pressure of the
switches are created by using a general changeover switch and
setting a label.
22.4.8 Proximity Switches
Magnetic proximity switch
Switch that closes when a solenoid is brought nearby. In the Simu-

lation Mode the proximity switch can also be actuated by clicking
on it.
Switching output: PNP,NPN (PNP)
Idle current (24 V): 1 ... 10000 mA (32)

Inductive proximity switch
Switch that closes when the induced electro-magnetic field is

changed. In the Simulation Mode the proximity switch can also be
actuated by clicking on it.
Idle current (24 V): 1 ... 10000 mA (32)
Capacitive proximity switch
Switch that closes when its electrostatic field is changed. In the

clicking on it.
Idle current (24 V): 1 ... 10000 mA (32)
Optical proximity switch
Switch that closes when the light barrier is interrupted. In the

clicking on it.

Idle current (24 V): 1 ... 10000 mA (32)
22.4.9 Relays
Relay

out immediately when current is removed.
On-delay: 0.01 ... 10000 ms (10)
Off-delay: 0.01 ... 10000 ms (8)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
Relay with switch-on delay
The relay picks up after a preset time when current is supplied and
drops out immediately when current is removed.
Delay time: 0 ... 999 s (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)

Relay with switch-off delay

out after a preset time when current is removed.
Delay time: 0 ... 999 s (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)
Relay counter
The relay picks up after a predefined number of current pulses

has/have been counted between the connections A1 and A2. If a
potential is supplied between the connections R1 and R2, the
counter is reset to its predefined value.
In the Simulation Mode the relay counter can also be reset by

clicking on it.
The relay works as a simple counter when the default number is set
to 0. In this case the relay never picks up.
Counter: 0 ... 9999 (5)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (550)

22.5 Electrical engineering/Electronics
22.5.1 Power supply
Constant voltage source
A constant voltage source is an ideal voltage source, which can

maintain a fixed voltage that does not depend on the output cur-
rent or load resistance.
Voltage: 0 ... 400 V (12)
Error models
current.
Potential
A potential is an ideal voltage source with a reference point of

“ground”.
Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (5)

Potential/Terminal
In FluidSIM the terminal/potential symbol is assigned to the power

supply. The symbol is therefore connected by default to a potential,
e.g. 12 V.
The voltages calculated in FluidSIM are calculated as potentials

relative to 0 V (ground) and can be displayed on the connectors of
the electrical symbols.
In automobile applications, terminal 15 is only connected to a

potential via the ignition switch. For this reason the Properties
dialog window for the symbol allows the user to specify that the
symbol should not be given a potential. In this case, the symbol
functions like the end of a line. If the ignition switch is not repre-
sented in the circuit diagram, terminal 15 can be connected to a
potential directly.
If the symbol is connected to a potential directly, the voltage level

is displayed on the symbol. Furthermore, the symbol can be clicked
during the simulation to disconnect it from the potential, as with a
switch.
Terminal: ... (30)
Connected to potential: ... (true)
Voltage: 0 ... 400 V (12)
Switched on: ... (true)
Error models
current.

Ground
The ground symbol defines the 0 V reference potential for all signal
and operating voltages.
Three-phase alternator
A three-phase alternator supplies a combined set of three sinusoi-

dal alternating electric voltages. The voltages are phase shifted to
one another.
There are three inductors inside the alternator, spatially off-set by

120°. The magnetic field of an evenly rotating permanent magnet
induces three alternating voltages, phase shifted to one another by
120°.
Frequency: 0.01 ... 1000 Hz (50)
String voltage: 0 ... 400 V (7)
Connector panel
Simple connector panel
DC power supply
Transformer for transforming alternating voltage into direct voltage.
Terminals 1 and 2 are used for connection to the alternating voltage

source. The desired direct voltage is made available at terminals L+
and L-.

Effective (RMS) voltage (min): 10 ... 400 V (90)
AC Frequency (min): 10 ... 100 Hz (30)
Voltage (DC): 0 ... 400 V (12)
Efficiency: 0.1 ... 1 (0.9)
Phase conductor
Phase conductor which makes a sinusoidal alternating voltage

available with adjustable amplitude, frequency and phase dis-
placement. A phase displacement of 0° is preset as a default value
for L1.
Effective (RMS) voltage: 0 ... 400 V (230)
Frequency: 1 ... 100 Hz (50)
Phase shift: 0 ... 360 deg (0)
Phase conductor

placement. A phase displacement of 120° is preset as a default
value for L2.
Frequency: 1 ... 100 Hz (50)
Phase conductor


placement. A phase displacement of 240° is preset as a default
value for L3.
Frequency: 1 ... 100 Hz (50)
Neutral conductor
Neutral conductor.
Protective earth conductor
Protective earth conductor.
DC power supply
Transformer for transforming alternating voltage into direct voltage.
Terminals 1 and 2 are used for connection to the alternating voltage

source. The desired direct voltage is made available at terminals L+
and L-.
Effective (RMS) voltage (min): 10 ... 400 V (90)
AC Frequency (min): 10 ... 100 Hz (30)
Voltage (DC): 0 ... 400 V (12)
Efficiency: 0.1 ... 1 (0.9)

Transformer DC/DC
The transformer transforms a DC input voltage into an DC output

voltage. A simplified mathematical model is used for this in
FluidSIM.
Voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (5)
Generator (Pulse Width Modulation)
The generator supplies a pulse-width modulated output signal in

the form of a square voltage. The amplitude of the output voltage
can be adjusted.
The switch-on time is the time in which the high voltage is supplied.
The frequency is the inverse of the cycle period.
The duty cycle is the ratio of the switch-on time to the cycle period,
expressed as a percentage. A duty cycle of 100% therefore means
that the voltage is supplied at the set amplitude continuously.
The generator must be supplied with direct voltage.
Frequency: 0.01 ... 10000 Hz (1)
Pulse duty ratio: 0 ... 100 % (50)
Amplitude: 0 ... 400 V (5)

22.5.2 Passive components
Resistor
A resistor represents an ideal ohmic resistor.
Resistance: 1e-3 ... 1E8 Ohm (100)
Resistor, temperature-dependent (NTC)
In a temperature-dependent resistor of type NTC (Negative Tem-

perature Coefficient), the resistance value falls as the temperature
rises.
Temperature-depended resistors can be heated by external or

internal heating. In case of external heating, the component is
heated by ambient temperature and by the current running through
the component.
The local ambient temperature “T_e” can be changed during simu-

lation and is displayed as a colored scale with a pointer. The arising
component temperature “T” is not shown symbolically. But it can
be shown in a diagram or the circuit.
A Steinhart-Hart-equation with four coefficients is used as mathe-

matical model. The coefficients are automatically calculated by
FluidSIM by providing four reference resistance values “R1” - “R4”.
Ambient temperature: -40 ... 140 °C (22)
Reference Resistance 1 (-40 °C): 1 ... 1E7 Ohm (147560)
Reference Resistance 2 (0 °C): 1 ... 1E7 Ohm (15040)
Reference Resistance 3 (20 °C): 1 ... 1E7 Ohm (5855)
Reference Resistance 4 (120 °C): 1 ... 1E7 Ohm (187.9)
Thermal time constant: 0.001 ... 1000 s (15)

Dissipation factor: 1e-5 ... 1 W/K (0.0156)
Resistor, temperature-dependent (PTC)
In a temperature-dependent resistor of type PTC (Positive Tempera-

ture Coefficient), the resistance value rises as the temperature
rises.
Temperature-depended resistors can be heated by external or

internal heating. In case of external heating, the component is
heated by ambient temperature and by the current running through
the component.
The local ambient temperature “T_e” can be changed during simu-

lation and is displayed as a colored scale with a pointer. The arising
component temperature “T” is not shown symbolically. But it can
be shown in a diagram or the circuit.
Especially PTC resistors build from metal behave like NTC resistors
up to a certain temperature. This is taken into account by FluidSIM
and can be specified by providing three reference points.
1. Reference resistance “R_0” at low temperature “T_0”. 2. Tem-

perature “T_C” at minimal resistance “R_C”. 3. Reference re-
sistance “R_1” at high temperature “”T_1".
This means the resistance falls to “T_C” and rises afterwards.
Thermal time constant: 0.001 ... 1000 s (5)
Dissipation factor: 1e-5 ... 1 W/K (7.5e-4)
Reference temperature: -80 ... 300 °C (-40)
Reference Resistance: 1 ... 1E7 Ohm (105)
Reference temperature: -80 ... 300 °C (20)
Reference temperature: -80 ... 300 °C (80)

Resistor, voltage-dependent (VDR)
A varistor is a voltage-dependent resistor. Resistance decreases

abruptly once a particular voltage threshold is exceeded.
Resistor, light-dependent (LDR)
A light-dependent resistor consists of an amorphous semiconduc-

tor film. As the incidence of light is increased, electrical resistance
is decreased, due to the internal photoelectric effect.
Light intensity: 0 ... 100 % (0)
Min. Resistance: 1 ... 1E6 Ohm (183)
Max. Resistance: 1 ... 1E6 Ohm (34324)
Lght-dependent resistor (LDR) with lamp
The symbol is a combination of a light-dependent resistor (LDR)

and a lamp.
The resistor can be masked continuously during the simulation. The

minimum resistance is reached when the lamp is supplied with its
nominal voltage and the resistor is not masked.
Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated power: 0.1 ... 10000 W (2.4)
Covering: 0 ... 1 (0)
Min. Resistance: 1 ... 1E6 Ohm (176.5)
Max. Resistance: 1 ... 1E6 Ohm (2333.3)

Fuse
A fuse is an overcurrent protection device that interrupts the circuit

when the current exceeds a given value for a given period of time.
The fuse will not trip while the current remains below the nominal
current I_N.
A tripped fuse can be reset during the simulation by clicking it with

the mouse. However, it will trip again if the current was not re-
duced.
In FluidSIM, fuses are modeled by a general fuse, the tripping

characteristics of which can be specified as a trip curve. The trip
curve is a curve describing the relationship between the current
intensity and the trip time. The curve is defined by two points. The
two points can be defined by the user by selecting “User Defined”.
The first point is the time when the fuse trips if ten times the nomi-
nal current is applied constantly. The factor c1h is specified in
FluidSIM for the second point. At a constant current intensity of c1h
* I_N the fuse trips after exactly one hour. This factor can be found
in the manufacturer’s specifications.
If the user selects FF (Very Fast Acting), F (Fast Acting), M (Medium

Acting), T (Slow Acting) or TT (Very Slow Acting), an average value
will be selected automatically for the first time point.
Tripping characteristic: User Defined,FF (Very Fast Acting),F (Fast
Acting),M (Medium Acting),T (Slow Acting),TT (Very Slow Acting)
(M (Medium Acting))
Rated current: 0.01 ... 10000 A (5)
Tripping time (10*I_N): 0.0001 ... 10 s (0.02)
Factor Rated current (Tripping time 1h): 1.21 ... 9.9 (1.5)
Resistance: 0.0001 ... 100 Ohm (0.01)
Error models
Fuse blown: The tripped fuse interrupts the current flow.

Potentiometer
A potentiometer is an electrical resistance component with me-

chanically adjustable (by means of rotation or sliding) resistance
values. It provides three connectors and is mainly used as a contin-
uously adjustable voltage divider.
Potentiometer position: 0 ... 100 % (0)
Resistance: 1E-4 ... 100000 kOhm (1)
Protective resistance: 1E-6 ... 1000 Ohm (1e-6)
Double potentiometer
The double potentiometer is a combination of two potentiometers

whose potentiometer positions are mechanically interlinked.
Potentiometer position: 0 ... 100 % (0)
Capacitor
A capacitor is a passive electrical component which is able to store

electric charge (and therefore electric energy.)
The capacitor in its basic configuration consists of two electrically

conductive surfaces, the electrodes. The electrodes are separated
through an insulating material, the so-called dielectric. The separa-
tion of the two electrodes is so narrow, that the electrical forces are
able to act through the insulating material.

If a constant voltage is applied to the connectors of an uncharged
capacitor, a current flows for a short period of time and one of the
electrodes is positively charged, the other one negatively. This
electric charge is retained when the capacitor is disconnected from
the voltage source. If charge resp. electric flow is extracted from the
capacitor, its voltage drops again.
Capacity: 1E-4 ... 1E7 uF (1)
Capacitor, polarized
A capacitor is a passive electrical component which is able to store

electric charge (and therefore electric energy.)
The capacitor in its basic configuration consists of two electrically

conductive surfaces, the electrodes. The electrodes are separated
through an insulating material, the so-called dielectric. The separa-
tion of the two electrodes is so narrow, that the electrical forces are
able to act through the insulating material.
If a constant voltage is applied to the connectors of an uncharged

capacitor, a current flows for a short period of time and one of the
electrodes is positively charged, the other one negatively. This
electric charge is retained when the capacitor is disconnected from
the voltage source. If charge resp. electric flow is extracted from the
capacitor, its voltage drops again.
In contrast to the non-polarized capacitor, the polarized capacitor is

only suitable for DC and for AC voltage that does not reverse the
capacitor’s polarity. The advantage of the polarized capacitor is the
much higher capacity for the same form factor compared to non-
polarized capacitors.
Capacity: 1E-4 ... 1E7 uF (1)

Coil
An inductor is a passive electrical component which is able to

create induction voltage.
An inductor, also called an inductance, in its basic configuration

consists of wire coils. The inductor provides two terminals.
If an inductor is connected to a DC voltage, then an exponentially

increasing current will flow.
Inductance: 1E-3 ... 1E4 mH (100)
Transformer
The transformer consists of two transformer coils. If an alternating

voltage is applied to one transformer coil, an alternating voltage is
induced in the second coil. In the no-load case, the value of the new
voltage when compared to the originally supplied voltage, follows
the ratio of the number of windings of the corresponding coils to
each other.
Inductance 1: 1E-3 ... 1E4 mH (595)
Windings 1: 1E-3 ... 1E4 (600)
Windings 2: 1E-3 ... 1E4 (200)
Coupling coefficient: 0 ... 1 (0.9)

22.5.3 Semiconductors
1N4007, Diode
A diode allows an electric current to pass in only one direction,

while in the opposite direction it acts as an insulator. Therefore,
diodes have a forward direction and a reverse direction.
Reference voltage: 0.1 ... 100 V (0.7)
Reference current: 1 ... 10000 mA (12.6)
Resistance in series: 0.001 ... 1000 Ohm (0.0341512)
Saturation current: 1e-15 ... 100 A (7.02767e-9)
LED, red
A light-emitting diode (LED) is a semiconductor component that

emits light and has the electrical characteristics of a diode. If an
electric current is flowing through the diode in forward direction, it
emits light with a wavelength that depends on the semiconductor
material and doping.
To make the use of the LED as a simple signal indicator easier,

FluidSIM allows setting the color independent of the physical
characteristics.
Reference voltage: 0.1 ... 100 V (2)
Reference current: 1 ... 10000 mA (25)
Resistance in series: 0.001 ... 1000 Ohm (9)
Saturation current: 1e-15 ... 100 A (1e-12)

LED, green


characteristics.
LED, blue


characteristics.
Reference voltage: 0.1 ... 100 V (4)
Resistance in series: 0.001 ... 1000 Ohm (12.5)

LED, red or green

In this component, a green and a red LED with opposite polarity are
connected in parallel. Depending on the current direction either the
green or red LED lights up. Connected to alternating current with a
frequency higher than about 30 Hz, the human eye cannot recog-
nize the blinking and it seems as if both LEDs are lit simultaneously.
Reference voltage (Red LED): 0.1 ... 100 V (2)
Reference current (Red LED): 1 ... 10000 mA (25)
Saturation current (Red LED): 1e-15 ... 100 mA (1e-12)
Reference voltage (Green LED): 0.1 ... 100 V (2.2)
Reference current (Green LED): 1 ... 10000 mA (30)
Saturation current (Green LED): 1e-15 ... 100 mA (1e-12)
Z-diode
Because of their characteristics, zener diodes are used in numerous

circuitries for stabilizing and limiting electrical voltages. In forward
direction, they behave like normal diodes. In reverse direction,
resistance drops off considerably after the voltage exceeds a cer-
tain value, the so-called breakdown voltage. The voltage does not
increase by much after that, even if the electric current is increased.
Z-voltage: 0.1 ... 100 V (10)

Current at Z-voltage: 1 ... 10000 mA (15)
BC140, NPN transistor
An NPN transistor is a bipolar junction transistor (BJT). It is operat-

ed with an electric current and is used for switching and amplifying
signals without using mechanically moving parts.
There are two types of BJTs: NPN and PNP. The letters indicate the
order and doping type of the layers. Essentially, a BJT constitutes
two p-n junctions connected together in series (like that of a p-n
diode.) The three terminals are called collector (C), base (B) and
emitter (E).
Forward current gain: 0.1 ... 1000 (120)
Reverse current gain: 0.1 ... 1000 (1)
Saturation current: 1e-16 ... 1e-3 A (8.81138e-14)
Forward early voltage: 1 ... 1000 V (64)
BC160, PNP transistor
A PNP transistor is a bipolar junction transistor (BJT). It is operated

with an electric current and is used for switching and amplifying
signals without using mechanically moving parts.
There are two types of BJTs: NPN and PNP. The letters indicate the
order and doping type of the layers. Essentially, a BJT constitutes
two p-n junctions connected together in series (like that of a p-n
diode.) The three terminals are called collector (C), base (B) and
emitter (E).
Forward current gain: 0.1 ... 1000 (230)
Reverse current gain: 0.1 ... 1000 (1)
Saturation current: 1e-16 ... 1e-3 A (8.81138e-14)

Forward early voltage: 1 ... 1000 V (64)
2N3819, N-channel JFET transistor
A junction gate field-effect transistor (JFET) controls the electrical

current that flows through the channel between the source and
drain terminals, by using a junction between the gate connector
and the channel.
Depending on doping type, JFETs are classified in two types: n-

channel and p-channel JFETs.
Threshold voltage: -20 ... 0 V (-3)
Transconductance parameter: 1e-6 ... 1e-1 A/V2 (1.304e-3)
Channel-length modulation parameter: 1e-6 ... 1e-1 1/V (2.25e-3)
2N3820, P-channel JFET transistor
A junction gate field-effect transistor (JFET) controls the electrical

current that flows through the channel between the source and
drain terminals, by using a junction between the gate terminal and
the channel.
Depending on doping type, JFETs are classified in two types: n-

channel and p-channel JFETs.
Threshold voltage: 0 ... 20 V (2.5)
Transconductance parameter: 1e-6 ... 1e-1 A/V2 (1.271e-3)
Channel-length modulation parameter: 1e-6 ... 1e-1 1/V (0.04)

BUZ10, N-channel MOSFET transistor
A metal-oxide-semiconductor field-effect transistor (MOSFET) is an

active component with at least three terminals (electrodes): G
(gate), D (drain) and S (source.) In some designs, an additional B
(bulk) terminal is fed to the outside. Usually though, B is connected
internally with S.
Like other field-effect transistors, a MOSFET acts as a voltage-

controlled resistor, meaning that the voltage between gate and
source can be used to change the resistance (and thus the electri-
cal current) between drain and source by several orders of magni-
tude.
Depending on doping type, MOSFETs are classified in two types: n-

channel and p-channel MOSFETs.
BS250, P-channel MOSFET transistor
A metal-oxide-semiconductor field-effect transistor (MOSFET) is an

active component with at least three terminals (electrodes): G
(gate), D (drain) and S (source.) In some designs, an additional B
(bulk) terminal is fed to the outside. Usually though, B is connected
internally with S.
Like other field-effect transistors, a MOSFET acts as a voltage-

controlled resistor, meaning that the voltage between gate and
source can be used to change the resistance (and thus the electri-
cal current) between drain and source by several orders of magni-
tude.
Depending on doping type, MOSFETs are classified in two types: n-

channel and p-channel MOSFETs.

Unijunction transistor
Similar to a normal bipolar transistor, a unijunction transistor (UJT)

provides three terminals. Unlike a bipolar transistor however, but
similar to a diode, there is only one p-n junction. In practice, it acts
like a controlled diode that, despite the constant polarity of the
applied voltage, can be made conductive or non-conductive. Be-
cause of the two B terminals, the UJT is also called “double-base
diode.”
If a small, positive control voltage against B1 is applied to the

emitter, nothing happens at first. If the control voltage is raised
further and a certain potential is reached, the UEB1 voltage will
collapse abruptly, and at the same time the emitter current will
jump to a certain value. In a sense, the UJT “has been fired.” This
behavior is very similar to a thyristor. A UJT is cleared when the
emitter current falls below a certain threshold.
Thyristor
A thyristor is a semiconductor component built from four or more

semiconductor films of varying levels of doping. Thyristors are
switchable components, meaning they are non-conductive in their
initial state and can be switched on through a small gate current.
After a thyristor has been switched on, it remains conductive even if
there is no gate current. A thyristor can be switched off by falling
below a minimum current, the so-called holding current.
Diac
A DIAC (diode for alternating current) is an electronic component

with only two terminals. DIACs are also referred to as “symmetrical
trigger diodes.” The junction between the terminals only becomes
conductive after a breakover voltage has been reached.
The DIAC’s bidirectional layout allows for the switching of alternat-

ing voltages. As soon as the voltage on the terminals (A1 and A2)

rises above a certain threshold voltage, it will switch through and
the p-n junction becomes conductive. Resistance will rise rapidly
again after the current that is flowing through the DIAC falls below a
certain value (the holding current.) This procedure is referred to as
“resetting the DIAC.”
Triac
In principle, A TRIAC (triode for alternating current) represents an

inverse-parallel connection of two thyristors. This allows for switch-
ing of alternating current, while a single thyristor can switch in only
one direction and thus acts - in its on-state - like a diode.
A TRIAC has a control terminal G (gate) and two main terminals MT1
and MT2, where MT2 is usually directly connected to the casing. In
order to be able to use a single control terminal for both thyristors,
TRIACs contain two firing, or helper, thyristor junctions, so that it
can be flipped into the low-impedance state by using a positive and
negative control pulse.
Photodiode
A photodiode is an electronic component that can be influenced by

light. It can function either as a photoelectric cell (solar cell) or as a
light-dependent resistor if it is reverse-biased in the circuit. The
light applied generates a voltage in the photodiode.
Illuminance: 0 ... 100000 lx (0)
Dark current: 1e-6 ... 1000 uA (1e-3)
Short circuit current (100 lx): 0.001 ... 1000 uA (2)

Photodiode with lamp
The symbol is a combination of a photodiode and a lamp.
The photodiode can be masked continuously during the simulation.

The maximum voltage is reached when the lamp is supplied with its
nominal voltage and the photodiode is not masked.
Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated power: 0.1 ... 10000 W (2.4)
Covering: 0 ... 1 (0)
Dark current: 1e-6 ... 1000 uA (1e-3)
Short circuit current (100 lx): 0.001 ... 1000 uA (10)
Operational amplifier
The operational amplifier amplifies the differential input voltage

U_in with
U_in = U_n – U_p
by the open-loop voltage gain V0, which inverts the output voltage
U_out.
Given an ideal linear model, the output voltage can therefore be

calculated with the following equation:
U_out = -Vo * U_in
Additionally, the supply voltage restricts the output voltage.
The positive supply voltage US_p and the negative supply voltage
US_n can be assigned in the property dialog when using the simpli-
fied symbol.

When the non-linear model is used (which is FluidSIMs default
setting), the previously stated equation is only satisfied by approx-
imation. The output voltage approaches the limiting voltage with-
out abrupt change in the slope.
The inputs are provided with a high resistance while the output is
provided with a low resistance.
The operational amplifier is not modelled as an integrated circuit in

detail. The temporal relation between input and output signal is
modelled as a PT1-System with time constant T.
Physical model: Linear model,Non-linear model (Non-linear
model)
Open loop gain: 1 ... 1e7 (10000)
Input resistance: 1 ... 1e9 Ohm (1e6)
Output resistance: 1 ... 1000 Ohm (10)
Max. Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (12)
Min. Voltage: -400 ... 400 V (-12)
Time constant: 0.001 ... 1 ms (0.1)
Operational amplifier with power supply pins
The operational amplifier amplifies the differential input voltage

U_in with
U_in = U_n – U_p
by the open-loop voltage gain V0, which inverts the output voltage
U_out.
Given an ideal linear model, the output voltage can therefore be

calculated with the following equation:
U_out = -Vo * U_in
Additionally, the supply voltage restricts the output voltage.

The connectors of the supply voltage need to be interconnected, in
order for the operational amplifier to work.
When the non-linear model is used (which is FluidSIMs default

setting), the previously stated equation is only satisfied by approx-
imation. The output voltage approaches the limiting voltage with-
out abrupt change in the slope.
The inputs are provided with a high resistance while the output is
provided with a low resistance.
The operational amplifier is not modelled as an integrated circuit in

detail. The temporal relation between input and output signal is
modelled as a PT1-System with time constant T.
Physical model: Linear model,Non-linear model (Non-linear
model)
Open loop gain: 1 ... 1e7 (10000)
Input resistance: 1 ... 1e9 Ohm (1e6)
Output resistance: 1 ... 1000 Ohm (10)
Time constant: 0.001 ... 1 ms (0.1)
Ohmmeter
An ohmmeter is an electrical test instrument which is used to

measure the electrical resistance of components.
Voltage: 0.1 ... 9 V (9)
Series resistor: 1 ... 1000 kOhm (47)

Oscilloscope
An oscilloscope is an electronic test instrument that allows visual

observation of one or more electrical voltages and their change
over time on a display device. The oscilloscope displays a history
graph, usually as a two-dimensional graph, where the horizontal x-
axis represents time and the vertical y-axis the voltages that are to
be displayed. The resulting image is called an oscillogram.
Channel 2: ... ()
Channel 3: ... ()
Channel 4: ... ()
Resistance: 1E-3 ... 10 MOhm (10)
Power factor meter
Effective power factor is measured in AC circuits with the power

factor meter. The measuring instrument is equipped with a current
path (terminals 1 and 3) and a voltage path (terminals 4 and 2).
Connect the measuring instrument’s current path like an ammeter
and the voltage path like a voltmeter.
Wattmeter
The wattmeter is used to measure effective power in electric cir-

cuits. It’s equipped with a current path (terminals 1 and 3) and a
voltage path (terminals 4 and 2). The wattmeter multiplies meas-
ured values for voltage and current with each other and displays
the result. Connect the measuring instrument’s current path like an
ammeter and the voltage path like a voltmeter.
Apparent power, reactive power and power factor can be measured

with this wattmeter in addition to effective power.

Time interval: 0.001 ... 100 s (0.1)
Wattmeter (3 phases)
The wattmeter with three phases is used to measure effective

power in electric circuits with three-phase alternating current. The
connections L1p and L1n are connected in series of the first phase,
the connections L2p and L2n are connected in series of the second
phase and connections L3p and L3n are connected in series of the
third phase.
Apparent power, reactive power and power factor can be measured

with this wattmeter in addition to effective power.
Time interval: 0.001 ... 100 s (0.1)
Pressure sensor
The pressure sensor is modeled as a simple force-dependent resis-

tor. During the simulation, the mouse can be used to set a force
acting on the sensor. The greater the force, the greater the re-
sistance.
In an automobile, the pressure sensor can determine the pressure

of a fluid that requires measurement. The pressure is the product of
the effective surface area and the force acting on the sensor.
External force: 0 ... 10000 N (0)
Area: 0.01 ... 1000 cm2 (0.25)
External force (Min.): 0 ... 10000 N (0)
External force (Max.): 1e-3 ... 10000 N (1)
Resistance (F_min): 1 ... 1e5 kOhm (900)
Resistance (F_max): 1 ... 1e5 kOhm (11.1)

Hot-film air-mass meter
The hot-film mass air flow sensor is modeled as a simple tempera-

ture-dependent resistor. In FluidSIM, an air flow can be specified
during the simulation as a qualitative value between 0 and 1. The
air flow cools the hot-film mass air flow sensor. The cooler it is, the
greater is its resistance.
Airflow: 0 ... 1 (0)
Knock sensor
The knock sensor is a piezoelectric voltage source. The smallest of

impacts produce a voltage.
In FluidSIM, an impact can be triggered during the simulation by

clicking with the mouse. The voltage curve that results can be
measured, using an oscilloscope for example.
Reluctance speed sensor
The inductive sensor is a magneto whose alternating voltage can be

interpreted directly by a controller in an automobile.
The inductive sensor can be used in an automobile as an r.p.m.

sensor. For a controller, the cycle period is the dimension for the
rotational speed. The more teeth the sensor’s trigger wheel has and
the faster it turns, the shorter the cycle period is.
In FluidSIM, a trigger wheel with 8 teeth is used and is displayed

during the simulation. The rotational speed can be modified during
the simulation.

Revolution: -8000 ... 8000 1/min (0)
Wheel position: 0 ... 360 deg (0)
Hall sensor
In a Hall sensor, an electric voltage called Hall voltage is generated.

The required electric and magnetic processes take place in the
smallest of spaces on the Hall IC, which requires an external power
supply (positive terminal: connector 1, negative terminal: connect-
or 2).
The Hall sensor can record a rotational position without contact. In

FluidSIM, a trigger wheel with 8 teeth is used and is displayed
during the simulation. The rotational position and the rotational
speed can be modified during the simulation.
The Hall sensor is modeled as a simple electronic switch. If there is

a tooth in front of the sensor, connector 1 is switched through to
connector 3.
Revolution: -8000 ... 8000 1/min (0)
Wheel position: 0 ... 360 deg (0)
Rated voltage: 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated power: 0.1 ... 1000 W (0.1)
22.5.5 Switches
Circuit breaker

Circuit breakers protect connected circuits from overloading.
They’re equipped with a thermal trigger and an electromagnetic
trigger. The thermal trigger is usually a bimetallic switch which is
tripped after a specified period of time when current flowing
through the circuit breaker is greater than nominal current. In the
event of a short-circuit or excessive overcurrent, the electromagnet-
ic trigger is tripped and the circuit break opens very quickly. The
circuit breaker is equipped with trip-free release, which means that
it opens even if it’s held closed manually. The switch’s character-
istic can be selected under the circuit breaker’s attributes. If char-
acteristic B is selected, the electromagnetic trigger is tripped at an
amperage of 3 times nominal current, or at 5 times nominal current
if characteristic C is selected. For thermal triggering, a selected
tripping point can be specified for a given overcurrent value.
The symbol for the circuit breaker shows the switch in its open
state. The circuit breaker is closed automatically when simulation
in FluidSIM is started, so that it doesn’t have to be closed manually
for each simulation.
Rated current: 0.1 ... 100 A (4)
Tripping characteristic: B,C (B)
Tripping temperature: 50 ... 150 °C (80)
Multiple of nominal current: 1.5 ... 10 (2)
Tripping time: 0.1 ... 100 s (30)
Circuit breaker three phase
Circuit breakers protect connected circuits from overloading.

They’re equipped with a thermal trigger and an electromagnetic
trigger. The thermal trigger is usually a bimetallic switch which is
tripped after a specified period of time when current flowing
through the circuit breaker is greater than nominal current. In the
event of a short-circuit or excessive overcurrent, the electromagnet-
ic trigger is tripped and the circuit break opens very quickly. The
circuit breaker is equipped with trip-free release, which means that
it opens even if it’s held closed manually.

In the case of this 3-phase circuit breaker, each phase is monitored
separately. If overloading occurs in any single phase, all three
phases are interrupted. The switch’s characteristic can be se-
lected under the circuit breaker’s attributes. If characteristic B is
selected, the electromagnetic trigger is tripped at an amperage of 3
times nominal current, or at 5 times nominal current if characteris-
tic C is selected. For thermal triggering, a selected tripping point
can be specified for a given overcurrent value.
The symbol for the circuit breaker shows the switch in its open
state. The circuit breaker is closed automatically when simulation
in FluidSIM is started, so that it doesn’t have to be closed manually
for each simulation.
Rated current: 0.1 ... 100 A (10)
Tripping characteristic: B,C (B)
Multiple of nominal current: 1.5 ... 10 (2)
Tripping time: 0.1 ... 100 s (30)
Motor circuit breaker
Motor circuit breaker are used to protect connected motors against

overloading. They’re equipped with a thermal trigger for minimal
overcurrent and an electromagnetic trigger for short-circuits. This
motor circuit breaker has a 10 A tripping class. The thermal trigger
starts to trip as of an amperage of 1.2 times nominal current and
the electromagnetic trigger is tripped as of 7.2 times nominal
current. If overloading occurs in any single phase, all three phases
are interrupted when the circuit breaker is tripped. The circuit
breaker has to be closed manually after tripping.
The symbol for the motor circuit breaker shows the switch in its
open state. The circuit breaker is closed automatically when simu-
lation in FluidSIM is started, so that it doesn’t have to be closed
manually for each simulation.

Rated current: 0.1 ... 100 A (0.5)
Motor protection relay
Motor protection relays are used to protect connected motors

against overloading. If overloading occurs in any of the three con-
nected phases, a connected switch can be actuated by means of
the motor protection relay. In the event of overloading, power
supply to the motor is usually interrupted via the its control circuit.
Rated current: 0.1 ... 100 A (0.5)
Safety relay PNOZ
Safety switching devices are essential constituents of safety tech-

nology. This safety relay with positively driven contacts is used for
the implementation of safety functions such as emergency stop or
the monitoring of safety doors.
This type of safety relay is based on the safety switching device for
the emergency stop function and the safety door in Festo Didactic’s
equipment set TP 250, “Safety in pneumatic systems”. The PNOZ
S4 safety relay from Pilz is used in the equipment set. Correct
wiring of the safety switching device is described in the operating
instructions included with the PNOZ S4.
Operating mode: Automatic/Manual start,Monitored reset with
falling edge,Monitored reset with rising edge (Automatic/Manual
start)
Min. Voltage: 0.1 ... 100 V (21.6)

22.5.6 Switches, Automotive
Configurable switch
The configurable switch can be used to configure a switch combina-

tion of up to three switches. Each switch is assigned to just one
input. The switching positions of the individual switches are me-
chanically interlinked. Up to 6 switching positions can be config-
ured.
The graphical representation can be modified via Options.
Ignition-starter switch
The ignition switch is usually installed behind the ignition lock in a

vehicle, and takes the form of a rotary switch.
The ignition switch has three switching positions: 0, 1, and 2. In

FluidSIM the switching between the positions 0 and 1 is realized as
in a detenting switch. The switching between 1 and 2 works like a
momentary-contact pushbutton. When the mouse button is
pressed and held, the position changes from 1 to 2. Once the
mouse button is released again, the ignition switch goes back to
position 1.
Position: 0,1,2 (0)
Light switch
The light switch is a combination of 4 switches whose switching

positions are mechanically interlinked. The light switch can be used
to switch the various lighting functions of a vehicle on and off.

The light switch has three switching positions: 0, 1, and 2. In
FluidSIM the switching between the positions is realized as in a
detenting switch.
Position: 0,1,2 (0)
Fog light switch
The fog light switch is a combination of 2 switches whose switching

positions are mechanically interlinked. The switch can be used to
switch the front and rear fog lights of a vehicle on and off.
The fog light switch has three switching positions: 0, 1, and 2. In

detenting switch.
Position: 0,1,2 (0)
Hazard flasher switch
The hazard warning light switch has two switching positions, 0 and
1. It can be used to switch a vehicle’s hazard flasher system on and
off. Switching position 1 can be signaled by the integrated lamp
when voltage is applied.
The fog light switch has three switching positions: 0, 1, and 2. In

detenting switch.
Position: 0,1 (0)
Rated voltage (Lamp): 0.1 ... 400 V (12)
Rated power (Lamp): 0.1 ... 1000 W (0.1)

Thermal switch
The thermostatic switch switches over when the ambient tempera-

ture exceeds the preset trip temperature.
In FluidSIM, the ambient temperature on the symbol can be modi-

fied during the simulation.
Tripping temperature: -40 ... 140 °C (40)
Hysteresis: 0 ... 20 °C (0)
Thermal switch, 2 stages
The two-stage thermostatic switch is a combination of two thermo-

static switches connected in parallel. Each individual thermostatic
switch switches over when the ambient temperature exceeds the
trip temperature preset for it.
In FluidSIM, the ambient temperature on the symbol can be modi-

fied during the simulation.
Control unit (Pulse Width Modulation)
The controller supplies a pulse-width modulated output signal. It

works like a switch that switches on and off periodically.

The switch-on time is the time in which the switch is switched on.
The frequency is the inverse of the cycle period.
The duty cycle is the ratio of the switch-on time to the cycle period,
expressed as a percentage. A duty cycle of 100% therefore means
that the switch is switched on permanently.
Frequency: 0.01 ... 100000 Hz (10)
Pulse duty ratio: 0 ... 100 % (50)
22.5.7 Machines
Capacitor motor
The capacitor motor is a machine for converting electrical energy

into mechanical energy (rotary motion). Capacitor motors are
single-phase AC motors with squirrel-cage rotor. The rotary field in
the stator is generated with the help of an additional capacitor,
from which the name “capacitor motor” originates. In order to
improve starting torque, a starter capacitor is used in addition to
the operating capacitor. The capacitance of the starter and operat-
ing capacitors can be adjusted, and direction of rotation can be
selected. The Revolution (Switch) parameter indicates as of which
speed switching from the starter capacitor to the operating capaci-
tor takes place.
Terminal 1 and 2 are used to connect the alternating current re-

quired to operate the motor. Terminal 3 is a rotary terminal mecha-
nism. A motor test bench or a further motor can be connected here,
for example. (The direction of rotation is usually reversed via the
connection. This can be selected with the connecting cable.)

The capacitor motor’s characteristic data (for example winding
resistances, inductances, number of pole pairs etc.) are automati-
cally ascertained in the background after entering the performance
data. Details can be found in the following separate section: Simu-
lation of rotating machines.
Power: 0.001 ... 100 kW (0.25)
Revolution: 1 ... 30000 1/min (1400)
Voltage: 1 ... 10000 V (230)
Frequency: 30 ... 100 Hz (50)
Current: 0.01 ... 100 A (1.86)
Capacity (Starting capacitor): 0.1 ... 100 uF (25)
Capacity (Running capacitor): 0.1 ... 100 uF (10)
Direction of rotation: Right,Left (Right)
Revolution (Switch): 1 ... 100000 1/min (1000)
Capacitor motor
The capacitor motor is a machine for converting electrical energy

into mechanical energy (rotary motion). Capacitor motors are
single-phase AC motors with squirrel-cage rotor. The rotary field in
the stator is generated with the help of an additional capacitor,
from which the name “capacitor motor” originates. In order to
improve starting torque, a starter capacitor is used in addition to
the operating capacitor. The capacitance of the starter and operat-
ing capacitors can be adjusted, and direction of rotation can be
selected. The Revolution (Switch) parameter indicates as of which
speed switching from the starter capacitor to the operating capaci-
tor takes place.
The exploded view of the motor makes it possible to manually wire

the stator coils and the capacitors to operating voltage.
Terminals 1 and 2 make reference to the operating capacitor. Ter-

minals 3 and 4 make reference to the starter capacitor including a
centrifugal switch, which opens when a specified speed is exceed-
ed (parameter: Revolution (Switch)). Terminal 5 is a rotary terminal
mechanism. A motor test bench or a further motor can be connect-

ed here, for example. (The direction of rotation is usually reversed
via the connection. This can be selected with the connecting cable.)
The capacitor motor’s characteristic data (for example winding

Power: 0.001 ... 100 kW (0.25)
Revolution: 1 ... 30000 1/min (1400)
Voltage: 1 ... 10000 V (230)
Frequency: 30 ... 100 Hz (50)
Current: 0.01 ... 100 A (1.86)
Capacity (Starting capacitor): 0.1 ... 100 uF (25)
Capacity (Running capacitor): 0.1 ... 100 uF (10)
Revolution (Switch): 1 ... 100000 1/min (1000)
Three-phase current squirrel-cage asynchronous motor
The 3-phase asynchronous motor is a machine for converting

electrical energy into mechanical energy (rotary motion). It’s a
widely used type of induction motor which is simple, rugged and
maintenance-free. It uses a short-circuited rotor and rotor current is
generated by means of induction. Asynchronous motors are used in
particular as high-performance servo-drives. The stator includes
three windings, each of which is arranged at an angle 120° to the
next. A slotted, laminated rotor core is used. A cage made of die-
cast aluminum is inserted into the slots. The cage thus comprises a
system of short-circuited electrical conductors.
The three phases of the 3-phase current are connected to terminal

1 through 3. Terminal 4 is a rotary terminal mechanism. A motor
test bench or a further motor can be connected here, for example.
(The direction of rotation is usually reversed via the connection.
This can be selected with the connecting cable.)

The inner wiring selected in the parameters determines how en-
tered machine performance data is interpreted in order to ascertain
the machine’s characteristics data such as winding resistances,
inductances, number of pole pairs etc. These characteristic ma-
chine data are ascertained automatically in the background after
the performance data have been entered. Details can be found in
the following separate section: Simulation of rotating machines. In
addition to the performance data, tightening torque and pull-out
torque can also be entered to the parameters as a ratio to nominal
torque. This makes it possible to specify the characteristic load
curve of an actual machine somewhat more accurately.
Internal wiring: Star connection,Delta connection (Delta connec-
tion)
Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.25)
Revolution: 1 ... 10000 1/min (1350)
Power factor cos φ: 0.1 ... 0.99 (0.78)
Line-to-line voltage: 1 ... 10000 V (400)
Phase current: 0.1 ... 100 A (0.77)
Frequency: 30 ... 100 Hz (50)
T_0 : T_N: 0.1 ... 10 (1.35)
T_B : T_N: 0.1 ... 10 (1.58)



This can be selected with the connecting cable.) The other electrical
terminals are used for connection to the electrical section of the
motor test bench.

tion)
Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.25)
Revolution: 1 ... 10000 1/min (1350)
Phase current: 0.1 ... 100 A (0.77)
Frequency: 30 ... 100 Hz (50)
T_0 : T_N: 0.1 ... 10 (1.35)
T_B : T_N: 0.1 ... 10 (1.58)


In this representation of the 3-phase motor, the terminals for the

stator windings (U1-U2, V1-V2, W1-W2) are led to the outside. In
this way, the desired wiring of the windings with star or delta con-
nection can be completed from the outside. Terminal 1 is a rotary
terminal mechanism. A motor test bench or a further motor can be
connected here, for example. (The direction of rotation is usually
reversed via the connection. This can be selected with the connect-
ing cable.)

: Star connection,Delta connection (Delta connection)
Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.25)
Revolution: 1 ... 10000 1/min (1350)
Phase current: 0.1 ... 100 A (0.77)
Frequency: 30 ... 100 Hz (50)
T_0 : T_N: 0.1 ... 10 (1.35)
T_B : T_N: 0.1 ... 10 (1.58)



This can be selected with the connecting cable.)

tion)
Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.25)
Revolution: 1 ... 10000 1/min (1350)
Phase current: 0.1 ... 100 A (0.77)
Frequency: 30 ... 100 Hz (50)
T_0 : T_N: 0.1 ... 10 (1.35)

T_B : T_N: 0.1 ... 10 (1.58)
Synchronous motor
The synchronous motor is a machine for converting electrical ener-

gy into mechanical energy (rotary motion). It’s a 3-phase motor in
which the rotor always runs synchronous to the stator’s rotary field.
This version of the synchronous motor is equipped with an addi-
tional squirrel cage, so that it can be started up in accordance with
the asynchronous motor principle.
Terminals 1 through 3 are used to connect 3-phase current for the

generation of a rotary field in the motor’s stator. Terminals 5 and 6
are used to connect direct current to the excitation windings. Ter-
minal 4 is a rotary terminal mechanism. A motor test bench or a
further motor can be connected here, for example. (The direction of
rotation is usually reversed via the connection. This can be selected
with the connecting cable.)
If the synchronous motor is idled without a load, a so-called V curve

can be recorded which reflects the relationship between excitation
current and effective stator current. Nominal excitation current
indicates the point of minimum stator current, at which power
factor is also equal to 1.
Nominal excitation current can be specified as a ratio to maximum

excitation current with the parameter Ratio Current : Max. Current.
The absolute value of nominal excitation current is determined by
multiplying maximum excitation current by the specified ratio (e.g.
maximum excitation current 0.95 A * 0.5 = nominal excitation
current 0.475 A).
The synchronous motor’s characteristic data (for example winding


Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.3)
Revolution: 1 ... 10000 1/min (1500)
Phase current: 0.1 ... 100 A (0.66)
Frequency: 30 ... 100 Hz (50)
Voltage (Max.): 1 ... 10000 V (150)
Current (Max.): 0.1 ... 100 A (0.95)
I_f : I_f_max: 0.01 ... 1 (0.5)
Synchronous motor
The synchronous motor is a machine for converting electrical ener-

gy into mechanical energy (rotary motion). It’s a 3-phase motor in
which the rotor always runs synchronous to the stator’s rotary field.
This version of the synchronous motor is equipped with an addi-
tional squirrel cage, so that it can be started up in accordance with
the asynchronous motor principle.
Terminals 1 through 3 are used to connect 3-phase current for the

generation of a rotary field in the motor’s stator. Terminals 5 and 6
are used to connect direct current to the excitation windings. Ter-
minal 4 is a rotary terminal mechanism. A motor test bench or a
with the connecting cable.) The other electrical terminals are used
for connection to the electrical section of the motor test bench.
If the synchronous motor is idled without a load, a so-called V curve

can be recorded which reflects the relationship between excitation
current and effective stator current. Nominal excitation current
indicates the point of minimum stator current, at which power
factor is also equal to 1.
Nominal excitation current can be specified as a ratio to maximum

excitation current with the parameter Ratio Current : Max. Current.
The absolute value of nominal excitation current is determined by
multiplying maximum excitation current by the specified ratio (e.g.

maximum excitation current 0.95 A * 0.5 = nominal excitation
current 0.475 A).
The synchronous motor’s characteristic data (for example winding

Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.3)
Revolution: 1 ... 10000 1/min (1500)
Phase current: 0.1 ... 100 A (0.66)
Frequency: 30 ... 100 Hz (50)
Voltage (Max.): 1 ... 10000 V (150)
Current (Max.): 0.1 ... 100 A (0.95)
I_f : I_f_max: 0.01 ... 1 (0.5)
Universal motor
The universal motor is a machine for converting electrical energy

into mechanical energy (rotary motion). Its layout corresponds to
that of a DC series motor (stator and rotor windings are connected
in series). It can be operated with either direct current or alternat-
ing current. As opposed to DC motors, stator and rotor cores are
made of laminated sheet in order to keep eddy-current losses to a
minimum in the case of alternating voltage.
Terminals 1 and 2 are used to connect operating voltage (AC/DC) to

the motor. Terminal 3 is a rotary terminal mechanism. A motor test
bench or a further motor can be connected here, for example. (The
direction of rotation is usually reversed via the connection. This can
be selected with the connecting cable.)
The Current (RMS) parameter is used to specify nominal current for

operation with direct voltage as well as alternating voltage. Idling
speed of the motor during operation with direct current can be

indicated as a ratio to nominal rotary speed with the parameter Idle
revolution : Rated speed. The absolute value of idling speed is
determined by multiplying nominal speed by the specified ratio
(e.g. nominal rotary speed 2000 rpm * 1.1 = idling speed 2200
rpm). The additional simulation value, Revolution (ø), is used to
read out average motor speed, so that design-related vibration due
to rotational speed is compensated for in the display in the case of
operation with alternating current.
Characteristic data: Alternating current,Direct current (Alternating
current)
Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.2)
Revolution: 1 ... 30000 1/min (3000)
Voltage: 1 ... 10000 V (230)
Current (RMS): 0.01 ... 100 A (3)
Frequency: 30 ... 100 Hz (50)
U_N_AC : U_N_DC: 1 ... 10 (1.643)
n_0 : n_N: 1.001 ... 100 (1.5)
Universal motor
The universal motor is a machine for converting electrical energy

into mechanical energy (rotary motion). Its layout corresponds to
that of a DC series motor (stator and rotor windings are connected
in series). It can be operated with either direct current or alternat-
ing current. As opposed to DC motors, stator and rotor cores are
made of laminated sheet in order to keep eddy-current losses to a
minimum in the case of alternating voltage.
In this representation of the universal motor, the terminals for the

armature windings (A1-A2) and the excitation winding (D1-D2) are
led to the outside. In this way, the desired wiring of the windings
can be completed from the outside. The other electrical terminals
are used for connection to the electrical section of the motor test
bench.

Terminal 1 is a rotary terminal mechanism. A motor test bench or a
The Current (RMS) parameter is used to specify nominal current for

operation with direct voltage as well as alternating voltage. Idling
speed of the motor during operation with direct current can be
indicated as a ratio to nominal rotary speed with the parameter Idle
revolution : Rated speed. The absolute value of idling speed is
determined by multiplying nominal speed by the specified ratio
(e.g. nominal rotary speed 2000 rpm * 1.1 = idling speed 2200
rpm). The additional simulation value, Revolution (ø), is used to
read out average motor speed, so that design-related vibration due
to rotational speed is compensated for in the display in the case of
operation with alternating current.
Characteristic data: Alternating current,Direct current (Alternating
current)
Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.2)
Revolution: 1 ... 30000 1/min (3000)
Voltage: 1 ... 10000 V (230)
Current (RMS): 0.01 ... 100 A (3)
Frequency: 30 ... 100 Hz (50)
U_N_AC : U_N_DC: 1 ... 10 (1.643)
n_0 : n_N: 1.001 ... 100 (1.5)
DC permanet-magnet motor
The DC permanent-magnet motor is a machine for converting elec-

trical energy into mechanical energy (rotary motion). Its stator
consists of a permanent magnet, and only the armature consists of
a coil through which current flows.
The L+ and L- terminals are used to connect the armature winding.

If L+ is connected to positive potential and L- is connected to
ground, the motor turns in the direction specified in the parame-
ters. Terminal 1 is a rotary terminal mechanism. A motor test bench

or a further motor can be connected here, for example. (The direc-
tion of rotation is usually reversed via the connection. This can be
selected with the connecting cable.)
Idling speed of the motor can be indicated as a ratio to nominal

rotary speed with the parameter Idle revolution : Rated speed. The
absolute value of idling speed is determined by multiplying nominal
speed by the specified ratio (e.g. nominal rotary speed 2000 rpm *
1.1 = idling speed 2200 rpm).
Winding resistance is calculated automatically based on the en-

tered parameters.
Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.3)
Revolution: 1 ... 30000 1/min (2000)
Voltage: 1 ... 10000 V (220)
Current: 0.01 ... 100 A (1.8)
Inductance: 0 ... 10 H (0.01)
n_0 : n_N: 1.001 ... 100 (1.1)
DC separately excited motor
The separately excited DC motor is a machine for converting electri-

cal energy into mechanical energy (rotary motion). Its armature and
excitation windings are supplied with power from different voltage
sources.
Terminals A1-A2 are used to connect the armature winding and

terminals 1-2 are used to connect the excitation winding. Terminal
3 is a rotary terminal mechanism. A motor test bench or a further
motor can be connected here, for example. (The direction of rota-
tion is usually reversed via the connection. This can be selected
with the connecting cable.) The other electrical terminals are used
for connection to the electrical section of the motor test bench.
Armature and excitation winding connections can be selected in the

motor’s parameters under Characteristic data. The selection of

these connections influences automatic calculation of winding
resistances. The desired performance values are only attained if the
motor is externally wired as specified in the parameters.

Characteristic data: Shunt-wound machine,Series-wound machine
(Shunt-wound machine)
Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.3)
Revolution: 1 ... 30000 1/min (2000)
Voltage: 1 ... 10000 V (220)
Current: 0.1 ... 100 A (1.8)
Inductance (Armature): 1e-6 ... 10 H (0.01)
Voltage: 1 ... 10000 V (220)
Current: 0.01 ... 100 A (0.3)
Inductance (Exciter): 1e-6 ... 10 H (0.01)
n_0 : n_N: 1.001 ... 100 (1.1)
DC series motor
The DC series motor is a machine for converting electrical energy

into mechanical energy (rotary motion). Its armature and excitation
windings are connected in series.
Terminals L+ and L- are used to connected supply power. If L+ is

connected to positive potential and L- is connected to ground, the
motor turns in the direction specified in the parameters. Terminal 1
is a rotary terminal mechanism. A motor test bench or a further


Winding resistances are calculated automatically based on the

entered parameters.
Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.3)
Revolution: 1 ... 30000 1/min (2000)
Voltage: 1 ... 10000 V (220)
Current: 0.01 ... 100 A (1.9)
n_0 : n_N: 1.001 ... 100 (1.7)
DC shunt motor
The DC shunt motor is a machine for converting electrical energy

into mechanical energy (rotary motion). Its armature and excitation
windings are connected in parallel.
Terminals L+ and L- are used to connected supply power. If L+ is

connected to positive potential and L- is connected to ground, the
motor turns in the direction specified in the parameters. Terminal 1
is a rotary terminal mechanism. A motor test bench or a further

Winding resistances are calculated automatically based on the

entered parameters.

Power: 0.001 ... 1000 kW (0.3)
Revolution: 1 ... 30000 1/min (2000)
Voltage: 1 ... 10000 V (220)
Current: 0.1 ... 100 A (1.8)
Voltage: 1 ... 10000 V (220)
Current: 0.01 ... 100 A (0.3)
n_0 : n_N: 1.001 ... 100 (1.1)
Engine test bench
The motor test bench is used to test a connected motor independ-

ent of its normal conditions of use. Examinations can be conducted
with reference to a given torque or a given rotational speed.
A rotary terminal mechanism, for example at a motor, can be con-

nected to the motor test bench via terminal 1. A specific, predefined
load or a specified rotational speed can then be selected at the
motor test bench. The selected load or limited rotational speed acts
upon the connected shaft as soon as the switch next to the rotary
terminal is activated. Not until then is a mechanical connection
established, as a result of which the connected motor is subjected
to a load.
The way in which the selected torque acts upon the connected
motor can be specified in the parameters of the motor test bench
under Controlled variable. Torque (braking) means that the select-
ed torque value acts upon the motor as friction or as reaction
torque in opposition to the motor’s torque. Torque (driving) means
that the motor test bench functions itself as a drive and applies the
corresponding torque to the connected axis of rotation. If a rota-
tional speed is specified, torque output or input is adjusted such
that the desired rotational speed is attained. With regard to the
regulation of rotational speed, maximum torque can be specified as
a separate parameter.

This component represents the mechanical section of the motor
test bench from Festo Didactic’s equipment set TP 1410, “Servo
brake and drive system”.
Controlled variable: Torque (braking),Torque (driving),Revolution
(Torque (braking))
Torque: -100 ... 100 N.m (0)
Revolution: -30000 ... 30000 1/min (0)
Torque (max): 0.1 ... 100 N.m (100)
Engine test bench (electrical part)
This element is used to measure certain characteristic data, for

example effective power and apparent power, of a motor during
simulation.
The Motor and ϑ terminals are used to connect the motor’s thermal
switch. Connect these two terminals to the motor’s M and ϑ termi-
nals. Input terminals L1, L2 and L3 at the top are used to connect
supply power. The motor is connected to output terminals L1, L2
and L3 at the bottom. The PE terminal is for the protective conduc-
tor.
This component represents the electrical section of the motor test

bench from Festo Didactic’s equipment set TP 1410, “Servo brake
and drive system”.
Time interval: 0.001 ... 100 s (0.1)
Generator
The alternator is realized as a compact AC generator with a multi-

functional controller. The alternator in an automobile supplies the
power to charge the battery. It essentially consists of a three-phase

generator, a rectifier, and a voltage regulator. The transformation of
alternating current to direct current by the rectifier results in a
residual ripple in the generated direct voltage.
The generated direct voltage is applied to connectors B+ and B+. If

a potential to ground is applied at terminal 15, the potential is
briefly switched through to terminal L.
In FluidSIM the alternator is only modeled qualitatively. Specifying

a rotational frequency generates direct voltage with a residual
ripple, without factoring in the effects of the actual electronic
arrangement.
Frequency: 0 ... 20 Hz (0)
Starter motor with engagement relay
The function of the starter is to start combustion engines. In

FluidSIM, the starter motor and the starter solenoid are modeled
internally.
Terminal 30 is connected directly to the supply voltage and termi-

nal 31 is connected to ground. When voltage is applied to terminal
50, the starter solenoid relay picks up, the starter motor is con-
nected to the engine, the contact for the primary starter current is
closed, and the starter motor starts running.
In FluidSIM, only the rotation of the starter motor is animated.

22.5.8 Controller
Add3 element
The summator element is a closed-loop control technology compo-

nent. An output signal/potential is generated at output 4, which
corresponds to the sum of the three input signals/potentials at
inputs 1 through 3. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightfor-
ward as possible, required earthing (0 V) is not led out as a termi-
nal, but rather wired internally.
The output signal’s voltage range is determined by the potential

applied to terminals A1 and A2 relative to ground (0 V). If a positive
potential is connected to A1 and a negative potential to A2, the
available output signal is no greater than the smaller numeric value
of the two (example: A1 = +15 V, A2 = -10 V => control range = ±10
V). This can be further limited by means of a parameter, in order to
take losses from the control electronics within the component into
account.
The component does not generate an output signal unless a mini-

mum potential is connected to both the A1 and the A2 terminals.
The value can be adjusted in the advanced settings. If either termi-
nal A1 or A2 is not connected to any potential, the potential of the
connected terminal is passed through to the output (4).
This element is based on the element with the same designation

from Festo Didactic’s equipment set for “Basic principles of control
technology” (TP 1013).
y offset: -5 ... 5 V (0)
Efficiency: 0 ... 1 (0.9)
Minimum voltage: 0 ... 10 V (1.5)

Derivation element
The D element is a transfer element used in closed-loop control

technology with a derivative response characteristic. The output
signal/potential at output 2 depends on the rate of change of the
input signal/potential at input 1. The D element is modelled as an
actual D element in this case, also known as a derivative-action
element, with first-order time delay, because an ideal D element is
technically infeasible. Derivative-action coefficient Kd and delay
time T can be adjusted. In order to keep circuit wiring as straight-
forward as possible, required earthing (0 V) is not led out as a
terminal, but rather wired internally.

account.


Time constant (PT1): 0.01 ... 100 ms (0.8)

Proportional element
The P element is a transfer element used in closed-loop control

technology with a proportional response characteristic. The input
signal/potential at input 1 is amplified by adjustable proportional-
action coefficient Kp and read out as an output signal/potential at
output 2. In the event of a proportional-action coefficient of less
than 1, we no longer speak of amplification, but rather of attenua-
tion. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightforward as possible,
required earthing (0 V) is not led out as a terminal, but rather wired
internally.

account.



Hysteresis element
The hysteresis element acts as a two-step action controller with

symmetrical hysteresis. If the input signal/potential at input 1 is
increased to above the selected hysteresis value, output 2 auf is
switched to +15 V. If the input signal/potential then drops to below
the hysteresis value with a preceding minus sign, the output is
switched to -15 V. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightforward
as possible, required earthing (0 V) is not led out as a terminal, but
rather wired internally.

account.



Integrator element
The I element is a transfer element used in closed-loop control

technology with an integral response characteristic. The input
signal/potential at input 1 is summed up over time and results in
the output signal/potential at output 2. The speed at which the
input signal is integrated can be adjusted with the integral-action
coefficient. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightforward as
possible, required earthing (0 V) is not led out as a terminal, but

account.


Integral gain: 1 ... 1000 1/s (100)

PT1 element
The PT1 element is a first-order proportional delay element used in

closed-loop control technology. The input signal/potential at input
1 is amplified or attenuated by proportional-action coefficient Kp
and delayed by delay time T, and is read out as the output sig-
nal/potential at output 2. In order to keep circuit wiring as straight-
forward as possible, required earthing (0 V) is not led out as a
terminal, but rather wired internally.

account.


Time constant: 0.001 ... 1 s (0.01)

PT2 element
The PT2 element is a second-order proportional delay element used

in closed-loop control technology. The input signal/potential at
input 1 is amplified or attenuated by proportional-action coefficient
Kp and delayed by delay times T1 and T2, and is read out as the
output signal/potential at output 2. In order to keep circuit wiring
as straightforward as possible, required earthing (0 V) is not led out
as a terminal, but rather wired internally.

account.


Time constant: 1e-5 ... 1 s (0.01)
Damping: 1e-5 ... 1000 (1)

Difference amplifier
The differential amplifier is a closed-loop control technology com-

ponent. An output signal/potential is generated at output 3, which
corresponds to the difference between the two input sig-
nals/potentials at inputs 1 (w) and 2 (x). In the field of closed-loop
control technology, the differential amplifier is used to determine
deviation. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightforward as

account.


Limiter
The limiter is a closed-loop control technology component. Within a

defined voltage range, the input signal/potential at input 1 is

replicated to another defined voltage range of the output sig-
nal/potential. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightforward as
The voltage range of the input and output signals are specified
after selecting the Operating mode option. The output signal is
additionally limited by the potentials applied to terminals A1 and
A2 relative to ground (0 V). If a positive potential is connected to A1
and a negative potential to A2, the available output signal is no
greater than the smaller numeric value of the two (example: A1 =
+15 V, A2 = -10 V => control range = ±10 V). This can be further
limited by means of a parameter, in order to take losses from the
control electronics within the component into account.


Operating mode: In [-10 V..10 V] –> Out [0 V..10 V], In [-10 V..10 V] –
> Out [-10 V..10 V],Enter manually (In [-10 V..10 V] –> Out [0 V..10
V])
Min. Voltage (in): -400 ... 400 V (-10)
Max. Voltage (in): -400 ... 400 V (10)
Min. Voltage (out): -400 ... 400 V (-10)
Max. Voltage (out): -400 ... 400 V (10)

22.5.9 Controller (block diagram)
Add3 element
The summator element is a closed-loop control technology compo-

nent. An output signal/potential is generated at output 4, which
corresponds to the sum of the three input signals/potentials at
inputs 1 through 3. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightfor-
ward as possible, required earthing (0 V) and supply voltage are
not led out as terminals, but rather wired internally.
y offset: -5 ... 5 V (0)
Derivation element
The D element is a transfer element used in closed-loop control

technology with a derivative response characteristic. The output
signal/potential at output 2 depends on the rate of change of the
input signal/potential at input 1. The D element is modelled as an
actual D element in this case, also known as a derivative-action
element, with first-order time delay, because an ideal D element is
technically infeasible. Derivative-action coefficient Kd and delay
time T can be adjusted. In order to keep circuit wiring as straight-
forward as possible, required earthing (0 V) and supply voltage are
Time constant (PT1): 0.01 ... 100 ms (0.8)

Proportional element
The P element is a transfer element used in closed-loop control

technology with a proportional response characteristic. The input
signal/potential at input 1 is amplified by adjustable proportional-
action coefficient Kp and read out as an output signal/potential at
output 2. In the event of a proportional-action coefficient of less
than 1, we no longer speak of amplification, but rather of attenua-
tion. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightforward as possible,
required earthing (0 V) and supply voltage are not led out as termi-
nals, but rather wired internally.
Hysteresis element
The hysteresis element acts as a two-step action controller with

symmetrical hysteresis. If the input signal/potential at input 1 is
increased to above the selected hysteresis value, output 2 auf is
switched to +15 V. If the input signal/potential then drops to below
the hysteresis value with a preceding minus sign, the output is
switched to -15 V. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightforward
as possible, required earthing (0 V) and supply voltage are not led
out as terminals, but rather wired internally.
Minimum output voltage: -400 ... 400 V (-1)
Maximum output voltage: -400 ... 400 V (1)
Integrator element
The I element is a transfer element used in closed-loop control

technology with an integral response characteristic. The input

signal/potential at input 1 is summed up over time and results in
the output signal/potential at output 2. The speed at which the
input signal is integrated can be adjusted with the integral-action
coefficient. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightforward as
possible, required earthing (0 V) and supply voltage are not led out
as terminals, but rather wired internally.
Integral gain: 1 ... 1000 1/s (100)
PT1 element
The PT1 element is a first-order proportional delay element used in

closed-loop control technology. The input signal/potential at input
1 is amplified or attenuated by proportional-action coefficient Kp
and delayed by delay time T, and is read out as the output sig-
nal/potential at output 2. In order to keep circuit wiring as straight-
forward as possible, required earthing (0 V) and supply voltage are
Time constant: 0.001 ... 1 s (0.01)
PT2 element
The PT2 element is a second-order proportional delay element used

in closed-loop control technology. The input signal/potential at
input 1 is amplified or attenuated by proportional-action coefficient
Kp and delayed by delay times T1 and T2, and is read out as the
output signal/potential at output 2. In order to keep circuit wiring
as straightforward as possible, required earthing (0 V) and supply
voltage are not led out as terminals, but rather wired internally.
Time constant: 1e-5 ... 1 s (0.01)

Damping: 1e-5 ... 1000 (1)
Difference amplifier
The differential amplifier is a closed-loop control technology com-

ponent. An output signal/potential is generated at output 3, which
corresponds to the difference between the two input sig-
nals/potentials at inputs 1 (w) and 2 (x). In the field of closed-loop
control technology, the differential amplifier is used to determine
deviation. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightforward as
Limiter
The limiter is a closed-loop control technology component. Within a

defined voltage range, the input signal/potential at input 1 is
replicated to another defined voltage range of the output sig-
nal/potential. In order to keep circuit wiring as straightforward as
The voltage range of the input and output signals are specified
after selecting the Operating mode option.
Operating mode: In [-10 V..10 V] –> Out [0 V..10 V], In [-10 V..10 V] –
> Out [-10 V..10 V],Enter manually (In [-10 V..10 V] –> Out [0 V..10
V])
Min. Voltage (in): -400 ... 400 V (-10)
Max. Voltage (in): -400 ... 400 V (10)
Min. Voltage (out): -400 ... 400 V (-10)
Max. Voltage (out): -400 ... 400 V (10)

22.6 Digital components with electrical signals
The digital components in this library simulate real components.

The input and output signals are not purely logical signals, but are
in fact voltage levels. The connections are therefore electrical
connections, which can be connected to all other electrical compo-
nents, such as switches, resistors and capacitors.
The symbols' presettings correspond to those of the components

used in the training package TP 1012 from Festo Didactic. Transis-
tor-transistor logic modules (TTL modules) of type 74HCxx are used
in this component set. These standard TTL-ICs are designed for
operation with a supply voltage of 5 V. The supply voltage connec-
tions are not shown explicitly in FluidSIM. There must be adequate
supply voltage present to generate the required output voltages.
In digital technology, a distinction is made between just two volt-

age levels: high voltage and low voltage. The presettings in
FluidSIM correspond to those of the standard TTL-ICs. Input voltag-
es below 0.8 V are regarded as low, while input voltages above 2.0
V are regarded as high. The low output voltage level is 0 V and the
high output voltage level is 5 V. These settings can be changed for
each symbol.
In order to designate the voltage levels in abstract terms, the two

logical states are usually called simply high and low, true and false,
or the abbreviations 1 and 0 are used.
In order to guarantee efficient simulation, the digital components in

FluidSIM are not modeled as a circuit consisting of transistors, but
as a simplified model that nonetheless takes the essential charac-
teristics of the components into account. Output voltages rise and
fall via a voltage ramp up to the required voltage level within
around 20 nanoseconds. Output connections are connected to the
output voltage with an adjustable internal resistor, i.e. ohmic loads
at the output result in a voltage drop. The voltage level at inputs
that are not connected is always 0 V.

22.6.1 Basic symbols
AND
The output Q is only set to 1 if there is a 1 at all inputs (A, B). The
standard symbol has two inputs. Extended symbols can have more
than two inputs.
Truth table
A B Q
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
The IC 74HC08 is used as a component in the training package TP
1012 from Festo Didactic.
Voltage level (lo): 0.1 ... 24 V (0.8)
Voltage level (hi): 0.1 ... 24 V (2)
Voltage level (lo): 0 ... 24 V (0)
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (60)
OR
The output Q is only set to 1 if there is a 1 at a minimum of one

input (A, B). The standard symbol has two inputs. Extended sym-
bols can have more than two inputs.
Truth table

A B Q
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (45)
Inverter (NOT)
The inverter inverts the value of input A and thus generates a 0 at

output Q from a 1 at the input and vice versa.
Truth table
A Q
0 1
1 0
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (45)

Schmitt trigger
The Schmitt trigger (named after its inventor Otto Schmitt) converts
an analogue input signal into a digital output signal. In the case of
TTL modules, this means that any analogue input voltage between
0 V and 5 V at input I is transformed into a logic output level of
either 0 V or 5 V at output Q.
This conversion takes place with the help of a lower and upper
trigger level. If the input signal lies below the lower trigger level,
the low level (usually 0 V) is output; above the upper trigger level
the high level (e.g. 5 V) is output. The difference between the two
threshold voltages is called hysteresis.
The output Q of the current Schmitt trigger is inverted, i.e. the low
level is output if the upper trigger level is exceeded and the high
level is output if the value falls below the lower trigger level.
If the input voltage changes only in the range between the lower
and upper trigger level, the output level does not change.

Voltage level (hi): 0.1 ... 24 V (2.4)
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (45)
NAND
The output Q is only set to 0 if all inputs (A, B) have the value 1. The
function of a NAND gate corresponds to that of an AND gate,
whereby the output level is inverted by a NOT gate.
Truth table

A B Q
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (40)
NOR
The output Q is only set to 1 if the value 0 is present at all inputs (A,
B). The function of a NOR gate corresponds to that of an OR gate,
whereby the output level is inverted by a NOT gate.
Truth table
A B Q
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0

Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (45)
XOR
The output Q of the XOR gate is only set to 1 if the input values (A,
B) are different. And thus the XOR gate corresponds to the OR
function, except that a high output level only occurs when exclu-
sively one input is 1, thus resulting in the name “exclusive or”.
Truth table
A B Q
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (45)

22.6.2 Flip-flops
RS flip-flop
The RS flip-flop is an asynchronous flip-flop, which is controlled via

the S (set) and R (reset) inputs. The flip-flop has two outputs Q1
and Q2, which are complementary to one another during normal
flip-flop operation.
With S=1 and R=0, Q1 is set to 1 and Q2 is set to 0. With S=0 and
R=1, Q1 is set to 0 and Q2 is set to 1.
The assignment of S=1 and R=1 is a special case, which should be

avoided for the reasons outlined below. An RS flip-flop can be
implemented in a number of ways using electronic components.
The FluidSIM implementation corresponds to the real design con-
sisting of two NOT and two NAND gates. Consequently, the assign-
ment of S=1 and R=1 produces a stable state Q1=1 and Q2=1.
Implementation with two NOR gates produces the stable state
Q1=0 and Q2=0 for S=1 and R=1. In both cases, Q1 and Q2 are not
complementary to one another.
A problem occurs with the transition from S=1 and R=1 to S=0 and
R=0. This transition is, in any case, nondeterministic (virtually
random), i.e. even the smallest runtime differences in the gates
used decide whether (Q1=0, Q2=1) or (Q1=1, Q2=0) is achieved as
the stable state. The same situation occurs when the supply volt-
age is applied.
The assignment of S=0 and R=0 has no effect on the current output
values other than the problematic transition described above.
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)

RS flip-flop with inverted inputs
This RS flip-flop is controlled by a 0 at the control inputs. This is

indicated in the symbol by the negation circuits for S and R. If there
is a NOT gate upstream of the inputs, this flip-flop behaves in
exactly the same way as the standard RS flip-flop.
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
Synchronous RS flip-flop
The clocked RS flip-flop only processes signals at S and R if the

clock signal C=1. If C=0, the values of S and R have no effect on the
output signals. If C=1, this flip-flop behaves in exactly the same
way as the standard RS flip-flop.
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
JK flip-flop, edge triggered
The edge-controlled JK flip-flop behaves exactly like an RS flip-flop

with one exception. The inputs are labeled J and K to distinguish
them from S and R. Just like with an RS flip-flop, a 1 at the input J
means set, a 1 at the input K means reset and 0 for J and K means

hold. If J and K are set to 1, however, an edge at C causes the flip-
flop to toggle to the other state.
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
JK flip-flop, edge triggered, K inverted
With this JK flip-flop the input K is inverted. If there is a NOT gate

upstream of the input K, this flip-flop behaves in exactly the same
way as the standard JK flip-flop.
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
JK flip-flop with SET and RESET inputs, edge triggered
Compared with a standard JK flip-flop, this JK flip-flop also has an

inverted input S for set and an inverted input R for reset. The input
K is also inverted.
Truth table
not S not R C J not K Q1 Q2

0 1 x x x 1 0
1 0 x x x 0 1
0 0 x x x 1 1

1 1 ↑ 1 0 q2 q1
1 1 ↑ 0 0 0 1
1 1 ↑ 1 1 1 0
1 1 ↑ 0 1 q1 q2
Comments:
x = any (0 or 1) ↑ = positive edge from 0 to 1 q = state of output Q

before the edge

Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (55)
JK MS flip-flop
A JK MS flip-flop (JK master/slave flip-flop) is a clock-skewed JK flip-

flop. With the rising edge at the clock input, the flip-flop transfers
the input information to a buffer. This new state is not forwarded to
the output until the falling edge.
In the circuit diagram “TP1012_05_3a2.circ”, implementation of the

JK MS flip-flop is shown with two JK flip-flops and an inverter.
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)

D flip-flop
A D flip-flop can be used to store a single bit. In this context it is

also referred to as a latch. The “D” stands for “data”. The value at
input D is saved precisely when input C=1 (clock) at the input. If
C=0, the stored value is retained regardless of the input value D.
Truth table
C D Q1 Q2
0 x q1 q2
1 0 0 1
1 1 1 0
Comments:
x = any (0 or 1) q = state of output Q remains unchanged
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
D flip-flop, edge triggered
The edge-triggered D flip-flop corresponds to a D flip-flop, with the

addition that the value at the input D is only stored if there is a
positive edge from 0 to 1 at clock input C.
Truth table
C D Q1 Q2
↑ 0 0 1

↑ 1 1 0
x x q1 q2
Comments:

remains unchanged
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
D flip-flop with CLR input
This D flip-flop is an edge-triggered D flip-flop with an additional

input CLR (clear), via which the internal state can be set directly to
0.
Truth table
CLR C D Q1 Q2
1 x x 0 1
0 ↑ 0 0 1
0 ↑ 1 1 0
0 x x q1 q2
Comments:

remains unchanged

Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
D flip-flop with SET and CLR inputs
This D flip-flop is an edge-triggered D flip-flop with two additional

inputs CLR (clear) and SET (set). With the input CLR, the internal
state can be set directly to 0. The input CLR is inverted, i.e. CLR=0
sets the internal state directly to 0. With the input SET, the internal
state can be set directly to 1. Truth table
CLR SET C D Q1 Q2
1 1 x x 1 0
0 0 x x 0 1
0 1 x x 1 1
1 0 ↑ 0 0 1
1 0 ↑ 1 1 0
1 0 x x q1 q2
Comments:

remains unchanged
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
T flip-flop
The T flip-flop (toggle flip-flop) has only one input T. If there is a

positive edge at input T from 0 to 1, the outputs change (toggle)

their states. The initial state of the outputs when the supply voltage
is applied is random. However, Q1 = not Q2 always applies.
Truth table
T Q1 Q2
↑ q2 q1
x q1 q2
Comments:

before the edge
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
T flip-flop with RESET input
This T flip-flop is a T flip-flop with an additional input R (reset), via

which the output Q1 can be set directly to 0.
Truth table
S T Q1 Q2
1 x 0 1
0 ↑ q2 q1
0 x q1 q2
Comments:

before the edge

Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
T flip-flop with inverted RESET input
This T flip-flop is a T flip-flop with an additional input R (reset), via

which the output Q1 can be set directly to 0. The input R is inverted,
i.e. R=0 sets Q1 directly to 0.
Truth table
S T Q1 Q2
0 x 0 1
1 ↑ q2 q1
1 x q1 q2
Comments:

before the edge
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
T flip-flop with inverted SET input

This T flip-flop is a T flip-flop with an additional input S (set), via
which the output Q1 can be set directly to 1. The input S is inverted,
i.e. S=0 sets Q1 directly to 1.
Truth table
S T Q1 Q2
0 x 1 0
1 ↑ q2 q1
1 x q1 q2
Comments:

before the edge
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
Positive edge-triggered monoflop
If there is an edge from 0 to 1 at input I of the positive edge-

triggered monoflop, the output Q1 is set to 1 for a time t. After
expiration of t, the output is reset to 0 automatically. A distinction
is made between non-retriggerable and triggerable monoflops.
With retriggerable monoflops, the cycle time t restarts with a new
edge.
Q1 = not Q2 always applies for the outputs.
Delay time: 0.001 ... 10000 ms (10)
Retriggerable: ... (false)

Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
Negative edge-triggered monoflop
If there is an edge from 1 to 0 at input I of the negative edge-

triggered monoflop, the output Q1 is set to 1 for a time t. After
expiration of t, the output is reset to 0 automatically. A distinction
is made between non-retriggerable and triggerable monoflops.
With retriggerable monoflops, the cycle time t restarts with a new
edge.
Q1 = not Q2 always applies for the outputs.
Delay time: 0.001 ... 10000 ms (10)
Retriggerable: ... (false)
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
D flip-flop with SET and RESET inputs, edge triggered
This D flip-flop is an edge-triggered D flip-flop with two additional

inputs S and R. With the input S (set), the internal state can be set
directly to 1. With the input R (reset), the internal state can be set
directly to 0. The inputs S and R are inverted, i.e. the value 1 trig-
gers the set or reset. Truth table
not S not R C D Q1 Q2
0 1 x x 1 0
1 0 x x 0 1

0 0 x x 1 1
1 1 ↑ 0 0 1
1 1 ↑ 1 1 0
1 1 x x q1 q2
Comments:

remains unchanged

Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
22.6.3 Miscellaneous
Bouncing changeover switch
When the bouncing changeover switch is actuated, the required

switching status is reached after multiple switching status changes
within a few milliseconds.

Hex switch
With the hex switch, a number x from 0 to 15 can be output bit-by-

bit via the four outputs Q1, Q2, Q4 and Q8. The number x corre-
sponds to a single-digit hexadecimal number, hence the name “hex
switch”. The following applies for the number x:
x = Q1*2^0 + Q2*2^1 + Q4*2^2 + Q8*2^3
Hexadecimal value (0..F): 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,D,E,F (0)
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (1)
7-segment display
Decimal and hexadecimal numbers can be displayed with the 7-

segment display. Depending on the additional inputs available, the
individual segments and a decimal point can be controlled sepa-
rately. The input DP=1 controls the decimal point.
If the input seg is available and has the value 1, the individual
segments are controlled via the inputs a, b, c, d, e, f and g.
If the input seg not available or has the value 0, the number x is
displayed, which is composed bit-by-bit from the inputs I1, I2, I4
and I8. If BCD=1 is also set, x is displayed as a decimal number.
Otherwise it is displayed as a hexadecimal number. With decimal
output, numbers greater than 9 are displayed as “-”. The following
applies for the number x:
x = I1*2^0 + I2*2^1 + I4*2^2 + I8*2^3

Half adder
The half adder adds two single-digit binary numbers (each 1 bit)
and outputs a carry, where applicable. It has the label HA.
The two inputs A and B represent the bits to be added. The output
S (sum) represents the last digit of the sum and the output C (carry)
represents the carry.
Truth table
A B S C
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
Full adder
The full adder or a cascade of full adders can be used to add multi-
digit binary numbers.
The full adder has the label FA and has three inputs and two out-
puts. The two inputs A and B represent the bits to be added. With
the input CI (carry in), a previous carry can be included in the addi-
tion.
The output S (sum) represents the last digit of the sum and the
output CO (carry out) represents the carry.

The circuit diagram “TP1012_08_3_1.circ” shows a 4-bit full adder.
Truth table
A B CI S CO
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 0
1 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 1
0 0 1 1 0
0 1 1 0 1
1 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1
Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (50)
4-bit full adder
This full adder can be used to add two 4-bit numbers. With the
input CI (carry in), a previous carry can be included in the addition.
The sum x is calculated from the inputs as follows:
x = CI + P0*2^0 + P1*2^1 + P2*2^2*P3*2^3 + Q0*2^0 + Q1*2^1 +

Q2*2^2*Q3*2^3
The outputs S0, S1, S2, S3 and the output CO (carry out) represent
the sum x bit-by-bit, which is composed as follows:
x = S0*2^0 + S1*2^1 + S2*2^2 + S3*2^3 + CO*2^4


Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (35)
4-bit counter
The counter counts the number of falling edges from 1 to 0 at input

I. The number is saved as a 4-bit number x and output bit-by-bit via
the outputs Q0, Q1, Q2 and Q3. The counter is reset to x=0 after
the value x=15 is reached. The counter can also be set to 0 with the
value 1 at the input “CT=0”. The counter x is output to the outputs
as follows:
x = Q0*2^0 + Q1*2^1 + Q2*2^2 + Q3*2^3

Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (30)
8-bit shift register, parallel-serial
With the shift register, data (8 bits) can be entered in parallel for-
mat and converted into a stream of serial bits. The bits are stored in
the registers R1 to R8 and output via the output Q.
The output mode is activated when the value 1 is present at input

M. The contents of each register are then shifted to the subsequent

register with each rising edge from 0 to 1 at input C. The contents of
register R8 are shifted to register R1 in the ring.
The registers are loaded via the inputs I1 to I8. The registers accept
the values of the inputs if the value 0 is present at input M and
there is a rising edge from 0 to 1 at input C.
The shift register also has an inverted input R for reset, i.e. R=0
sets all registers to 0.

Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (55)
8-bit shift register, serial-parallel
With the shift register, a stream of serial bits can be loaded in the
registers R1 to R8, which are output in parallel via the inputs Q1 to
Q8.
The contents of each register are then shifted to the subsequent

register with each rising edge from 0 to 1 at input C. The contents of
register R1 are set to the value of input I.
The shift register also has an inverted input R for reset, i.e. R=0
sets all registers to 0.


Resistance: 0.1 ... 1000 Ohm (45)
22.7 Digital technology
22.7.1 Constants and Terminals
Input
Digital inputs are designated with an “I”. In FluidSIM digital com-

ponents can be used inside and outside a digital module. If a
digital input is used inside a digital module, you can determine the
input connector of the digital module in question with which the
digital input shall be linked by allocating a number “I1” to “I16”. If
there is an analog signal of more than 10V at the chosen input of
the digital module, the digital input is set to “Hi”. If a digital input is
used outside a digital module, there is an additional analog electri-
cal connection at the digital input. If there is an analog signal of
more than 10V at this connection, the digital input is set to “Hi”. As
an alternative you can click on the digital input with the left mouse
button in order to set it to “Hi”. Another click resets the value to
“Lo”.
Output
Digital outputs are designated with a “Q”. The output connects a

digital signal through from its input to its output. In FluidSIM digital
components can be used inside and outside a digital module. If a
digital output is used inside a digital module, you can determine
the output connector of the digital module in question with which

the digital output shall be linked by allocating a number “Q1” to
“Q16”. If the status of the digital output is “Hi”, a potential of 24V
is set at the corresponding output connector of the digital module.
If a digital output is used outside a digital module, there is an
additional analog electrical connection at the digital output. If the
status of the digital output is “Hi”, a potential of 24 V is set at this
connection.
Buffer
Memory bits are designated with a “M”. Memory bits are virtual
outputs, with a value at their output analog to that at their input.
When the simulation start is activated, you can define by using the
property dialog box if the output Q shall be set to “Lo” or to “Hi”,
independent on the input value. After the simulation start the value
at the output is set to the value of the input.
Initial state = Hi: ... (false)
Hi Level
At the output Q you have the logic level “Hi”.
Lo level
At the output Q you have the logic level “Lo”.
Connection (digital)
A digital connection is a place where a digital line can be attached

to. To simplify the line drawing process, a connection appears as a

small circle in Edit Mode. Note that at each digital connection its
level “Lo” / “Hi” can be displayed.
Line (digital)
A digital line links two digital connections. Note that a digital con-
nection may be a simple digital connection or a T-junction.
T-junction (digital)
A T-junction joins up to four digital lines, thus having a single

digital level. Note that T-junctions are introduced automatically by
FluidSIM when dropping the line drawing cursor onto another line
in Edit Mode.
22.7.2 Basic Functions
AND
The output Q of the AND is only “Hi” when all inputs are “Hi”, that
is, if they are closed. If an input pin of this module is not connected,
its status is automatically “Hi”.
AND with edge triggering
The output Q of the edge-triggered AND is only “Hi” when all inputs
are “Hi” and if at least one input was “Lo” in the previous cycle. If
an input pin of this block is not connected, its status is automatical-
ly “Hi”.

NAND
The output Q of the NAND is only “Lo”, when all inputs are “Hi”,
that is, if they are closed. If an input pin of this block is not con-
nected, its status is automatically “Hi”.
NAND with edge triggering
The output Q of the NAND with edge evaluation is only “Hi”, if at

least one input is “Lo” and if all inputs were “Hi” in the previous
cycle. If an input pin of this block is not connected, its status is
automatically “Hi”.
OR
The output Q of the OR is only “Hi”, if at least one input is “Hi”, that
is, if it is closed. If an input pin of this block is not connected, its
status is automatically “Lo”.
NOR
The output Q of the NOR is only “Hi” when all inputs are “Lo”, that
is, if they are switched off. As soon as any input is switched on
(status “Hi”), the output of the NOR is set to “Lo”. If an input pin of
this block is not connected, its status is automatically “Lo”.
XOR
The output Q of the XOR is “Hi”, if the inputs are nonequivalent. If

an input pin of this block is not connected, its status is automatical-
ly “Lo”.

NOT
The output Q is “Hi” if the input is “Lo”. The NOT block is an input
status inverter.
22.7.3 Special Functions
Logic module
The digital module is used for a compact embedding of a digital

switching circuit into an electropneumatic or electrohydraulic
circuit. The digital module offers 8 (16) electrical inputs and out-
puts, which transfer their states to its digital switching circuit in the
inner part. Therefore the digital switching circuit does not need
much space in the electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit for
the display of the digital module as a rectangle with a total number
of 18 (34) connections.
By making a double-click with the left mouse button on the digital

module you come to the digital circuit in the inner part of the mod-
ule. A new window opens. It shows the digital circuit and can be
handled in the usual way. The standard configuration in the inner
part of a new inserted digital module is a row with 8 (16) inputs and
8 (16) outputs each. They correspond to the inputs and outputs of
the module in the electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit. In
order to be able to test the digital circuit during the setup, it can be
simulated separated from the electropneumatic or electrohydraulic
circuit. As soon as the processing window of the digital module is
closed or the original circuit window is put into the foreground, the
previously effected changes in the digital circuit are automatically
adopted into the digital module of the electropneumatic or electro-
hydraulic circuit.
Inside the digital module only digital components can be inserted.

Furthermore, an encapsulating of additional digital modules inside

a module is not possible. However, you can use several digital
modules in one electropneumatic or electrohydraulic circuit. Please
note that the digital circuit inside a digital module only works
correctly if corresponding potentials are set at the electrical power
supply units of the module (+24 V) and (0 V).
On delay
An output with on delay is not switched on until a specified time

has expired. When the status of input Trg changes from “Lo” to
“Hi”, the on delay time starts. If the status of input Trg is “Hi” at
least for the duration of the configured time, the output Q is set to
“Hi” on expiration of this time. The output follows the input with on
delay. The time is reset, when the status of the input changes again
to “Lo” before the time has expired. The output is reset to “Lo”,
when the status at the input is “Lo”.
Delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)
Off delay
The output is not reset until a configured time has expired. When
the input status turns to “Hi”, the output Q is switched instantane-
ously to “Hi”. If the status at input Trg changes from “Hi” to “Lo”,
the off delay starts. After expiration of the configured time, the
output is reset to “Lo” (off delay). When the input Trg is switched
on and off again, the off delay restarts. The input R (Reset) is used
to reset the delay time and the output before the configured time
has expired.
Delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)

On/off delay
An output with on/off delay is switched on after a specified time

and is reset on expiration of a second specified time. As soon as the
status at input Trg changes from “Lo” to “Hi”, the configured on
delay time starts. If the status at input Trg remains “Hi” at least for
the duration of the configured time, the output Q is set to “Hi” on
expiration of the on delay time (the output follows the input on
delayed). If the status at input Trg changes again to “Lo”, before
the configured on delay time has expired, the time is reset. When
the status at input returns to “Lo”, the configured off delay time
starts. If the status at the input remains “Lo” at least for the dura-
tion of the configured off delay time, the output is set to “Lo” on
expiration of that time (the output follows the input off delayed). If
the status at the input returns to “Hi” before this time has expired,
the time is reset.
On delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)
Off delay time: 0 ... 100 s (6)
Retentive on delay
A specified time starts after an input pulse. The output is set on

expiration of this time. As soon as the status at the input Trg
changes from “Lo” to “Hi”, the specified time starts. After expira-
tion on the configured time, the output Q is set to “Hi”. Further
switching actions at input Trg have no influence on the running
time. The output and the time are only reset to “Lo” when the
status at input R is “Hi”.
Delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)

Latching relay
Input S sets output Q. Another input R resets the output Q. A latch-

ing relay is a simple logic memory. The output value depends on
the input states and on the previous output status.
Pulse relay
A short one-shot at the input is used to set and reset the output.
Output Q status is toggled at every “Lo” to “Hi” transition of the
status at input Trg, that is, the output is switched on or off. Use
input R to reset the pulse relay to initial state, that is, the output is
set to “Lo”.
Wiping Relay - Pulse Output
An input signal generates a signal of specified length at the output.

The output status is switched to “Hi” after the input Trg is set to
“Hi”. The configured time is started at the same time and the out-
put remains set. After expiration of the configured time, the output
is reset to the status “Lo” (pulse output). If the input status chang-
es from “Hi” to “Lo” before the specified time has expired, also the
output follows immediately with a with a “Hi” to “Lo” transition.
Delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)
Edge-triggered wiping relay
An input signal generates a signal of specified length at the output

(retriggering). The output status is switched to “Hi” after the input
Trg is set to “Hi”. The configured time is started at the same time.
After expiration of the configured time, the output Q status is reset

to “Lo” (pulse output). If the input status changes again from “Lo”
to “Hi” (retriggering), before the specified time has expired, the
time is reset and the output remains switched on.
Delay time: 0 ... 100 s (3)
Timer switch
With the timer switch you can create timer switches referring to
days, weeks and years. Upon reach of the specified on-transition
time, the output Q of the timer switch is set to “Hi” and upon reach
of the specified off-transition time to “Lo”. If you have chosen the
option “Repeat every”, the on and off transition is repeated each
time according to the specified repetition time.
On time: 0 ... 1000 s (10)
Off time: 0.1 ... 1000 s (30)
Repeat every: 0.1 ... 1000 s (60)
Up and down counter
Depending on the configuration of the input Dir, an internal value is

counted up or down through an input pulse. The output is set when
the configured count value is reached. With every status change at
the input Cnt from “Lo” to “Hi”, the internal counter is increased
(Dir = “Lo”) or decreased (Dir = “Hi”) by one unit. If the internal
counter is equal or larger compared to the specified value, the
output Q is set to “Hi”. You can use the reset input R to reset the
internal count value and the output to “Lo”. As long as R=“Hi”, also
the output is “Lo” and the pulses at input Cnt are not counted.
Counter: 0 ... 9999 (5)

Symmetric clock generator
A timing signal with a configurable period is given at the output. Via

the duration of the pulses you can determine the length of the on
and off times. Via the input En (for Enable) you can switch on the
clock generator, that is, the clock generator sets the output to “Hi”
for the duration of the pulse, subsequent the output to “Lo” for the
duration of the pulse and so on, until the input status is “Lo” again.
Impulse time: 0.0005 ... 100 s (0.5)
Asynchronous pulse generator
The pulse profile of the output can be changed via the configurable
pulse duration and pulse pause duration. It is possible to invert the
output with input INV. The input INV only negates the output, if the
block is enabled via EN.
Impulse time: 0.01 ... 100 s (3)
Impulse pause time: 0.01 ... 100 s (1)
Frequency trigger
The output is switched on and off depending on two frequencies

which can be specified. The threshold trigger measures the signals
at input Fre. The pulses are captured across a measuring interval
which can be specified. If the frequency measured within the meas-
uring interval higher than the input frequency, the output Q is
switched to “Hi”. Q is switched again to “Lo” when the measured
frequency has reached the value of the output frequency or if it is
lower.

On frequency: 0.01 ... 9999 Hz (6)
Off frequency: 0.01 ... 9999 Hz (2)
Time interval: 0.001 ... 100 s (5)
22.8 GRAFCET
22.8.1 GRAFCET
Step
The name of a step may contain the following characters: “0-9”, “a-
z”, “A-Z” and the underscore “_”. You can select from the following
seven different step types: simple step, initial step, macro-step,
macro input, macro output, enclosing step and initial enclosing
step. Furthermore, you can give the step an activation link.
Transition
You can give a transition a name, which is shown to the left of the
transition in brackets. Entering a transition condition is supported
by buttons for special symbols (AND, OR, NOT, falling edge, rising
edge, delay). Via Variable you can select an existing GRAFCET
variable from a list. Alternatively to the formula, you can show a
descriptive text. To do this, you have to select the option “Display
description instead of formula”. In the “Connection ID/target in-
formation” field, you can enter a step that links to the transition’s
output without having to draw a connecting line. You can select an
existing step from a list.

Action
There are three types of action: assignations, allocations and

compulsory commands.
For assignations and allocations, you can enter a variable or an

output, whose value is changed by the action. The name of a varia-
ble may contain the following characters: “0-9”, “a-z”, “A-Z” and
the underscore “_”.
For a “conditional action” or an “Action on event”, you can enter a

condition that has to be fulfilled before the action is executed.
Entering a condition is supported by buttons for special symbols
(AND, OR, NOT, falling edge, rising edge, delay). Via Variable you
can select an existing GRAFCET variable from a list. Alternatively to
the formula, you can show a descriptive text. To do this, you have
to select the option “Display description instead of formula”.
For an allocation (“action on activation”, “action on deactivation”

and “action on event”), you can enter any term whose value is to be
allocated to the action variable. Entering a term is supported by
buttons for special symbols (AND, OR, NOT, falling edge, rising
edge). Via Variable you can select an existing GRAFCET variable
from a list. Alternatively to the formula, you can show a descriptive
text. To do this, you have to select the option “Display description
instead of formula”.
For a “compulsory command”, you can enter the name of the par-
tial GRAFCET directly or select an existing partial GRAFCET from a
list. You can also enter the relevant steps directly or select them
from a list of existing steps. You have to separate the step names
with commas. You can select the special commands “*” and “INIT”
using the relevant buttons.
Synchronization
You can connect synchronizations like other FluidSIM components.

However, they do not initially have any connections. You always

have to draw connecting lines to a synchronization. The corre-
sponding connections are then generated automatically.
Partial GRAFCET
If you want to allocate GRAFCET elements to a specific partial

GRAFCET, place the partial GRAFCET frame over the relevant
GRAFCET part and give it a name. The preceding “G” is not part of
the name that you have to enter; it is added automatically by
FluidSIM and shown at the bottom left of the partial GRAFCET
frame. You can alter the size of the partial GRAFCET frame by drag-
ging its edges with the mouse. For the partial GRAFCET to function
correctly, it is important that all its elements are completely within
the frame and that the frame does not overlap with any foreign
elements or other frames.
GRAFCET PLC
The GRAFCET-PLC component is similar to a SPS controller, whose

behavior is described by a GRAFCET. For more information, please
read the section GRAFCET-PLC-Component.
GRAFCET PLC

GRAFCET PLC


GRAFCET I/O
The GRAFCET I/O component is used to link the GRAFCET variables

with the electrical part of a circuit. You can enter eight GRAFCET
input variables and eight GRAFCET output variables into the
GRAFCET I/O component. The actions' variables serve as outputs.
The inputs can be the allocations and conditions of actions and
transitions. If a potential is created as the input of the GRAFCET I/O
component, the corresponding variable is set to “1”. If an output
variable has a value other than “0”, a potential of 24V is created at
the corresponding output of the GRAFCET I/O component.
22.9 Miscellaneous
22.9.1 Miscellaneous
Connection (mechanical)
A mechanical connection constitutes a place holder for the label of

a valve solenoid. To simplify clicking, a mechanical connection
appears as a small circle in Edit Mode.
Valve solenoid
The valve solenoid switches the valve. By means of a label the valve
solenoid can be linked to a valve that is solenoid operated.

Proportional valve solenoid, position controlled
In FluidSIM the proportional valve solenoid is coupled to the re-

spective continuous directional valve with the help of a label. The
required slide position is predetermined via a voltage signal. The
valve slide distance is position controlled. The control and amplifier
component is integrated in the valve.
Current (max): 0.01 ... 10 A (0.1)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (128)
Proportional amplifier, 1-channel
The amplifier is used to control proportional valves. For this pur-

pose, nominal values (voltage signals) from 0 V to +10 V are trans-
formed into the necessary magnetic current for the proportional
valves. In FluidSIM the amplifier is coupled to the respective valve
with the help of a label. The maximum current at the amplifier
output is hereby automatically adjusted in relation to the coupled
valve. A step current relative to the maximum current can be speci-
fied, in order to compensate the positive overlap of proportional
valves. The amplifier requires a power supply of 24 V.
Current (max): 0.01 ... 30 A (0.1)
Jump current: 0 ... 25 % (0)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (100)
Proportional amplifier, 2-channel
The amplifier is used to control proportional valves with two mag-

nets. For this purpose, nominal values (voltage signals) from -10 V

to +10 V are transformed into the necessary magnetic current for
the proportional valves. Output A is gated at a nominal value be-
tween 0 V and -10 V, output B between 0 V and -10 V. In FluidSIM
the amplifier is coupled to the respective valve with the help of two
labels. The maximum currents at the amplifier outputs are hereby
automatically adjusted in relation to the coupled valves. A step
current relative to the maximum current can be specified, in order
to compensate the positive overlap of proportional valves. The
amplifier requires a power supply of 24 V.
Current (max): 0.01 ... 30 A (0.1)
Jump current: 0 ... 25 % (0)
Resistance: 1 ... 10000 Ohm (100)
Valve solenoid
The valve solenoid switches the valve. By means of a label the valve
solenoid can be linked to a valve that is solenoid operated.
Distance rule
The distance rule is a device for attaching switches at the cylinder.

The labels at the distance rule define links to the actual proximity
switches or limit switches in the electrical circuit.

Status indicator
In Edit Mode, the status indicator is automatically displayed at

those components that are actuated in the circuit’s initial position.
Cam switch
In Edit Mode, the cam switch is automatically displayed at those

mechanically operated way valves that are actuated in the circuit’s
initial position.
Text
The concept of text components in FluidSIM gives the user a way in

which to describe components in diagrams, assign identification
texts, or to provide commentary on the diagram. The text and the
appearance of text components can be customized to the user’s
liking.
State diagram
The state diagram records the state quantities of important compo-

nents and depicts them graphically.
Terminal assignment diagram
The terminal assignment diagram list automatically creates termi-

nals in the electrical circuit and displays the allocation in a table.
Functional diagram

With the functional diagram editor, functional diagrams e.g. dis-
placement-step diagrams can be created.
Parts list
The parts list component creates from the components of a circuit

diagram a table, which contains for each component its designation
and its description.
Rectangle
Rectangles are graphic primitives, which can also be used within

circuit diagrams.
Ellipse
Ellipses are graphic primitives, which can also be used within circuit
diagrams.
Bitmap
In FluidSIM images, as with all other components and objects, can

be inserted, positioned, moved, rotated and mirrored. In addition,
images such as rectangles and ellipses are freely scalable.

Learning, Teaching, and Visualizing Technologies
Chapter 23
23. Learning, T eachi ng, a nd Visual izi ng Technol ogies
Beside the creation and simulation of electro-fluidic circuit dia-

grams, FluidSIM also supports teaching basic knowledge. This
knowledge is presented in the form of texts, overview pictures,
sectional views, exercises, and educational films. Functions that
realize the selection of this instruction material are found under the
Didactics menu.
One group of these functions refers to information about single,

selected components. Another group of functions refers to ordered
overviews of the didactics material, allowing the selection of an
interesting topic. Finally, it is also possible to select and link to-
gether arbitrary topics into so-called Presentation... .
Appendix Component Library and Didactics Material offer a

complete and concise summary of the instructional material in
FluidSIM.
The following sections contain a description of the functions found

under the Didactics menu.
23.1 Information about Single Components
The first three entries under the Didactics menu refer to selected
components and are context sensitive. More precisely:
When a component in the current circuit diagram window is select-

ed, or all selected components are of the same type, the menu
entry Component description will be enabled.

23.1.1 Component Descriptions
All components possess a page with a technical description. This

page contains the diagram symbol for the component according to
the DIN standard (“Deutsche Industrienorm”), a textual description
of the component’s function, the designations of the connections,
and a listing of the adjustable parameters along with their value
ranges.
You will find a photograph of the real-life part provided for most
components. In the case that a component cannot exist singularly
in a real system, FluidSIM displays a photo of the assembly group
that this component belongs to. Examples for such components
include the indicator light, relays, switches, and the electrical
power supply. Components, which do not exist in reality, simply
have no photo. Examples include the text component and the
distance rule.
→ Select the one-way flow control valve and click on the menu
item Component description under the Didactics menu.
The following page opens:

Figure 23/1: Technical page of the one-way flow control valve

Figure 23/2: Technical page of the throttle check valve
Under the heading Related topics, but also when appropriate in the
component description, cross references for related instruction
material and components are defined. By clicking on a cross refer-
ence, the related page will automatically be displayed.
23.1.2 Component Illustrations
Component illustrations provide useful information relating a

component’s function. This may include a sectional view of the
component, but also illustrations of the component’s usage within
a circuit diagram. For several components, their sectional view can
be animated like a cartoon.

→ Select an air motor (4/2-way hand-lever valve in case of hy-
draulic version) and click on Component description under
the Didactics menu.

Figure 23/3: Page component-specific topics

Figure 23/4: Dialog box with component-specific topics
→ Please click the line with the relevant topic [35] Air
motor (hydraulics: [104] 4/2-way valve, two
pistons (1) ).
The following picture appears:

Figure 23/5: Function illustration of an air motor

Figure 23/6: Function illustration of a 4/2-way valve
Often it is easier to understand the functional nature of a compo-

nent, when its behavior is visualized through the use of animation.
For this reason, several components possess different sectional
views showing the component at different states. These sectional
views can be animated in much the same way as a flip book.
→ Please mark a quick-exhaust valve(hydraulics: 3-way pressure

reducing valve)and click the menu option Didactics Compo-
nent description to open the window with the component de-
scription. Now click the link with the function illustration [87]
quick exhaust valve (hydraulics: [84] 3-way pressure reducing
valve)
This function illustration can be animated.
→ Click on or Execute Start to start the animation.

An animation can be “frozen” with or by clicking on Pause in
the Execute menu. or Execute Stop stops an animation,
whereas or Execute Reset restarts an animation.
23.2 Selecting Didactics Material from a List
The entries Tutorial ’Simulating with FluidSIM' , Component

Library and Didactics Material under the Didactics menu
present the didactics material of FluidSIM organized in the form of
overview pages. From these pages topics can be chosen and
viewed independently of the current window and possibly selected
components.
23.2.1 Tutorial
Below this menu option you can launch the tutorial “Simulating
with FluidSIM”, which contains a variety of interesting experiments
and an excursus. By means of these useful examples you will get to
know the possibilities of simulating with FluidSIM. Furthermore, for
the most important components the mathematic models used in
FluidSIM are also described.
→ Please click the menu option Didactics Tutorial ’Simulating

with FluidSIM' to open the tutorial.

Figure 23/7: Tutorial (Pneumatics)

Figure 23/8: Tutorial (Hydraulics)
On the right-hand side the hierarchical directory is displayed. By

double-clicking the directory symbols you may list off or close the
applicable subsections. Clicking a page symbol will display the
contents of the page in the open window.
23.2.2 Component Library
Below the menu option Component Library you will find descrip-
tions and photos of all FluidSIM -components.
→ Click a menu option Didactics Component Library to open

the help pages of the component library.

Figure 23/9: Component Library (Pneumatics)

Figure 23/10: Component Library (Hydraulics)
23.2.3 Didactics Material
FluidSIM, alongside the tutorial and the component reference,

contains further didactics material particularly useful for group
work. Moreover, here you will find educational films, provided you
have copied them onto the hard disk during the installation. If you
haven’t installed the film files, you may choose a chapter via the
menu option Didactics Educational Film... to view the applicable
film from the included video-CD.
→ Click the menu option Didactics Didactics Material to open

the overview of the didactics material.

Figure 23/11: Didactics Material (Pneumatics)

Figure 23/12: Didactics Material (Hydraulics)
23.3 Presentations: Combining Instructional Material
Sometimes you may want to examine a topic from different angles

or combine individual topics into a lesson. For this purpose
FluidSIM offers the concept entitled Presentation... .
There are a number of already prepared presentations, which can

be found on the FluidSIM installation disks. However, editing
presentations or creating new presentations is also possible with
FluidSIM. All presentations can be found under Presentation... in
the Didactics menu.
→ Click on Didactics Presentation... .


Figure 23/13: Dialog box for selecting and editing presentations
(Pneumatics)

Figure 23/14: Dialog box for selecting and editing presentations
(Hydraulics)
Presentations This field contains a list of already created presentations.
New presentation... Clicking on “ New presentation... ” opens a second dialog box for
the creation of a new presentation.
Edit presentation... Clicking on “ Edit presentation... ” opens a second dialog box to

begin editing a presentation.
Preview When the “Preview” setting is activated, the picture that pertains to
the selected presentation appears underneath the topics list.
→ Click on “New Presentation” to open the following dialog box.

Figure 23/15: Dialog box for editing presentations (Pneumatics)

Figure 23/16: Dialog box for editing presentations (Hydraulics)
Description In this text field a short description of the presentation can be

entered. This text may consist of up to 128 characters and will
appear with the other presentations, the next time the presentation
dialog box is opened.
Available topics This field contains a list of all available topics dealing with “ Pneu-
matics basics”, “Hydraulics basics”, “Working principle”, and
“Exercise”. Moreover, there exist two pictures that can be used to
announce a refreshment and a lunch break respectively. A double
click on a line in the “Available Topics” list inserts this line in the
“Selected topics” list above the highlighted bar. In this way a
presentation can be created or altered. Moreover, a user can inte-
grate his own circuit diagrams, DXF files, BMP- and WMF-picture
files, or even multimedia files such as sounds or video clips. To do

so, click on “User file”: A dialog box opens that allows for the
selection of the desired data source on the file system.
Selected topics This field contains a list of topics chosen for the current presenta-
tion.
Add Clicking on “ Add ” is the same as double clicking a line in the “

Available topics ” list: The selected line in “ Available topics ” will
be inserted in the “ Selected topics ” list.
Delete Clicking on “ Delete ” deletes the selected line of the “ Selected

topics ” list.
Preview When the “ Preview ” setting is activated, the picture that pertains
to the selected topic appears underneath the respective list.
Within both topics lists the highlighted bar can be moved using the
arrow keys. Maybe it will be necessary to click and select the list
you want to work with. After creating a new presentation and clos-
ing the dialog box by clicking on “ OK ”, FluidSIM asks you to
name the presentation file. Presentation files have the extension
.shw and are located in the subdirectory shw under the installa-
tion directory.
23.4 Extended Presentations in the Microsoft PowerPoint

Format
The hydraulics version of FluidSIM contains an additional large set

of presentations written in the Microsoft PowerPoint Format. To use
these presentations, PowerPoint must not be installed on your PC
since FluidSIM installs the necessary viewer at its installation time.
→ Click on Extended Presentation... to open the dialog box of a

presentation.

Figure 23/17: Selection of an extended presentation
→ Select the item “Actuators” to open the related presentation in

full screen mode.
Most of the topics form a picture sequence, which can be viewed in

a single-step manner using the left mouse button or the spacebar.
→ Move two single steps forward in the current presentation.

Figure 23/18: Actuators
When clicking the right mouse button, a context menu is opened by

which, among others, the presentation can be closed or particular
pictures picked out. The files of the extended presentations are in
the subdirectory ppx of the FluidSIM installation. You can add
new PowerPoint presentations on your own by copying the related
files (format: “ppt” or “pps”) into the ppx -directory. Like the
other didactics material (illustrations of function, component pho-
tos, circuit drawings, educational films, etc.), the PowerPoint
presentations can linked and used within presentations (cf. Section
Presentations: Combining Instructional Material).

Didactics Material Survey (Pneumatics)
Chapter 24
24. Didactics Material Survey (Pne umatics)
This chapter provides a comprehensive listing of those parts of the

didactics material in FluidSIM that are not covered by chapter The
Component Library “The Component Library” . Basically, this mate-
rial consists of the components' behavior illustrations, the anima-
tions, the exercises, and the educational films, which all can be
activated under the Didactics menu. The subsequent sections
are arranged thematically. The icon indicates that an animation
exists for the related topic. The last section gives an overview of the
educational films.
24.1 Basics
[1] Pneumatic system structure and signal flow
A pneumatic system can be broken down into a number of levels

representing the hardware and signal flow from the energy source
to the actuating devices.
→ The topic highlights the relationship between signals, levels

and elements in a pneumatic system.
[2] Circuit diagram and pneumatic elements
Circuit diagrams are drawn in such a way that signals, for instance
energy or potential values, are oriented downwards. The number-
ing of the components is derived from their respective function in
the diagram.
→ The topic highlights the various levels in a circuit.

[3] Designating the elements, circuit diagram
This topic shows the relationship between levels in a circuit.
The figures contrasts the position of a roller lever valve (initial

position: actuated by the cylinder) in a circuit diagram and its
physical setup in a plant.
The figures contrasts the position of a roller lever valve (initial

position: not actuated) in a circuit diagram and its physical setup in
a plant.
All elements should be shown in the circuit diagram in the initial

position. If valves have been drawn with an actuated initial posi-
tion, this fact is indicated for example by an arrow, or for a limit
switch, by drawing the cam.
→ Explain the differences between the following terms: initial

position and starting position.

24.2 Supply elements
[7] Symbols of energy and supply components, supply and ser-

vice equipment
The Symbols are from the DIN ISO 1219 “Circuit symbols for fluidic
power components and systems”. The symbols for the energy
supply system can be represented as individual components or as
combined elements.
→ Compare the symbols with the combined symbols (topic 8).
[8] Symbols of energy and supply components, combined sym-

bols
In general where specific technical details are to be given, such as

requirements for non-lubricated air or micro-filtering, the complete
detailed symbol should be used. If a standard and common air
supply is used for all components, the simplified symbols can be
used.
→ Compare the symbols with the previous topic.
[9] Air service unit
The filter is normally combined with the pressure regulator and

lubricator to form a compressed air service unit. The selection of
the correct filter plays an important role in determining the quality
and performance of the control system which is to be supplied with
compressed air.
→ Refer to topic 10 for construction of the filter.

[10] Compressed air filter
The compressed air passes through a baffle plate in the filter bowl.
The air is rotated, and the heavier dust particles and water droplets
are spun by centrifugal force against the inner wall of the filter bowl
and run down the wall of the housing. The air which has been
precleaned then passes through the filter element.
→ The bowl must be emptied daily to prevent overflow.
[11] Air drying, low temperature
The lower the dew point the more the water will condense and
reduce the amount entrapped in the air. Using refrigeration meth-
ods, it is possible to achieve dew points of between 2°{C} and
5°{C}.
→ Compare with absorption and adsorption drying.
[12] Air drying, absorption
Absorption drying is a purely chemical process. The moisture in the

compressed air forms a compound with the drying agent in the
tank. This causes the drying agent to break down; it is then dis-
charged as a fluid at the base of the tank. The drying agent must be
replenished at a rate which is dependent on the compressed air
temperature, water content and flow rate.
→ Compare with adsorption drying.

[13] Air drying, adsorption
The lowest equivalent dew points (down to -90°{C}) can be

achieved by means of adsorption drying. In this process, the com-
pressed air is passed through gel and the water is deposited on the
surface, i.e. it is adsorbed.
→ Compare with absorption drying.
[14] Air lubricator
As a rule, the compressed air which is generated should be dry and

free of oil. For some components, lubricated air is damaging, for
others, it is undesirable, and for power components, it may in
certain cases be necessary. Lubrication of the air should therefore
be limited to the sections of the plant which require it.
→ Refer to picture of topic 9 for general arrangement.
[15] Air lubricator
Air passing through the lubricator causes a pressure drop between

the oil reservoir and the upper part of the lubricator. This pressure
difference forces the oil upwards through a tube and it then drips
into a nozzle which can be seen through an inspection glass. The oil
is atomized and carried along by the air stream.
→ It is necessary to carefully adjust the oil discharge rate.

[16] Pressure regulator with vent hole
The purpose of the regulator is to maintain the operating pressure

(secondary pressure) virtually constant regardless of fluctuations in
the line pressure (primary pressure). When air consumption in-
creases, the operating pressure drops and the spring opens the
valve. If the pressure on the secondary side increases considerably,
the center-piece of the diaphragm then opens and the compressed
air can flow to atmosphere through the vent holes in the housing.
[17] Delivery
Due to the pressure losses in the system, the compressor should

deliver between 650 and 700 kPa (6.5 and 7 bar). The operating
components of the system should be regulated to between 500 and
600 kPa (5 and 6 bar) for economic use. The receiver is used to
even out fluctuations in pressure due to demand. The drainage
points are at the lowest points.
→ The gradient should be away from the compressor.
[18] Piston compressor
The piston compressor is widely used. Multi-stage compressors are

required for compressing to high pressure. The drawn in air is
compressed by the first piston, cooled and then compressed fur-
ther by the next stage.

→ Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of piston compres-
sors.
[19] Axial flow compressor
Flow compressors produce large volumes of air at small increases

in stage pressure. The air is accelerated by the blades of the com-
pressor but there is only a small increase in pressure.
→ The kinetic energy is converted to pressure energy.
[20] Distribution
For ease of maintenance, repair or extension of the air network, it is

advisable to sub-divide the network into individual sections by
means of shut-off valves. Branches with T-pieces and manifolds
with plug-in couplings make it possible to supply additional con-
suming devices as the need arises.
→ To discharge condensate, the pipes should be inclined 1-2 %

and include water separators at low points.
[21] Absolute pressure and atmospheric pressure
Absolute pressure is calculated from the absolute zero mark. Below

atmospheric pressure the pressure is in the vacuum range. The

atmospheric pressure fluctuates but is approximately 100 kPa (1
bar).
→ Gauge pressure is normally that component above atmospheric

pressure and is not an absolute value.
24.3 Actuators
[22] Symbols for actuators, linear actuators
The single acting cylinder and the double acting cylinder form the
basis for design variations. The use of cushioning to reduce loads
on the end caps and mountings during deceleration of the piston is
important for long-life and smooth operation.
→ Refer to topics 25 - 30 for construction details.
[23] Symbols for actuators, rotary motion
Rotary actuators are divided into continuous motion and limited

angle of rotation. The air motor is normally a high speed device
with either fixed or adjustable speed control. Units with limited
angle of rotation are fixed or adjustable in angular distance. The
rotary actuator may be cushioned depending on the load and speed
of operation.
→ Refer to topics 34 and 35 for construction details.
[24] Control of a single acting cylinder
The position rod of a single acting cylinder is to move forward when

air is applied. A valve is to create a signal when a push-button is
released. The animation shows the operation of the push-button
and the extension of the cylinder. Pressure is maintained on the

piston until the push-button is released. The next stage shows
retraction of the cylinder and the release of air via the exhaust port
of the 3/2-way valve.
→ The topic can be used as an intermediate stage for explanation

of the related symbols.
[25] Single acting cylinder
The cylinder requires one pneumatic connection and an exhaust

port. The exhaust port must be clear of obstructions to ensure that
the piston is not restricted by the air passage. A filter is normally
fitted to the exhaust port.
→ Discuss the importance of selecting the size of the cylinder to

match the load conditions.
With single acting cylinders, compressed air is applied on only one

side of the piston face. The other side is open to atmosphere. The
cylinders can perform work in only one direction. The return move-
ment of the piston is effected by a built-in spring or by the applica-
tion of an external force. The spring force returns the piston to its
start position with a reasonably high speed under no load condi-
tions. The stroke is limited by the natural length of the spring.
Single acting cylinders are therefore only available in stroke lengths
of up to 100 mm.
→ Compare the construction with the double acting type. Discuss

the spring size and return speed.
[27] Control of a double acting cylinder
The 4/2-way directional control valve is suitable for the control of a

double acting cylinder. Normal practice is to use the 5/2-way valve.

The cylinder motion is controlled by air in both directions of motion.
The animation shows the advance and retraction sequences as
separate phases. The fully advanced position is related as long as
the push-button is actuated.
→ The topic can be used as an intermediate stage for explanation

of the related symbols.
[28] Double acting cylinder
Double acting cylinders are used particularly when the piston is

required to perform a work function in both directions of motion.
The construction is in general similar to the single acting cylinder.
→ Refer to the large number of variants, which result from the

different designs, materials, etc.
The first sequence shows the piston rod advancing. The second
stage the retraction. The speed of advance and retraction are fairly
constant under no load conditions.
→ Point at the positions of cylinder body, piston cover, cylinder

cover, piston seal, piston rod, bearing bush, and scraper ring.
[30] Cushioned double acting cylinder
If large masses are moved by a cylinder, cushioning is used in the

end positions. Before reaching the end position, a cushioning
piston interrupts the direct flow of air to the outside. For the last

part of the stroke the speed is slowed to reduce impact on the
cylinder.
→ Discuss the different concept of throttling the exhausting air by

means of one-way flow control valve.
[31] Cylinder seals
The various piston seal arrangements are shown. The double-cup

seal materials used are, Perbunan for -20°{C} to +80°{C} Viton for -
20°{C} to +190°{C} Teflon for -80°{C} to +200°{C}.
→ Emphasize correct temperature range selection for reliability.
[32] Mounting arrangements for cylinders
The type of mounting is determined by the manner in which the

cylinder is to be fitted to a machine or fixture. The cylinder can be
designed with a permanent type of mounting if it does not have to
be altered at any time. Alternatively, the cylinder can utilize adjust-
able types of mounting which can be altered by using suitable
accessories on the modular construction principle.
→ Discuss application examples for each type of mounting.

[33] Tandem double acting cylinder
This design features the characteristics of two double acting cylin-

ders forming a single unit. This increases the effective piston area
of the unit for high force applications. It is suitable for applications
where a large force is required but the cylinder diameter is restrict-
ed.
→ Compare the double acting cylinder in topic 29.
[34] Semi-rotary actuator
The rotary actuator is compact with high torque ratings. The force is
transmitted to the drive shaft by a rotary vane. The range of angular
movement is adjustable with end stops. The angle can be adjusted
between 0° and 180°. The adjustable stop system is separate to the
rotary vanes. This allows force to be absorbed by the stop blocks.
At the end positions, impacts are cushioned by elastic cushioning
rings.
→ Discuss the mounting arrangements for the actuator. Discuss

applications for the rotary actuator.
[35] Air motor
Devices which transform pneumatic energy into mechanical rotary

motion, with the possibility of continuous motion. They are catego-
rized into the groups of piston motors, sliding vane motors, gear
motors and turbines.

→ Discuss applications for the air motor.
24.4 Directional control valves
[36] Symbols for directional control valves (1)
The directional control valve is represented by the number of ports

and the number of switching positions. Additional information is
required to fully describe the symbol function, including the meth-
ods of actuation and special flow path characteristics.
→ Compare the full range of symbols for directional control

valves.
[37] Symbols for directional valves (2)
Each valve position is shown as a separate square. The designation

of the ports is important when interpreting the circuit symbols and
the valve as fitted to the physical system.
→ Compare the full range of symbols for directional control

valves.
[38] Designation of connections
The designations for directional control valves are in accordance

with ISO 5599-3, edition 1990. Prior to this a lettering system was
utilized.
→ Discuss the examples and emphasize the numbering systems.

[39] Methods of actuation (1)
The methods of actuation of pneumatic directional control valves

are dependent upon the application. The methods of actuation
include manual, mechanical, pneumatic, electrical and combined.
→ Discuss the actuation and return actuation methods.
[40] Methods of actuation (2)
When applied to a directional control valve, consideration must be

given to the method of initial actuation of the valve and also the
method of return actuation. They are both shown on the symbol
either side of the position boxes. There may also be additional
methods such as manual overrides separately indicated.
→ Discuss the actuation and return actuation methods.
[41] 3/2-way valve, ball seat
A spring forces a hemisphere against the valve seat preventing the

compressed air from flowing from the air connection 1 to the work-
ing line 2. Initially port 1 is blocked and the output port 2 is ex-
hausted through the stem of the plunger. Actuation of the valve
plunger causes the sealing element to be forced away from the
seat. In doing this, the opposing force of the reset spring and that
generated from the compressed air must be overcome. The air
supply is then open to the output side of the valve and a signal is
generated.
→ Compare the symbol and the valve construction. Compare the

construction of the disc seat valve.

[42] 3/2-way valve, ball seat
The ball seat valve is compact with the possibility of fitting various
types of actuating heads. The limitation for directly actuated valves
is the force required to operate the stem. If the flow rate required is
very high, the valve ball will have a large working area. This re-
quires a large operating force. This limits the size of valve for this
design.
→ The load on the stem is dependent on the size of valve.
[43] 3/2-way valve, disc seat, normally closed
The valve is constructed on the disc seat principle. The response

time is short and a small movement results in a large area being
available for air flow. Valves of the single disc seat type are non-
overlapping. Using this topic, discuss the term “blocked normal
position”. When operated slowly, there is no loss of air. A 3/2-way
valve with flow blocked between ports 1 and 2 in the normal condi-
tion, is referred to as a normally closed valve. The valves are insen-
sitive to dirt and thus have a long service life. Explain the term
“non-overlapping” with this figure and the animation.
→ The animation sequence shows the operation of the 3/2 way

valve. The first sequence describes the actuation and the sup-
ply of a signal from 1 to 2. The second sequence shows the
closing of the disc seat and the release of air from 2 to 3 which
exhausts to atmosphere.

[44] 3/2-way valve, disc seat, normally open
A 3/2-way valve with free flow between ports 1 and 2 in the normal
condition, is referred to as normally open. Valves can be operated
manually, mechanically, electrically or pneumatically. The configu-
ration of the valve head is changed to meet the actuation method.
Upon operation of the actuating stem, the disc seat is sealed and
air supply port 1 is blocked. The air at port 2 is exhausted to at-
mosphere via port 3.
→ Note the change of construction compared to the normally

closed valve topic 43.
[45] 3/2-way valve, single pilot, normally closed
The pneumatically operated 3/2-way valve is operated by a directly

acting signal at port 12. This is referred to as a single pilot valve
since there is only one control signal and the valve has a spring
return. A signal is applied at port 12 and the valve plunger is moved
against the reset spring. The connections 1 and 2 are then inter-
connected creating a signal 2. The pressure at port 12 must be
sufficient to move the disc against the supply pressure.
→ Note the pneumatic symbol shows direct application of the

signal at port 12. Compare the construction of the valve to the
3/2-way disc seat valve topic 43.
[46] 3/2-way valve, single pilot

The valve ports are labeled to ensure the correct connections are
made. The pilot valve is available in a range of sizes depending
upon the flow rate.
→ Note the need to designate and label the ports.
[47] 3/2-way valve, internal pilot, roller operated
This type of valve can be used as either a normally closed valve or

as a normally open valve by exchanging connections 1 and 3 and
rotating the actuating head 180 degrees. The force required on the
roller lever is small due to the pilot operation.
→ Show the requirements to alter the valve configuration.
[48] 3/2-way valve, internal pilot, normally closed
To avoid high actuating force, mechanically controlled directional

valves can be equipped with an internal pilot valve to assist open-
ing. A small hole connects the pressure connection 1 and the pilot
valve. If the roller is operated, the pilot valve opens. Compressed
air flows to the main piston and actuates the main valve disc.
→ The symbol shows the roller operating a pilot signal.
[49] 4/2-way valve, disc seat
The valve is robust. Two stems directly operate the disc seats. The
load required to move the stems may be large for high flow rate
valves.

→ Compare the construction with the 3/2-way valve.
[50] 4/2-way valve, disc seat
The 4/2-way valve has four ports and two positions. A disc seat
4/2-way valve is similar in characteristic to the combination of two
3/2-way valves, one valve normally closed and the other normally
open. The plungers can be operated by an auxiliary mounted device
such as a roller lever or push-button. When the two plungers are
actuated simultaneously, 1 to 2 and 4 to 3 are closed by the first
movement. By pressing the valve plungers further against the
discs, opposing the reset spring force, the passages between 1 and
4 and from 2 to 3 are opened.
→ Show the similarities to the 3/2-way valve construction. Dis-

cuss the valve overlap.
[51] 4/3-way valve, mid-position closed
The 4/3-way valve has four ports and three positions. An example
of the 4/3-way valve is the plate slide valve with hand or foot
actuation. By turning two discs, channels are interconnected with
one another.
→ Compare the symbol with the valve construction.

[52] 5/2-way valve, longitudinal slide valve
The valve can be mounted onto a common sub-base for supply and
exhaust air. This compact arrangement also ensures adequate flow
is available to the valve.
→ Discuss the DIN ISO 5599/1 standard for 5 port valves.
[53] 5/2-way valve, longitudinal slide valve
The 5/2-way valve has five ports and two positions. The 5/2-way
valve is used for the control of cylinders primarily as a final control
element. In pneumatic valves, the gap between spool and housing
bore should not exceed 0.002–0.004 mm. The valve is shown here
with pilot pressure applied at port 12. To avoid damage to seals,
the ports can be distributed around the circumference of the hous-
ing. The actuation travel is considerably larger than with seat
valves. The valve is shown here with pilot pressure at 14.
→ Discuss the load conditions on the O-rings. Compare the con-

struction with the disc seat valve.
[54] 5/2-way valve, suspended disc seat
A method of sealing the 5/2-way valve is to use a suspended disc

seat with a relatively small switching movement. The disc seat seal
connects the 1 port to either the 2 port or the 4 port. The 5/2-way
double air pilot valve has the characteristic of memory control. The
last switched position is retained until a new switching position is
initiated by a unique pilot signal from the opposite side. There are

two manual override buttons to manually operate valve spool. The
animation shows the two switched positions. The air pilot signals
are applied from both directions. The manual override operations
are also shown. The manual overrides are used to manually actuate
the valve or initialize the valve position.
→ Compare the suspended disc seat construction to the longitu-

dinal slide principle topic 53. Explain the working principle of
the manual override button and its related diagram symbol.
[55] 5/3-way valve
The 5/3-way valve has five ports and three positions. Signals ap-
plied at ports 14 or 12 operate the valve. If the valve is not actuated
it is closed in the mid-position. After actuation via a pilot signal at
port 14 air flows from 1 to 4. Port 2 exhausts via 3. After actuation
via a pilot signal at port 12 air flows from 1 to 2. Port 4 exhausts via
port 5.
→ Show the three valve positions.
[56] Memory circuit, 5/2-way bistable valve
The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is to advance when a 3/2-

way push-button valve is actuated. The cylinder is to remain ex-
tended until a second push-button is actuated. The cylinder is to
then return to the initial position. The speed of the cylinder is to be
adjustable in both directions.
→ Discuss the memory characteristic of the bistable valve.

Signals initiated by the push-button signaling devices can be of

short or pulse duration due to the memory characteristics of the
bistable valve. Upon operation of push-button 1S1, a 1-signal is
generated at port 14 of the control valve 1V3. The 5/2-way memory
valve switches and the cylinder 1A1 advances.
→ The circuit is shown at the first operation of the button.
When the push-button 1S1 is released, the signal at port 14 is

exhausted. The valve 1V3 remains in the current position. The last
position is retained until a new input signal is given.
→ Compare the sequence of operation.
The valve 1V3 remains in the current position until the push-button
1S2 is operated. The cylinder then retracts. The cylinder remains
retracted until a new signal is generated at port 14 by the valve
1S1.
→ Compare the sequence of operation.
The flow control valves throttle the exhausting air in both directions
of piston motion. The cylinder remains retracted until a start signal
is generated at port 14 by the valve 1S1. The 5/2-way valve re-
mains in the current position with air supplied continuously to the
return side of the cylinder.
→ Discuss the situation when both 1S1 and 1S2 are operated
together.

[61] Direct control, unactuated
A single acting cylinder of 25 mm diameter is to clamp a component

when a push-button is pressed. As long as the push-button is
operated, the cylinder is to remain in the clamped position. Since
the cylinder is the only working element or actuator in the circuit, it
is designated 1A1. The final control element that advances the
cylinder is designated 1S1.
→ Discuss the circuit layout standard, numbering and operation.

Note the circuit is shown in the initial state.
[62] Indirect control (unactuated)
A large diameter single acting cylinder is to extend upon operation

of a push-button valve. The valve is situated at a remote and dis-
tant position. The cylinder is to retract once the remote push-
button is released. The signal at the pilot port 12 remains as long
as the push-button is held down. This is an indirect push-button
control of the cylinder. If the push-button is released, the spring
return closes the 3/2-way valve and removes the pilot signal at the
control valve.

Note the circuit is shown in the initial state.
[63] Exercise: Direct control of a double acting cylinder – Problem
A double acting cylinder is to advance when a push-button is oper-

ated. Upon release of the push-button, the cylinder is to retract.
The cylinder is of small bore (25 mm diameter) requiring a small
flow rate to operate at the correct speed.
[64] Exercise: Direct control of a double acting cylinder – Solution
The control valve for a double acting cylinder can be selected as a

4/2 way or a 5/2 way valve. In this case, since the cylinder has a

small capacity, the operation can be directly controlled by a push-
button control valve with spring return. On operating the push-
button, the air passes through the valve from port 1 to the port 4
and advances the piston rod. On release of the push-button, the
valve spring returns the control valve to its initial position and the
cylinder retracts. Air escapes from the cylinder via the exhaust port.
Since the cylinder is the only working element or actuator in the
circuit, it is designated 1A1. The final control element that advances
the cylinder is designated 1S1.
[65] Exercise: Direct control of a double acting cylinder – Note
→ If the push-button is pressed for a very short period, the cylin-

der only partially advances and then retracts, since the spring
resets the control valve as soon as the push-button is released.
In order to achieve full extension in this case, the push-button
must be held down until the cylinder moves fully forward.
[66] Exercise: Indirect control of a double acting cylinder – Prob-

lem
A double acting cylinder is to advance when a push-button is oper-

ated. Upon release of the push-button the cylinder is to retract. The
cylinder is 250 mm diameter and consumes a large volume of air.
For controlling cylinders at high speed or of large diameter large
size control valves should be used. The operating force to actuate
the valve may be relatively large and in this case indirect control is
preferable.
[67] Exercise: Indirect control of a double acting cylinder – Solu-

tion
Operating valve 1S1 supplies a pilot signal to port 14 of control

valve 1V1. This generates a 1-signal at the outlet 4 and the cylinder
advances. If the push-button is released the return signal is sup-
plied via port 2 of valve 1V1 and the return air is vented via exhaust
port 5. If the push-button is released before the cylinder fully ad-

vances, the cylinder immediately returns to the initial position. The
control valve requires a sustained signal for it to remain operated.
→ Explain the benefits of indirect control: The required actuating

force is reduced, the working lines can be kept short, since the
actuator can be mounted close to the cylinder, and the signal-
ing element can be small since it has to generate only the sig-
nal for actuating the control valve.
[68] Exercise: Indirect control of a double acting cylinder – Note
→ The supply line can be short since the control valve can be
mounted close to the cylinder. The other advantage is that the
signal element (i.e. push-button 3/2 way valve) can be small,
as it only provides a signal to operate the control valve and is
not required to operate the cylinder directly.
24.5 Shutoff valves
[69] Non-return valves
The non-return or check valve will open due to the supply pressure
exceeding the resistance of the spring (if fitted) and the inertia of
the valve. The non-return valve is the basis for development of
many combined components. The shuttle valve, two pressure valve
and quick exhaust valve incorporate features of the non-return
valve.
→ Indicate the valves that include the non-return function.
[70] Non return valve
Non return valves can stop the flow completely in one direction. In
the opposite direction the flow is free with a minimal pressure drop

due to the resistance of the valve. The one-way blocking action can
be effected by cones, balls, plates or diaphragms.
→ Discuss the relationship between pressure to open and the

spring size.
[71] Two pressure valve
The two pressure valve has two inputs 1 and one output 2. The two
pressure valve is used mainly for interlocking controls, safety
controls, check functions or logic operations. The application of a
signal at a single input produces no pressure at output 2. If pres-
sure is applied at both inputs 1, the signal which is last applied
passes to the output 2. The two pressure circuit is equivalent to
two input signaling devices in series, i.e. one after the other.
→ Refer to topics 72 - 74 for the circuit example. Discuss the

advantages of the shown solution against series connection.
[72] Circuit: Two pressure valve I
The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is to advance when a 3/2-

way push-button valve and a roller lever valve are actuated. If
either of the actuations is released, then the cylinder is to return to
the initial position.
[73] Circuit: Two pressure valve II
The inputs of the two pressure valve are connected to the outputs
of the two 3/2-way valves. Upon operation of the push-button 1S1,
a signal is generated at the left side of input 1 of the two pressure
valve. The signal is blocked by the two pressure valve. No output is
given at 2.

→ Discuss the logic function “AND”. Refer to the following topic
for additional conditions.
[74] Circuit: Two pressure valve III
If the roller lever valve 1S2 is also operated, then the two pressure
valve will produce a 1-signal at port 2 which operates the control
valve, via pilot port 1V1, against the return spring and the cylinder
advances.
→ Compare this topic to topic 73.
[75] Exercise: The logic AND function, the two pressure valve –
Problem
A transfer station removes a product from a conveyor belt. If the

product is detected as present and if the operator presses the
push-button, the pick-up cylinder 1A1 advances. The product is
sensed by a 3/2 way roller lever valve. Upon release of the push-
button, cylinder 1A1 is to retract to the initial position. The operat-
ing condition for the pick-up cylinder to advance is a logic AND
function between the product sensor and the operator push-
button. Therefore if a two pressure valve is used to combine the
signals from the sensor and push-button the logic conditions can
be met.
Solution
The two pressure valve is connected between the outlet lines of the
two 3/2 way valves. Operating the push-button, a 1-signal is gen-
erated at left input 1 of the two pressure valve. Once the part is
sensed as present, the 3/2 way roller valve generates a second 1-
signal, this time at the right input 1 of the two pressure valve. A
signal is passed through to port 2. This signal operates the control
valve pilot signal 14 against the spring return and the cylinder
advances. If either of the two signals created by the 3/2 way valves
is set to zero, the two pressure valve will release the 14 signal back
through the exhaust port of one of the 3/2 way valves. The return

spring in the control valve then switches the control valve to the
initial position. The control valve outlet port 2 is active and with
outlet port 4 exhausted to atmosphere the cylinder retracts. The
control valve can be a 4/2 or 5/2 way valve and can be sized to suit
the flow rate required for the cylinder speed.
Note
Discuss also the advantages of the shown solution against series

connection.
[78] Shuttle valve
This non-return element has two inputs 1 and one output 2. If

compressed air is applied to one input, the valve seat seals off the
opposing input and air flows to output 2. Note the similarity in
construction to the two pressure valve.
→ Compare the two pressure valve construction topic 71.
[79] Circuit: Shuttle valve I
If the condition states that either of two push-buttons is to advance

a cylinder, the inexperienced designer may attempt to use a junc-
tion for the output signals of 1S1 and 1S2. The circuit is not func-
tional due to the escape of air through the exhaust ports of the
valves.
→ Discuss the sequence of circuits for the shuttle valve.
[80] Circuit: Shuttle valve II
If push-button 1S1 is operated, the air escapes to atmosphere

through the exhaust port of 1S2. The air takes the easiest path and
the pressure will be very low and inadequate to operate the valve

1V1. This is an inadequate solution to the problem. A shuttle valve
is required.
→ Compare the topic with the previous one.
[81] Circuit: Shuttle valve III
The piston rod of a double acting cylinder is to advance when either

of two 3/2-way push-buttons is actuated. If both push-buttons are
then released, the cylinder is to retract. The shuttle valve is incor-
porated at the junction and the circuit now functions correctly.
→ Note the function of the ball in the shuttle valve acting as a

non-return valve.
[82] Circuit: Shuttle valve IV
The shuttle valve is connected to the junction between the two 3/2-
way push-button valves. Upon operation of one of the push-
buttons, a signal is generated at the X or Y port of the shuttle valve
and an output signal is emitted at port 2. The cylinder advances.
→ Compare the topic with the previous one.
[83] Exercise: The logic OR function, the shuttle valve – Problem
A cylinder is used to transfer parts from a magazine. If either a

push-button or a foot pedal is operated, then the cylinder is to
advance. Once the cylinder has fully advanced, it is to retract to the
initial position. A 3/2 way roller lever valve is to be used to detect
forward end position of the cylinder.
[84] Exercise: The logic OR function, the shuttle valve – Solution
The shuttle valve is connected to the junction between the two

manual 3/2 way valves. Upon operation of one of the manual 3/2
way valves, a 1-signal is generated at either input 1 of the shuttle

valve. This signal passes through the shuttle valve and is emitted at
port 2. This operates the control valve via pilot port 14, and the
cylinder advances. A limit valve 1S2 senses that the cylinder has
fully extended. Pilot signal 2 from valve 1S2 actuates the 5/2 way
valve via port 12 and the cylinder retracts. The signal at port 12 is
only effective, if the opposing signal at port 14 is released. If both
of the signals produced via the push-button valves are set to zero,
then the shuttle valve will release the pilot signal 14 back through
the exhaust port of one of the 3/2 way valves. In other words, both
the push-button and the foot pedal must be inactive for retraction
to occur. The control valve can be a 4/2 way or 5/2 way valve and
can be sized to suit the flow rate required for the cylinder speed.
[85] Exercise: The logic OR function, the shuttle valve – Note
→ The necessity of the shuttle valve can be explained with topic

79.
[86] Quick exhaust valve
To reduce resistance to flow, the air is expelled to atmosphere

through a large orifice thus increasing cylinder piston speed. The
valve is normally silenced so as to reduce exhaust air noise.
[87] Quick exhaust valve
Quick exhaust valves are used to increase the piston speed of

cylinders. Lengthy return times can be avoided, particularly with
single acting cylinders. To reduce resistance to flow, the air is
expelled to atmosphere close to the cylinder and through a large
orifice. In the direction 1 to 2 the air is passed freely via the open-
ing of the non-return seal. Port 3 is blocked by the disc. If air is
supplied to port 2, the disc seals port 1. Air is expelled to atmos-
phere through the large orifice 3. Mount the quick exhaust valve
directly on the cylinder, or as near as possible.
→ Refer to topic 88 for the circuit example.

[88] Circuit: Quick exhaust valve
A cylinder piston rod is to travel at an increased speed, utilizing the

quick exhaust valve. The forward motion of the piston rod is assist-
ed by the release of exhausting air at the quick exhaust valve. The
return stroke is unchanged due to the bypass non-return valve.
→ Refer to topic 70 for construction of the valve.
[89] Exercise: The quick exhaust valve – Problem
A cylinder advances a forming tool on an edge-folding device. If a

sheet is detected as present and if a push-button is pressed, then
the cylinder is to advance. For rapid forward travel, the circuit
utilizes a quick exhaust valve. The forward movement folds the
edge of a flat sheet. If the push-button is released, the double
acting cylinder is to return slowly to the initial position.
[90] Exercise: The quick exhaust valve – Solution
Initial position: In the initial state, the cylinder assumes the retract-
ed position. If both of the 3/2 way valves are actuated, pressure is
present at the output port 2 of the two pressure valve 1V4. This
reverses the 5/2 way control valve. The cylinder advances with air
being supplied via an unrestricted passage through the one-way
flow control valve 1V1. The actuator travels rapidly to its forward
end position since the pressure space on the piston rod side is
rapidly exhausted through the quick exhaust valve. If both 3/2 way
valves remain actuated, the cylinder remains in the forward end
position. If the push-button is released, the actuator is no longer
pressurized, since the control valve reverses via the return spring.
The actuator travels to its initial position under conditions of re-
stricted flow (valve 1V1) and therefore at a reduced speed.

[91] Exercise: The quick exhaust valve – Note
→ The quick exhaust valve should be fitted as near as possible to

the connection of the cylinder to reduce resistance to flow.
24.6 Flow control valves
[92] Flow control valves
Most flow control valves are adjustable. If the non-return valve is

fitted, then the element is a one-way flow control valve.
→ Discuss the flow in both directions in both cases.
[93] One-way flow control valve
The valve is generally mounted as close to the cylinder as possible.

The valve is usually provided with a locking nut to allow finite
adjustments to be regulated and then set.
[94] One-way flow control valve
One-way flow control valves influence the volumetric flow of the

compressed air. One-way flow control valves are normally adjusta-
ble and the setting can be locked in position. The influence of
speed control is in one direction only. The first sequence of the
animation shows the total cross section of the one-way flow control
valve. The animation will be shown in detail by zooming into the air
passage area.
→ Refer to topic 96 for the circuit example.

[95] Throttle valve
Throttle valves are normally adjustable and the setting can be

locked in position. These valves are used to regulate the speed
regulation of actuators and if possible, should be mounted directly
on the cylinder.
→ Compare the flow control with throttle valves and one-way flow
control valve topic 94.
[96] Supply and exhaust air throttling
Exhaust air throttling should be used with double acting cylinder

circuits. For supply air throttling, the flow valves are installed so
that the air entering the cylinder is throttled. With exhaust air
throttling, the supply air flows freely to the cylinder and the exhaust
air is throttled.
→ Discuss the numbering system. Even numbers relate to advanc-

ing signals and odd numbers to the retracting signals.

24.7 Pressure control valves
[97] Pressure control valves
The pressure control valves are generally adjustable against a

compression spring. The sensing line for regulators is at the valve
outlet and for sequence valves the sensing is before the valve, i.e.
that pressure which is to be measured.
→ Compare the sensing line positions and flow arrows.
[98] Adjustable pressure sequence valve
The adjusting screw normally incorporates a look nut to set the

desired position. The valve body is fitted to a sub-base which can
frame mounted with other compact valves. Some applications for
the valve are clamping, pressing, gluing and safety interlocks.
[99] Adjustable pressure sequence valve (unactuated)
Sequence valves are installed in pneumatic controls where a specif-

ic pressure is required for a switching operation. The output signal
is transmitted only after the required operation pressure has been
reached. If the signal pressure at port 12 exceeds that set on the
spring, the valve opens. Outlet port 2 is opened only if a preset
pressure has built up in pilot line 12. A pilot spool opens the pas-
sage between ports 1 to 2.
→ Discuss the two elements in the control symbol. Discuss the

adjustment required to set the desired operation pressure. A
pressure gauge is required.

[100] Circuit: Pressure sequence valve
A plastic component is embossed using a die powered by a double

acting cylinder. The die is to advance and emboss the plastic when
a push-button is operated. The return of the die is to be effected
when a preset pressure is reached. The pressure is to be adjusta-
ble.
[101] Exercise: Pressure dependent control, embossing of plastic

– Problem
A plastic component is embossed using a die and a double acting

cylinder. The die is to advance and emboss the plastic when a
push-button is operated. The return of the die is to occur when the
cylinder rod has fully advanced to the embossing position and a
preset pressure is reached. A roller limit valve is to be used to
confirm full extension. The embossing pressure is adjustable and is
indicated on a pressure gauge.

– Solution
The cylinder advances if valve 1V1 is switched by push-button valve

1S1. The pressure on the advancing side of the cylinder is fed from
a junction to the limit valve 1S2 and then in series to the sequence
valve. The signal port 12 at the sequence valve acts against the
preset compression of the adjustable spring. If the limit valve 1S2
is operated due to full extension of the cylinder and the preset
value is reached, then the sequence valve opens from 1 to 2 and
sends a pilot signal to port 12 of the control valve 1V1. The memory
valve switches and the cylinder retracts. At the same time the air
from port 4 is exhausted and the pilot signal at the sequence valve
is relieved through the limit valve.

– Note
→ If the pressure does not reach the preset limit, then the cylin-
der will remain advanced. If the cylinder is obstructed during
extension to the forward position, the cylinder will not retract
due to the dependency upon operation of the limit vale 1S2.
The power circuit must be initialized by operating the 5/2 way
memory valve manually (via the manual overrides) with the air
off. The air can then be turned on.
24.8 Time delay valve
[104] Time delay valve, normally closed
The valve has a lock-able adjusting screw for setting time. The valve
is sized to meet the flow requirements.
→ Discuss the accuracy of the time delay valve.
[105] Time delay valve, normally closed
The time delay valve is a combinational valve consisting of a 3/2-

way valve, throttle relief valve and an air reservoir. The 3/2-way
valve can be a valve with normal position open or closed. The delay
time is generally 0-30 seconds for both types of valves. By using
additional reservoirs, the time can be extended. When the neces-
sary control pressure from 12 has built up in the air reservoir, the
pilot spool of the 3/2-way valve is actuated. An accurate switch-
over time is assured if the air is clean and the pressure constant.
→ Discuss the need for clean and stable air for accuracy. Discuss
the relationship between time delay and the reservoir size.

[106] Circuit: Time delay valve
A double acting cylinder is to glue components. The push-button

operates the clamping cylinder and trips a roller lever valve. The
cylinder is to remain fully extended for a time of 6 seconds and then
immediately retracts to the initial position. A new start cycle is only
possible after the cylinder has fully retracted. The cylinder advance
is to be slow and the retraction adjustable but fast.
[107] Exercise: The time delay valve – Problem
A double acting cylinder is used to press together glued compo-

nents. Upon operation of a push-button, the clamping cylinder
advances and trips a roller lever valve. Once the forward end posi-
tion is reached, the cylinder is to remain for 6 seconds and then
immediately retract to the initial position. A new start cycle is only
possible after the cylinder has fully retracted and after a delay of 5
seconds. The cylinder extension is to be slow and the retraction
adjustable, but relatively fast.
[108] Exercise: The time delay valve – Solution
The start conditions are the actuation of roller limit valve 1S3, a
delay of 5 seconds after the end of cycle and the operation of 1S1.
The two pressure valve 1V4 actuates the 5/2 way memory valve at
port 14. The cylinder advances at a preset speed via the flow con-
trol valve 1V2. The limit switch 1S3 is deactivated and therefore
even if the start button is still held, the signal at port 14 is exhaust-
ed by the removal of the limit switch signal, which resets the timer
1V6 until the cylinder has retracted again. The cylinder reaches the
limit valve 1S2 and produces a pilot signal for the time delay valve
1V5. The time delay valve opens port 2 if the preset time is reached.

A pilot signal is produced 6 seconds after the limit valve 1S2 is
operated. The 5/2 way valve switches to the initial position and the
cylinder retracts and with speed controlled by the valve 1V1. The
roller limit valve 1S2 is deactivated and the pilot signal to the timer
1V5 is cut-off, removing the signal at port 12 of the 5/2 way valve.
[109] Exercise: The time delay valve – Note
→ The memory valve must be positioned manually before air is

supplied to the circuit to ensure that the cylinder will be re-
tracted initially.
[110] Exercise: Memory circuit and speed control of a cylinder –

Problem
A double acting cylinder is to fully advance when a push-button is

actuated and to retract after full extensions is reached (confirmed
by a roller lever valve). The cylinder is to continue forward even if
the push-button is released. Speed of the cylinder is to be adjusta-
ble.

Solution
Operating the push-button 1S1 then advances the cylinder 1A1.

Operation of valve 1V3 produces pressure at port 14 which switch-
es the air to port 4. Once the cylinder travels to the limit valve 1S2,
a pilot signal is sent to port 12 of the control valve switching the
control valve if the push-button valve is released. If the push-
button is held operated after the cylinder has fully advanced, it will
remain advanced until valve 1S1 is released. The final control
element 1V3 is a memory valve and the last position is retained
until a unique opposing signal is received. The speed of advance
and retraction is controlled by the throttle valves 1V1 and 1V2 and
in both cases the speed control is by exhaust air throttling. If the
roller lever valve is fitted at the mid-stroke position of the cylinder,
it will advance up to the limit valve and then retract.

Note
The memory control valve 1V3 when first fitted could be in either of
two positions 14 or 12. It is not easy to predict the position of the
valve when fitted. If a manual override button is available the valve
should be manually set to the 12 position before turning on the air
to ensure that the cylinder remains retracted initially.
24.9 Sequential circuit and signal overlap circuit
[113] Sequential circuit, distance-step diagram
Confirmation is required that cylinder 2A1 is retracted before start

of the cycle. The sequence is, A+ B+ A- B-. The valves 2S2 and 1S3
are initially operated. There is no signal overlap at the final control
elements 1V2 and 2V2.
→ Discuss the relationship between the circuit and the distance-

step diagram.
[114] Sequential circuit
A sequential circuit has the following characteristics; when a 3/2-

way push-button valve is operated, cylinder 1A1 extends. Confirma-
tion is required at each step of the sequence. The sequence is A+
B+ A- B-.
→ There is no signal overlap with the circuit.

[115] Signal overlap circuit I
It is necessary to identify the points in the circuit where signal

overlap occurs on the 5/2-way valves 1V2 and 2V2. With this dis-
tance step diagram the circuit design using roller valves cannot
operate due to signal overlap.
→ Refer to the next topics for the overlap conditions.
[116] Signal overlap circuit II
The first overlap condition occurs at the start. The pilot signals at
the valve 1V2 from the valves 1S3 and 1S2 are opposed. The bista-
ble valve cannot move due to overlap.
→ Discuss the options for removal of overlap.
[117] Signal overlap circuit III
The second overlap condition occurs in the third step. The valve
2V2 has signals generated by 2S1 and 2S2 opposing each other
and causing a signal overlap condition.
→ Review the control diagram topic 118.
[118] Control diagram, signal overlap
The first control valve 1V2 has an overlap problem in the first step.
The first of these signals must be out short and therefore valve 1S2
could be an idle return roller lever valve. The second overlap prob-
lem is with valve 2V2 in step 3, when the cylinder 2A1 is fully ad-
vanced. Valve 2S1 could be an idle return roller valve only active in
step 2 for a short duration.
→ Idle return roller valves are not a recommended solution.

[119] Idle return roller valve solution
The idle return roller limit switch can be used to remove the signal
overlap points, i.e. replace the roller lever limit switches identified,
with an idle return roller lever valve. Valves 1S2 and 2S1 generated
the signal overlap and therefore these valves should be idle return
roller valves.
→ Idle return roller valves are not a recommended solution.
[120] Reversing valve solution
An alternative method of shortening the duration of signals is to

remove the air supply to the two signal valves, except at the steps
required. Using the reversing valve 1V2, lines S1 and S2 can be
activated consecutively and the signals are prevented from over-
lapping at the memory valves 1V1 and 2V1.
→ Emphasize the increased reliability of the circuit.
24.10 Educational Films
24.10.1 Educational Films
No. Title Length

1 Introduction 2:42
2 Fundamentals: Structure of hybrid systems 4:32
3 Fundamentals: Fundamentals of electricity 10:26
4 Sensors and relays – Signals 0:48
5 Sensors and relays – Sensors 3:24

6 Sensors and relays – Pressure switches 2:41
7 Sensors and relays – Relays 3:34
8 Solenoid valves 2:48
9 Solenoid valves: Double-solenoid valves 1:47
10 Solenoid valves: Pilot control 3:58
11 Pilot control: Circuit-diagram conventions 4:14
12 Pilot control: Hard-wired controllers 4:58
13 Pilot control: Programmable Logic Control- 2:25
lers
24.11 Standard Presentations
For several topics useful presentations have been provided within

FluidSIM. The following table lists the titles of the predefined
presentations.
24.11.1 Presentations
Presentation Title
All topics sorted by number
Basics
Supply elements
Actuators
Directional control valves
Shutoff valves
Flow control valves
Pressure control valves
Time delay valve

Sequential circuit and signal overlap circuit
Educational films

Didactics Material Survey (Hydraulics)
Chapter 25
25. Didactics Material Survey (Hydra ulics)
This chapter provides a comprehensive listing of those parts of the

didactics material in FluidSIM that are not covered by chapter The
Component Library “The Component Library”. Basically, this mate-
rial consists of the components' behavior illustrations, the anima-
tions, the exercises, and the educational films, which all can be
activated under the Didactics menu. The subsequent sections
are arranged thematically. The icon indicates that an animation
exists for the related topic. The last section gives an overview of the
educational films.
25.1 Applications
[1] Lathe
Machine-tool construction is a typical area of application of hydrau-

lics. With modern CNC machine tools, the tools and workpieces are
clamped by hydraulic means. Feed motions and the spindle drive
can also be hydraulically powered.
→ This can also serve as an example of hydraulic circuit with two

pressure ranges, for example, 3 MPa (30 bar) for machining
and 9 MPa (90 bar) for clamping.
[2] Press with elevated reservoir
This is an application in which extremely high forces are required.

Due to the suspended cylinder and the tractive load, special
measures are required for the activation of the advance stroke. This
in turn requires specially-designed press drives.
→ A special feature is the elevated reservoir, which utilizes the

static pressure in the pressure medium.

[3] Mobile hydraulics: Excavator
On this hydraulic excavator, not only all working movements (linear

drives) but also the propulsion of the vehicle (rotary drive) is hy-
draulically powered. The primary drive of the excavator is an inter-
nal-combustion engine.
→ A model calculation can be used here to demonstrate an ad-

vantage of hydraulics - large forces with relatively small com-
ponents.
25.2 Components of a Hydraulic Plant
[4] Structure of a hydraulic system
This simplified block diagram shows the division of hydraulic sys-

tems into a signal control section and a hydraulic power section.
This signal control section is used to activate the valves in the
power control section.
→ The material depicted in these electronic slides is concerned in

the main with the hydraulic power section and the three “lev-
els” of this which are shown.
[5] Hydraulic power section
The diagram of the hydraulic power section is complemented in this

case by a circuit diagram to allow correlation of the various function
groups; the power supply section contains the hydraulic pump and
drive motor and the components for the preparation of the hydrau-
lic fluid. The energy control section consists of the various valves
used to provide control and regulate the flow rate, pressure and

direction of the hydraulic fluid. This drive section consists of cylin-
ders or hydraulic motors, depending on the application in question.
[6] Block diagram of a control system
In analyzing and planning an actual control task, it can be helpful to

use a differentiated block diagram showing the actual levels to be
found on the machine.
→ The light arrows show the signal flow, while the solid dark
arrows show the energy flow.
[7] Interaction of components
The animations show the sequences in a basic hydraulic circuit in

simplified form - the actuation and spring return of the final control
element (4/2-way valve), the advance and return of the drive com-
ponent (double acting cylinder) and the opening and closing of the
pressure relief valve.
→ The representations of the actuator and final control element

are based on the relevant circuit symbols. This can be used as
a preparation for the introduction of circuit symbols.
[8] Action related numbering
First of all the control chain is numbered sequentially according to

the principle. The first actuator is given the supplementary num-
ber.0 and the associated final control element the supplementary
number.1. The remaining elements get even numbers if they influ-
ence the advance stroke and uneven numbers if they influence the
return stroke.
→ The numbering should always be entered in the circuit diagram

and also on the machine to enable systematic fault-finding.

[9] Numbering in accordance with DIN ISO 1219-2
The DIN ISO Standard 1219-2 defines the code structure of the
components as a string consisting of the following four parts:
number of the plant, number of the circuit, component designation,
and component number. If the entire system consists of a single
plant only, the plant number may be dropped.
[10] Numbering in accordance with parts list
Another method used in practice is to number all the components

in a hydraulic system consecutively. The numbers then correspond
to the numbers in the parts list.
→ This method is used particularly with complex controls sys-

tems, for which a control-chain-related numbering system can-
not be used due the overlaps involved.
25.3 Symbols
[11] Circuit symbols for energy transfer (1)
The symbols shown are used in circuit diagrams for energy transfer
and hydraulic-fluid preparation.
→ In the interests of clarity, the lines in the circuit diagram should

be drawn without cross-overs as far as possible.

[12] Circuit symbols for energy transfer (2)
The direction of the arrows in the circuit symbols for the heater and
cooler correspond to the direction of heat flow.
[13] Circuit symbols for energy conversion
Hydraulic pumps are shown by a circle with a part representation of

a drive shaft. Triangles in the circles show the direction of flow. The
triangles are shown solid, since pressure fluid is used in hydraulics.
→ If the pressure medium is gaseous, as in the case of pneumat-

ics, the triangles are shown in outline.
[14] Circuit symbols for hydraulic motors
The symbols for hydraulic motors are distinguished from the sym-
bols for hydraulic pumps by the fact that the arrows showing the
direction of flow are the other way round.
[15] Circuit symbols for single acting cylinders
Single acting cylinders have one port, i.e. pressure fluid can be
applied only to the piston side. With these cylinders, the return
stroke is produced either by external force, shown in the symbol by
an opening bearing cap, or by a spring is shown within the symbol
in this latter case.
[16] Circuit symbols for double acting cylinders
Double acting cylinders have two ports to allow pressure fluid to be

applied to both cylinder chambers. The symbol for a differential
cylinder is distinguished from the symbol for a double acting cylin-

der by the two lines added to the end of the piston rod. The area
ratio is generally 2:1. In the case of cylinders with double- ended
piston rods, the symbol shows that the piston areas are of equal
size (synchronous cylinders).
[17] Circuit symbols for directional control valves (1)
Designations for directional control valves always give firstly the

number of ports and then the number of switching positions. Direc-
tional control valves always have at least two ports and at least two
switching positions. The number of squares shows the number of
possible switching positions of a valve. Arrows within the squares
show the direction of flow. Lines show how the ports are intercon-
nected in the various switching positions of the valve. The designa-
tions always relate to the normal position of the valve.
This illustration shows the circuit symbols for 4/2- and 5/2-way
valves.
→ There are two general methods for the designation of ports,

using either the letters P, T, R, A, B and L or consecutively using
A, B, C, D etc.; the first method is the preferred one in the rele-
vant standard.
The illustration shows the circuit symbols for 4/3-way valves with
various mid-positions.
[20] Circuit symbols for manual operation
The switching position of a directional control valve can be changed

by various actuation methods. The symbol for the valve is accord-

ingly supplemented by a symbol indicating the actuation methods
shown, such as pushbuttons and pedals, a spring is always neces-
sary for resetting. Resetting can, however, also be achieved by
actuating the valve a second time, for example in the case of valves
with hand levers and detents.
→ The various actuating methods possible are listed in DIN ISO

1219.
[21] Circuit symbols for mechanical actuation
This illustration shows the symbols for stem or push button, spring
and roller stem.
[22] Circuit symbol for pressure valves
Pressure valves are represented using squares. The flow direction

is indicated by an arrow. The valve ports can be designated as P
(supply port) and T (tank return port) or as A and B. The position of
the arrow within the square indicates whether the valve is normally
open or normally closed. Adjustable pressure valves are indicated
by a diagonal arrow through the spring. Pressure valves are divided
into pressure relief valves and pressure regulators.
[23] Circuit symbols for flow control valves
A distinction is made in flow control valves between types which

are affected by viscosity and those which are unaffected. Flow
control valves unaffected by viscosity are termed orifices. A 2-way
flow control valve consists of restrictors, one adjustable restrictor
which is unaffected by viscosity (orifice) and a regulating restrictor
(pressure compensator). These valves are represented by a rectan-
gle containing the symbol for the adjustable restrictor and an arrow
to represent the pressure compensator. The diagonal arrow
through the rectangle indicates that the valve is adjustable.

[24] Circuit symbols for non-return valves
The symbol for non-return valves is a ball which is pressed against

a seat. Delockable non-return valves are shown by a square con-
taining the symbol for a non- return valve. The pilot control for
unlocking the non- return valve is indicated by a broken line at the
pilot port. The pilot port is designated by the letter X.
[25] Circuit symbols for measuring devices
The illustration shows the symbols for measuring devices used in

hydraulics.
25.4 Some Physical Fundamentals
[26] Hydrostatic pressure
Hydrostatic pressure is the pressure created above a certain level

within a liquid as a result of the weight of the liquid mass. Hydro-
static pressure is not dependent on the shape of the vessel con-
cerned but only on the height and density of the column of liquid.
→ Hydrostatic pressure can generally be ignored for the purpose

of studying hydraulics (exception: see topic 2).
[27] Pressure propagation
If a force F acts on an area A of an enclosed liquid, a pressure p is

produced which acts throughout the liquid (Pascal’s Law).

→ Hydrostatic pressure has been ignored here. The term pressure
propagation is also used to mean the pulse velocity in liquids
(approx. 1000 m/s).
[28] Power transmission
If a force F_1 is applied to an area A_1 of a liquid, a pressure p

results. If, as in this case, the pressure acts on a larger surface A_2,
then a larger counter-force F_2 must be maintained. If A_2 is three
times as large as A1, then F_2 will also be three times as large as
F_1.
→ Hydraulic power transmission is comparable to the mechanical

law of levers.
[29] Displacement transmission (1)
If the input piston of the hydraulic press travels a distance s_1, a

volume of fluid will be displaced. This same volume displaces the
output piston by the distance s_2. If the area of this piston is larger
than that of the input piston, the distance s_2 will be shorter than
s_1.
→ Hydraulic displacement transmission is comparable to the

mechanical law of levers.
[30] Displacement transmission (2)
See topic 29
[31] Pressure transfer (1)
The fluid pressure p_1 exerts a force F_1 on the surface A_1 which
is transferred via the piston rod to the small piston. The force F_1
thus acts on the surface A_2 and produces the fluid pressure p2.
Since the piston area A_2 is smaller than the piston area A_1, the
pressure p_2 must be larger than the pressure p_1.

→ The pressure-transfer (pressure-intensification) effect is put to
practical use in pneumatic/hydraulic pressure intensifiers and
also in purely hydraulic systems when extremely high pres-
sures are required which a pump cannot deliver.
[32] Pressure transfer (2)
A pressure-transfer effect also occurs in conventional double acting

cylinders with single piston rod.
→ This effect also causes problems in hydraulics. If, for example,

an exhaust flow control is fitted to a differential cylinder for the
advance stroke, a pressure- intensification effect results in the
piston-rod chamber.
[33] Types of flow
A distinction is made between laminar flow and turbulent flow. In

the case of laminar flow, the hydraulic fluid moves through the pipe
in ordered cylindrical layers. If the flow velocity of the hydraulic
fluid rises above a critical speed, the fluid particles at the center of
the pipe break away to the side, and turbulence results.
→ Turbulent flow should be avoided in hydraulic circuits by ensur-

ing they are adequate sized.
[34] Diesel effect
A pressure drop to the level of vacuum may occur at points of

restriction, causing precipitation of the air dissolved in the oil.
When the pressure rises again, oil bursts into the gas bubbles and
spontaneous ignition of the oil/air mixture may occur.
[35] Cavitation
Motion energy is required for an increase in the flow velocity of the

oil at a restriction. This motion energy is derived from the pressure
energy. If the vacuum which results is smaller than -30 kPa (-0.3

bar), air dissolved in the oil is precipitated out. When the pressure
rises again due to a reduction in speed, the oil bursts into the gas
bubbles.
→ Cavitation is a significant factor in hydraulic systems as a cause

of wear in devices and connections.
[36] Cavitation
Local pressure peaks occur during cavitation. This causes the

erosion of small particles from the wall of the pipe immediately
after the reduced cross-section, leading to material fatigue and
often also to fractures. This effect is accompanied by considerable
noise.
[37] Input and output power
Various losses occur at the individual devices within a hydraulic

control chain. These consist essentially of mechanical, electrical
and volumetric losses.
→ After an installation has been in service for some time, there

will be a change in particular in the volumetric efficiency of the
pump, as the result, for example, of cavitation (see topic 35).
25.5 Components of a Power Unit
[38] Hydraulic power unit
The hydraulic power unit (power supply unit) provides the energy
required for the hydraulic installation. It’s most important compo-
nents are the reservoir (tank) , drive (electric motor), hydraulic
pump, pressure relief valve (safety valve), filter and cooler. The

hydraulic power unit may also act as a carrier for other devices
(gauges, directional control valves).
[39] Hydraulic power unit: Reservoir
The hydraulic reservoir contains the hydraulic fluid required to

operate the installation. Within the reservoir, air, water and solid
matter are separated out of the hydraulic fluid.
→ The size of the reservoir will depend on the practical applica-

tion involved; for stationary systems, the volume of fluid deliv-
ered by the pump in 3 to 5 minutes can be taken as a guide. In
mobile hydraulic systems, on the other hand, the reservoir con-
tains only the maximum quantity of hydraulic fluid required.
[40] Externally toothed gear pump
The increase in volume which results when a tooth moves out of

mesh produces a vacuum in the suction area. The hydraulic fluid is
conveyed into the pressure area. The hydraulic fluid is then forced
out of the tooth gaps by the meshing of the teeth and displaced
into the above supply line.
[41] Internally toothed gear pump
The inner gear is driven by a motor. The teeth of the inner wheel
drive the outer gear wheel. The rotary motion creates a vacuum in
the gaps between the teeth, causing hydraulic fluid to be sucked in.
On the other side, the teeth engage once more and oil is displaced
from the tooth chambers.
→ The design can deliver pressures of up to approx. 17.5 MPa

(175 bar). Hydraulic motors represent the reverse of the func-
tion principle.

[42] Circuit diagram: Return flow filter
An oil filter situated in the return line to the tank has the advantage
that the filter is thus easy to maintain. A disadvantage, however, is
that contamination is removed from the hydraulic fluid only after it
has passed through the hydraulic components.
→ This configuration is often used.
[43] Circuit diagram : Pump inlet filter
With this configuration, the pump is protected from contamination.

The filter is, on the other hand, less easily accessible.
→ If these filters have a too fine mesh, suction problems and

cavitation effects may occur. Additional coarse filters upstream
of the pump are recommended.
[44] Circuit diagram: Pressure line filter
Pressure filters can be installed selectively upstream of valves

which are sensitive to contamination; this also enables smaller
mesh sizes to be used.
→ A pressure-resistant housing is required, which makes this

configuration more expensive.
[45] Circuit diagram: Contamination indicator
It is important that the effectiveness of a filter can be checked by a

contamination indicator. The contamination of a filter is measured
by the pressure drop; as the contamination increases, the pressure
upstream of the filter increases. The pressure acts on a spring-
loaded piston. As the pressure increases, the piston is pushed
against a spring.

→ There are a number of different display methods. Either the
piston movement is directly visible or it is converted into an
electrical or visual indication by electrical contacts.
[46] Water cooler
With this design of cooler, hydraulic fluid is fed through tubes over
which coolant (water) flows. The heat which is discharged can be
re-used.
→ The operating temperature in hydraulic installations should not

exceed 50 - 60°{C}, since this would cause an unacceptable re-
duction in viscosity, leading to premature aging of the fluid. In
comparison with air cooling, operating costs a higher due to
the required coolant and the susceptibility to corrosion. Tem-
perature difference of up to approx. 35°{C} can be handled.
[47] Air cooler
Hydraulic fluid from the return line flows through a coiled pipe
which is cooled by a fan.
→ The advantages here are simplicity of installation and low

operating costs. The noise of the fan may be a nuisance (see
also topic 46).
[48] Heating element
Heaters are often required to ensure that the optimum operating

temperature is reached quickly. Heating elements or flow preheat-
ers are used for heating and pre-heating hydraulic fluid.
→ If the viscosity is too high, the resulting increase in friction and

cavitation leads to greater wear.
[49] Circuit diagram: Hydraulic power unit
The illustration shows the detailed circuit symbol for a hydraulic

power unit.

→ Since this is a combination unit, a dot/dash line is placed
around the symbols representing the individual units.
25.6 Fundamentals of Valves
[50] Actuating force
With some types of poppet valves, the actuating force, which is

dependent on pressure and area, may be very high. In order to
avoid this, pressure compensation may be provided at the valves.
[51] Poppet principle
Valves are based either on the poppet principle or slide principle. In

poppet valves, a ball, a cone or a disc is pressed by a spring against
the seat of a passage. The high pressure per unit area which is
created, means that valves of this kind provide a very efficient seal.
The illustration shows a cone used as a sealing element.
[52] Slide principle
This illustration shows the principle of a longitudinal slide valve. In

order to allow the piston to move, it has a certain clearance and
floats in hydraulic fluids. Ring grooves ensure an even film of oil
and thus pressure equilibrium. The piston can thus be moved with
minimal frictional losses.
→ This type of valve cannot provide a perfect seal, which means

that there is always a certain oil leakage.

[53] Poppet valves
In poppet valves, a ball, cone or occasionally a disk is pressed

against a seat area to act as a sealing element. Valves of this type
provide a very efficient seal.
[54] Piston overlap
The switching characteristics of a valve are governed by, among

other things, its piston overlap. A distinction is made between
positive, negative and zero overlap. In the case of positive overlap,
the port in question is completely covered by the piston, while with
negative overlap it is less than completely covered. In the case of
zero overlap, the distances between the control edges of the piston
and of the port are exactly the same.
→ The individual control edges of the pilot piston can have differ-
ent overlaps.
[55] Negative switching overlap
In the case of negative overlap, flow from A to T is not quite closed

when the inlet P is opened. This means that the pressure at port A
rises slowly and the piston starts gently.
→ In manufacturers' data sheets, overlap positions are shown

within dotted lines between the switching positions, or the
overlap positions are shown in color or with a patterned back-
ground.
[56] Positive switching overlap
In the case of positive overlap, the left-hand piston does not open
the passage from P to A until the tank has been completely isolated
by the other piston. Pressure is immediately fed to the load device
(cylinder or hydraulic motor) with the result that this starts abrupt-
ly.

[57] Control edges
The control edges of the pistons are often either sharp, chamfered
or notched. The profiling of the control edges means that the throt-
tling action of the flow when switching is gradual rather than ab-
rupt.
→ See also the example in topic 144.
[58] Vertical interconnection system
Vertical interconnection systems (“modular hydraulics”) mean that

less space is required and that no piping is needed between the
components. The circuit symbols directly marked on the compo-
nents give greater clarity in the installation.
25.7 Pressure Valves
[59] Pressure relief valve (1)
In this design incorporating a poppet valve, a seal is pressed

against the inlet port P by a pressure spring when the valve is in its
normal position.
→ In this situation, for example, an unloaded piston rod is execut-

ing an advance stroke and the entire pump delivery is flowing
to the cylinder.
[60] Pressure relief valve (2)
As soon as the force exerted by the inlet pressure at A exceeds the

opposing spring force, the valve begins to open.

→ In this situation, for example, the piston rod is fully advanced;
the entire pump delivery is flowing at the preset system pres-
sure to the tank.
[61] PRV used to limit system pressure
This illustration shows a pressure relief valve within a basic hydrau-

lic circuit (used to control a double acting cylinder).
→ The resistances at the outlet (tank line, filter) must be added to

the force of the spring in the pressure relief valve. See also the
animation “Interaction of components” (topic 7).
[62] Circuit diagram: PRV used to limit system pressure
This illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration,

but with the cut-away view of the PRV replaced by the appropriate
circuit symbol.
[63] Circuit without brake valve
One application of pressure relief valves is as brake valves; these

prevent pressure peaks which may otherwise occur as the result of
mass moments of inertia when a directional control valve is sud-
denly closed. The animation shows an (incorrect) circuit in schemat-
ic form in which the working line on the exhaust side has fractured
due to the absence of a brake valve.
→ The next animation (topic 64) shows the correct circuit.
[64] Circuit diagram: Brake valve
This illustration shows the correct circuit for the problem in topic
63. This circuit incorporates not only a brake valve on the piston-
rod side but also a non-return valve on the inlet side via which oil
can be taken in from a reservoir during the vacuum phase following
the closure of the directional control valve.

→ The following animation shows the events which occur in the
two working lines.
[65] Circuit with brake valve
First the animation shows in schematic form the behavior of the

PRV during the braking phase, then it shows the behavior of the
non-return valve (NRV) in the supply line.
→
The necessity of the brake valve can be demonstrated by topic 63.
[66] Circuit diagram: PRV as back-pressure valve
Back-pressure valves counteract mass moments of inertia with

tractive loads. The illustration shows a circuit with a back-pressure
valve on the piston-rod side. On the return stroke, the PRV is by-
passed by an NRV.
→ The PRV must be pressure-compensated and the tank port

must be capable of carrying a pressure load.
[67] PRV, internally controlled, cushioned
Pressure relief valves often incorporate cushioning pistons or flow

control valves. The cushioning device shown provides fast opening
and slow closing of the valve. This prevents damage caused by
pressure shocks (smooth valve operation).
→ Pressure shock arise, for example, when the pump delivers oil
in an almost unpressurized condition and the supply port of the
load device is abruptly closed by a directional control valve.
[68] PRV, externally controlled (1)
This pressure relief valve controls the flow in accordance with an

external pressure setting. This pressure acts against an adjustable

spring force. The passage from the supply port P to the tank port T
remains closed as long as no load acts on the pilot piston.
[69] PRV, externally controlled (2)
Pressure can be fed to the pilot piston via the pilot port X. As soon
as the pressure force at the pilot piston exceeds the preset spring
force, the pilot piston is displaced, allowing free flow.
[70] Sequence valve
The example shows a circuit with a pressure relief valve used as a

pressure sequence valve. The pressure at the pilot piston of the
PRV rises via the pressure regulator. The PRV opens and the high-
pressure pump delivers directly to the tank. As soon as the 2/2-way
valve opens, the pressure drops. The pressure relief valve closes
and the high pressure pump is connected to the system.
[71] Circuit diagram: Sequence valve
This illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration,

but with the cut-away view of the sequence valve replaced by the
appropriate circuit symbol.
[72] Pressure relief valve
Actual photograph of a pressure relief valve.
[73] 2-way pressure regulator (1)

This valve is normally open. The outlet pressure (A) acts via a pilot
line on the left-hand surface of the pilot piston against an adjusta-
ble spring force.
→ Pressure regulators reduce the inlet pressure to an adjustable

outlet pressure. It is appropriate to use these in hydraulic in-
stallations only if different pressures are required.
When the pressure rises at outlet A, the force at the left-hand

surface of the pilot piston becomes greater, the piston is displaced
to the right and the throttle gap becomes narrower. This causes a
pressure drop.
→ In the case of slide valves, it is also possible to design the

control edges in such way that the opening gap increases only
slowly. This gives greater control precision.
When the preset maximum pressure is reached, the throttle point

closes completely; the pressure set on the pressure relief valve is
produced at the inlet P.
In the circuit illustrated, the piston rod of the cylinder is executing

an advance stroke. The pressure at the outlet A of the pressure
regulator is less than the system pressure at P and constant.
The piston rod of the cylinder is now in its forward end position.
The pressure at outlet A thus continues to rise and the throttle
point closes completely.

[78] Circuit diagram: 2-way pressure regulator
The illustration shows the same circuit as the previous illustration,

but with the 2-way pressure regulator in the form of a circuit sym-
bol.
It is appropriate to use PRVs only when different pressures are

required in an installation. The mode of operation of pressure
regulator will thus be explained here by taking an example with two
control circuits. The first control circuit acts via a flow control valve
on a hydraulic motor which drives a roller. This roller is used to
stick together multi-layered printed circuit boards. The second
control circuit acts on a hydraulic cylinder which draws the roller
towards the boards at an adjustable reduced pressure.
→ This example can be used as a preliminary stage to the intro-

duction of the 3-way PR. If the 2-way PR is closed due to the
fact that the preset maximum pressure has been reached,
thickening of the material of the workpieces would cause an in-
crease in the pressure on the outlet side of the PR to a higher
value than desired. (See also the animation for topic 84.)
The 3-way pressure regulator can be regarded as a combination of

a 2-way PR and a pressure relief valve (PRV). The PR is in its normal
position here; only a low pressure has built up at the outlet A.
When the pressure at A rises the result of external conditions, this

pressure acts via a pilot line on the left-hand piston surface of the
pilot piston against an adjustable spring force. Every pressure

increase causes the throttle gap to become narrower, resulting in a
pressure drop.
When the maximum preset pressure is reached, the throttle point

closes completely. The pressure set on the system-pressure limiter
is produced at the inlet P.
If the pressure rises above the preset value as the result of an

external load at outlet A, the valve opens to allow flow from A to the
tank port T (pressure-limiter function).
→ 3-way pressure regulators are available with both positive and

negative piston overlap. If a 3-way pressure regulator is creat-
ed by combining a 2-way pressure regulator and a pressure re-
lief valve, the “overlap” is adjustable.
[84] 3-way pressure regulator
The animation shows both the pressure-regulator and pressure-

limiter function of a 3-way pressure regulator through the example
of a roller which exerts a constant pressure on moving material of
variable thickness.
→ The final control element which is normally interposed has

been omitted here in the interests of clarity.
A 3-way PR is shown here in a functional representation, incorpo-

rated into a model circuit diagram. The piston rod of the cylinder is
subject to external force and the pressure regulator provides a
pressure-limiter function.


but with the functional representation of the 3-way pressure regu-
lator replaced by a “detailed” circuit symbol.
→ 3-way pressure regulators are available with both positive and

negative piston overlap. If a 3-way pressure regulator is creat-
ed by combining a 2-way pressure regulator and a pressure re-
lief valve, the “overlap” is adjustable.

but with the standard circuit symbol for a 3-way pressure regulator.
25.8 Way Valves
[88] 2/2-way valve (1)
The 2/2-way valve has a working port A, a supply port P and a

leakage-oil port L. In the case of the valve shown here, of slide
design, flow from P to A is closed in the normal position.
→ A relief line leading to the leakage-oil port is provided to pre-

vent a build-up of pressure in the spring and piston chambers.
[89] 2/2-way valve (2)
The 2/2-way valve is actuated and the passage from P to A is open.
→ 2/2-way valves are also available which are normally open

from P to A.

[90] 2/2-way valve as by-pass valve
This example shows a 2/2-way valve used as a by-pass valve; when

the 2/2-way valve is actuated, the flow control valve 0V2 is by-
passed, causing the piston rod of the cylinder to advance at maxi-
mum speed.
[91] Circuit diagram: 2/2-way valve as by-pass valve

but with the functional representation of the 2/2-way valve re-
placed by a circuit symbol.
[92] Circuit diagram: 2/2-way valve as final control element
In its initial position, the cylinder is advanced. If the 2/2- way valve
0V1 is actuated, the entire volumetric flow passes to the tank and
piston rod of the cylinder is reset by the external load m. If 0V1 is
not actuated, the system pressure set on the pressure limiter 0V2
builds up and the piston rod advances.
→ In the initial position, the pump operates against the preset

system pressure, which has an unfavorable effect on the power
balance of the circuit shown.
[93] 2/2-way valve as final control element
The animations show the actuation and release of the 2/2-way

valve, which causes the piston rod of the cylinder to advance and
retract.

[94] Circuit diagram for pressure-less pump recirculation
The part circuit diagram shows a 2/2-way valve used as a by-pass

valve to achieve pressure-less pump recirculation; if the valve is
actuated, the pump no longer needs to operate against the preset
system pressure.
→ One application of this circuit is with 4/3-way valves which are

closed in their mid-position in cases where, with the installa-
tion operational, it is desired to switch to pump recirculation
(see also topic 116).
[95] Circuit diagram: Pressure stage circuit
The part circuit diagram shows a 2/2-way valve used as a selector

switch for one of two preset system pressures (“pressure levels”);
if the 2/2-way valve is actuated, flow is enabled to a second sys-
tem-pressure limiter.
[96] 3/2-way valve (poppet principle) (1)
The 3/2-way valve has working port A, a supply port P and a tank
port T. Volumetric flow can be routed from the supply port to the
working port or from the working port to the tank port. The third
port in each case is closed. In the normal position shown, P is
closed and flow released from A to T.
→ See also topic 101 (slide principle).
[97] 3/2-way valve (poppet principle) (2)
The 3/2-way valve is actuated; flow is released from P to A, the

outlet T is closed.
→ 3/2-way valves which are normally open from P to A and T

closed are also available.

[98] 3/2-way valve as final control element
The circuit shows the 3/2-way valve in a functional representation

as a final control element of a single acting cylinder.
→ The non-return valve protects the pump in cases where the

3/2-way valve is actuated and the piston rod is subject to an
external load.
[99] Circuit diagram: 3/2-way valve as final control element

but with the circuit symbol for the 3/2-way valve.
[100] 3/2-way valve
The animations show the actuation and release of the manual

pushbutton for a 3/2-way valve, which causes the piston rod of the
cylinder to advance and retract.
[101] 3/2-way valve (slide principle) (1)
The 3/2-way valve has a working port A, a supply port P and a tank
port T. The volumetric flow can be routed from the supply port to
the working port, or from the working port to the tank port. The
third port in each case is closed. In the normal position shown, P is
closed and flow is released from A to T.
→ See also the 3/2-way valve designed on the poppet principle

(Topic 96).

[102] 3/2-way valve (slide principle) (2)
The 3/2-way valve is actuated; flow is released from P to A, and the

outlet T is closed.
→ 3/2-way valves which are normally closed from P to A and T are

also available.
[103] 3/2-way valves as diverter
In addition to their application as final control elements, 3/2-way

valves can also be used as diverters. In this case, port T is connect-
ed to a further device, to which a switch-over can then be made.
The part circuit diagrams show the facility to switch between the
flow control valves with different settings and between heating and
cooling.
→ The circuit symbol is drawn reversed to simplify the representa-

tion of the circuit diagram.
[104] 4/2-way valve, two pistons (1)
The 4/2-way valve has two working ports A and B, a supply port P
and a tank port T. The supply port is always connected to one of the
working ports, while the second working port is routed to the tank.
In the normal position, there is flow from P to B and from A to T.
→ In contrast to valves with three pistons, 4/2-way valves with

two pistons do not require a leakage-oil port (see topic 106).
[105] 4/2-way valve, two pistons (2)
The 4/2-way valve is actuated, and there is flow from P to A and

from B to T.
→ 4/2-way valves are also available which are normally open

from P to A and from B to T.

[106] 4/2-way valve, three pistons (1)
This 4/2-way valve has two working ports A and B, a supply port P
and a tank port T. The supply port is always connected to one of the
working ports, while the second working port is routed to the tank.
In the neutral position, there is flow from P to B and from A to T.
→ 4/2-way valves with three pistons require a leakage-oil port,

since hydraulic fluid would otherwise be trapped within the
valve.
The 4/2-way valve is actuated, and there is flow from P to A and

from B to T.
The circuit shows the 4/2-way valve in functional representation as

a final control element of a double acting cylinder.

piston rod of the cylinder is subject to an external load.
[109] Circuit diagram: 4/2-way valve

but with the 4/2-way valve as a circuit symbol.
[110] 4/3-way valve with pump bypass (1)
From the logic point of view, 4/3-way valves are 4/2- way valves
with an additional mid-position. There are various versions of this
mid-position (in the mid-position in the example shown, the supply

port P is directly connected to the tank T, see next illustration). In
the switching position shown, there is flow from P to B and from A
to T.
→ 4/3-way valves are easy to construct as slide valves and of

complex design as poppet valves.
The 4/3-way valve is in its mid-position; there is flow from P to T,

while A and B are closed. Since the output from the pump flows to
the tank, this switching position is called pump bypass or also
pump recirculation.
→ In the case of pump bypass, the pump needs to operate only

against the resistance of the valve, which has a favorable effect
on the power balance.
The valve is in its left-hand switching position; there is flow from P

to A and from B to T.

a final control element of a double acting cylinder. The valve is in its
mid-position; the pump delivery flows via the by-pass line within
the pilot piston to the tank.

piston rod of the cylinder is subject to an external load.
[114] Circuit diagram: 4/3-way valve with pump bypass


[115] 4/3-way valve with pump bypass
The animations show the switching of the 4/3-way valve into the
three switching positions and the corresponding cylinder move-
ments. During the advance stroke, movement can be halted by
switching to the mid- position.
→ As appropriate to the application in question, a circuit of this

kind must be equipped with a brake valve to prevent damage
to the installation when the valve is switched to the mid-
position (see also topic 64).
[116] 4/3-way valve with closed mid-position (1)
From the logic point of view, 4/3-way valves are 4/2- way valves
with an additional mid-position. There are various versions of this
mid-position (in the mid-position in the example shown, all ports
are closed in the mid- position, see next illustration). In the switch-
ing position shown, there is flow from P to B and from A to T.
The 4/3-way valve is in its mid-position; all ports apart from the
leakage-oil port are closed.
→ In this mid-position, the pump is operating against the system

pressure set on the pressure relief valve.
The valve is in its left-hand switching position; there is flow from P

to A and from B to T.


a final control element of a double acting cylinder. The valve is in its
mid-position; the pump is operating against the system pressure
set on the PRV.
→ If, with an operational installation, it is desired to switch to

pump recirculation, this can be achieved by using an additional
2/2-way valve as a changeover valve (see part circuit-diagram
in topic 94).
[120] Circuit diagram: 4/3-way valve with closed mid-position

[121] 4/3-way valve: overlap positions (1)
The illustration shows the left-hand overlap position of a 4/3-way

valve with positive overlap in the mid-position (closed mid-
position). This overlap position is a mixture of positive and negative
overlap; P is connected to A, B and T are closed.
→ With 4/3-way valves, the types of overlap positions are gener-

ally specified in the data sheet.
[122] 4/3-way valve: overlap positions (2)
The illustration shows the “right-hand” overlap position of a 4/3-

way valve with positive overlap in the mid- position (closed mid-
position). This overlap position, too, is a mixture of positive and
negative overlap; P is connected to B, A and T are closed.

[123] Way valve
Actual photograph of a directional control valve with lever actua-

tion.
[124] 4/3-way module
This 4/3-way module with hand-lever actuation is used in vertical

interconnection systems (“modular hydraulics”).
→ See also the illustration in topic 58.
25.9 Shutoff Valves
[125] Non-return valve (1)
Non-return valves block flow in one direction and allow free flow in
the other. In the direction of flow shown, the sealing element is
pressed against a seat by a spring and the hydraulic fluid.
→ These valves are also available in designs without springs.

Since there must be no leaks in the closed position, these
valves are generally of poppet design.
[126] Non-return valve (2)
In the direction of flow shown, the valve is opened by the hydraulic

fluid, which lifts the sealing element from the seat.

[127] Circuit diagram: Pump protection
In this circuit, the non-return valve is used to protect the pump.

This prevents a load pressure from driving the pump in reverse
when the electric motor is switched off. Pressure peaks do not
affect the pump but are discharged via the pressure relief valve.
[128] Graetz block (1)
In the Graetz rectifier circuit (Graetz block), four non- return valves
are combined to form a function unit. The circuit diagram shows
how this operates in conjunction with a flow control valve; flow
passes through this valve from left to right during both the advance
and return strokes of the cylinder. The situation during the advance
stroke is shown.
→ During the advance stroke shown here, flow control is carried

out on the inlet side.
[129] Graetz block (2)
The cylinder is on its return stroke. The rectifier circuit means that
flow once again passes through the flow control valve from left to
right.
→ During the return stroke shown here, flow control is carried out
on the outlet side.
[130] Graetz block
The animation shows the actuation and spring return of a 4/2-way

valve and the flow through the Graetz block during the advance and
return strokes.
→ Similar rectifier circuits are also used in conjunction with line

filters or brake valves.

[131] Delockable non-return valve (1)
In the cases of delockable non-return valves, flow in the closed

direction can be released by means of an additional pilot port (X).
The illustration shows the valve in its normal position; flow from B
to A is closed.
The released piston is pressurized via pilot port X. This lifts the
sealing element from its seat and releases flow from B to A.
→ In order to release the valve reliably, the effective area of the

pilot piston must always be greater than the effective area of
the sealing element. Piloted non-return valves are also availa-
ble with lockable non-return function.
The model circuit diagram shows how a load can be positioned by

holding a cylinder using a suitable delockable non-return valve. The
valve becomes active in the return stroke whereby the restriction
on the piston side is released by actuation of the 3/2-way valve.
→ See also the animation 135 on this topic.
[134] Circuit diagram: Delockable non-return valve

but with the piloted non-return valve as a circuit symbol.

[135] Delockable non-return valve
The 4/2-way valve is actuated, the hydraulic fluid passes through

the non-return valve against the force of the return spring and the
piston rod advances. When the 4/2-way valve is reset, the outlet on
the piston side is closed by the non-return valve, and the cylinder
remains advanced. The 3/2-way valve is now actuated, the pilot
piston is reversed and the outlet flow released; the piston rod
begins to retract. During the return stroke, the 3/2-way valve is
brought temporarily into its normal position. This causes the outlet
to be closed again, and the piston rod and load remain in their
current position. When the 3/2-way valve is actuated again, the
piston rod travels to its retracted end position.
[136] Delockable double non-return valve (1)
Delockable double non-return valves allow a load to be positioned

reliably with the cylinder at a standstill, even if eternal leaks exist
around the cylinder piston. When, as in the case, neither of the
inlets A_1 or A_2 is pressurized, B_1 and B_2 are closed.
When A_1 is pressurized, the left-hand sealing element is lifted

from its seat, enabling flow to B_1. At the same time, the pilot
piston is displaced to the right, releasing flow from B_2 to A_2.
→ The opposite is true when inlet A_2 is pressurized.
The model circuit diagram shows a delockable double non-return

valve used in conjunction with a 4/3-way valve to allow the vertical
positioning of a load. In the mid-position of the final control ele-
ment shown, ports A and B are connected to the tank. This means

that the inlets A_1 and A_2 of the double non-return valve are
pressure-less and both cylinder supply lines are closed.
[139] Circuit diagram: Delockable double non-return valve

but with the delockable double non-return valve as a circuit sym-
bol.
25.10 Flow Valves
[140] Needle restrictor
Throttle and orifice valves are used to achieve a certain pressure

drop. This is done by creating a specific flow resistance. The needle
flow control valve shown generates considerable friction due to its
long narrowing. This means that the action of the flow control valve
is difficult to adjust due to the fact that a small adjustment produc-
es a large change in cross-section.
→ One advantage is the simple and inexpensive design. Needle

flow control valves can be used if the above- mentioned nega-
tive properties can be ignored for the purposes of a given con-
trol task.
[141] Gap restrictor with helix
Its short narrowing means that the action of this gap flow control
valve is virtually independent of viscosity. The helix provides pre-
cise adjustability, since adjustment from fully opened to fully
closed requires a 360° turn. The helix is, however, very costly to
produce.

[142] Circuit diagram: Flow division using restrictor
Throttle and orifice valves control the volumetric flow rate in con-
junction with a pressure relief valve. The PRV opens when the
resistance of the flow control valve becomes greater than that of
the opening pressure set on the PRV. This produces a division of
flow.
→ The volumetric flow to the load device varies, i.e. the action of
flow control valves is load-dependent.
[143] Throttle valve
Actual photograph of a flow control valve.
[144] One-way flow control valve (1)
The one-way flow control valve is a combination of an orifice or

throttle valve and a non-return valve. In the closed direction shown
of the non-return valve, the volumetric flow passes via the variable
throttle gap, which creates a considerable resistance.
→ Speed reduction can be achieved by using a one-way flow

control valve in conjunction with a pressure relief valve or a
variable-delivery pump. The pressure rises upstream of the
flow control valve until the PRV opens and routes part of the
flow to the tank.
[145] One-way flow control valve (2)
In the reverse direction, from B to A, flow is unrestricted, since the

ball in the one-way flow control valve allows free flow (non-return
function).
→ One-way flow control valves are available with a fixed restrictor

and with variable flow control.

[146] 2-way flow control valve (1)
Flow control valves have the task of providing constant volumetric

flow independently of pressure changes at the inlet or outlet of the
valve. This is achieved firstly by means of an adjustable restrictor
which is set to the desired volumetric flow. In order to keep the
pressure drop across the throttle point constant, a second regulat-
ing restrictor (pressure compensator) is also required. The illustra-
tion shows the valve in its normal position.
→ 2-way flow control valves always operate in conjunction with a

pressure relief valve. The part of the flow which is not required
is discharged via the PRV.
When fluid flows through the valve, the pressure drop across the
adjustable restrictor is kept constant by the pressure compensator,
which varies the resistance at the upper throttle point in accord-
ance with the load at the inlet or outlet.
→ See also the animation 150 for this topic.
In the case of this flow control valve, the pressure difference is kept
constant by an adjustable restrictor, i.e. between p_1 and p_2. If
the pressure p_3 rises as the result of an external load, the overall
resistance of the valve is reduced by opening the regulating restric-
tor.
[149] Circuit diagram: 2-way flow control valve
The model circuit diagram shows the arrangement of a 2-way flow

control valve in the piston-side supply line in order to achieve a
constant feed speed even under varying load. A non-return valve is

fitted in the by-pass to allow the flow control valve to be by-passed
on the return stroke.
[150] 2-way flow control valve
The advancing piston rod encounters a load half-way through its

stroke. The flow control valve nonetheless ensures that the ad-
vance speed remains constant. From 0 to 2 seconds (shown at
bottom right) the piston rod is unloaded and the pressure condi-
tions remain constant. When the piston rod encounters the load,
the pressure p_3 rises at the outlet of the flow control valve. (In
order to allow the rapid control operations to be shown more clear-
ly, the time scale now changes to 1/100ths of a second.) The flow
control valve briefly raises the pressure p_2 downstream of the
adjustable restrictor. Following this, the regulating restrictor moves
to the left, and p_2 falls back to its original value, i.e. the pressure
difference between p_1 and p_2 remains constant. The regulating
operation shown is repeated a number of times, as the result of
which p_3 increases to 2.5 MPa (25 bar) in several steps and the
regulating restrictor opens more and more. (At the point at which
2.5 MPa (25 bar) is reached, the time scale changes back to 0.1
seconds.) The piston rod now travels under load just as fast as
previously without load.
25.11 Hydraulic Cylinders and Motors
In the case of a single acting cylinder, only the piston side is pres-
surized with hydraulic fluid. The cylinder can thus carry out work
only in one direction. The fluid which flows into the piston chamber
causes a pressure to build up the surface of the piston. The piston
travels into its forward end position. The return stroke is affected
by a spring, the dead weight of the piston rod or an external load.

[152] Plunger cylinder
In the case of plunger cylinders, the piston and rod form a single
component. Due to the design of the cylinder, the return stroke can
only be affected by external forces. The cylinders can therefore
generally be installed only vertically.
In the case of double acting cylinders, both piston surfaces can be

pressurized. A working movement can thus be performed in both
directions.
→ With double acting cylinders with a single-sided piston rod,

different forces and speeds are obtained on the advance and
return strokes due to the difference in area between the piston
surface and annular piston surface.
[154] Double acting cylinder with end position cushioning
Cylinders with end position cushioning are used to break high

stroke speeds smoothly and prevent hard impacts at the end of the
stroke. Shortly before the end position is reached, the cross- sec-
tion for the outflow of fluid is reduced by the built-in cushioning
pistons and then finally closed. The hydraulic fluid is then forced to
escape through a flow control valve.
[155] End position cushioning (1)
The piston is a short distance before its end position; the hydraulic
fluid on the piston-rod side must escape via the adjustable flow
control valve above the piston rod

→ This type of end position cushioning is used for stroke speed
between 6 m/min and 20 m/min. At higher speed, additional
cushioning or braking devices must be used.
[156] End position cushioning (2)
The piston rod is on its return stroke; in this flow direction, the non-
return valve below the piston rod is opened, thus by-passing the
flow control valve. The piston rod retracts at maximum speed.
[157] End position cushioning
The illustration shows first the advance of the piston rod from a
mid-position to the forward end position, with cushioning at the
end of the advance movement. The non-return valve is open during
the return stroke.
→ In addition the animation shows the opening of the pressure

limiter after a certain pressure has been built up on the outlet
side by the cushioning piston.
Actual photograph of a double acting cylinder.
[159] Automatic bleed valve
When the cylinder is retracted, the piston of the bleed valve is

closed. It is lifted as the piston rod advances. Air can then escape
via the bleed hole until the hydraulic fluid reaches the piston and
pushes it upwards. In the forward end position, the piston is
pushed fully upwards by the hydraulic fluid and thus provides an
external seal.
→ Bleed valves should be fitted at the highest point in a piping

system, since this is where any trapped air will collect.

25.12 Gauges
[160] Piston pressure gauge
Pressure gauges operate on the principle that pressure acting on a

given area will produce a given force. In the case of piston pressure
gauges, the pressure acts on a piston against the force of a spring.
The pressure value is now shown on a scale either by the piston
itself or by a pointer driven magnetically by the piston.
[161] Bourdon-tube pressure gauge
Most pressure gauges operate on the principle of a Bourdon tube.

When hydraulic fluid flows into the tube, an identical pressure is
produced throughout. Due to the difference in area between the
outer and inner curved surfaces, the tube is bent. This movement is
transferred to a pointer.
→ This type of gauge is not protected against overload. A cush-

ioning restrictor must be installed in the inlet connection pre-
vent pressure surges from damaging the tube.
[162] Flow meter
The flow of oil to be measured passes through a movable orifice.

The orifice consists of a fixed cone and a hollow piston mounted on
a spring. The piston is pressed against the spring in proportion to
the flow rate concerned. The measuring error of this type of flow
meter is approx. 4%. Measuring turbines, oval disk meters or
toothed-wheel gauges are used when higher accuracy is required.

25.13 Exercises
[163] Exercise: Horizontal grinding machine (pump delivery)
The slide on a horizontal grinding machine is hydraulically actuat-

ed. A machine operator determines that the reciprocating move-
ment of the machine is no longer reaching the desired speed. A
possible cause of this is reduced pump delivery. To investigate this,
it is necessary to plot a characteristic curve for the pump and com-
pare this with the values achieved during initial commissioning. As
an additional exercise, the circuit diagram and parts list for the
necessary test assembly should be prepared.
In order to draw the characteristic curve for the pump, the volu-
metric flow of hydraulic fluid delivered by the pump (Q) is plotted
against the operating pressure achieved (p). The manufacturer’s
characteristic curve exhibits a slight downward gradient, since the
new pump manifests increasing internal leakage losses as neces-
sary to provide internal lubrication. The newly-plotted curve shows
a clear deviation; the leakage oil losses have become greater at
higher operating pressures, the volumetric efficiency has become
worse. The main reason for this is pump wear. Regarding the circuit
diagram for the test assembly: The adjustable flow control valve
1V3 is adjusted in such a way that the pressure gauge 1Z1 shows
the desired system pressure. The pressure relief valve 1V2 is used
to limit the system pressure, while valve 1V1 acts as a safety valve
for the pump.
→ The measured values taken as the basis for this exercise do not
allow for the characteristic curve of the electric motor. The mo-
tor characteristic thus forms part of the calculated error.

[164] Exercise: Bending machine (directly-controlled pressure
relief valve)
A bending machine is used to bend steel plates. The bending tools

are driven by hydraulic cylinders. It is now desired to use the bend-
ing machine for considerably thicker steel plates than before. This
requires a hydraulic system pressure of 45 bar against the previous
30 bar. According to the manufacturer’s data, the pump used is
suitable for the higher operating pressure. Testing reveals, howev-
er, that the bending process is now much too slow. In this case,
leakage losses in the piping or directional control valve are ruled
out as the cause of the problem. A directly-controlled pressure
relief valve (PRV) is installed as a safety valve. Measurements of
the volumetric flow (Q) as a function of pressure (p) are available
for this valve. A characteristic curve can then be used to determine
whether the loss of speed in the bending process is due to the PRV.
The volumetric flow which is discharged to the tank when the PRV
opens is entered on the horizontal axis. The characteristic curve
shows that the opening point of the PRV is 44 bar, although it is set
to 50 bar. This means that part of the pump delivery is diverted at
pressures greater than 44 bar. Pressures of more than 44 bar are
achieved during the bending process. Since, however, the flow is
divided from 44 bar onwards, the volumetric flow to the cylinder is
reduced from this point and the bending process slows down.
Measure to be taken: The PRTV can be set to 60 bar if the overall
installation has been designed for this higher pressure. Flow diver-
sion will then take place from a pressure of 54 bar onwards.
→ An alternative solution would be to use a valve with a different

response pressure.
[165] Exercise: Roller conveyor (flow resistance)
Steel blocks are transported on a roller conveyor. A hydraulic

transfer station makes it possible to transfer blocks from one track

to another. A pressure of at least 30 bar is required for the transfer
of blocks by means of hydraulic cylinders. Every component
through which the hydraulic fluid flows represents a resistance and
causes a constant pressure loss. The question is, what pressure is
to be set at the pressure relief valve.
The total resistance is the sum of all the individual resistances.

The resistance must be determined separately for the advance and
return strokes. The overall balances do not include data for the
pressure losses at the 4/2-way valve. These can be determined
from the flow characteristic for the 4/2-way valve, based on a
volumetric flow of 8 l/min. In the calculation, allowance must be
made for the resistance of the directional control valve on the inlet
and outlet sides respectively. Allowance must also be made for the
pressure intensification factor of 2:1 in the case of the differential
cylinder. This enables values to be calculated as shown in the
solution figure. In the case of the advance stroke, 6 bar hysteresis
for the PRV (see exercise 164) must be added to the calculated 42.5
bar in order to ensure that the opening pressure is higher than the
required operating pressure. The value finally chosen is 50 bar in
order to make allowance for unknown variables such as pipe el-
bows and the static friction in the cylinder.
→ In order to keep pressure losses in large installations to a

minimum, it is advisable to select valves on the basis of their
flow characteristics. It is better to select a valve which is one
size too large than to accept large pressure losses. This fur-
thermore reduces wear resulting from cavitation in the valves.
[166] Exercise: Embossing press (activation of a single acting

cylinder)
Additional hydraulic components are to be added to an embossing

press to eject the finished workpieces. A single acting cylinder (1A)
is to be fitted for this purpose. A proposed solution in the form of a
circuit diagram with a 2/2-way valve is to be examined to see if it is
suitable for this control problem. Following this, a circuit diagram
with a 3/2-way valve as final control element is to be developed

and a parts list prepared. A comparison is to be made of the behav-
ior of these two circuits during the advance and return strokes.
When a 2/2-way valve is used to activate a single acting cylinder,

the final control element must be reversed and the hydraulic power
unit switched off in order to retract the piston rod. The load acting
on the piston rod must be larger than the resistance of the direc-
tional control valve. This solution cannot be used due to the pres-
ence of the second control chain (embossing cylinder). If a 3/2-way
valve is used, a direct switch-over can be made from the advance
stroke to the return stroke without switching off the hydraulic
power unit. Halting at overlap positions, on the other hand (which
are not required here), would be possible only by switching off the
hydraulic power unit.
→ The non-return valve fitted in each case protects the pump

against oil back-pressure. This is necessary in case the hydrau-
lic power unit is switched off with the cylinder advanced and
under load.
[167] Exercise: Ladle (activation of a double acting cylinder)
Liquid aluminum is transferred from a holding furnace into a chan-

nel leading to a die-casting machine. A ladle is required for this. A
double acting cylinder is used to enable the ladle to carry out the
appropriate movements. A circuit diagram is provided for the acti-
vation of the cylinder with a 4/2-way valve as final control element.
This must be examined to see if it is suitable for the control task
concerned. The ladle must not be allowed to dip into the furnace
when the valve is not actuated. A circuit diagram with a back-
pressure valve must be developed to cater for the case in which the
ladle is very heavy.
The requirements of the exercise are met by the first circuit dia-
gram only if the ladle represents a light load. If the ladle is very
heavy, the advance speed could rise to an unacceptably high level
during the advance stroke of the piston rod (ladle moving towards
furnace), and the ladle could as a result plunge too quickly into the

molten metal. This can be prevented by installing a back- pressure
valve in the B line between the valve and cylinder (tractive load).
→ If, as is required in this exercise, the power component must

positively assume a defined end position when the installation
is at rest, valves with spring return must be used, as in this
case. Here, a 4/2-way valve with spring return has been used,
since this ensures that the cylinder remains in the desired posi-
tion if the hydraulic power unit is switched on unexpectedly.
The required cylinder diameter and the return speed of the pis-
ton rod can also be calculated as additional optional tasks in
the exercise: see the model calculations in the textbook.
[168] Exercise: Paint drying oven (4/3-way valve)
Workpieces are fed continuously through a paint drying oven on a

conveyor belt. In order to minimize the heat loss through the door,
this should be opened only as much as required by the height of
the workpieces. The hydraulic control system should be designed
so that the door can be held reliably in position for a long period of
time without slipping down. Firstly, a 4/3-way valve with suitable
mid-position functions should be selected as a final control ele-
ment. Secondly, a delockable non-return valve should be provided
in the circuit diagram to act as a hydraulic safety device to prevent
slippage of the door under load (i.e. its own weight) over a long
period of time as the result of leakage losses in the directional
control valve. The question is, which type of 4/3-way valve has a
suitable mid-position function?
A 4/3-way valve with an “all ports closed” mid-position will solve

the problem only if a poppet valve is used. If a slide valve would be
used, the oven door would slip down slowly as the result of internal
leakage losses.
→ The second solution would be to fit a delockable non- return

valve in the supply line to the piston rod side of the cylinder
downstream of the directional control valve. In order to ensure
that the non-return valve closes immediately when the door

stops, both the outlets A and B of the directional control valve
to the tank must be de-pressurized (A, B and T connected, P
closed).
[169] Exercise: Clamping device (closing speed)
Workpieces are clamped by a hydraulic cylinder. The closing speed

must be reduced in order to prevent damage to the workpieces. The
opening speed must, however, be maintained. The question here is
how to incorporate the necessary one-way flow control valve in the
circuit. Possible solutions must be examined to see what thermal
side- effects occur and to determine the pressure load placed on
the components concerned.
The advance stroke can as a general principle be made slower by

using either inlet or outlet flow control. Either solution can be used
in this control; in comparison with outlet flow control, inlet flow
control has the advantage that no pressure intensification will take
place. The oil heated at the throttle point will, however, then pass
through the power component. The resulting expansion of material
is not, however, of significance for this simple vice. If the solution
with outlet flow control is selected, it should be borne in mind that
pressure intensification will take place in accordance with the area
ratio of the differential cylinder of 2:1. The pressure relief valve will
respond, i.e. flow division will occur, only when a pressure has built
up on the piston-rod side which is approximately twice as high as
the system pressure set on the PRV. The cylinder, flow control valve
and connectors used must therefore be suitable for this intensified
pressure.
→ Precision drives for machine tools are a good example of cases

in which it is essential to make allowance for expansion of the
material of power components due to the passage through
these of heated oil.

[170] Exercise: Hydraulic crane (speed reduction)
Press tools of varying weights are inserted into a press by means of

a hydraulic crane. A double acting cylinder raises and lowers the
load. During the commissioning of the hydraulic crane, it has be-
come apparent that the advance speed of the piston rod is too
high. The solutions have been proposed to reduce this speed; a
circuit with exhaust flow control and a circuit with a back-pressure
valve. A suitable solution must be selected and reasons stated for
this choice. Since the second solution is not capable of operating in
this form, this must be rectified by correcting the circuit diagram.
If the solution with exhaust flow control is selected, it must be

borne in mind that the cylinder, flow control valve and connectors
must be suitable for this intensified pressure. The solution chosen
is the circuit with the back-pressure valve; in this case, the load is
clamped hydraulically and a pressure-intensification effect does not
occur, since the pressure can be adjustable by means of the pres-
sure relief valve as appropriate to the load. A non-return valve must
be installed to provide a by-pass on the return stroke.
→ Inlet flow control cannot be used to control a tractive load; the

load forces oil out of the piston-rod chamber faster than oil can
flow into the piston chamber. Vacuum is created and air will
escape.
[171] Exercise: Feed control for a lathe (speed control)
The feed movement of a lathe has previously been carried out

manually. In future, this is to be performed automatically by a
hydraulic control system. The feed movement must be adjustable
and remain constant even with changing tool loads. Since a simple
throttle valve is not able to provide a constant feed speed under
changing load, a 2-way flow control valve must be used. On the
basis of a circuit diagram with data for the no- load situation, val-
ues for pressures, pressure differences and feed speed under load

must be added. The circuit diagram must be modified to ensure
that the flow control valve is not operative on the return stroke.
Finally, the relationship must be investigated between Q of the PRV
and the feed speed and between p_2 and the volumetric flow to the
load device.
In order to prevent the flow control valve from acting as a re-

sistance on the return stroke, a non-return valve is installed parallel
to this as a by-pass. The pressure at the PRV remains constant
despite the effect of the load. The outlet flow from this is therefore
a constant 7 l/min. A constant volumetric flow Q at the PRV in turn
means a constant volumetric flow to the load device and thus
constant feed speed. Regarding the last question: No matter
whether operation is with or without a load, the pressure drop p_2
at the adjustable throttle remains constant. A constant pressure
drop means a constant volumetric flow.
→ Regarding the necessity for the non-return valve in the by-pass:

When flow passes through 2-way flow control valves in the re-
verse direction, they act either as flow control valves if the reg-
ulating restrictor is fully open or non-return valves if the regu-
lating restrictor is closed.
[172] Exercise: Planing machine (by-pass circuit)
The sliding bed of a parallel planing machine is actuated with the

aid of a hydraulic control system. The power section of this hydrau-
lic control system consists of a double acting differential cylinder.
The area ratio of the full piston surface of this cylinder to the annu-
lar piston surface is 2:1. Since the piston-rod chamber is only half
the volume of the piston chamber, the return stroke is twice as fast
as the advance stroke. Machining has previously been carried out
only during the advance stroke. In future, working movements are
to be carried out in both directions. To make this possible, the
hydraulic control system must be modified so that forward and
return strokes are at the same speed. The speed should now also
be adjustable. The connecting lines should be added to the given
circuit diagram. The mode of operation of the circuit in the three

switching positions should be described and the various piston
speeds and forces compared.
In order to achieve the same speed on the advance and return

strokes, a differential circuit (by-pass circuit) can be used with
differential cylinders with an area ratio of 2:1. Picture 116.2 The
second picture shows the principle of a by-pass circuit with a 3/2-
way valve. In the case of the parallel planing machine, the neces-
sary differential circuit can be achieved by using the mid-position of
a 4/3-way valve (A, B and P connected, T closed). In this switching
position (advance stroke), the piston speed and force are twice as
high as in the right-hand switching position (return stroke). In the
left-hand switching position, on the other hand, the advance stroke
is half as fast and the force twice as great as in the other two
switching positions. The speed for the advance and return strokes
can be adjusted by means of a flow control valve fitted upstream.
→ It should also be noted that only half the force is available on

the advance stroke at the mid-position. In the case of a tractive
load, the by-pass position has the advantage that the piston is
hydraulically clamped. Differential circuits are used not only as
synchronization circuits but also as rapid-traverse circuits
when, for example, different speeds are required in the same
direction with constant pump delivery. If it is desired to calcu-
late forces and piston speeds using concrete values, the model
values given in the TP 501 textbook can be used for this pur-
pose.
[173] Exercise: Drilling machine (pressure regulator)
The drill feed and clamping device of a drilling machine are hydrau-
lically actuated. The hydraulic control system contains two cylin-
ders, a clamping cylinder 1A and a feed cylinder 2A. The clamping
pressure at cylinder 1A must be adjustable, since different
workpiece clamping forces are required. A pressure regulator is
used for this. The return stroke of the clamping cylinder must be at
maximum speed. The drilling feed must be adjustable for various
feed speeds, which must however remain constant under varying

load. It should also be noted that the drive spindle fitted to the
piston rod of the drilling cylinder acts as a tractive load. The return
stroke of the drilling cylinder should also be at maximum speed. A
circuit should be drafted with the above-mentioned characteristics.
Pressure regulators can, as general principle, be used to reduce

the general system pressure in a part of a hydraulic installation. If
we consider the two control chains for the drilling machine without
pressure regulation, we can observe the following undesirable
effects: When 1V1 is actuated, the workpiece is first clamped at full
system pressure. If 2V1 is now actuated, the system pressure will
drop to the operating pressure of the drilling cylinder. The same
applies to the pressure at the clamping cylinder. If the circuit is
expanded to include the pressure regulator 1V3, this enables the
clamping pressure to be adjusted. The system pressure upstream
of the PRV will, however, continue to fall during the advance stroke
of 2A. In order to maintain the preset clamping pressure at outlet A
of the PRV reliably, the pressure at inlet P must be higher than this.
This can be achieved by fitting the additional flow control valve 0V2
upstream of the final control element 2V1. Maximum return-stroke
speed is achieved for the clamping cylinder by means of 1V2, which
is used to by-pass 1V3. The flow control valve 2V3 means that the
advance-stroke speed of the drilling cylinder is independent of load
and adjustable. Due to the tractive load of the attached spindle,
however, an additional PRV must be fitted as a back-pressure
valve. The non-return valves 2V2 and 2V5 provide a by-pass during
the return stroke and allow maximum speed to be achieved during
this.
→ A parts list can be specified to help in the drafting of this cir-

cuit.

25.14 Educational Films
25.14.1 Educational Films
No. Title Length

1 Introduction 3:20
2 Fundamentals: Pressure fluids 2:02
3 Fundamentals: Pressure and Flow Rate 2:41
4 Fundamentals: Transmission of Force and 1:35
Displacement
5 Fundamentals: Pressure Transmission 0:53
6 Fundamentals: Types of Flow 2:10
7 Basic Design of Hydraulic Systems 1:13
8 The Hydraulic Power Unit 3:26
9 Hydraulic Drives 6:58
10 Valves 3:12
11 Valves: Directional Control Valves 10:39
12 Valves: Non-Return Valves 1:59
13 Valves: Pressure Control Valves 4:24
14 Valves: Flow Control Valves 4:23
15 Representation of Hydraulic Systems in 2:58
Circuit Diagrams
25.15 Standard Presentations
For several topics useful presentations have been provided within

FluidSIM. The following table lists the titles of the predefined
presentations.

25.15.1 Presentations
Presentation Title
All topics sorted by number
Applications
Components of a hydraulic system
Graphic and circuit symbols
Fundamental physical principles
Components of the power supply section
Valves in general
Pressure valves
Directional control valves
Non-return valves
Flow control valves
Hydraulic cylinders and motors
Measuring devices
Exercises

Index
Index
3
3/2-way valve
ball seat _____________________________________ 736, 737
disc seat_____________________________________ 737, 738
pneumatically operated ________________________ 738, 739
roller operated____________________________________ 739
4
4/2-way valve
disc seat_________________________________________ 740
roller operated____________________________________ 740
4/3-way valve
turning disc principle_______________________________ 740
5
5/2-way valve
longitudinal slide principle __________________________ 741
suspended disc seat _______________________________ 742
5/3-way valve
pneumatically operated ____________________________ 742
A
air drying
absorption _______________________________________ 727
adsorption _______________________________________ 727
low temperature __________________________________ 726
air lubricator _____________________________________ 727, 728
air motor ____________________________________________ 735
air service unit _______________________________________ 725
C
circuit diagram
bistable valve ________________________________ 742, 743
direct control _____________________________________ 744
indirect control ___________________________________ 744
pressure sequence valve ___________________________ 756
quick exhaust valve ________________________________ 752
sequential control _________________________________ 760
shuttle valve _________________________________ 749, 750
signal overlap ________________________________ 761, 762

time delay valve___________________________________ 758
two pressure valve ____________________________ 747, 748
component
animation animation
component ______________________________________ 707
description didactics
component description ____________________________ 700
sectional view component
usage in circuit didactics
sectional view __________________________________ 702
compressed air filter filter ______________________________ 726
compressed air supply
axial flow compressor axial flow compressor ____________ 729
delivery _________________________________________ 728
distribution ______________________________________ 729
piston compressor piston compressor _________________ 729
Configurable _____________________________________ 416, 486
cylinder
control cylinder
double acting ____________________________________ 732
single acting _____________________________________ 731
double acting _________________________________ 732, 733
mounting arrangements ____________________________ 733
seals____________________________________________ 733
single acting _____________________________________ 731
tandem double acting ______________________________ 734
D
diagram symbol
designation of connections __________________________ 735
directional valve __________________________________ 735
flow control valve _________________________________ 753
linear actuator ____________________________________ 730
method of actuation _______________________________ 736
non-return valve diagram symbol
check valve ______________________________________ 746
numbering system _________________________________ 724
pressure control valve ______________________________ 755
rotary actuator____________________________________ 730
supply component_________________________________ 725
Dialog
Line _____________________________________________ 45
Dialog window
diagram properties ________________________________ 391
drawing areas ____________________________________ 394

Functional diagram ________________________________ 390
line options ______________________________________ 400
signal logic_______________________________________ 401
signaling elements ________________________________ 397
text options ______________________________________ 392
didactics
actuators ________________________________________ 730
applications ______________________________________ 765
basic pneumatics _________________________________ 723
cylinder didactics
motor __________________________________________ 804
directional control valves ___________________________ 735
educational film educational film
overview ____________________________________ 762, 818
exercises ________________________________________ 808
flow control valves ________________________________ 753
flow valves _______________________________________ 801
gauge ___________________________________________ 807
hydraulic plant____________________________________ 766
physical fundamentals _____________________________ 772
power unit _______________________________________ 775
presentation presentation
play ____________________________________________ 714
presentations
overview ________________________________________ 818
presentations presentation
overview ________________________________________ 763
pressure control valves _____________________________ 755
pressure valves ___________________________________ 781
sequential circuit didactics
signal overlap circuit ______________________________ 760
shutoff valves ________________________________ 746, 797
supply elements __________________________________ 725
symbols _________________________________________ 768
time delay valve___________________________________ 757
tutorial tutorial ___________________________________ 708
valves ___________________________________________ 779
way valves _______________________________________ 788
DIN standard ________________________________________ 700
distance-step diagram _________________________________ 760
E
exercise
bending machine __________________________________ 809
clamping device___________________________________ 813

drilling machine ___________________________________ 817
drying oven ______________________________________ 813
embossing press __________________________________ 811
feed control ______________________________________ 815
grinding machine__________________________________ 808
hydraulic crane ___________________________________ 814
ladle ____________________________________________ 812
planing machine __________________________________ 816
roller conveyor____________________________________ 810
F
Failure configuration __________________________________ 267
Failure model ________________________________________ 267
function illustration
general sectional view______________________________ 710
I
IEC _________________________________________________ 550
Imperial unit system____________________________________ 27
L
Line parameters _______________________________________ 45
M
Measuring instruments
virtual___________________________________________ 155
menu
context sensitive context sensitive ____________________ 699
Metric unit system _____________________________________ 27
N
NEMA ______________________________________________ 581
non return valve ______________________________________ 747
Numbering __________________________________________ 723
O
one-way flow control valve _________________________ 753, 754
P
Parameters
Line _____________________________________________ 45
presentation
creation _________________________________________ 717

edit _____________________________________________ 717
pressure
absolute pressure
atmospheric _____________________________________ 730
pressure control valve _________________________________ 728
Pressure control valves ________________________________ 518
Properties
Line _____________________________________________ 45
Q
quick exhaust valve _______________________________ 751, 752
S
semi-rotary actuator___________________________________ 734
sequence valve _______________________________________ 755
shuttle valve _________________________________________ 749
signal flow __________________________________________ 723
signal flow component _________________________________ 723
supply air throttling exhaust air throttling _________________ 754
T
Throttle valve ________________________________________ 754
time delay valve delay valve ________________________ 757, 758
two pressure valve ____________________________________ 747
U
Unit system___________________________________________ 27
Units ________________________________________________ 27

Fluidsim5 Enus PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fluidsim5 Enus PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fluidsim5 Enus PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FluidSIM® 5

2.1 Technical requirements 18

3.1 Create a new circuit drawing 22

4. Library and project window 32

4.1 Change window position 32

5.1 Insert and arrange symbols 34

© Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 3

6.1 Editable labels 59

7. Additional tools for creating drawings 80

7.1 Drawing tools 80

4 © Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

8. Simulating with FluidSIM 108

8.1 Simulation of existing circuits 108

9. Advanced concepts in simulating and creating circuits 137

9.1 Adjusting the component parameters 137

© Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 5

10. GRAFCET 207

10.1 The various GRAFCET modes 207

6 © Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

11. Dimension 242

11.1 Draw dimension 242

12. Component attributes 245

12.1 Component attributes in the Properties dialog window 246

© Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 7

13. Failure models and failure configuration 267

13.1 Failure configurations 267

14. Parts list management and analyses 284

14.1 Display parts list 285

15. Manage projects 297

15.1 Create new project 297

16. Circuit and project properties 302

16.1 Attributes 303

8 © Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

17. Special functions for electric circuits 310

17.1 Potentials and conduction lines 310

18. Circuit input and output 343

18.1 Print circuit diagram and parts list 343

19. Options 348

19.1 General 348

© Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 9

20. Menu overview 367

20.1 File 367

21. Functional diagram 389

21.1 Edit Mode 390

10 © Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

22. The Component Library 404

22.1 Hydraulic 404

© Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 11

12 © Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

23. Learning, Teaching, and Visualizing Technologies 699

23.1 Information about Single Components 699

24. Didactics Material Survey (Pneumatics) 723

24.1 Basics 723

© Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM 13

25. Didactics Material Survey (Hydraulics) 765

25.1 Applications 765

14 © Festo Didactic SE • Art Systems GmbH • FluidSIM

Thank you for purchasing the FluidSIM training software. This

FluidSIM permits the creation and simulation of circuits in the